A Grammar Of The Oldest Kanarese Inscriptions

(< OU_1 60925 >m

UNIVERSITY OF MYSORE

STUDIES IN DRAVIDIAN PHILOLOGY No 1.
A GRAMMAR

OF THE

OLDEST KANARESE INSCRIPTIONS

BY

A. N. NABASIMjaiA, M.A., L.T., Ph.o. (London)

Uni varsity Librarian

a-tid
Part-time Professw of Philology, Maharaja 's College, Mysore

PUBLISHED BY

THE ONIVEBSITY OF MYSORE
MYSORE

A Grammar of the Oldest Kanarese Inscriptions,

including a Study of the Sanskrit and

Prakrit Loan Words.

Volume I
THESIS

Presented to the Faculty of Arts of the University

of London, June 1933, in partial fulfilment of

the requirements for the Degree of Doctor

of Philosophy.

PREFACE.

THIS is an attempt to give a descriptive account of
the grammar of the oldest Kanarese inscriptions
from the linguistic material available in the Inscrip-
tions of the sixth and the seventh centuries A. D.
Every effort is made to explain the forms, wherever
possible, in the light of those in Tamil, Malayalam,
Telugu and Tulu ; and also the developments of some
of the old Kanarese forms into the modern Kanarese.

I take this opportunity to express rny sincere
gratitude to Professor R. L. Turner. Director, the
School of Oriental Studies, London, who, as my
supervisor, opened my eyes to the western methods
of scientific research. He has been kind enough not
only to go through the whole of this thesis, but also
to help me constantly with his most valuable and
enlightening criticisms and suggestions for improve-
ment.

The fact that it is published as the first volume
of the series " Studies in Dravidian Philology " is
due to the kindness and active sympathy of Dr. E. P.
Metcalfe, D.sc., F.-iNST.-P.,&ndIlajakarya2)ravinaN. S.
Subba Rao, ESQ., M.A. (Cantab.), Bar.-at-law., the
former and the present Vice-Chancel lors of the
University of Mysore. I would be failing in my duty
if I did not acknowledge these obligations and express
my sincere gratefulness to them and the University
of Mysore.

THE UNIVERSITY LIBRARY,)

MYSORE, \ A. N. NARAglMHJA,

27th November 1941.

CONTENTS.

SUBJECT

Preface

An Abstract of the Thesis

Chief Abbreviations, etc.

Introduction

PAGE,
i

iii

v-viii
xi-xxi

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.
10.
11.

PART I.

A. CONSONANTS AND CONSONANT GROUPS.

History of p ... ... ... 1-22

History of r ... ... ... 23-51

History of v ... ... ... 52-60

History of I ... ... ... 61-85

Consonant Groups ... ... ... 86-95

Long Consonants ... ... ... 96-105

B. GRAMMAR.

Nouns

Adjectives

Pronouns

Numerals

Derivative Nouns

Composition

Verbs

Substantives derived from verbal roots

Adverbs

Conjunctions

Word-order

109-163
164-174
175-181
181-184
184-185
186-192
193-215
217-219
220-222
223-227
227-245

PART IL

The Text of the Inscriptions ...
G. O. I.

249-264
B

11

PAET Til.

PAGE

A. The Index ... ... ... 271-349

B. Appendix I. Proper names ... ... 353-357

Appendix II. Verse Inscriptions ... ... 358-360

Appendix III. Figures of Speech in Inscriptions ... 361
Appendix IV. Sanskrit verses in Kanarese Inscrip-
tions ... ... ... 362-363

APPENDIX V- Iiido- Aryan Loan words ... 364-365

C. Bibliography ... ... ... 366-375

Ill

THE ABSTRACT OF THE THESIS.

The title of the Thesis : A Grammar of the Oldest
Kanarese Inscriptions, with a study of the Sanskrit
and Prakrt lo^in-words.

The thesis is an attempt to give a descriptive
account of the grammar of the oldest Kanarese inscrip-
tions from the linguistic material available in the
inscriptions of the sixth ' :c and seventh centuries A. D.

It consists of three parts :

Part 1 : The Grammar : Consisting of short
chapters on the history of certain consonants and
consonant groups, substantives, adjectives, pronouns,
numerals, verbs, adverbs and conjunctions. An
attempt is made to explain the forms, wherever
possible, in the light of chose in Tamil, Malayalam,
Telugu and Tulu ; and developments of some of the
old Kanarese forms into the modern Kaaarese are
noted* The last Chapter is devoted to remarks on
the word-order.

Part II : -The Inscriptions : Text of the Inscrip-
tions studied.

Part III : The Index : Index of all words in the
Inscriptions studied, with etymological notes.

* Recently ati inscription of the second quarter of the fifth
century A. D. (circa, 450 A. D.) has been discovered at Halmidi. a
village about live miles to the north-west of Belur, Hassan
District, Mysore State, S. India. (Vide M. A. E. 1936. pp. 73-
80). The conclusions reached in this Part of the thesis are not
affected by the discovery of this new inscription.

B2

IV

anukulapavananim ji-

van istadiih mibhimuladol kahaleya pam- 1

gina vol sabdadravyarh
janiyisugum svetam adara karyam

Sa'hdarii 11

tanu vadyam nalige va-
dana dandarii kartrv a tin an

avana manovr-*
ttinirnittarn agi sabdam
janiyisugum dhavalavarnam aksara-

ruparh"

vyakaranadiiiide padam a
vyakaranada padadin art ham

arthade tattva-'
lokam tattvalokadin
akamksipii muktiy akkum

ade budharge phalarh"

KES1RAJA.

CHIEF ABBREVIATIONS, ETC.

(a) TITLES OF BOOKS, JOURNALS, PERIODICALS, ETC.

A.J.P. American Journal of Philology.

A.S.I. Archaological Survey of India.

C.D.G. A Comparative Grammar of the
Dravidian or the South Indian
Family of Languages by R. Cald-
well.

D.K.D. The Dynasties of the Kanarese Dis-
tricts by J. F. Fleet.

D.D. Dravidiaii Developments by E. H.

Tuttle.

D.R. Dravidian Researches by E. H . Tuttle.

D.S. Dravidic Studies (Madras University)

E.C. Epigraphia Carnatica.

E.I. Epigraphia Indica.

I.Ant, Indian Antiquary.

J.R.A.S. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society,
London.

J.Bom.Br. Journal of the Bombay Branch of the
R.A.S. Royal Asiatic Society.

Kan. Kanarese.

K.B.B. Karnataka Bhasa Bhusana.

K.G. Kittel's Grammar of the Kannada

Language.

K.K.C. KarnatakakavicaritebyE.Narasimha-
car.

K.L. I.S.I. Kielhorn's List of Inscriptions in
Southern India.

K.K.M. Kaviraja Marga by Nrpatuiiga.

Vl

1LS.S. Karnataka S'abdanus'asani

by Bhattakajanka.
K.V.V. Karnataka Kavyavalokana by Naga-

varma.

L.8.I. Linguistic Survey of India. Vol. IV.
N.D. The Nepali Dictionary.

P.K. Prabuddha Karnataka.

P.S.O.C.I. Pali, Sanskrit and Old Canarese

Inscriptions by J. P. fleet.
Q.J.M.S. Quarterly Journal of the Mythic

Society, Bangalore.

S.M.D. S'abdamanidarpana by Kes'iraja.
S.S.D.I. Some S'aka Dates in Inscriptions by

A, Venkatasubbiah.
T.H. Tamil Handbook by G. II. Pope.

N.B. 1, For the Editions of the different works used, see
Bibliography at the'end of the thesis.

2. The abbreviations for the Names of Taluks in

E.O.I, are used throughout.

3. The numbers after K.B.B., K.V.V., K.S.S. and

S.M.P. refer to the Sutras and not to pages
In K.K.M. the numbers refer to verses.

(b) G-BAMMATICAL TERMS.

1. ace. - accusative,

2. act. - active.

3. adj. - adjective.

4. adj.s. - adjectival substantive.

5. adv. - adverb or adverbial

6. adv. pp. - adverbial past participle.

7. conj. - conjunction, conjunctive.
9. dat. - dative.

10. dem. - demonstrative.

11. D.P.P. - declinable past participle.

12. f., fern. - feminine.

13. fut., ft. - future.

Vll

14. gen. - genitive.

15. imp. - imperative.

16. inf. - infinitive.

17. instr. -instrumental.

18. intr. - intransitive.

18a. inter., - inter - interrogative.

19. loc. - locative.

20. m. masc. - masculine.
'21. n."- neuter.

22. noin. - nominative.

23. num. - numeral.

24. num. adj. - numeral adj.

25. opt. - optative.

26. p., part. - participle.

27. pers. - person.

28. pi. - plural.

29. pi. (hon.) - honorific plural.
50. pp. - past participle.

31. pr. - present.

32. pr. Drn. - primitive Dravidian (hypo-

thetical).

33. pr. Kan. - primitive Kanarese (hypo-

thetical).

34. pr. p. - present participle.

35. pron. - pronoun.
35a. ref. - reflexive.

36. rt. - root.

37. s. - substantive.

38. s. pr. - proper noun.

39. sg. - singular.
39a. tab. - tadbhava.

40. tr. - transitive.

41. vb. - verb.

42. vbal. - verbal.

43. voc. - vocative.

Vlll

(c) MISCELLANEOUS.

colloq. - colloquial.

contd. - continued.

e.g. - for example.

i.e. - that is.

Kan. - Kanarese.

Lw. - loan-word.

M. - Malayalam.

M.K. - Medieval Kanarese.

N.K. - Modern Kanarese.

N.W. - native word.

O.K. - Old Kanarese.

Pkt. - Prakrit.

Plw. - Prakrt loan-xvord.

Skt. - Sanskrt.

Slw. - Sanskrt loan-word.

T. - Tamil, O. T. - Old Tamil.

N.T. - New Tamil.

Tel."- } Telu & u -
Tu. - Tulu.

Other abbreviations will be easily recognised.
Matter In [ j is deleted.

The system of the Royal Asiatic Society is
followed for transliteration, except r, I and t where r
is used for O.K. T. pTe. ; I for O.K. w and T. and
M. & ; and -t- for alveolar -t-.

IX

avagunarn idarolag ena-
nuvullodam niroma gunaman are
mcreyal ti-

rduvudu bahus'rutar en i sida
kavigal budhar oldu, gunake

purudipar olare"

-KAVI-SALVA.

INTRODUCTION.

The present thesis is an attempt to deal, in some
detail, with the grammar of the Old Kanarese inscrip-
tions of the 6th and the 7th centuries A.D.

There ara four grammatical treatises 1 on Old
Kanarese, based on the ancient literary works.
Occasional references to grammatical points are found
in a work on rhetoric, " Kavirajamarga " by
Nrpatunga (877 A.I).). Western scholars have
written grammars in English on Kanarese. John
McKerrell of the Madras Civil Service dedicated his
grammar of Kanarese language to King George IV,
in 1820. Caldwell wrote in 1856 " A Comparative
Grammar of the Dravidiau or the South Indian
Family of Languages " and a second revised edition of
it was published in 1875. In this comparative
study, Caldwell refers to the general tendencies of the
Kanarese language, old and new, as compared with
Tamil, Malayalam, Telugu and Tulu. It is Dr.
F. Kittel who wrote the most systematic and complete

1. (a) Karnataka kdvydvalokana by Ndgavarmma C. 1045
in 96 Kanda verses with illustrations in verse given as the first
chapter of his work on rhetoric.

(b) Karndtaka Bhdsd Bhusana by Ndgavarmma, C. 1045
in 269 Sutras in Sanskrit with a Sanskrit vrtti or gloss and
illustrations.

(c) S'abdamanidarpana by Kes'irdja, 1260 A. I), in 320
kanda verses in old Kanarese with his own gloss on each verse
and is " the fullest exposition of the language of his period ":

(d) Karndtaka S'abddnus'dsana by Bhattdkalanka (1604)
in 592 Sanskrit Sutras with illustrations from ancient literary
works.

xi

Xll

grammar on the Kanarese language in English
in 1903.

McKerrell deals with New Kanarese, but Caldwell
deals with the old as well as the new. Kittel has
given a thorough exposition in English of all the
Kan. grammars and also of O.K., M.K. and N.K. with
occasional references 1 to the grammatical forms in
the old Kanarese inscriptions.

Such references to the old Kanarese inscriptions
are very few compared with those to old kavyas. In the
introduction to his " Kannada-English Dictionary ",
Kittel says that he has not been able to include all
the words occurring in the inscriptions, published
so far.

The four grammars on O.K. referred to above, as
we now have it, are the originals, as modified by
" the endless blunders of drivelling and hireling
transcribers, the paucity of (good) duplicates of MSS.
for collation and the comparatively very small number
of men to be found among the natives possessing
appropriate philological information, soundness of
judgment or zeal for literary research and general
improvement." 2 . Further, the texts of these grammars
are altered by the pandits \*ho hoped to add to the
dignity of Kanarese by the free use of the terminology
and principles of Skt. grammar. The Kanarese
kavyas have not suffered less in this manner.

But the Old Kan. inscriptions are, fortunately,
not liable to alterations of this kind. Hence a study
of the O.K. inscriptions will give reliable infor-
mation about the grammar of O.K. from the earliest
times up to the present.

1. E.G. pp. 42, 43, 48, 51, 67, 139, etc.

2. Reeve in the preface to his Dictionary P. II (1832).

Xlll

The oldest specimen of O.K. is found in the
inscription of 578 A.D. (No. 1 in Part II). But
some scholars 1 think that specimens of Old Kan. are
found in the Oxyrhyncus papyri No. 413 of the 2nd
century A.D. The language of the passages under
reference has not been accepted as Kanarese,
in spite of Dr. R. Shamasastri's attempts. Dr.
Shamasastri has not convinced us that the words are
old Kanarese.

The inscriptions, given in the Epigraphia
Carnatica ; the Epigraphia Indica ; " The Pali,
Sanskrit and Old Canarese Inscriptions (Fleet) "; the
Inscriptions of Mysore and Coorg (B, L. Rice) ; The
Archaeological Reports, issued by the Government of
India and other Provincial and States Governments ;
the " Historical Inscriptions of Southern India "
(Madras University 1932), and the inscriptions,
published in the following Journals, have been
consulted :

1. The Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society

of Great Britain and Ireland;

2. The Indian Antiquary ;

3. The Journal of the Bombay Branch of the

R.A.S.;

4. The Journal of the Mythic Society;

5. The Mysore University Magazine (Kan.) ;

6. The Karnataka Sahitya Parisat Patrike.

1. S. Levi. I. Ant. XXXIII, p. 12; Hubzsch, J. B.
A. S. 1904; p. 601. Grierson and Sten Konow. L. S. I.
Vol. IV, p. 365 ; Dr. L. D. Barnett : Journal of Egyptian
Archaeology, April 1926 ; Dr. E. Shamasastri : M. A. R.
1926, pp. 10-J 4 ; S. Srikantaiya : Mythic Society Journal,
July 1928 ; M. Govinda Pai : Prabuddhakarnataka, Vinayakana
sancike, 1929.

XIV

The following inscriptions claim to be more
ancient than that of Badami, on account of the
8'aka dates given in them :

EC. III. (1) NJ. HO - 103 A,D. (S'aka - 25) ;

(2) NJ. 199 - 189 A.D. (S'aka - 111) ;

(3) NJ. 122 - 266 A.D. (S'aka - 188) ;
EC VII. (4) SK. 52 - 357 A.D. (S'aka - 279) ;
EC I. (5) CG 1 - 466 A.D. (S'aka - 388);

But these are all spurious:

(1) NJ. 110. (Kudlapura). Rice suspects it to
be later in origin.

See EC. III. Introd. p.l.
Fleet thinks it spurious : DKD. p. 30 J.
Kielhorn thinks it to be one of about 1148
(K.L.LS.I.P.)

(2) NJ. 190 (G-attavadi). Eice says the date
is incorrect, probably 8th century. See E.G. III.
Introd. P.2. probably S'711 and not 8' 111. Fleet
thinks it spurious. (D.K.D. p. 301.) He says the
Characters are of 9th oV 10th century.

(3) NJ. 123 (Tagadur). Rice thinks that the
date is incorrect : EC. III. Introd. p.2. Fleet says it
is spurious, cf. Tanjure grant of 248 A.D. (spurious.)
belongs to 10th century. (EL III. 174, 1 Ant. VII,
212.) Kielhorn says the date is irregular, and it is
spurious. No. 109.

N.B. Dr. A. V. Subbiah says the date is irregular,
(p.142. S.S.D.I.)

(4) SK. 52 (Tagarti agrahara). Eicc says in
E.G. VII. Introd, p. 12 that it is an extraordinary
mixture of As'oka, halakannada and nagari characters,
and later in origin, of. Sh. 4. No. J10. Kielborn says
that the date is irregular (I. Ant. VIL 173), and it is
spurious.

XV

(5). Cg. 1. Bice thinks this to be genuine.

(1) EC. I. Introd. p.4. (2) BO. IV. Introd. p.6 in
reply to Fleet ; (3) EC. VI. Introd. p. 30, 466 AJ).
replying to Fleet. N.B. (1) Dr. E. Shamasastri in
MAE. 1926 states Avinita may have been a boy king

n 475 A.D. (2) Sewell and Dr. S. K. lyengar state
that the date is irregular and cannot be safely trusted
(Historical Inscriptions of Southern India Madras
University publication 1932). Description of boun-
daries is the same as or similar to, that of N.J. 122 (3)
above. Fleet thinks it spurious r 1 (1) El. III. 162 ;

(2) El. VI. p.79 (it belongs to the 6th century.

(3) D.K.D. pp. 297-300. Kielhorn in K.L.I.S.I. states
that the date is irregular and it is spurious, cf.
(1) I. Ant. XXIV. p. 13, No. 169, (2) l.Ant. XXX,
p. 219, No. 40.

N.B. Dr. A. V. Subbiah, p. 143 of " Some Saka
Dates in Inscriptions " says u The date is irregular,
either the Naksatra or the fortnight is wrongly
quoted."

The following undated inscriptions, though stated
to be genuine by Eice, are spurious :

(1) Db. 67 and 68 ~ 459 A.D.

(2) Cd. 43 fifth century

(3) Cm. 50 C. 480.

(1) D. B. 67 : A.D. 459 and D.B. 68. A.D. 517

Bangalore); Eice thinks these genuine, cp E.G. IX.

Introd. pp. J to 3. Kielhorn in K.L.LS.I. Nos. 113 and

114 thinks that these are spurious, cf. Cg. 1. with

Db. 67. (S'388).

^ fMercara plates : I Ant. I. p. 360.
J Nagamangala plates, Yol II. p. 155.
] Mallohalli grants, Vol V. 133.
ll Ant. Vol VII. p. 101. No. 38.

XVI

(2) Cd. 43 (Ohitaldroog) : Rice thinks it genuine
E.G. XI. Intr. 5. " There is nothing to throw light
on the question as to who he was". It is astray
verse. Characters are not clear on the plates - it is
doubtful whether it can he earlier.

(3) Gin. 50 (S'iragunda): Rice.says it is genuine
and " is the oldest Ganga inscription, must be assigned
to the end of the 5th or the beginning of the 6th
century, Kd. 158 refers to this. [EC. VI. Intr. pp. 5
and 6.] N.B. This plate is not clear.

These arc undated. Rice considers these as
genuine. The characters are not very clear ; in
some, they are of later date.

There is one inscription dated 601 A.D. (S'522) 1 .
Fleet has pointed out that this is a spurious record, as
bhe characters and the polished language show and
bhat it belongs to the middle of the 10th century,
though the matter may be ancient.

LIST OF INSCRIPTIONS FINALLY SELECTED
STUDY.

No. in
Trans-
litera-
tion Source
of the

Date A.D.

Whether
plates are
available

Text

1.

LA. X, p. 60 Badami

578

Yes

2.

E.G. VII. S.K. 10

C. 640

...

3.

E.G. VI. Kp. 37

C.675

...

4.

E.G. VII. Sa. 79

C. 680

...

5.

E.G. VII. Sk. 154

G. 685

Yes

6.

LA. XIX. p. 143

G. 685

7.

E.G. VIII. Sb. 15

C. 690

...

8.

E.G. VIII. Sb. 671

692

Yes

9.

E.G. II. 5

C. 700

...

10.

6

ti

1. E.I. XV. 6.

No. i*i

Trans-

litera-

tion

of the

Text

11. E.G. II

7

12.

8

13.

9

14.

12

15.

13

16.

17

17.

18

18.

19

19.

20

20.

21

21.

22

22.

24

23.

25

24.

26

25.

27

26.

28

27.

29

28.

30

29.

31

30.

32

31.

33

32.

34

33.

76

34.

77

35.

80

36.

84

37.

88

37(a).

89

38.

91

39.

92

40.

93

40(a).

94

41.

95

42.

96

43.

97

44.

98

G.O.I.

XV11

Whether

Source Date A.D. plates are

available

C. 700

Yes

Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes

Yes
C

xvm

No. in

Trans-

litera-
tion

Source

Text

45.

E.G. II 99

45(a).

,, 101

46.

102

47.

103

48.

104

49.

,, 105

50.

106

51.

107

52.

108

53.

i. 109

54.

HI

55.

112

56.

H3

57.

114

58.

U5

59.

H6

60.

445

61.

I. A. X. 61 Badami

62.

E.G. VI. Kp. 38 *

63.

Kp. 39

64.

, Kp. 40

65.

E.G. VIII. Sb, 411

Whether
Date A.D. plates are

availabl <

0. 700

Yes
Yes

11 Plates

These inscriptions are selected almost entirely
on the authority of the epigraphists, as these do not
mention dates or years in which they were installed.
Only a few give the names of historical persons. Of
these, the plates of 11 inscriptions as given in the
B.C. and I. Ant. have been carefully examined,
Judged from the plates given in S.I.P. and I.P. 1 ,

1. South Indian Paleography by A. C. Burnell and Indian
Paleography by G. Buhler (translation by J. R Fleet).

XIX

these are of about the 7th century A.D. as B.L. Rice
has dated them.

The same inscription edited by two people from
different estampages shows the following differ-
ences :

Fleet (1890).
line

3. -tarar

4. Jedugur
4. ajgeyan

6. poraluman
6. valliggame-

yara
1. dasadiyurii

devadiyurii

8. Alavajliyara
(perhaps with

anusvara
devadiyurii

9, Sorkkaga-
mundarurii

10. molejara- .
maniya

11. mukhavage

12. afivon

13. varanas'

ivadul
15. Samyuktan

17. -ti(rthaih)

ga!

18. appar

19. velege

parvvarum
19. tanige

Rice (transliter- Rice (Kan.
ation 1902 ) version)

-tara

Jelugur

ajgeyan

poruduman

valjirggameyara

dasadiyurii
devadiyurii
Alain vail iyara

devadiyurii
sokkagamuncfa-

rurii
moleuramaniya-

mukhamage

&livon

varanas'iyalul

Sariiyutan
-bhagigal

appor

veleg a parvva-

rurii
tanige

tara

Jejugur

algeyan

poruduman

vallirggameyara

dasadiyurii
devadiyum
Alamval] iyara

devadiyurii
sokkagamunda

mole ura
maniya
mukhamage
alivon
varanas'iyalul

Saihyutan
bhagigal

appor

veleg a parrva-

rurii
tanige (ge)

XX

Bice (1902) knew Fleet's version of it. But
Rice is wrong in writing alivon for aZivon and
algeyan for filgeyan. About the other 55 inscrip-
tions, our dependence on Rice's version is inevitable.

Of the 66 inscriptions selected, all except the
following, relate to Jain religious practices: Nos. 1,
2, a, 4, 5, 6, 7, H, 61, 6:\ 63, 64 and 65.

Of the Jain inscriptions, the following record the
death by U 8anyasana" of Jain monks and devotees:

Nos. 9 to 26, 29 to 37, 40 to 45, 49 to 54, 56 to
60 (inclusive) of which Nos. 11, 17, 19, 33 and 44 are
those of Jain women.

Of the tombs (or epitaphs) Nos. 18, 27, 39, 46,
47 and 48 are those of men, while 42 and 55 are
those of women.

In the non-Jain inscriptions, No. 61 relates the
heroism of Kappe-Arabhattan ; Nos. 5 and 6 relate
the remission of taxes by a royal proclamation ; and
Nos. 1, 3, 4, 7, 8, 62-65 inclusive, record the gift of
lands to temples and priests.

In the following 'inscriptions, there is reference
to historical persons :

1. Mariigalisa (I.Ant. X. 60, P. SOCT. No. 40)

2. Polikesiarasar 1 (I.Ant. VII. p.211).

3. Citravahana. 1

5. 6, 7. Vinayaditya (P.S.O.C.I. Nos. 14 and
17; I. Ant. VI. p.86)

29. Bhadrabahu and Candragupta.

62. Gunasagara (Father of Citravahana).

63 and 04. S'antarasa.

65. Vijayaditya (I.Ant. IX. ; P.S.O.C.I. 76, 126,
130 ; I. A.X. 60

1. B. I. VII. Appendix No. 29 ; I. Ant. XIX. p. 149.
P.S.CXC.T. No 16.

fcxi

6. fogilli of Sendraka family (P.S.O.C.I.
No. 152 ; I.Ant. Vol. XIX. p. 144).

Tri many of the inscriptions a large number of
words are effaced or illegible. An attempt is made
to use the words that can be made out in these.

PART I.

A. CONSONANTS AND CONSONANT GROUPS.

An attempt is made in this section to give the history
of O.K. p, r, v and I with a descriptive account of
O.K. consonant groups and long consonants.

History of 0. K. p.

THE change of p, initial and intervocal, to h was
noticed by Western scholars early. Caldwell 1
says that " the initial p of nearly all the words,
whether they are pure Dravidian or Skt. derivatives
changes to h." But a careful study of this change of
p to h was made by Kittel in his Grammar. 2 He
points out that initial p was changed to h- in
Kes'iraja's time (1260) optionally. But he has not
given evidence from the inscriptions to show when p
Changed to h.

An attempt is made in this section to show from
the forms in the inscriptions when this change began
and how it developed :

The following words with initial P. are found in
the inscriptions of the 6th and 7th centuries : 3
pa/i (hali), parvvaruman (hafuvarannu), palum
(halu), pavu (havu>, pin (hiriide), pirigum (hiri),
pulla (hullannu), puZu (hulu), puni (hunu,
obsolete), peran (hera, hora), perjediya(hejjede),
peZcuge (heccu), periya (hiriya), peZda (helida),
pokka (hokka), pogevogi (hogahogi), porngol-
(homgol-), podeda (hodeda), poragu (horagu)

The forms taken from the inscriptions are given
in the appendix to this section. The following
inferences are based on them :

Up till the end of the 9th century, p- is preserved.

1. C.D.G. pp. 156 and 157.

2. K.G. Sections 64, 384, 223, 224, 370.

3. N.K. equivalent in brackets.

CKQ.I.

In the 10th century, forms with h- in place of p-
begin to appear in all parts of the Kanarese area. The
h- forms are more in evidence in prose, particularly
where the boundaries of lands granted are described.
In verse, it is always p- that is predominant and very
few h- forms are found. This is not uniform in all areas.

In the llth century, there is very great confusion
in the use of p- and h- in verse, sometimes p- and
more often h . But in prose, it is always h, though
occasional use of p- is not rare. The llth century,
therefore, seems to be the. period of transition

In the 12th century, even in verse, the use of In-
forms increases in number ; the intervocalic -p-r is also
changed to -h- in such words as Tailaha (proper
name) (1152), hoheyam (1162), ulihim (1172),
Biluhunadu (1175), alihidade (1175), h'oharu (1175),
Toraha (1179) (proper name).

In the 13th century, h- goes on replacing p- and
-p-. more and more. This is clear from the list of
words given. The peculiarity of the century is
~PP~ > ~k e '9- appa > apa > aha (1295), bappa >
baha. ippa > iha, (1300), though in the previous
century hoha (1182) shows the tendency was there.

It is in the 14th century that h- and -h- are fully
established in place of p, initial or intervocalic.
Even skt. Iws. such as Nrpam > Nrharn (1382). In
verse, the archaic forms with p. are found. That the
people were using h- instead of p- long before their
use in literary composition becomes clear by the
early appearance of h- in prose, specially in the
description of boundaries of the lands given to tem-
ples, raathas and scholars, in all the areas.

In the 15th century, fewest forms with p. are
found, clearly indicating the complete displacement
of p by h initially and intervocalically.

This displacement was carried to extremes in
the 16th century when pattana is found as hattana
(1557). In the 17th century p- appears only in
some verse portions and h- is the rule in prose and
verse.

The 18th century does not differ very much from
the 17th and from 1800 onwards there is not much
change in the history of p and h.

That the displacement of p- by h- is not restric-
ted to the initial position of p. or before particular
vowels is made clear by such forms : himdu, himgu,
hulu, hudu, heccu, helu, hogi, hoda, hohanu, baha,
taha, iha.

Which is earlier, Pr. Dm.* -p- > -v- or Pr. Drn.
* -p- > -h- ? The change of -p- to -v- is found in
the earliest inscriptions. There is no single -p- in
Kanarese. Pr. Drav\ * -p- > -v- in Kanarese, when
it became intervocalic.

The following are found in the inscriptions of
the 7th century. Here also the p- of the 2nd mem-
ber of this word > intervocalic, and therefore -v-,

edevidiyal (40-3) ; Edevoialnadu (9-28), pogevogi
(3-7), muvetmura (3-6) mamjuvol (37-1), bittavol
(61-9), salvavoK21-U

Lws.kavileyumarh(5-13 ; 673), rnahatavan (35-2)
mahatavadi (5-4).

This change is very common in the^later inscrip-
tions :

800-900 : 800. Kirtivura, EC. VIL SK. 283,
(888) kavile, EC. I. 2. (890), pervoZala (71) E.C. IV.
Yd. 60, Pagantevallame (25) EC. IV. Yd. 60.
Permanadivatlamgatti EC. I. 3.

900-1000:- 900.' TurumdavoZala EC. IV. HG.
110, (900). paravendirannan EC. II. 448, (990).
marevokkara (12) EC, III. My. 36.

1000-1100: 1057. devalokakke vodal (27) EC.
IV. HG. 18, (1070). Posavalli (5 and 6) EC. L 50,
(1085). ' Mokkaverggade EC. VII. Sh. 10.

1100-1200: 1104." pempuvebta (34) EC. VII.
SK. 131, 1113. Karavurada EC. III. NJ. 44.
1199. marevokka (21) EC. IV. Ng. 49.

This is very common in all the inscriptions.

But the change of Utsava to Ut$aha, ravuta to
rahuta and the survival of hovaru (1544) for hoharu
sho\ys that, at the time of the displacement of -p- by
-h-, -pp- which had become -p- was converted to -li-
as in hoharu, and that the form with -v- < -p- like
4 hovaru ' was an analogical formation (cf. ivaru,
kavaru, rmvaru) and they were replaced by hoguvaru
later.

Even when p. was being replaced by h-, h
disappeared, i.e., p > h. > o. (zero).

A. D. 1219. ogu for hogu j 115.

odar for hodar I EL V. p. 261.
1634. ada-u for adahu < adapu-pledge or pawn
(EC. II. 250).

In N. K. colloquial speech of the uneducated
classes, h- has practically disappeared. This dis-
appearance is not before particular vowels - e.g.

a. Hakkalu, hagga, hadapa, hatti, haradari,
harige, havanisu, haladi.

a. haku, hadu, harayke, hare, havu, hasige,
hasu.

i and I. hittu, hidisu, hittale, hire, hiju.

u. huggi, huduga, hunnu, hu}u.

u. huje,' hudu, hunu, huvu,

e. hedda, henike, hede, hemmike.

e. he(Ji, hesike, he]u.

0. hogu, homge, hottu, hondu, horisu, hosalu,
bolle.

6. hogu, holu, holisu, holu.

All these and a very large number of words with
initial h- have lost the h- and the vowels alone
survive in the colloquial pronunciation of the lower
classes.

When these people want to speak grand, they
make use of h- where they are not at all required,
e.g., ode (- to break), > hode, whereas hode is restricted
to mean ' to strike with something ' (transitive).

-pp- of verbs and participles had already become
-p- by 1004 A.D., as Nadihidar shows. Nadahidar is
< Nadapidar < Nadappidar, Vbl causative past. 3.
pi. in. of nadappu. cf. mudippidar in these inscrip-
tions. But the causative suffix is found as -p- in
ka}upe in the 7tb century. The shortening of -pp-
to -p- in 1004 is only a continuation of the practice.
In 1282 appa, fut. p. of * ay (M.K. aguj is found, but
in 910, hohan is also found ; thj.3 suggests that the
-pp- of poppan, becomes hohan, indicating that -pp-
after a long vowel is converted into -h- sooner than
-pp- after short vowels. But from nadahidar (A.D.
1004) l it is to be suspected that even -pp- after
short vowels had > -h- through -p- in the llth cen-
tury. But -appa- too may have changed to aha long
before it is found in the inscriptions. It is not
possible to say even approximately when the -pp-
was shortened to -p-. as, in the inscriptions of the
7th century, apar (apar) from appar, appar is found.
The tendency developed and this single -p- > -h- in
the inscriptions in 910; particularly after long

1. From pp. SMD. 232-233,

vowels. In 1300 baharu < bapparu < barppar '' is
found. (See 'Declinable Participles' future, about
-pp- as the tense-suffix for the future) 2 . In the
following examples from inscriptions -pp- > -h-
through * -p- :

1004 .... nadahidar sattarendu EC. I. 46.

1172 .... ulihim BI. XV. Madagihal.

1175 .... al'ihidade EC. I. 65, 1182, hoha (48)

El. XIV. Kurugod.

1218 .... hoharu appa EC. IV. Hg. 23.

1228 ... hohaga (6) EC. VII. Sk. 175.

1229 ... aluhidava (12) EC. IV. Gu. 19.
1282 .... appa (19) EC. II. 334.

1295. .... kondamtaha (11) EC. IV. yl. 44.
1300 .... baharu (37) EC. III. TN. 98,-ilihikottu

(27), baha (35).
1317 .... alihida (26), hoharu (30) EC. IV. Ch.

116.
1361 .... hoharu (31) (25) bahev, ullamtaha (19)

EC. II. 344, bahevu (16) EC. III.

Nj. 117.

1370 .... iharu (15), hoharu (16) E.C. IV.Ch.97
1376 .... hohaga (8) EC. VII. Sk. 57.

1390 .... hoharu E.C. I. 39.

1391 .... hoharu EC. IV. yd. 1.

1392 appudakke (21) EC. VII. Sh. 11.
1406 .... ajupidavani, EC. III. Sr. .105.

1409 .... bahevu \J9), antaha EC. II. 255, aha

EC. VII. Sh. 70.

1431 .... bahiri (53) EC. VII. Sh. 71.
1437 .... hoharu EC. III. Ml. 4.
1444 .... hohanu (11, 12, ]3) EC. IV. Yd. 7.

1. SMD. 232.

2. C. D. G. p. 157.

1477 .... h6haru(28),bahiri(20)EC.III.Md.77.

1484 .... hoharu (18), baheu (21) EC. IV. Ng. 59.

1500 ... hoharu EC. II. 395.

1500 .... hoguvaru EC. II. 340.

1517 . . hoharu (10, 11) EC. III. My. 5.

1539 .... bahevu (7) EC. II. 225, bahenu (13)

EC. II. 224,

1544 .... appa (12),h6varu(35) EC. I. 10.

1550 .... bahadu (15), hoharu (19) EC.II1. My.

50.

1557 .. hoha (38) EC. VII. Hg. 9.

1564 .... kaluhi (8), yihan (14) EC. IV. Yl. 29.

1576 .... bahiri EC. IV. Yd. 59.

1620 .... alupidavanu (13) EC. III. My. 17.

1645 .... yiha, EC. IV. Ch. 124.

1650 .... yiruvadu EC. IV. Yd. 40.

1663 .... bahari (53) EC. III. My. 13.

1670 .... bahiri (20) EC. IV. 1 and 9, 119.

1672 .... bahudu EC. VII. Sk. 213.

1678 ... baha (25) EC. III. Sr. 94,

1593 .... yihadu EC. I. 11.

1753 .. yiha EC. IV. Ch'. 128.

Further, O.K. antappa, intappa, entappa have >
antaha, intaba, entaha, in M.K: inN.K. antha, intha,
entha, and sometimes anbha, intha and entha. This
change can be explained thus :

antaha > anthaa by Metathesis, later antha,
and often antha. Similarly for intaha and entaha in
the pronunciation of the urban people.

But in rural areas, antha, intha, entha > anta
(anta), inta (inta), enta (enta), as the people are not
used to the pronunciation of aspirates.

In some of the kavyas and inscriptions anta-
ham < antappam > annam. Sidilannam Singa-

dannam 'a man like the thunderbolt, one like a HOD.
(SMD. 160.) Cf. annam - =rt SMD. p 293.

But this annam < antaharh through anta-am,
antarh and by assimilation, annam. The meaning is
antappam ' he who is like. ' Similarly intha, antha,
> inna, anna. In N.K., when antha, intha, entha,
are used as participial adjectives and when used as
adj. substantives, the forms are :

antha-vanu, intha-vanu, entha-vanu, (avanu k he'
is suffixed to these).

It is wrong to say that all initial p. in Kanarese
changed to h. Many words are still used both in
literary composition and colloquial speech with an
initial p-. A few of them are : Iws. pakka (a side),
pagadi (tribute, tax); paccadi (a kind of pickle); patli
(a squared rafter); pattu (hold, seizure); patte (the
rind or bark of trees); paduvalu (the west); padde
(maturity); pajaka (practice, habit); padu (experien-
cing difficulty) ; papa (a small child); palu (a share);
pedasu (hardness), pottare (a hole in the trunk of a
tree) ; pokari (a profligate) ; poti (joining) ; ponisu (to
string together) ; polu (wasting).

In some cases, p and h forms are both found in
use, but the use of p and h are differentiated by
meaning and usage ;

A. From the same root :

1. palu s. n. 'ruined place' used in proverbs
which retain archaic forms ; halu vb. (to be spoiled,
to ruin).

2. pettu s. n. " a blow '; vb. ' to beat as with a
hammer '; hettu vb. 4 to thrust ' (with the penis) to
avoid the use of the expression which had acquired a
vulgar meaning, pettu was confined to the meaning
of ' a blow ' and * to beat, '

9

B. From different toots:

1. hal ' milk ' and pal * a share. '

2. hadu ' to sing ' and ' a song '; padu ' difficulty
experienced. '

3. hurudu ' rivalry ' ; purudu c the pollution
observed after the birth of a child. '

4. holu ' to resemble '; polu * to waste, to
squander. '

In all these cases, because the h- form had
acquired some conventional meaning, the p- forms
were retained to signify the other meaning and to
avoid confusion in the use of the two forms.

The group, p + consonant, initially or otherwise,
does not change to h at all, e.g., prakara, pras'astya,
priti, etc., as such combinations are foreign to
Kanarese.

These inferences are borne out by forms in the
published literary works and grammars of old Kana-
rese :

Grammar* : There are four grammars of the
ancient Kanarese language. But in a book on
rhetoric, A.D. 877 Kavirdjamarga, the portion relat-
ing to grammar is comparatively small. In the part
on rhetoric we find no h- initial or otherwise, in the
pure Kanarese word.

I. 1045 Karnatakakavy&valdkana. As it is
poetry, there is no h- at all.

II. 1045 Karnatakabhd sab hit sana by
N^gavarmma includes h in the alphabet (K.B.B. 6).
In Sutra 116 he says "pe hova " - that p > h often
initially and inter vocalically, as the examples he
gives prove ; palage > halage ; kapu > kahu. This
author of the llth century actually corroborates our
inference that h had begun to appear in literary

10

Kanarese (vide remarks on h- in the llth century,
Supra).

III. 1260 Sabdctwanidarpana by Kes'iraja.
He includes h in his account of the alphabet (S.M.D.
s. 33). In S. 159, he states that single p of pure
Kanarese words often changes to h and that such a
change is beautiful (sundaram), but he definitely
points out that long p. (-pp-) does not become -h-and
says that it is duskara or forbidden. Examples giyeu
are uppararh, kappuraih, tappu, bippandam, muppu
soppu, heppu. But in S. 160 -pp- of antappa, int-
appa, entappa are changed into a single -h-, i.e.
antaha, intaha and entaha, clearly implying that the
shortening of the long consonants was the general
rule and that such shortened p > h, and unshortened
p remained unchanged.

Further, in. sutras 254, 258 he points out
how Skt. Iws. with p- change to h- in Kanarese
pisunam- > hisunarn, pasa > hasa.
The disappearance of h- initially is not unknown to
him. In S. 271, he gives himgu > imgu, haiiisapinda
> ancevimdu ; hariisa > amce, hirhgulikarh > imguli-
kam.

All these confirm our inferences about the change
of p to h and h to zero in the 13th century.

Use of unnecessary h- was known to Kesiraja
(SMD 269) : agni > haggi. It is -pp- > -p- and -h- ;
but all cases of - p- > -h-are analogical.
IV. 1604 Karnataka&abdanus&sana by Bhatta-
kalamka.

In Sutra 6, he includes h in the Kanarese alpha-
bet ; in Sutra 145 p > h often, e.g., pattike > hattige;
pivara > hivara, gopura > gohura. (In the com-
mentary on the same Sutra, -p- > -v- often, e.g.,
dlpika > dlvige ; kapi > kavi) In Sutra 296, Tihu-

11

rantakam, Gohuram are referred to as being correct,
showing that there was doubt whether these forms
were correct and so accepted by some and rejected by
others. In S. 497, appam > aham ; appudu >ahudu
In S. 576, he states that hu ( < pu) is to be affixed
to ba ( -to corrie) to form verbal nouns.

This grammar which is practically an amplifica-
tion of SMD substantiates our inference that by the
17th century, p appears only in some verse portions
and h is the rule in prose and verse.

These grammars are based on the works of
u praktanacaryas " (Sutra 3 8.M.D.) fc old venerable
scholars of the past and Lakshanacaryas '. A study of
the Karnatakakavicarite (vols. I III) by Rao Baha-
dur B. Narasimhachar and ' Kariarese Literature '
by E. P. Rice substantiates our inferences on this
point.

This change is probably due to the influence of
Marathi, the neighbour of Kan. and Tulu according
to K. V. Subbaiya 1 . In Marathi, the aspirated consts.
> h. bhavati > hoti. This change of p to h presup-
poses that the p- in O.K. though written as p, was
aspirated as f, which led to the change of p to h.
This change may have been independent of Marathif).

N.K. has h for O.K.p. not in contact with a
const. This development was apparently connected
with the Kanarese change of v to b ( w ) -. In early Kana-
rese, v> b, the differnce between b & p became distinc-
tive in certain word forms. In order to make the
difference clearer, many persons strengthened p. to
ph. which later developed through f to b. (E. H.
Tuttlein A. J. P. 1929 p. 154.)

1. I. Ant. 1909, p. 145.

2. A. J. P. 1929, p. 155-

12

p is a bilabial stop. Where the contact between
the lips is slack and the same p. is articulated by the
lower lip against the upper teeth, p > f, a bilabial
fricative. When even this contact of the lower lip is
slackened and f is articulated in the glottis, we get
the glottal fricative h. (/.)

13

APPENDIX.

In the 8th century, p is preserved without any
change :

726 .... punname, EC. III. Tn. 1,

740 ... puttade (21) EC. III. My. 55; pop-

pandu (16) EC. III. My. 55:
750 .... pin EC. II. 79.

panmrvvarparvvar, pattu EC. IV. 149, 4, per-
valjame EC. IV. Hg. 4 ;

776 .... pajeya (66) EC. IV. Ng. 85 ;

9th Century :

800 .... poZdu, pogi, periya, II. 35. 4 ;

800 .... perba/a EC. IV. Sr. 160.

810 .... pusuvan (7) EC. III. Nj. 26 ;

830 .... puttida (5) EC. VII. S.K. -283 ;

870 .... palaram (9) EC. III. Nj. 75;

870 .... parvvarumam (10) EC. III. Nj. 76.

884 ... padinayduvari^adandu EC. II. #94.

838 .... padinentaneya (5) EC. 1. '2., peddore-
gareya (6)ponnum (14).

890 .... pattugadyanada (8) EC. I. 3. 8;

890 .... pervvayala (71), peronie (73), pajlaoae
(74) ; peroZve (65), pervaZtiya (75),
perggolliya (76) EC. IV. Yd. 60.

898 .... Elecaga palliya (3) EC. III. Nj. 89.

10th Century :

900 .... puttegu (6,) E.G. III. Tn. 115 ;

907 .... PoZalasetti ;6), padinaydupananum

11), pattondiya (8) EC. III. MD.

14;
910 ... lOkakke h6han EC. III. Sr. 134 ;

14

930 .... perggedegaluih (6), paridavu (14)

EC.' IV.' 149, 116;
950 .... pandiyum (11), piriya (12) EC. III.

Md. 41; 972. punnameyum (7),

Piriya Hcrfma (5) EC. III. Nj. 183.
978 .... piridu (18), perggadurum (11^,

Peddore gare (13) EC. I. 4.
980 .... puttidom (16), puttidar (6) EC. III.

Tn. 69.
982 . perarorhbarum (41), paruvalli (61),

podisuva (6), pogaftsu (3), EC. II.

134.
982 .. pogaZisal (113), peZdapem (31), porage

(80), pusivude (45), piridiva, E.G.

II. J33.

985 . perggade (2), poge -K I. XVII, p. 170.
995 .... pogaZe EC. II. 121

llth Century :

1000 .... punname (7), Bihagamundana (9),

Hancadarmasetti (11), Bokahalli

(13), Hakadivadi (14), Gorahajji

(15 EC. i. 5.

1004 .... nadahidarsattarendu (6) NC. I. 46.
1007 .... ponnol (14), penadotti, palarani (22)

EC. HI. TN. 44; "
1012 .... eraduhottina (30), payisidam (Hi

EC. III. Sr. 140.
1019 .. parbbi (14), halladi 29,30), holakke

(29), holada (31), hudomta (32),

pudomta (40), puduke (16) EC.

VII. Sk. 125;
1021 .... padineydu kolaga (18), punusevaram

(20), pumbolauium (21) EC. IV.

HG. 16, 1021.

16

1036 .... hadinentu (22\ pudomta (23) EC.
VIL S.K. 126;

1049 .... Hosanada (28), ponnarakottu (31)

EC. IV.'Gu.9'3.

1050 .... panneradam (9 EC. I. 30. 1050;

1057 pervvayal (18), polipare (16), pogi

(26;, pogale negaZututn (27), EC.
IV. 149. 18;

1058 .... Haruvanahalli, Arakanahalli (12),

Heniiellunabhumi (21), Kaiiigonda

hallihamgalabani (26), hunise (29)

EC. I. 35.
1060 .... Hiliyakereya(ll), Hegga naleya (14)

haduvanakolada (15), Heggerege,

(19), balliya (21), hiriya (23), E.G.

VII. Sh. 6.
1063 .... parekara (24), harekara ('25;, hiriya-

kereya (27), horavarige (24) EC.

VII. Ci. 18.
1070 .... Mudanhaduvana (6), Hosavalli (8)

EC. I. 49.

1070 .... Hosavallisiddhes'vara Mahade-

vargge, Posavalli (6) EC. I. 50 ;

1071 .... heggade (57), hesar (94) E.I. XV,

p. 337;

1075 .... halla (4651), hadada (52), hanne-

radu (54) ; 1. badinaru (55), halla
(55), pudomta (53, 55) EL XV. p.
96e. '

1076 .... perggade (33) paduvarggam (24),

panneradu (30) ; Kofcehalsavanta
(35), hesara (38) EC-' VII. H.E.
14;

1079 .... baraha, (49), posavoZala (33) EC.
IV. Hg. 56. perggadegala (26) ;

16

1085 ....'poZtirkkuni (48), peZdu (59;, poydarii
(59), harige (47), harige (51), Hen-
navurada (51), pere (44), EC- VII
Sh. 10.

1087 ...hoda (24) EC. IV. Yd. 2.;

1089 ... Hosavura (3), posavura (4), perot-
timge, (5) palaram (5), Hosavura
(6), EC. VII. SK. 291.

1095. .... hasuvurhharuvanam konda (58) EG.
I. 57 ; Buvanahalliyarh (9) EC.
IV, Kp, 49;

1097 .... horege (55), herirhge (55), honnam
(56), pana, paduvalu., EL XVII.
p. 182.;

1099 .... Panasogenivasi EC. IV. Yd; 24 ;

12th Century :

1100 .... pesarvvadedar (23) EC. JI. 69.
1104 .... putti (20), hermmagal (39), EC. VII.

Sk. 131.

1107 .... HosavoZal (4), Posavo/ala (5), Poge-
palli(5)EC. IV. H.G.I 107.

1107 .... herimge (14), honna (15), her (17)
Panumgall, (9), panav f !5;,
perin-(17)ELXIII. p. 12.

1110 .... hattu (33) and all the rest begin with
P . El. XV. 26;(Mutgi inscrip-
tion) ;

1112 .... paduvalu (8), pom, ponna (83), pana

(83), hoda (77), hola (77), halla (78),
hattu (78), El. XIII. p. 36 (Ittagi);

1113 .... pogaZvudujanam (26) EC- II. 126 ;
1115 .... perggade (44), Hoysalamaharaja

(156) EC. II. 127;
1118 .... harubageyam EC. II. 125

17

1120 .... hesarittu (11), h'alli (11), Hoysala (5)
EC. III. Sr. 43 ';'

1123 .... hadimuru kamcitia holavigeya (54),

polvavarar ( 17), Poysaladevara piri-
yarasi (42) EC. II. 132 ;

1124 .... Hermmadigavundana (3) EC. III.

Nj. 194;

1125 .... Halasige and palasige. El. XIII.

p. 298 ;
1135 .... huvinatotamum EC. II. 384 ;

1144 .... hamdiyan (6) EC. III. Md. 22;

1145 .... po po vadi pogendu (148) EC. II.

140;

1 147 .... hore, himgidudii, hal, horn, pannir-

pulige?-e, padedu, hattar, hola, hala,
horeya, halla, El. XVI. p. 44.

1148 .... honnalakottu (18) EC. III. Nj. 110.
1150 .... hanavinalekka (20), hermmagal (39).

EC. VTI. 8K. 131;
1152 .... Tailaha. Hanuthgall, Panumgall,

EL XVI. p. 36.
1159 .... haduvalu (62), huniseya (62), hiriyaru

(62), EC. II. 345 ;

1162 .... halgalam (31), hoheyam (32)> hun

(33) and the rest are all p . El.
XVIII. p. 212 ;

1163 .... Hullarajarn (108), Heggade Koray-

yanum (103) EC. II. 64 ;
1172 .... Hemmadi (12), Ulihim (32), hiridum

(82, 94), (in verse); both p and h in

prose. EL XV. Madagihal;
1175 .... Hoysana (4), Biluhunadu (7), alihidade

(16), hoharu (19); EC. I. 65,
1175 .... Huvinapadage (3), himdegade (3),

honnabeddaleya (4) EC. II. 242
o. o.i. 2

18

1179 .... hodabatteya (43), hulumadiya (43),

Hiriyadevarabettakkam (44), hadu-
valu, hiriya, hajla (44) EC. II. 397.
Hoysalana (32), Torahanam (33)
Torapa (63), biriya (67, 71, 73), hola
(73), paduva (7i) El. XIX. p. 226.

1180 .... poy and pesaran (4), Hanamgallu

(17), Hoysalaviraballala (19), Kalu-
hajli (22) EC. III. TN. 106,

1180 ; 1182.... piriya (36) paduval (40), 47, 48)
pu (40). but babe (40), biriya (44)
boha (48) El. XIV. (Kurugad) ;

1184 .... pasuge, perimge, haja, basuge, hana.
EL XVII. p. 189;

1195 .... puttidan (7), pididam (16), pirhgugum
(32), hanamuru (56) EC. II. 335;

1199 .... batfcigajegadol (14) EC. IV. Ng. 47

perar ;

13th Century.

1200 .... hogalu (11), balli (11), himde (11),

EC. IV. Kp. 47.

1203 .... bore (46), hasumbe (47), Hotteyya

(43), perggere (41), hola (48), huttida
(48), EC. VII. Sb. 88 ;

1204 .... peridodam (5 i?),perim- (54), otherwise

all b-. EL XIII. p. 16;
1206 .... hana (16), ! hiriya (13), hokkade (28),

EC. II. 333 ;
1210 ... Huligere (13), hitu (13), paduva,

padeda (40), EL XIX 194 ;

1213 .... Harahondanaruaga (3), Kogdahohali

(4) EC. III. Ml. 37 ; .

1214 .. . perggade (12), beggade (14), EC. VII.

SK. 243 ;

(19

1217 .. haduvanahtmiseya, EC. II. 170;

1218 .... rahuta, hoharu, appa (20) BO. IV.

Hg.23;
1218 .... hesara (49), Hadavajagoggi (21), pusi

(9), EC. Vn.Sh. 5;
1223 .... hadinaraneya(2),halli(4),h5haga(6),

. halaram (6), EC. VII. Sk. 175 ;
1229 .. hodaru (13), Heriyanada (8), aluhi-

dava (12), EC. IV. Gu. 19 ;
1235 .... hesarimdam; (37), hoda (41), pesar-

vetta, pokkade (17), EC. III. Md,

121;-

1246 .... Hiriyabettadi (2) EC. II. 165 ;
.1255 .... hogi, huttida EC. I. 6. Hoysana

appa, aha-
1276 .. samanvitava/ia (for appa), (13) Stha-

varavaha (15) EC. III. Md. 70 ;
1282 .... horagagi (26), appa (19), EC. II.

334;
1285 .... baluhimde (12), Hoyisala (8), Hara-

dayya (26), EC. III. Md. 62;
1290 .... hallada (20), herobbe (22) EC. III.

Tn. 27 ;
1295 .... Homrna (11), Kondamta/m (11), EC

IV. YI. 44 (for appa)

14th Century.

1300 .... baharu (37), EC. III. TN. 98; ijihi-
kottu (27), baha (35) (for barppa),
honnanuEC. III. TN. 98;

1317 .... alihida (26), hoharu (30) EC. IV.

Ch. 116 ;

1325 .... hattu (10), Hosahalli (10), hadinaidu
(22) ;

1318 .... Hauagallimge (4) EC. I. 63

20

1360 ... hogi (8), Hulukoda Cikkannayya (3)
EC. I. 67 ;

1368 .... hoharu (31), honnimge (25), baheu
(20), ul]amtaha (19), (for appa,)
hadinentu (13), EC. II. 344, bahevu
(J 6) EC. III. Nj. 117;

1370 .... iharu (15), hoharu (16), EC. IV. Ch.
97

1376 .... hayidu (8), hohaga (8), EC. VII. Sk.

57;

1377 .... birimaham (20), EC. VII. Sk. 85, for

binuappa < vijnapana ;

1382 .... Nrpam and Nrham (King) (16),
pogalgu (14), EC. III. Ml. 21,
1382;

1390 .... halla (7), halli (8), hariva (8), pesara-

nittu (23), hunisedaki (25), hoharu,
haindiya (31), EC. 1. 39;

1391 .... hottina'(6), hoharu, EC. IV. Yd. 1. ;

1392 .... excepting appudakke, every p- and

-,p- is h- and -h-. EC. III. Ml. 47

15th Century.

1400 .... ahudu (21) EC. VII. Sh. llj

1406 .... halji (7), alupidavam (13), EC. III.

Sr. 105
1409 .... bahevu (79), homna (78), asadharana-

vamtafta. EC. II. 255 ; abhivrddhi-

gai aha hage (27), EC. VII. Sh. 70;
1431 .... anubhavisi, bahiri (53) EC. VII.

Sh. 71;

1437 .... hoharu, EC. III. Ml. 4;
1444 .... hohanu (11, 12, 13) EC. IV. Yd. 7;
1477 .... hoharu (26), bahiri (20) EC. III. Md.

77;

1484

16th Century.

1500
1500

1509

1513

1517
1539
1539
1539

1544

1550
1557

1564

1569
1576

17th Century.

1620
1634

1645

hoharu (18), baheu (2J) EC. IV. Ng.
59.

hoharu EC. II. 395 ;
. hoguvar EC. II. 340; All h- and

-h- except in verse,
sahodararo/ta (10) EC. II. 228 ;
. hage (25) EC. lll.gu. 3;
. hoharu (10 and 11) EC. III. My. 5;
bahevu(7)EC. [1.225;
bahenu (13) EC. II. 224 ;
adahagiralagi (7 ), adahanu (8) EC.

II. 224 ;
homnu (28), Hanasoge (27), halaru

(33), Hosahalli (27); appa (12),

Hosagadde (54), hovaru (35) EC.

I. 10;
bahadu (15), hoharu (19) EC. III.

My. 50;
yl hattanada (J.O) (for pattanada),

Nihphalam (35), hoha (38) EC.

VII. HI. 9 ;
bimnaha (8), kaluhi (8), yihari (14),

EC. IV. YI. 20 ;
, adahu(lO), EC. IV. Hg. 41;
bahiri (30). EC. IV. Yd. 59.

alupidavan (13) EC. III. My. 17;

adahu (J8), adavakotamtavaru (40)
hoharu (49), EC. II. 352. adahina
(23), adava (24) EC. II. 250;

Haradanahalliyalu yiha, EC. TV. Ch ,
124;

22

1650 .... hakiyiruvadu EC. IV. Yd. 40.

1651 .... Verse portion : pasivamte (1 1), pesa-

ran (15), posatu (14), irppudu (13),
peZdan (5C). Prose portion : huva-
diganige (77), hola (90), Hosahalli
(80) EC. IV. YI. 1.

166S .... bahari (53) and all h-. EC. III. My.
13;

1670 .... bahiri (20) EC. IV. Hg. 119 ;

1672 .. . umdu bahudu EC. VII. Sk. 2 13 ;

1673 .... nityotsaba (4) EC. II. 390 ;

1678 . . nadedubaha (-25) and all h-. EC. III.

Sr. 94 ;
1693 .... yihadu EC. I. 11.

18 tli Century.

1753 .... samudradalliyiha (5) EC. IV. Cb.

128;.

1775 .... pra-u-da pratapa EC. IV. YI. 4 ;
1782 .... pra-hudapratapa EC. I. 12; 13 ; 14.
1800 .... praudapratapa EC. III. Sr. 8. and

all h-.
There is reason to suspect that "~Pr.

Dm. - p - > O.K., M.K. $ N.K.,

- V -. But *Pr. Drn. - pp. - > - p

- > - b -.

"r ()."

J The existence of r in Kanarese was noticed
by Caldwell and later by Fleet and Kittel. 2 But
Kittel pointed out that r was displaced in Kan. by r.
The gradual replacement of this r by r, is pointed out
here from the evidence of inscriptions.

The following words contain r:--

6th and 7th centuries A. D. (N. K. equivalents are
given in brackets)

aridu (33-, 45-1, 53-1) (aridu), aridaih 58-341
(aridanu), idarul (54-4) (idarolage), eriveppaduvorum
(62-11), ere (29-4), (ere), edepare (40-1), eri (36-4
i3-4), kamara (8-3) (kanimara), kare (33-2) (kare),
karu-um (7-10), Kittere (18-2), kere (65-13) (kere),
koredu (40-2) (kovedu), ghanammarittaman (34-1)
Tarekada (31-2) (Talekadina), teravol (37-1) (tere-
yamte), toradu (33-4, 46-3, 49-2) (toredu), torade
(34-2), (torade), tori (37-1) (tori), nurentu (21-2)
(nurentu), neradu (59-4) (neredu), neredon (21-4)
(neredanu), peran (61-^, 3-11) (horaginavanu), per-
jediya (31-2), poragu (horagu), rnuru (7-12, 19-2,
63-24) (muru), Sindera (5-11, 6-11), (Sindera.)

There was difference in meaning in the words
with -r- and those with -r-in O.K. : ~

(1) aridu (33-3) ' having known ' (1) aridu (20-2)

1 impossible '

(2) kare (33-3) N': f a stain' (2) kare - N : (a

VB : 'to milk' bank' 'a shore'
'to rain' VB: 'to call' 'to
invite'.

1. C. D. G. p. 145 and p. 162.

2. K. G. pp. 23, 24, 114, 116, 117, 177, 253.

24

1.

5.

6.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

1.

There are a large number of words of this kind :

are - N. the rear,
the back, a half.
Vb. to grind,
iri - vb. to give
forth, to rain,
uri - to burn, to
glow.

are - N. a stone, a'rock
Vb : to be disfigured

or defaced
2. iri - vb. to beat, to kill 2.

uri - a coarse network 3.
made of rope or
rattan, in which pots
and other vessels are
suspended from the
beams of the
house.

uru - vb. to be, to exist, 4.
to settle, to lean on

ere - N. a lord, a master

5.

vb. to pour out liquid

ore - vb. to ooze, to trickle 6.
down; N. a sheath.

*

ore - the red painting 7.
upon the lower part
of a wall used as a
description

kere - a tank 8.

tere - to be uncovered 9.

pare - a drum 10.

bare - to grow dry. to 11.

disappear
mare - to disappear, 12.

to forget

to screen.

uru - a village,
a small town
ere - a dark-red
colour ; a worm
in general,
ore - vb. to
speak, to touch,
N. similarity,
ore - declivity,
crookedness ;
bending.

kere- to scratch.

tere - a wave.

pare - a scale or
a coat of the
onion, a fibre,

bare - to write.

mare - a kind of
deer

The context decides the meaning of the word in
N. K. From a study of the words with r in the inscrip-
tions of the 6th and 7th centuries and the correspond-
ing N. K. equivalents, it is seen that the r has
disappeared in N. K. (See appendix to this section for
examples from later inscriptions).

History of 0. K. r

A study of the form with r from the 8th century
onwards shows that r is maintained throughout the
8th, the 9th, the 10th and the llth centuries. In
the 12th century, we find r used for r in an inscription
dated 1179. 4bout the end of the 13th century, we
find r replacing r in a few instances, e.g., neradu (1*296).
and neradirdda (1-296). The same tendency to replace
rbyris found in certain areas in the 14th century,
particularly in Shikaripur Taluk. This becomes more
noticeable in the 15th century in the same taluk as
well as in Seringapatam and Maddur taluks, (see 1415,
1420, 1431, 1458, 1474, 1477 infra). Towards the end of
the 16th century, the same tendency is found in the
region round about Seringapatam. The replacement
of r by r is more noticeable in the 17th century. In
this century, both kinds of r are found in the same
inscription where 0. K. had r. Towards the close of
the century, r is found less and less. In the 18th
century, in spite of the occasional discovery of r
forms, r had replaced r and from 1800 onwards r does
not appear in these inscriptions.

From this, it cannot be concluded that / actually
lived in the colloquial speech of the people till ttiq
end of .the 18th century. The occasional appearance
of r in place of r in 1296, is sufficient proof that the
people had already adopted r in place of r, whatever
the pronunciation of the latter may have been, and

26

that the writing of only r was in vogue in poetry and
literary compositions till the 16th century. The
appearance of r and r in prose occasionally for 0. K.
r shows that r was not so common as r.

Anyway, r finally disappears towards the close
of the 18th century.

The earliest published Kanarese work is Kaviraja-
rnarga by Nrpatunga (about 877 A. D.) Though a
work on Ehetoric, it deals with grammar occasionally.
The use of r there is in no way different from that in
tho inscriptions of the Oth century : adara (I. 13),
perara (1. 14), bere (I. 46), orndarol (1. 81). eraZterakke
(1. 114), murar.ola (I. 120), ml/ada (II. 142), arivina
(ITL81), kiridu (III. 175).

As already stated under p-, there are four O. K.
grammars :

I. 1045. Kavt/avalokana by N&gavarmma :

The author includes r in the alphabet (Sutra 6)
and states that r becomes r before a consonant.
The examples he quotes from ancient Kanarese works
corroborate our inference about r in the inscriptions
of the llth century.

II. 1045. Karnataka Bhasa Bhttasna by Naga-
varmma :

He included r in the Kan. alphabet (Su^ra 10).
-ar is shown by him to be the suffix for neuter stems
ending in -u. adu + ar + a > adara (gen. sg. of adu)
(Sutra 55). In Sutras 185 and 187, he states that
-kara and gara are used as suffixes in taddhitas or
secondary derivatives, to mean c the maker of,' Once
again he refers to r and states that roots ending in
-ru have their past tense in -tta- (Sutra 229).

27

If we take his examples into consideration, the
position of r is the same as .the one in the inscriptions
of the 12tb century; examples are mare, more (S-
10), adarol (S. 10. Com.) teru, poru and peru
(S. 229).

III. 1260. Karnataka Sabdamanidarpana by
Kl&ir&ja.

The author includes r in the Kan. alphabet (S. 18).
The position of r in this work is in no way different
from that in the inscriptions of the 13th century. His
examples under the following sutras bear out the
statement made above: 173, 181,. 184, 188, 209, 210,
238, 240,

IV. 1604. Karnatakasabdamts dsana, bij Bhattfi-
kalamka.

He includes r in the Kan/ alphabet (Sutra 1).
The author of this grammar simply paraphrases in the
following sutras, 352, 353, 854, 355, 369, 379, 483, 484,
what Kes'iraja has said in his S'abdamanidarpana.
He is more a commentator on Kesiraja's grammar.
Here we do not get any corroboration of the actual
position of r, as he is discussing the forms in the
ancient kavyas and does not take into account the
contemporary speech.

There is no grammar which deals with the
language of the 17th century onwards till about the
close of the 19th century.

The inferences are corroborated till the 14th
century by grammarians. . But the last grammarian
has not considered the language of his times. But
the MSS. of literary works are liable to change at the
hands of scribes, commentators and editors of later
years. The examples from Karnatakakavicarite

28

Vols. II and III have been taken to show that the
evidence of inscriptions are more reliable. The figures
within brackets refer to the pages oi the volume.

From KKC. Vol II.

1413 .... nurukhanduga, (46),

1424 .... kareva (48),

1430 .... nereyadu (67), ruereva (67),

1485 .... baride, tore (136),

1500 .. mereduvu (143); erisiye (149), ba/i-
kaige (149),

1526 .... a/karma (209),

1535 .... muranaridu (283),

1550 .... mohigalarike (236),

1590 adarol (313),

J599 ... poravarage (316),

1600 .... merede (317), murivalli (324)

1606 .... Marigala (352), turubi (352), tori
(353),

1611 .... karedeno, jivisalarade (355),

1620 ... nireavare (362),

1640 .... koradu (370),

1646 .... arasuva (372)

1648 .... nere here (375), meredan (383)
cirittu (383), jarittu (383), birittu
(383), guriyaytu (390), odaruta
(403), nere (403), bedaruta (403),

1672 .... kaiseregondu (456), ariyade (458),
idara (459), teradim (460).

1675 .... mfiraneya (465) ariyada (492),

1677 .. yeruva (497).

The r is less noticeable in prose works than in
very high-class poetr"y, where archaic forms were
specially selected and used. All the examples given
below are from kavyas :

1680. mirida, muridu (508), 1700. r very
infrequent, baydereya, buddhidorasittu (525), beragagi
(526), nuraivattondu (526).

We rarely see r in Sarvajnavacana, e.g., about
1700 A.D; very infrequently e.g. arivu, maravu,
berilla (p. 560), etc., are found.

1712 .... teradali KKC. Vol. III. (2),

1715 .... eragida (5),

1731 .... tereda (14),

1732 .... torittu (18), hariduvu, tariduvu,

jariduvu, uri, nlreyara (19), tirrane,
birrane, sarrane, (19), parumbafeya

1740 .... en, maremadi (50),

1745 .... orate, kareva, ariye (55),

1750 .... karisidal, garigaliyali (79), nerila,
porumattu (85), kere, tore, are ^88)

1770 >... erutuin (131),

1775 .... raareyaro, toreyaro (138),

1780 .... mareyalu, eri, eragadiha (143),

1800 .... aruhimda, arivumarave (161).

r is found in poetry very rarely after 1740, but
none in .prose.

After 1800, r is rarer still. 1830 ivarolagilla
KKC. III. (p. 187), 1840. bedare (191), ariyadiral,
muridu: No r either in prose or poetry after 1850 in
KKC. But the inscriptions are not capable of being
changed by these editors or scribes. Hence the
evidence of the inscriptions of the later centuries are
to be relied on as authoritative till it is disproved by
stronger and more authentic sources of information.

This r is found in Tamil, Malayalarn, Telugu
and Kanarese. In the words with -r-, found in the
inscriptions of the 6th and 7th centuries, r is found

30

intervocalically and not initially. In his Dictionary,
Kittel gives a few words (about 25) with initial r
which are really corruptions or mistaken spellings of
words with r-. In the following inscriptions r is found
initially :

1124 .... rodisi EC. V. On. 149 ; .

1224 .... Battapalli. EG. XL DN

1300 ... jRatta, Battiga.

In kavyas also, r is found initially, e.g. KKC. I.
p. 402.

1300 ... Rattavedamgam KKC. I, p. 401.
This r is not found initially either
in Tamil or Malayalam. But Slta-
ramacarlu in his "Sabdaratnakara-
mu" (1929) gives on pp. 673-675 a
number of Telugu words with in-
itial r. 0. P. Brown does not men-
tion any Telugu words with initial
r in his Telugu-English Dictionary
in the first or second edition. In
modern Telugu, as. in N. K,, initial
or intervocalic r is not used. Tulu
has not got this r at all now. In
N. T., the distinction between r
and r is disappearing in all parts of
the Madras Presidency except in the
extreme South :
kirudu and kirudu (vanity) ; korudal and

korudal (praying) ; ta/'ai and tarai (ground) ; taruvay

and taruvay (proper time), '

In the following T. -r- > T. -t- and T. rr > T.
-tt-. kari and kati (to bite) ; tari and tati (a Stick) ;
korram and kottam (triumph) ; korrudal and kottudal
(digging).

31

But -rr- is found in a large number of Telugu
words, but these are pronounced, not as -ttr- or -ttr-,
but as -rr-. A few of them are mentioned here :

Tel. arra (a division of a chamber) ; K. are ; irra
(the male of the antelope); karm < a ploughshare) ;
kirrupurugu-(a cicada, a noisy insect) : kurra (small,
young) ; karri '(a milking cow); garre (an instrument
for catching fish); gorre (a sheep) ; cirra(apeg);
cirru (anger) ; K. sittu (anger); turru (in haste) ; Skt.
tvarita ; torra (a hole in the trunk of a tree) ; narra
(a troublesome milch cow) ; parra (a bog); parra (soft
mire) ; purre (the skull) ; K. burude (the skull) ; barre
(a female buffalo) ; burri (a heifer) ; borra (a pot-belly) ;
K. bojju; mirra (a rising ground) ; T. medu ; K. medu ;
M. medu ; morra (a scream) ; K. more ; varru (a heap) ;
sorra (a shark).

The few corresponding words indicate that at
one time Te -rr- was pronounced as -tt- or -tt-.

The Telugu scholars or peasants do not pronounce
these words as Tamil -rr-, but only as -rr- (a long r).
Further in N. Te. the long -rr- is shortened and -r- is
used in place of r. In Kan, -rr- is found in. some
inscriptions, but the pronunciation is -rr-. In N. K.
it is written and pronounced as -rr-. Surreihbinam,
(E.G. V. Bl. 77). Kitte!^ equating tirrane to tittane
in his dictionary is wrong as can be seen from his
own edition of 8 M D. p. 393 (SMD. S. e307). These
are onomatopoeic words.

In Tamil, r is used in place of -w-, -t-, -1- before
-k, -c, and -p.

I. -N-. (1) where -nr- > -rr-

NWs. anra - arm (then) ; mra - irru (now) ;

enru - erra (when) , onru - orra (one).

32

(2) where -n- > -r-

tankaval - tarkaval (self-protection) ;
tawkolai - tarkolai (suicide) ; ta/?cuttu -
tarcuttu (self-reference) ; ta^celvarn -
tarcelvam (one's own property) ; tanpadi
tarpadi (a lark)

II. -t- > -r-.

Lws. utkatam - urkatam (an elephant in rut);

utkrstam - urkrttam (excellence) ; udgara
- urkaram (vomiting) ; utsarga -urcar-
kam (abandonment) ; utpatti - urpatti
(birth) ; kutsita - kurcitam (abhorrence);
tatkalam - tarkalam (the fixed time) ;
tadbhavam - tarpavam (born of that) ;
balatkaram - palarkararn (force - com-
pulsion) ; bhaskaran - parkaran (the
sun) ; vatsanabhi - varcanapi (a kind of
poison).

III. -1-. > -r-.

alpam - arpam (trifling) ; ulka - urkai (a
meteor) ; kalka- karkarn (drugs pounded
for the preparation of decoctior^, oils,
etc.) ; kalki - karki (a horse) ; svalpam -
sorpani (a little) ; nalgati - narkati
(bliss) ; nalkanavu - narkanavu (a good
dream) ; nalpendu - narpendu (a good
woman) ; nalclr - narclr (a good state).

This change of -1 to -r- is also found in the O.K. f
of the inscriptions studied. Nirisidom "Set-up" or
"caused to stand" is from nil - to stand. T.M. Nil - to
stand. Te Nilu - to stand. This root 'nil', when
converted into a causative - 1 > -r- in O.K. as it

33

does in O.T. niruttu - to cause to stand. Cf P. 41
nirugal ; P. 42. nirisida. What is the nature of this 1
nilisidom.

In Kanarese, roots teru, peru and poru form
their past tense with -tt-, i.e. tettam, pettam, pottam
(SMD. 240). But this long -t in the past clearly
shows the following :

ter, per, por, are the roots. When -da- the
past tense suffix, is added ter -da = tetta ; per - da =
petta ; por - da = potta. Unless -da- is derived from
<* -na- (K. -r-) or -ta- (K. -r-), this change is impos-
sible. Ter - * nta = ter n) ta; the pre-consonantal
nasal disappears ; terra = tetta. Similarly for petta
and potta. This shows that in O.K. also rr > -tt-.

In O.K. Kiridu > Kuru before consonants, e.g.,
kurudadi. But before vowels kiru > kit, e.g. kini -
adi > kittadi; kiru - esal > kittesal. (SMD. 181).
This shows that in O.K. -rr- used to become -tt-.

In Kanarese, peragu is replased by peda in com-
pounds (SMD. 173, KSS. 369) e.g. pedamgay, pedagay
pedadale. Kanarese grammarians state that r gives
rise to r when pronounced with greater pressure and
force. (KVV. 6 ; KBB. 10; SMD. 18 and 19, KSS. 1).
According to these, r is a cerebral. Cf P. 43. 1021,
nadaoreya.

I suspect pera < peda < *petfa. This gives
us pedagay. In Tel. also we find peda in the same
sense, e.g. pedabuddhi (Uttararainayana. 7. ch). This
pfeda gives us a hint as to the probable reason of the
grammarians to call r a cerebral. When single -r- =
-t-, (-t-) Kan., & Tel. voiced the intervocal single
surds and used the sonant symbols for the voiced
stops. But when -rr- became -tt- or -tt-, the sound

34

value was retained. Why it is -tt- or -tt- sometimes'
is at present unknown.

Further, surds coming after -r- of roots in
Kanarese do not become sonants, but those sounds
that come after r > sonants, (sutra KBB. 29, SMD.
65, 66; KSS. 89 and 90). This clearly shows that
it is a stop and a surd. Further, this r when followed
by a surd becomes r and, later,is assimilated to the
surd. In idarke, -ar- is the suffix ; in place of
-ad- -ar- is used here, perhaps for dissimilation ;
idu - ar - ke > idarke. This idarke > idakke in
N. K. cp. T, idarku.

Also, in the inscriptions r is used for represent-
ing the upadhmanlya breathing before -p-:

1. nirpindam (Ec. II. 63. 1163 AD)

2. payahpura is written payarpura (El. XIII.

p. 36)

3. bhavinah parthivendran is bhavinarpar -(52)

E. I. XV. p. 26 1110 A.D.)

4. vigatabhayayas'arpataka (67) EC. IV. Yd.

60, 890, A.D.

This mistake is due to the similarity in the shape
of the symbol for upadhmanlya breathing and -r~.
O.K. r is used wrongly for Skt. r. e.g. arula (5-15),
kamara (8-31) ; rudhi, arudha - kara and gara in the
inscriptions and grammars ; probably the pronuncia-
tion was like that, r is used in later inscriptions in
place of -s-;

purpa (6) E. I. XII. p. 271, 1189. E. 1. XV. p.
33, 1189. purpayudham (22) E.G. VII Sk. 185, 1158,
A.D.

In Tamil, -- is represented by -t-.
Skt. puspa = T. putpam - a flower. Skt,
visStfakam - T. vise^akam = anything special.

38

This suggests that Kan. r may correspond to T.
-t- though, this use of r may be due to 9, confusion
with the upadhmaniya. .

All these show that V in Kanarese is a cerebral
according to the grammarians. Since it is now lost
in N.K., it is not possible to find out what its
phonetic value may have been. That it represents a
stop, perhaps an alveolar, which can become a dental
or a cerebral and hot the continuant r, is definite.

0. K. r

Kan. T. M.

[.pr. Drn. *-t- after short vowels.

-r-

-r-

-r-

Tel.

-r-

Tu

-r-

ara (virtue) aram

aru (six) aru

ari (to know) ari

ere (lord, master) irai
[eru (to ascend) eru

kore (to cut) kurai

tera (an opening) tira

toradu (to leave) tura
[nur (a hundred) nuru

nere (to become

complete) nirai nirai

peran (an outsider) piran piran

poragu (outside; puram puram

veragu (alarm) veruppu veri

II. pr. Drn. * ~t-

after long vowels.

aru
ar?

aru aji
eruka ari

irai

eru
kurai

6ru eru]
korata kore

tira

tercu tere sere

tura
nuru

toragu tor^puni
nuru nudu]

nerayu nerevun
pera

purugu

veragu verri
berasru

Kan.

86

T.

M.

Tel.

Tu.

raaru maru

mini

naru nadu
paru

veru bete

maru maru

mlru mlru

-r- -r- -r- -r-

1. Niru: nlru niru nlru

vb. "to reduce,

to powder/'
n. "powder,
ashes"

2. Naru naru naru

"to stink"

3. paru paru paru

"to jump"

4. here vere veru
"separate"

5. maru

"to barter,
to exchange"

6. mlru mlru

"to surpass"

7. more moral mora more more
"the face" "the chin"

8. saru caru caru ca/u saru

"broth"

9. sure curai curai cure sure

"plundering" (sure)

II. But pr. Drn. *-nd- (after long vowels) >

Kan.-d- and T. and M. nr. e. g. K. Ida - T.
Inra.

III. But Pr. Dr. *, -n- (after short vowels) has

K, -nd- and T. -nr- after a short vowel in
the following :

T. K.

onru (one) ondu

anru (then) andu

37

T. K.

inru (now) indu

enru (when) endu

konru (having killed) kondu

senru (having gone) sandu

ninru (having stood) nindu (nintu)

kunm (to diminish) kundu

kanru (a calf) kandu (karu) also

venru (scorched) vendu

Sometimes in colloquial speech of villagers T. nr
> ~nn-. inru > innu ; enru > ennu ; onru > onnu.
kanru > kannu ; as in Mai. onru > onnu ; panri >
panni ; venru > venuu.

K. T. M. Te. Tu.

pr. Drn. * -n<-

(after long vowels)

-r- -nr- . -r- -c- -j-

(and later -d- -r-

assimilation) -n-
uru "to fix, unru unnu unu uru

to support"
toru tonru tonnu tocu toj

"to appear"
niuru "three" rnunru rnunnu mtidu : muj

In Tu, Kan r is found as -j- before short vowels
also :

K. am "to be dried" Tu. aj

K. bari "empty" Tu. baji

K. karu "a calf" Tu. kamji (Cp. T. Kanru)

Kan. r corresponds to Tu. -r :
K. Tu.

oragu "to lean, to lie down" orag
karu "to vomit" ,

K.

kiru "to scratch"
kuri "a sheep"
kesaru "mud"
jaru "to slip"
besar "disgust"
mini "to transgress"
saru *to proclaim"
sere "confinement"

Tu.

kiru

kuri

kesar

jar

besar

mir

sar (Cp. T. carru)

sere

In two words Kan. -r- corresponds to Tu. -t- :

K, adara "of that" Tu. ayta

K. here "different" Tu. bete

Kan. -r- corresponds to Tu. -d-:
after short vowels after long vowels

Tu. K. Tu.

ude naru "to stink" nadu

kidu nuru "100,, tiudu

kedu maru "to change" madu

pude

made

mudi

K.

ore "a sheath"
kiru ''smal)"
kere "a. tank"
pore "burden"
mare "a screen"

nauri "to break"

Some of the forms in T. with -nr- >^-rr in
Tamil. Both these have correspondences in Kan:

T.

Kan.

anru

"then"

= andu

inru

"now"

= indu

enru

"when"

= endu

But

T.

anru

arru

K. atta

inru

irru

K. itta

enrii ;

erru

K. etta

39

But the meaning in Kanarese is one of place
whereas it is one of time in Tamil :

K. atta = there ; itta = here ; etta = where

This leads us to a consideration of the -rr-.
Pr. Dr. * -tt- is retained as rr in T. and M. In T.
though written as -rr-, it is pronounced as -ttr- in
some areas arid -tt- in other areas. Many people
pronounce it as -tt-. Thus in Tamil dictionaries,
there are forms with -rr- and also with -tt- having the
same meaning and used in the same sense :

IV Pr. Drn. *-- after short vowels

> T. &M. K. Te.

.rr- -tt- (-tt-) -tt-
(4t-)

T. & M. K. Te.

Orri (pledge, lease) otte otta

(otti)

orru (to gain) 1. ottu - compressed ottu

(ottu) (to unite) 2. ottu - together ottu

3. ontu r to agree with ontu

karrai (a collection katte (a broom) katta

of hair)
(kattai)

kurram (a defect) kutta kudi

(kuttam )

kurru (to pound) and kuttu (to pierce)

kuttu (to stitch)
kuttu (to pound)

curru (to go round) suttu cuttu

(cuttu)

parru (to seize, pattu (to go over) pattu

to hold) pattu (the hold in

. . wrestling)

46

T. & M. K. Te.

purru (ant-hill) pufcta putta

Puttu

perra (that has been

obtained) petta

marru (again, besides) mattu mari, madi

inurra (a siege) muttu muttu

(muttu)

varral (dryness) battu (to dry) vatta

(vattal)

V. pr. Drn. * -it- after a long vowel >

K. Tarn. Te.

-t- (-H -rr- -t- (-t-)

1. uta (firmness) urram utamu

2. ute (a spring) iirru (uttu) uta

3. eta (a mechanism erram etamu

for lifting water)

4. .tete (clearness) terrain teti

(certainty)

5. tota (a garden) torram totamu

6. nata (stench) narram (nattam) natamu

7. matu (a reply) marram mata

In a few cases, the -rr- of T. corresponds to -r-
of Kanarese and -$- of Tel :

carru (to proclaim) K. saru Te. catu

But T. & M. kapparru (to protect) ; K. kapadu;
Te. kapadu ; where T. -rr- corresponds to K. -d-

K. T. Tel

VI. pr. Drn. * -dd- > dd rr -d-

after long vowels (dd)
kapadu
(to protect) kapparru kapadu

41

K. T. & M.

VII. pr. Drn. * dd -r- -rr

after long vowel

saru (to proclaim),

(Te catu)cflrru
turn (to winnow), turn*

Appendix

8th Century :

A. D.

740 Edattorenada (0) EC. III. My. 55
750 .... teruvudu (22) EC. IV. HG. 4..
tere (22), EC. IV. nereyardi (1) EC.
III. My. 6.

9th Century :

800 .... olamgere (25) EC. IV. Sr. 160.
810 .... arusasirakke (fc) EC. III. Nj. 26.

ereyar (2).
865 .... nirugal (a set up stone) EC. VII. p.

200 nirisidon.' I. Ant. Vol. XII. p.

223

870 .... turugaloi (6) EC. VII. HI. 13.
884 .... turuvam (10) EC. II. 394. erida (J2).
888 .... Peddoregareya (8) EC. I. 2., taruvom

(8), tombhattanisasirbbar (9), entu-

nuru (14) EC. I. 2.
890 .... Ereyamgamge (ft & 12) EC. I. 3.

murubhattamum (9) E.G. I.
890 .... Permugagere (74), tore (73), erina

(73) vigatabhayayasarpatakava-

bhasa- (67) EC. IV. yd. 60.
898 .... parekambalada (6), Parekere(3), mQru

(5), EC. III. 97 & 98.

42

10th Century :

900 .... ariya (2) EC. I. 60. Ereyarasamge

02) EC. I. 60. murukallam (1) EC.

II. 443. kereyam (3) EC. IV. Ch.

141. Turundavo/ala (10), EC. IV.

HG. 110 turugalol. EC. IV. Kp.

17. ariye(9) EC. IV. Gu. 57.
900 .... irdu (4), Ereyappa (3) EC. III. TN.

115.
907 perataledivasam (8th day) (3), kere

(5), avarola,ge (7), irdu (4).
910 .... Ereyapparasar (5), mereyapponu EC.

IV. Hg. 103 (10). kere; EC. III. Sr.

134.

920 ... Ereyappan EC. IV. HS. 9 ( 2.
930 .... eridode (2), teredavu (E., Nirisidom

(11), EC. IV. Hg. 116.
934 .... nirisidalu, EC. VII. HI. 23.
940 .... parapimge (7), perabagadalli (8), raere-

du (14), bedaruvinamte (12), EC. II.

138.

971 .... nereye (7) EC. IV. Ch. 9.

972 .... keregaja EC. IV. Ng. 51.

977 .... eragida (5) EC. IV. Ng. 23.

978 .... peddoregare (13), aru sasirbbarum

EC. I. 47.

982 .... arivem (36), porage (97), kiridu (100),
nereye (124), ivarol bere (107),
(104), perar (41), iridu (52), EC. II.
133.

llth century :
1007

iriye (9), paruva (10), iridu (9), ire
(17), nirisida (23), tore (14).

43

1012 .... turuvanikkisi (9) EC. IV. Kp. 16.

tallarisalke (13) EC. III. Sr. 140.
1019 .... kereya (10), eruvantu (15), iriva (23),

areyatti (17), EC. VII. 8k. 125.

1021 .... nura, muraneya (1) avudarul (4),

Nado?-eya (chief)? (4) EC. IV. Hg.
16. kiriya ColiyariiE C. III. Nj. 134.

1022 .... kerege (18) EC. III. Md. 78.
1031 .... kereya (12) EC. IV. Hg. 7.

1050 .... kereyam (15), eri (23), EC. VII. Ci. 8.
eragi (4), nirisidom (12), EC. I 30.

1057 .... arage (1), arivimge (4), Erayamgana
(4), kondarembudu (20), kere (33),
EC. IV. Hg. 18.

1060 .... iridu (8) E. C. VII. Sk. 152. Heg-
gerege (19),konareyim (7), kereyim
(15), EC. VII. Sh. 6. turugalam (3),
karidu (3) EC. III. Md. 116.

1069 .... kere (8), yere (10), EC. Ill TN. 135.

1070 .... kereye (5), kerege (11), EC. I. 49.
1076 ... berdale (27), garde (27), ga/de (21),

beddale (22), aregereya (23), hare-
kara (24), EC. VII. Ci. 18. marevuge
(13), kereya (40), EC. VII. HI. 14.

1085 .... arusasira (21), kerege (33). irivakava
(41), ariyar (42), kiridu (43), pere-
yamdade (44), ara vantage (45),
kumbarargge (56), harige (51),
harige (47), EC. VII. Sh. 10.

1087 .... eredu (19), ereya (17), miiauru (15),
EC. IV. 149/55.

1087 .... Torenada (6) EC. IV. Yd. 2.

1092 .... kere (9), ponnarakotta (7), (of. pon-
narakotta) EC. IV. bu. 93. 1049) :
turuvam (19), yerida (19), birda (14),

44

1096 ... akereya (14), Kannagereyam (13)

EC. IV. Kp. 49.
1095 . .. bedari (27), nura (35), kere (43), tore

(46), EC. I. 57.

12th Century :

1100 .. taledorade (39), EC. II. 69. nirisidorn

EC. II. 164.
1107 .... turuvumam (8), nerenurusayirada-

runuralverasu (12), peragikki (12),

iridu (13), EC. IV. Hg. 79.
1113 .... Ededorenada (3), ponnarakondu (5),

pallikararum (8), EC. III. Nj. 44.
1115 .... neremadisuttum (169) merevuttire

(170), arusasiram (170), EC. II.

127.
1117 .... arusasira (4), Heggere (29), EC. IV.

Ch. 83.
1123 .... nereye (35), munnura (54), EC. II.

132.

1144 .... iridu (6) EC. III. Md. 22.

1145 .... sajjegeral (129) EC. II. 140.
1148 .... einuru (18) EC. III. Nj. 110.

1158 .... ereyam (11), peraruge (31), asta bahi-
rprapamcam (38), EC. II. 34S.

1163 .... nirpindam. EC. II. 63.

1175 .... yeradu (14) EC. 1. 65, arade (23),
Kaggereyuuiam (41), teradimda (57)
EC. II. 240.

1179 .... oramtana (r is used for r) El, XII.

p. 336.

1180 .... ariva (12), muni (19) EC. II. 71.
1195 .... muru (56), kere (54) EC. II. 335.
1199 .... iriva (19), nereda (21), marevokka

EC. IV. Ng. 47.

46

13th Century :

1203 .... hore (46), herimge (50), heruvaru
(47), iridade (48), EC. VII. Sh. 88.

1206 .... hanavomdara (16), manedere (15),
EC. II. 333.

1217 .... murugumdige EC. II. 170.

1218 .... purpasararibbara (12), kere (50), EC.

VII. Sh. 5.
1223 .... hadinaraneya (2), iridu (6), kere (9),

turuvam (7), EC. VII. Sk. 175.
1229 .... virodisamvabsarada (4) EC. III. Ml.

93. r for r.
1235 .... nerggiriyan (30) EC. III. Md. 121. /

for r. kereya (41), ondara (45), EC.

III. Md. 121.
1276 .... mura (38), nalkara (36 and 58), hadi-

naruballa (42), eidara (62), murara

(71), ha'nneradara (79), EC. III.

Tn. 97.

1278 .... kimkula (44) EC. II. 347. Devara-

kere (13), korakodahu (19 and 20)
Makalakereya (21), EC. I. 32.

1279 .... nurakke (32), ondaropadiya (33), EC.

II. 336

1281 .. Edadorenada (14), EC. III. Tn. 100.

1282 ... horagagi (27), hasaregallu (30), Eda-

vallagere (22), EC. II. 334.
1284 .... iridu (7) EC. VII. Sk. 140.

1290 .... Hegguruvada ('25), ippatharamane

(32) aru (34) muru (42), EC. III.
TN. 27.

1291 .... horasumka. EC. VII. Sh. 78.

1293 .... voleyakara (13), iridu (14), bemtekara

T\T n,-,

46

1295 .... eredu (15), Torenada (16), EC. IV.

Ch. 65.

1296 .... munuralu (9), kere (11), neradirddu

(9), neradu (12), r for r. EC. I. 45.

14th Century :

1300 .... nurayippattararolage (9), here (41)

terutta (37) EC. III. Tn. 98.
1309 aruvattu (10), nureppattu (11), nera-

du (16), r for r. EC. VII. Sh. 19.
1312 .... Sarumanayakaru (6), iridu, EC. III.

Nj. 71

1319 ... kere, tere (22) EC. III. Md. 100.
1325 .... aru (4), nurahattakke (10), muru (23)

kere (24),muvattaru (25), EC. III.

Tn. 99.
1332 . karanisidharu (32) EC. III. Nj. 65.

r for r.

1336 .... kamcagara (13) EC. III. yl. 38.
1336 .... kere (1), muvattara (4), teruta (9),

karanathamge (4), EC. IV. Ng.

36.
1368 ... Udugore (76), Horahodeya (67) EC.

VII. Sk. 282.
1368 ... miridavanu (29) EC. II. 344. eredu

(14), teruva (12), teruta (16), EC.

III. Nj. 117.

1376 .. . Toranada (6), r for r. EC. VII. Sk.

57. turu serehohaga EC. VII.
Sk. 57.

1377 .... erasidanu (22), Herahalli (6), EC.

VII. Sk. 35.

1390 .... kere (9), eredu (25) EC. VII. HI. 6.
1390 .... Badagakere (11), marevokkarakava

(18) EC. I. 39. '.

47

1396 .... nuruyentu (20) no r but r. kere (24)

EC. VII. Sk. 241
1396 .... inura (17), maggadere (21), rnaduve-

dere (22), ganadere (22), EC. VII.

HI. 71.

15th Century :

1403 . . mathadereyanu (7) EC. IV. Hg. 47.

aridu (11) EC. IV. Hg. 60.
1407 .... horaveyarage (4) EC. IV. Gu. 41.
1411 .... terige EC. III. Nj. 137.

1415 .... munuru (2) r and not r. EC. VII.

Sh. 31.

1416 .... aledere (10), adudere (10) EC. III.

Sr. 105.

1417 .... suregondaru (17) EC. VII. Sk. 37.
1420 .... Mugalikere (39) No r. EC. VII. Sk.

288.

1422 .... adadere, kurnbaradere (14) (prose)
No. r.

1430 .... yerakottevu (19) EC. IV. Ch. 159.

EC. VII. Sh. 40. (prose)

1431 .... eradu Kottevu (55) EC. VII. Sh. 71.

(prose).

1431 .... eradu (23), ganadere, amedere (30),

olavaru horavaru (31), Gandugere
ojagereya (40), No r. EG. VII.
Sh. 71

1432 .... horavaru (20) EC. III. Sr. 7.

1437 .... Heggerege (19), kuriterige (Nor. )

EC. III. Tn. 47.

1437 .... Kamigereya. EC. III. Ml. 4.
1458 .... kere (no r) (63), kumbara (61), no r.

EC. III. Sr. 133. kere (37) EC.

48

1474 .... Kaligereya (no r) EC. III.M1. 121.

1477 .... Arasanakere (8), but vomdukereyanu

(11) no r. EC. III. Md. 77,

1482 .... kereya. EC. TV. Ch. 185.

1484 .... eradu (11) EC. IV. Ng. 59.

1494 .... nuru (6), kere (6). EC. III. Nj. 100.

1496 .... erevalli EC. III. Nj. 33.

1497 .... tere (11) EC. III. Nj. 115.

16th Century :

1609 .... Yeragamballi (9) EC. IV. yl. 18.
1613 .... dhareyaneradu (69 ; 74), Malligere

(98 ; 107) (prose) EC. IV. ng. 81.

No r
1613 .... terigegalu (7), bogaraderige (17),

ganacaraderige (no r), ahaderige

asagara terige, nayimdara terige

kumbhara (no r) terige (19), EC.

IV. Qu. 3. karihola (4), kere (10)

Huregadde (13) EC. III. Tn. 37.
1517 .... eradn (8) EC. III. my. 5
1519 .... baruva (9), Kuruha Javadevapagau-

dana (6) EC. III. Nj. 63.
1521 .... Sarvamanyada (5), paridevaya (8),

EC. IV. yl. 21.

1524 .... olagere (247) no r. EC. VII. Sh. 2fi.
1527 .... eradu (10) EC. III. Sr. 1.
1530 .... tarisi (26), eradu (27), maleyuru (7).
1530 .... nanura aruvattaru (3) EC. IV. Hg.

43.
1532 .... muraneya (6), eradu (8), olavarehora-

vare (9), EC. IV. Ch. 115.
1538 .... nura arpattaneya. EC. III. Md. 112.
1541 .... kere (24), eradu (26), nuru (21), EC.

III. Tn. 120.

49

1542 . .... ka'/adu (17), eradu (18), EC. III.

Si: 6.
1544 .... mu/u (29), I for r. kereya (26) EC.

I. 10.

1556 .... eradu (14) EC. III. Tn. 108. nmrake

(18) no r ; aruvattumuru (19) EC.
VII. Sk. 55.

1557 .... talavarike (22), Kuruvada grama

EC. VII. HI. 9.

1585 .... yeradu (16), no r. EC. III. Sr. 40.
1589 .... kabbereya (9) EC. III. Md. 25.

17th Century:

1600 ... eragidanu (4), no r. EC. II. 204.
1505 .... Hamgarepurada (6), kerekatte (13)

EC. IV. Ch. 82.
1622 .... rnenasugere (192), volagere (199),

kembare (208), kerekolagana (220),

kerebadagana (221), No r. EC. III.

Tn. 62.

1634 .... yaradu (30), yarisi (34), EC. II. 352.
1634 .... pareyamna (19) EC. II. 250.
1639 .... kere (146), no r. EC. III. Nj. 198.
1654 .... keregal (47), seruvagaranige (76),

samgitagararige (83), nurakke (88),

adara (13).
1663 .... eredu (14) EC. IV. Hg. 85. No. r.

1663 .... arutirumale Seve (46), kerekelage

(59) EC. III. Sr. 13.

1664 .... eradu (26) EC. IV. Gu. 25.

1666 .... eradu (17) EC. IV. Yd. 53.

1667 .... kerekatte (112) EC. IV. Yd. 43.

1668 ... Kerehal'li. EC. VII. Sh. 81.

1669 .... rnuru (20), nuru (21), nurayippattaru

(22), eradu (26), EC. IV. HS. 139.

G. O. I. 4

50

1670 .... aruvarabada (7) EC. IV. HG. 120.

Nor.

1671 .... teru (26-28), aramaiiidigu (29) EC.

VII. Bh. 3.

1685 .... eredu (18), valagere (22, 25) EC. III.

My. 7

1686 ... am (99), cradu (105), kerege (143),

EC. III. Sr. 14.
18th Century :

1100 .... kallanirisidaii), EC. I. 71.

1722 .... teruvahanavanu (8), terigehanava
(10) EC. VII. Sh. 21.

1722 . .. kereyalli (441), Belekercgc (445),
Sattikeremathakke. No r. (503),
Kuruvada (493), huttaremele (428 ;
540), huttare (508,"530, 532 549,
594), kere (529, 530), kerege (574),
Patnagere (590), niira (595), nuri-
ppatlara (628), volagere (G37), nura-
hanneradu (681, 682, 685, 709),
muru (684, 709), eredu (710), EC.
III. Sr. 54.

1724 .... einuru (150), kere (155, 158, 161),
terige (164, 165), hadimuru (175),
eredu (191).

1741 .... Kumbaragumdige (159), kere (170)
EC. IV. yd. 58.

1748 .... Kerehatti (308), borage (317),
Hamdugere (358), kereyerl (358),
Kattegere (378), idara (382), kerege
(476), kere (1350), ippattam (1372),
EC. III. TN. 63.

1759 .... teruva (10), pujegararu niamnyaga-
raru (9), terige (31), horagu (46),
EC. IV. Ch. 101.

51

1762 .... nura aravattelu (17), nura ippattaru

(14) EC. IV. yl. 63.
J762 .... iiraniira ippattu (20), aruvatbu (17)

EC. IV. Ng. 7

19th Century :

1825. nurokkalu (19) E. I. 25.

53

The following words contain v~. (Their N. K.
equivalents are given in brackets) : va/ikke (balika) ;
Valjiggame (Ba)agave) ; vandu (bandu) ; vai-vu (balu) ;
vittar (bittaru) ; vittu (bittu) ; vittidalli (bittidakade) ;
vettede- (bettede-) ; Bedevalli (Bedahalli) ; vejege
(bejeyali) ; veleyade (bejeyade) ; Velgola (Belgola) ;
Veimadada (Belmadada) ; Vegura (Begura) :

Some of these words have b- in these inscriptions :-
NWs. bandu, bitta, bittavol, bi|te;
LWs. besagey, begarii

The corresponding words in T., M. and Te. have
v- and in Tu. have b-.

K.

T.

M.

Te.

Tu.

vaZvu

va/vu

vaZvu

. . .

balu

vittar

vittar

vittu

vidicinaru

bitta

vittu

vittu

vittu

vittu

bittu

vettadul

....

....

vele

vilai

vila

*

bele

ve!

vi]ang.u

ve] vilannu

vele

bill

All words with initial v- in Kan. have correspond-
ing words in v-, in the other Dravidian languages.

Even in the case of Lws., Kan. b- corresponds to
T., M., Te. v- and Tu. b-.

K. T. M. Te. Tu.

begam vegam vegarn vegaraih bega
That this b- is a later development from v- will be
clear from the following :

9th Century.

830 .... basadi, EC. 11.415.
810 .... vitta (10), EC. III. ML 68 ; Ml. 5
Baraijasiyum,

S3

870 .... Varanasiyu. EC. III. NJ. 68.

884 .... bidiyayatam (G) EC. II. 394.

888 .... Sasirvbarpparvbarurnam (12) ; Sa-
sirvbar. Baranasiyumam (12),
Sarvbanandi (7). EC. I. 2.

895 ... Sarhbatsararhgaj (2) EC. III. Md.
13.

10th Century :

900 .... bandisidar (for vandisidar) EC. IT.
55 ; EC. II. 4.

930 .... varmisiitte (58), vayasi (28) (for
bayasi. N. K.) EL XIII. 326.

950 .... bandisida. EC II. 154.

978 .... Belgola (9), Birasena- (10), Sasirb-
barum (13), aynurbbarurh (15)
orbban (16), Banarasiyum (for
Varan asi) 16), arorbba (18) EC.
1.4.

llth Century:

1000 .... blrara. EC. II. 45. bandisida, bandu.
EC. II. 49.

1038 .... varalasiyalu. E. I. XVI, p. 277.

1050 .... bandisida. EC. II. 52. bandisidarh.
EC. II. 465 (for vaadisidam).

1071 .... v>b after r, before y and r. garbba
(3,16), agurbbirh(3),dibya (10), deby
(11), sarbbabhaumarh (15), purbba
(16, 22, 40), orbbara (19), Sarhse-
byauj (29), bhabya (40j, byoma(51),
sarbbo- (56), byacaraaada (63)
byakhyana (66, 67), E. I. XV
p. 337.

1080 .... basadige. EC. II. 485.

54

1097

12th Century

1100
1104

1113

1172

, .. v > b in braja (13), dibyaih (23, 32)
byatipatamum (25), drabya (37).
El. XVII, p. 182.

bandisida (for vandisida) EC. II. 48.

aivalam (4), tolvalanh, balvalarh. EC.
VII. 8k. 131.

r > b initially in Skt. words and
also in Samsebyam (4) and nabya
(15). EL XV. p. 105. nirvvadhe.
E. I. VI, p. 36.

byapaka (34), byapanam (34), pati-
brate (36), brata (36) byftpara (40)
brata (45), braja (48), byavahari
(61), dibya (79 and 87), bratimdram
(80). E. LXV. Madagibal.

13th Century:

1200 .... b for v. in braja (9) sebyam (15)

v for b. dorvvala (5). EL V, p. 28.
1256. blragallu, EC. 1.6.
1285. viragallu. EC. I. 7.

The writing of Sasirvbar (888) is noteworthy, as
it suggests the mode of writing and the hesitation of
the writer.

Both v- and b- are in use during these centuries,
and in the earlier centuries the forms with v- are
more in number. About 1192, the sign for v denotes
both v and b in the inscriptions (El. Vol. VI, p. 98).

In the later inscriptions b- is more common than
v-. In KBM. (877 A. D.) we find b-:
baZikkam (I. 93), baZvude (II. 36), baradanani (II. 56)
bamdode (II. 41 ), beladu (III. 166), bereverappudarim
(I. 46).'

56

In the later Kanarese grammars, all the forms are
in b-, but in word groups and compounds, b- is
replaced by v-.

KBB. SMD. K8S.

31. ela-vidri 67. kadu-velpu 91. mu-vannam
kal-va/e al-vale 92. ber-vverasi

mr-velasu tol-vale inel-vannam

127 teZ-vasir ber-verasi (327. kudu-villam

gen-vayi 1 372.

131. karbu-villam 115. betta-vesage
kudu-villam datta-valli

135. kur-val 184. ur-vveli

136. per-val 186. pallili-vay
143. kadn-val 188. mu-velasu

In all these examples, the second word begins
with b- when independently used in M. K. andN. K.,
v- being preserved in such groups.

It is noted that b- of Kanarese is not from p- as
g- and d- are from k- and t- respectively.

-v-

Intervocalic -v- may be from (1) -v-; (2) -p-;
and (3) -m-.

1. -v- before y and r and after r becomes b some-
times as shown from the evidence of the later
inscriptions. But in pure Kanarese words it remained
v in 0. K. with very few exceptions and later -v- >
-b- and r before -v- is assimilated to -b- in N. K. :
anduva/ikke (N. K. abalika), orvvan and orvvan (N.
K. obbanu), eZnurvvar (replaced by elnurujana).

2. -v- < -p-.

The forms are: Nws. edevidiyal, Edevo/al,
pogevogi, bittavol, mamjuvol, muvetinura, salvavol.
Iws : kavilevum, mahatavadi, mahatavan.

56

(About aramantama for aramntava, see -v- from
-in- infra.)

This change of -p- to -v- is found in the later ins-
criptions .

9th Century :
830

89U
890

10th Century:
900

915

990

llth Century :
1057

1070 .
1085

Klrttivura (8), Temkanavalliya (4 EC.

VII. SK. 283.

kavileyumam (12) EC. I. 2.
permmadi-vattamgatti (6) EC- I. 3.

pervoJaia (71) EC. IV. Yd. <;0.

pagantevallame (75).

paravendirannan EC. 11.448. Turu-
ndavoZala (13) EC. IV. Hg. 110.

pernjuiadi vattagattuvandu EC. VII.
Sh. 96.

marevokkara (12) EC. III. My. 36.

devalokakke vodal EC. IV. Hg.

18.

Posavalli, HosavalU EC. I. 50.
Nokkaverggade EC. VII. sh. 10.

12th Century:

1104 .- . pempuvetta. EC. VII. Sk. 181.
1113 .... Karavurada. EC. III. NJ 44.
1148 .... nandadlvige EC. III. N J. 110.

Here -p- in the body of words and in word

groups > -v-,
This change of -p- to -v- is common even in

N.K.
In. T. -p- > -v- :

57

The examples are all Iws :

apattam and avattam ' a falsehood ', apaniyam and
avamyam 'a market street', upamai and uvamai
4 a simile ', upattiyayan and uvattiyayan ' a priest, a
teacher ', kapi and kavi ( a monkey ', kapantam and
kavantam 4 a headless body ', kappiyam and kaviyam
'an epic poem', tapasi and tavasi c a brahmacari
entering upon the stage of a recluse/ vapi and vavi
4 a walled tank', vipattu and vivattu * a calamity '.
In Tel. -p- > -v- in word groups: pampuvadu,
payavadu, payavaru, bayalavovu.

Later Kanarese grammarians have noted this
change as a regular one in Nws. and Lws. alike and
all of them have given examples.

SMD Sutras, 67, 99, 178, 179, 181, 182, 186, 18<J,
'258 and 292 and KSS. 60, 68, '241, 327, 3v>8,
329, 330, 333, H34, 338, 339, 340-2, 351-354, give
a large number of examples for this change of -p- to
-v-.

But sometimes -v- < -p- 1 after nasals continue
to be -v- in these inscriptions: e.g. unvorurh, enva;
in N. K. umborii and emba.

KKM. (877 A.D.; has the following bhogivisarh-
bol (I. 70), embudakkum (1. 84), embudu (I. 63),
embudidu (II. 7), embudemdum (III. 37).

In T. the intervocalic -p- is pronounced as -b-;
after nasals, the -p- is pronounced as -b-. e.g. anpu,
inpu, kampu, nompu.

But in Tel. -p- after nasals, is -p- in many cases.
e.g. impu, tampu, tnampu. In some -mp- > -mb-,
tombadi (tom+padi), tommidi. In New Kanarese
also -mp- and -mb- are both found. But this -m +

1. See-ppa under " Verbs ".

58

pol > -mbol in O. K. and M. K. always. Suracapam+
pole > suracapambole (37-1).

But in later grammars, v- suffixes after nasals >
-nab-.

SMD. K8S.

99-100. palavar, but palambar. 170. palambar,

kelavar but kelambar palavar, palabar.
214. Indrambol 171. ambar.

232. ernbarh, tirhbam, 333. candrariibol,

annambol.

517. enbaiii, tinbarh.

518. manbam,

kanbarb.

But in N. K. literary compositions this en-to
say, has been replaced by ermu-due to the addition of
-u to the root.

of. K- after nasals is not voiced in some of these
inscriptions : kalarii keydar, tafikade, prthivlrajyam-
keye, pnisadaiii keydar, but some are voiced ;
enangottu, prithivlrajyarhgeye, cp vinnapaih keye.
(6) EC/III. TN. 1. '(726 A.D.)

3. -v- from -m-.

The following words have -m-:

<1) ara mantatna, a/imen, gamiga, gamunda,
dehama, Namilur, Niurilur, mukhamage, Valliggame-
yarum.

(2) In the following -m- > -v- : Navilur,
rnukhavage, rajyava, valavadu.

-m- > -v- in the pretorminatioiial element in
rajyava; and also when one word ending in -in is
followed by another with an initial vowel, in mukha-
mage, mukhavage, valavadu.

The change -m- to -v- in (3) and the retention of
-m- in (1) suggest that -in- was probably used with

59

the phonetic value of -v-, though conservative
writing still used -m- as the Skt. word is mandapa.
It is also possible that the presence of another nasal
in some words may have been the cause of the
retention of -in- in some of these.

The following examples are from the later
inscriptions :- -

890 .... gavundana (5) EC. I. 8 ;
941-945 .... final -m occasionally changes to -v
before vowels, e.g., padvav(o) nesa-
nav (19) El. XIV. 364.
980 .... Cavundayya EC. II. 39.
983 .... Camundarajam EC. II. 175.
983 .... Cavundaraja EC. II. 179.
1057 .. Hemalambi prasiddham (12) EC.
IV. Hg. 18.

1097 .... final -m occasionally > -v- before

vowels. El. XVII. p. 182.

1098 .... punyarnantar apparu. EC. VII. Sk.

106.

1129 .... Balligave EC. VII. Sk. 100.

1182 .... -m > occasionally -v. El. XIV.

(Kurugod).

1189 .... panav-(28) EL XV. 77.
1115 .... Cavarajam (167) EC. II. 127 ;
1177 .... Hemalambi samvatsarada (3) EC.

III. Md. 44 ; .
L120 .... Demavatyamgaua (34), Demiyakka

(27 and 64). EC. II. 129;
1117 .... Hemalambi EC. III. Md. 10 \
1474 .... vrttimamtarolage (194) EC. III. Ml.

121.
1538 .... Hemalambi EC. III. Md. 112.

60

In KRM. (B77 A. D.) -m- > -v- in some words
and remains unchanged in others :
kiruvakkal (I. 39), viduragatainage (L 83), vis'
esamillade (1.84), prayogamlteran (I. 90), laksyami-
teranendum (III. 92).

Later grammars substantiate the view that -in- >
-v-.

I. KVV. and II. KBB. 1 (1050) stated that the
sounds of the labial class > v not only after vowels,
but also after y, r and 1 : e.g., mara + mane >
nmravanc ; tay + mane > tayvvan6 ; pul + mane >
pulvane; mr-4- manisatn > nirvanisam.

III. SMD. (1260) supports our inference, -m- >
-v- in all Iws. from skt. 2 and also in pure Kanarese
word 3 e.g., bemar > bevar, tornar > tevar, ernage >
evage, tamage > tavage.

IV. KSS. Iws. grama > gava, tainara > tavare
(1604).

As already stated this grammar paraphrases and
amplifies what No. Ill gives. According to KSS. 4
-m- > -v-.

In N. K., words with initial u or o take a
prothetic v- in rural pronunciation : e.g., vuru for uru ;
vodu for odu ; vuntagu for untagu.

The same tendency is found in these inscriptions :
vandinisu (29-2) for ondinisu ' a little.'

-v- is replaced by -u- in upnurum in these
inscriptions. The ^same tendency is found in later
inscriptions : Ga-u-mda ; Ga-u-da ; EC. III. My. 17 ;
bahe-u EC. II. 344 (1368) ; sarvasvarnyau saludu (15)
EC. IV. Ch. 135 (1612); appa-u (3) kudu-u-demdu
(10), EC. IV. Yl. 1. (1654).

1. KBB. 31. 2. SMD. 292.

3. SMD. 67 and 104. 4. KSS. 144.

61

L.

The following words have-/- :

(The N.K. and M.K. equivalents are given in brackets),
ada/de (21-3) (M.K. adari, in N.K. replaced by
hatti), iZal, (44-4) (N.K. ilidu). IreZpattu (5-15);
6-15) ; (M.K. irerpattu. N.K. replaced by nurana-
Ivattu, 140); uligam (8-38) 1 for I (N.K.
uliga); eZtum (3-3) (M.K. ertu, N.K. ettu) ;
EdevoZalnadu (8-28); eZaneya (1-4) (M.K. and
N.K. elaneya) ; e/nur (59-1) ; (M.K. and N.K.
elniiru) ; oJtu (43-3) (M.K. ollittu, oljitu, N.K.
olleyadu) ; KaZvappu (57-4) (M.K. KaZbappu)
(N.K. Kabbappu) ; KiZgana (62-6) N.K. Kigga-) ;
KiZga (3-2) (N.K. Kigges' vara) ; kiZtu(U-l) (M.K.
kittu, N.K. kittu) ; gaZde (63-20) (M.K. garde,
N.K. gadde); ge/i (27-4) (M.K. keri, N.K. keri);
tlZthadol (17-1) ; (Lw. N.K. tirthadalli). -/for
-r-. Pa/i (56-14) ; (NK.'hali) ; paZcidor (62-8) ; N.K.
(paccu. Vb.) ; puZu (1-1) (N.K. hulu) ; pe/cuge
(3-8); (M.K percu, N.K. heccu) ; pe/da (25-1;
34-2; 38-1); M.K. pelda, N.K. lielida) ; poZdu
(14-1) (N.K. replaced by holuuiadi) ; va/vu
(40- -2) (N.K. balu) ;

This -I- doe^s not appear initially in Kanarese.
It appears intervocalically, finally and before conso-
nants. This I has been replaced by -1- between vowels
and assimilated to the following consonant in conso-
nant groups in N.K.

History of I in Kanarese.

I remained unchanged during the 8th and the
9th centuries. But in the 10th century about 930
A,D, becomes r before consonants; e,g. } negartte

62

from negaZte ; berpparan from beZparan ; norpode
from noZpode. All the words with I before consonants
did not change / to r. Both Z and r forms are found
in the s:inu> inscriptions (See A.I). 930, 940, 945, 949
and 978 in the appendix). About the year 930, words
with 1 in place of I appear side by side with forms with
I and consonant, and r + consonant forms < Z + con-
sonant forms. This indicates that I >r and / > 1
about the same time. See 930 A.D. It is often *
stated that Z > r before a consonant if the vowel
preceding I was long by nature or position ; and that
I before a consonant preceded by a short vowel not
lengthened by position remained I and the double
consonant was considered a " fleeting double con-
sonant " or " s' ithiladvitva" (SMD 36). But I before
a consonant naturally makes the vowel long by
position as Z + consonant becomes a double consonant,
e.g., negartte < nega/te, garde < gaZde (SMD 37).
negarddarn from negaZdam (SMD 3fi). This convention
of a fleeting double consonant (Z 4- consonant in this
case) shows that, already, a vowel was being pro-
nounced, though not fully, in between Z arid the
consonant, though the vowel was not written 2 or they
were being assimilated. This points to two kinds of
pronunciation one with a vowel and the other
without a vowel of these consonantal groups
(Z + const.) (SMD. 60.) Also the assimilated
consonant group or long consonant was shortened in
pronunciation. This theory of s'ithiladvitva is illus-
trated in SMD. sutras 36, 45, 59 and 60. The
appearance of 1 in place of Z is predominant when Z is
between vowels, such as in aZipi.

1. E, I. XIII. p. 327.

2. Of. Kilagana (1036).

63

The use of I for r in such words as ti/aka.
tiZthadol, is also found, though not often (See 950).

In the llth century, the same changes (i.e. /tor
and 1) are on the increase. The use of / in place of r
in 1007, and others is due to the confusion of /, r and
1 I had ceased to have its original definite value.
The use of I for Skt. 1 in tiZakam (1010) and kamaZa
(1085) is due to the confusion between I and 1 which
had taken the place of /. In this century, 1 is taking
the place of I more and more, though not uniformly
in all the areas. (See 1028, It 37, 1042, 1045, 1047
1049, 1055, 1057, 1058, 1060, 1063, 1064, 1067, 1071,
1075, 1077, 1081, 1082, 1085, 1087, 1098 and 1100).

There is one interesting form ir?/da (1067) show-
ing the transitional stage in the change from / to r,
when both r and I are written.

In the 12th century, 1 and r become more
frequent than I and 1 is more predominant than r.
This does not mean that I disappeared completely.
In some inscriptions all the three changes are seen ;
e.g., 1172. In 1179, we have the next stage: ther-f
consonant > long consonant, the r being assimilated
to the consonant following. Thus :

1 . I + const. > r + const. > a long const.
J. vowel + 1 + vowel > vowel + 1 + vowel.

In the next century (13th century) 1 establishes
itself firmly and very few forms with / are found. From
the 14th century onwards, ] replaces / between vowels
and the assimilation of I to the consonant following
is established.

. So far as the inscriptions are concerned, I is
still found much less frequently in verse and very
rarely in prose, though 1 had completely replaced I in

f.hp r)pflrrinf,inn ni

64

Let us see what the grammars tell us :

Kavirajamarga (877 A.D.) has /, as in the
inscriptions of the 9th century.

I. 1045. Karndtaka kdvydvalokana by Ndga-
vartnma. The forms with I are quite in keeping with
ancient traditions regarding the use of I. Sutras 6
and 65.

II. 1045. Karndtaka Bhdsd BMsdna by Naga-
varmma. He also includes I in the Kanarese alphabet
(Sutras 10 and 11). He states that consonants in
front of -d often change to /(KBB. 119, 121):noZpaih
< nodu + parh ; be/pam < bedu -\- paiii.

The examples, where / is used, keep up the old
tradition about the use of I.

III. 1260. Karndtaka Sabdamanidarpana by
Ke&irdja. The author, Kes' iraja, states that I is d
pronounced with greater pressure :

atipldanadim repha

S'ritarnada rakaramum sarnantu (Jakara

S'ritamada ra/anum arhgi

krtapadalatvakke Saneiuasallada kulanum (18)

ivu varnavrttige sa-

Ivuvu ; Samdum prasadedege sallavu ; yamaka

vyavahrtig agavu ; des'I-

yavenipuv a hrasvam enisida e o sahitam (19)
(18) : r is produced by pronouncing r with greater
pressure ; . Hs produced by pronouncing d with greater
pressure ; 1 is produced by pronouncing 1 with greater
pressure; pronouncing with greater pressure is ex-
plained in the vrtti as " atipindeled uccarisuva
ekasthani."

(19) r and 1 r, d and 2 I and 1 and 3 1 may be used for
repetition of cognate letters (as " surar iridoragida ") ;

1. KSS, Cocomentary, p, 165.

65

they cannot be used for alliteration (prasa) (it is
wrong to use r and ; in prasa, as in c dhuradol and
teradimda ") ; r and r cannot be used in yamaka (as in
kareyam and kareyam pottappudu) - (19) (Similarly
for d and / and ! and j.)

The author then discusses where / and 1 are to
be used and gives a list of words where words ought
to have I (SMD <$). This clearly shows that there
was much confusion in his age about the use of I and
1. He was bound by tho traditional spelling and so
he wanted to give a list of words where / and 1 ought
to be used. This is in full agreement with our
inference regarding the use of I in the 12th and the
first half of the loth century. He also discusses the
use of r in consonant groups such as garde, etc.
(SMD 37). This indicates that the assimilation of r
< I to the following consonant was on the increase
and the author wanted to point out which word ought
to have r and which not. In his list, garde < gaMe is
grven. This is also in corroboration of our inferences
about I in the J3th century. By the end of the 13th
or the middle of the 14th century, replacement of Iby
1 and the assimilation of r < I to the following conso-
nant was established.

N.K. baduku<i\l.K. bardumku < O.K. ba/durhku
seems to have lost I apparently. But baduku is < *
badduku < barduku < bardumku < baldumku. The
poets and scholars always tried to use the archaic I in
spite of the popular use of 1 and assimilated forms.

IV. 1604. Karn&taka S'abdanvs'dsana by
Bhattdkalamka The author of this grammar does
not describe the actual state of the language in the
early 17th century. He discusses mainly the
principles laid down by Kes' iraja, author of No. Ill

66

above, and often amplifies them, though the conditions
had changed. Us from d (KSS. pp. 163-168). He
gives a list of words 1 where I ought to be used, though
I had been replaced by 1 long ago.

If we turn to Karnatakakavicarite, Vols. I-III,
we find that 1 is occasionally used for Z, but / is used
in all the examples quoted even up to A, D. 1850 cf,
P XVII. Vol. I. KKC. -In the popular song of DevaJa-
purada Namjumda, an ordinary Visnudasa, (184 J)
(p. 196 of KKC. Vol. Ill) we have peZi. This
indicates the ways of scribes, commentators and
editors of MSS. Hence quotations from this ' History
of Literature ' by R. Narasimhachar, compiled from
MSS. manipulated by scribes, commentators and
editors, cannot be depended upon for our purposes.

Dr. Fleet in I. Ant. (KG. p. 15) has corne to
the following conclusion about the use of I in Kan. :-

A. 600-900 A.D. I in common use.

B. 900-1200 A.D. a transition of I to r and 1.
According to Kan. grammarians Kan. -/- is

produced when d- is pronounced with great force. 1
When Surds k and p come after -d-, -d > -I in O.K. 2
nodu + pam > noZpam, madu -f ko > maZke, eradu
+ kudure > eraZkudure. Probably the -d- ofe these
and similar words was pronounced like / or very
much like /,, and the words like no/pam, etc*, were
archaic forms, still surviving then. After Z, fut.
tense suffix -va- > pa- 3 as before -r.

In between vowels, / > 1 in M.K. and N.K: aZipi
> alihi (See History of / above.)

1. KVV. 6; KBB. 10, 11 ; SAID- 18, 19 and 114; KSS.
pp. 167 and 168.

. 2. KBB. 119 and 121 ; KVV. 65 ; SMD. 183 ; KSS. 65.
3. SMD. 232 ; KSS. 503, 504, 511 and 518.

67

In SMD 20, dadima, kusmiinda. Gkiutla, Guda,
jhagade, Vidamgam, though born of -da- and > -Z-,
have become kulas i.e., dalimba, kumbala, Gaula,
Gulam, Jhagale, vilamgam. These are kula in
" rudhi " or usage ; elaga < edaga is kula.

The Skt. t, th, t, r and 1 become -Z- in old Kan. 1
Skt. Skt. O.K.

-t- ghatike

ghotike

dhati dha/i

latam laZam

th mathike ma/ige

pethike peJige

t pratihastam paZihastam

r kruram ku/

Jhallari JhallaZi

1 talam taZ

pulinam
argalarh

According to Kes'iraja, O.K. -I- is from -d- and
is the result of different prouiiciation. This can be
inferred from Kes'iraja (1260) stating in SMD 22 that
palikani, pelige, vilige, gnlige, varalam, ragale, though
born of Skt. Sphatikam, petike, vitike, ghatike,
varatam, raghate by u apabhrams' ate " are still ]
(ku] a as he calls them) in old Kanarese. But " holige<
sphotaka ; lambala < lampata are treated as doubtful
cases for Z, most probably they have 1."

SMD 25. jhalakarii, jhalipisidam, jomguli, bom-
buli, alamalarn, thamalam, valige, Onduli, jarhguli,
puttali, goli, peli -these are doubtful whether they are
Z; they are most probably kula -1.

1. SMD. 21, KSS. 140.

68

These Sutras show that d, 1 and / were pronounced
though differently, but nearly in the same manner,
and that / ig, in the Skt. words, given by him and by
KSS. on pp. 164-1(56 are from -d- or -t- or r ; though
/ has replaced -t- in Skt. words like pratihastarh, it is
to be assumed that -t- had become -d- m Sauraseni
prakrt and that this / replaced -d- of prakrt

About its pronunciation in old Kanarese, nothing-
is definitely stated by the grammarians except that I
is from -d-.

There is no I in Te. and Tu. now. But in T.
and M. it is still found. But in Madura and suburbs I
is pronounced as 1 \ but in Madras and the north, it
is pronounced as -y-.

In O.K. the grammarians and the poets considered
/ 4- consonant and r + consonant could be used in
alliteration (prasa) 2 . This suggests that the pronun-
ciation of r was very near that of I and that is
probably why I + consonant > r + consonant.

O.K. I

This I is found in T. and M. now. It was in use
in O.K. and O.Tc. 3 . When Te. and Tu. lost I is not
known at present. This I is not found initially in
any langage.

The following correspondences are found :
I. (a) After long vowel :
K. T. M. Te. Tu.

-Z -Z -Z -Z -1

teZu 4 a scorpion' te/, teZ, telu, t6l

1. The Hindu Literary Supplement. April 3, 1933. Page 2
C.D.G. p. 144.

2. S.M.D. 24 ; KSS. 140. Commentary 167-169 " atra
Sarvatra raZadinam vyapades' a bhedei s'rutyanugunyam astiti
prasakaranam " iti-

3. El. XIX. pp. 138 aqd 172 about I in O. Te.

K.
-Z

kaZ 4 blackness :
peZ ' to speak ;

T. M. Te. Tu.
Z- -Z Z- -1

kaZ kaZ kalu kal
pecu pecu peZu helu

preZu. pun.

aZ l to sink
aZa ' depth
eZ i to rise

*
>
j

aZ
aZarh
e/

aZ
aZam
eZi

lo-gu
lo-tu
le

al
ala
el

(b) After

short

vowel.

-Z-

-Z-

-Z-

-r-

-r-

iuZu ' a worm '

puZu

puZu

purugu

puru

rnoZegn ' to

resound'
moZa l a cubit

measure '
paZa * old 7
poZal ' a city, a

district '
poZtu k sun, time ' poZutu,

pun
muZangu mulannu mroga ....

muZam muZam mura morarhge

paZa
poZal

paZa pra para
poZal proZu
polu

poZutu pordu portu.
proddu
poddu.
toZtu ' a slave ' toZuttai tottu tottu

(a female slave; tortu
e/tu 4 a bull ' erutu eddu era

erdu

iM.K. ertu (why a voiced

N.K. ettu. stop came in

here is not
known.)

This Z is dropped after long vowel with compen-
satory lengthening in Tel.

moZakalu muZarnkalu muZakal mokalu ....

70

II. After long and short vowels :

-Z -I -I -d- -!-r,d,Z-

IZ ' to pull ' iZu iZu idu

ii/iga 'service ' u&yarn uZiyam uZiyamudigamuuliga.
eZu ' seven '
koZi ' a fowl '
toZi 4 friend '
naZi c vein, a tube '
paZu Vaste, to bury
(puZu)
bil 'inferior'

eZu

eZu

edu

el

koZi

koZi

kodi

kori

toZi

to?i

todi

na/i

naZi

n^di

nadi

paZ
puZu

paZ
pu/u

padu
pudu

padu

vll 4 to viZ ' to bidu burn
fall ' fall J

bo/a 4 shaven '
agaZ 4 a moat '
koZave ' a pipe '

xiegaZ 4 to be famous :
pogal ' to praise '
suZi * an eddy 7

boda bola
agadu agalte
kodama kolave
kolave

nigaZ nigaZ negadu
pugaZ pugaZ pogadu pugar
cuZi culi sudi suli

tuli

In two words, Kan. -Z corresponds to Te -y.
kuZi ' a pit ' kuZi kuZi koyyi guri

no/e ' to enter ' nuZai nu/e huy niiri

cf. Madras pronunciation of -Z- as -y-. paZan
payam and sometimes palam.

agaZ agaZ
kuZay kuZay

71

APPENDIX.

The history of I in K. can be seen in the following:

8th Century :

726
750

776
780

9th Century
810

865
870

874
884
888

890

893
898

.... TaZekada EC. III. Tn. 1 ;

.... eZpatturuan EC. IV. Hg. 4 ; aZitton

(g) EC. IV. (17) Gu. 88; eZdu (1)

EC. III. My. 6; aZidon (6) EC. III.

TN. 113; TaZgijiira (1), kaZnadara

(1) EC. IV. gu. 86 ;
.... kaZam (68) KG. IV. Ng. 85 ;
... afttton (4 arid 9) KG. IV. Hg. 87.

.... idanaZitton (5) EC. III. Nj. 26;

idanaZidam (10) EC. III. Ml. 68;
.... peZcisu El. VII. p. 200. ot. peZdore

' the groat river' in EL VI. p. 259.

975 A.D. ;
.... aZida (8), a/idan (9) EC. III. Nj. 76.

alutiZdu (6) EC. III. Nj. 75. eZnura

EC. VII. HI. 13;
.... aZi (to ruin) EL XIII. p. 184;
.... maZtiyara (8) EC. II. 394;
.... idanaZidom (11), aZidom (13) EC.

1.2:
.... biZtiyabhattadol (8) EC. I. 3 ; CoZa-

garnundarum (71), peroZve 75

pervaZtiya (75), vaZveliye (76), peZ-

jogeya (76), paZeyabaZ (82) EC. IV.

Yd. 60.
.... GavaZi Settiyamaga EC. IV. Ch,

134;
.... eZpadi (7) EC. III. Nj. 97 ;

10th Century :

900 .... kalamka/oi (1 and 5) EC. I. 60,
TurumdavoZala EC. IV. Hg. 110 ;
eZpattugulaga/de (3) EC. III. TN.
114. iZdu (3), aZipikondatan (5),
a/idarh (6), NoZambana (1) EC. IV,
Ch 141. idanalida (11) 1 and not I
EC. IV. Ch. 95.

904 .... iZdu, uZalu, EC. III. Sr. 148 ;

907 .... PoZalasctti (6), uZida (8), aZida (13),
a/idora (13) EC. III. Md. 14.

909 .... iZdu, EZeyapparasarum, EC. III. Sr.

147;

910 ... aZivamge (10), aZida (12), EC. I. 74 ;
910 .... ondu baZu pariharam (14), E(>. I. 74 ;
915 .... peroZbeyiri (26), afidom, EC. III. Nj.

139;

918 .... eZpattarkkam (8) naZ^avundugey-
yuttu (9), iZdal (for irdal), iZdavasa-
nadol (22) niZisidom (for r). EC.
VII. Sk. 219 ;

925 .... iZdu (for irdu), poZalabbeya (12),
gaZde (4), aZidon (14),

930 .... pogartte (2, 31), berpparan (5), arka-
rindarb (8), norppara (28), norppa-
. vargge (53), negartte (57, 66),
norpode (61), Z is replaced by r, but
negaZdaiii (3), negaZda (26), negaZd-
(33), negaZdar (63). As against
these elgeyan (7), pogalal (8, 66),
maldarh (17), podalda (27), maleye
(31), pogal (37) K.I. XIII. 326.

935 gaZde (24) EC. VII. Sk. 194;

940 .... pogaZe (6), tuZilalgalan (12), kalip
(5), eZgeyain (13), biZuvol (17) ;

940 .... no I at all, but negardda (18), norp-
pade (10, 11). El. XVII. p. 201 ;

944 .... aZida (13) EC. I. 28;

945 .... iZdu (14), NaZgaumndara (17), el

(21), ali (J-2) bub in one case r:

Narggamundam (14) El. XIV.
949-50 .... erppattnvarii (21) EL VI. 50;
950 .... Ka/bapputlZthadol EC. II. 68;
950 .... KaZbappinalli (2) EC. II. 136.
9oO .... keZage (12), iZdoin (17), SeraguvaZda-

por, coZacaturanigabalaihgalan (15),

EC. III. Md. 41 ;

963 ... NaZgavunda (3) EC. VII. Sb 22 ;
963-4 .... coZa, iZda, kiZta, El. XIX. p. 287 ;

975 .... negaZte, pogaZte, eZde^yam (edeyatn)

El. V. Inscr. of Marasirnba II.
peZdore (5) El. VI. p. 258;

976 ... iZda (for irda) EC. IV. Hs 64 ;

978 .... aZidoin (16), aZida (17) EC. I. 4;
iZdu, negaZda ; but pogarddam,
porttum ; in other cases Z > 1.

982 . . pe/endu (7), nega/dain (8), oppiZdap-
puvu (18),pe/im (51), esedu iZdapudu
(64), SuZiva (89), uddavajameZedu
(119), maguZdam (137), poguZntiZ-
dapuvu (26), EZevabedamgarh (88),
EC. II. 133. melasiiiidam (100) 1
for Z. EC. II. 133. aZigandararh
(54), negaZda (6,^). iZdu (50), aZidu
(28), EC. II. 134. rnaZdura (2),
oZparbbaruih (3), aZida (5) EC. IV;
yl. 41

74

985 ' .... eZtam (3) but negalda (8 and 9), kali-
da (10) ;

lllh Century :

1000 .... kalamtiZdi (12), alidam (22) EC. I. 5.

1000 .... koZa, EC. II. 4, 29.

1007 ... niZsida(32), Zfor r;

1007 .... I is preserved and sometimes wrong-
ly I for 1. EL XVI. p. 73;

1009 .... aZidaih (12) EC. IV. Gu. 79.

1010 .... NoZariibadhirajana (3) (but Nojarn-

badhirajana ( 11), kerhgaZi. aZipilla-
datam, iZdu, aZida. El. XVI, p.
27 ; eZpattumarh (11), iZda (26), but
wrongly I in tiZakarh (3) El. XV.
p. 75;

1012 .... CoZanadenal (6), coZarii (7), TuZavarii
(10), aZidarh (34), kaZaniya (3'2)
EC. HI. Sr. 140; 1015. baZiya ( 1 2)
Co/apermmadiyara (5) EC. II. 378 ;

1019 .... Colamimam ( 17 ), eluinam (US), elusa-
mudramurii ( 17) EC. VII. Sk. 125 ;

1021 .... Ma/lagavun-danum (6 and 8) (Rice

has Mai la-) MaZlesvarakke (7) KC.
III. Nj. 121, bi/du (4), kiftw (5),
a/idavam (13), gaMeyum (19),
MaZtikereyam (19) EC. IV. Hg. 16.

1022 .... CoZabhupala (2), aZikkiri (20), EC.

III. Md. 78;

1022 .... negaZda, Ind. Ant. XVIII;
1022 .... aZida, uega/da; but 1 in pogajadar

(10), El. XIX. p. 223;
1028 .... Z: CoZana (8), negac'dal (11, 13),

keZage (23), gaZde (23, 27, 35),

irZdu (35) aZida (36), wrongly used

75

in koZada (24) ; I > r : bar-dale-
galan (10), erppadhhbarurh (35) ;
I > 1 ; pogalvudu (14), nal (20),
galeyalu (23), alidarh (36), kelage
(35), alidatam (36), ET. XV. p. 329 ;
1033 .... CoZapandyarkka/an (15) EC. IV. Hg.
17;

1036 .... magurddu irddu (3) r for I ; aZida (25),

Kilagana (22) EC. VII. Sk. 126;

1037 ...I: i/da, negaZda ; 'irregularly in

pa/am ' (L. D. B.) ; probably T.
loanword ; - 1 in alida KI. XVI. 75.

1038 .... negarddam. I > r (and !) El XVI.

p. 277;
1040 .... baZiya (7), aftdavaih (21) ; wrongly

used in iZnurvvara (12) for irnurv-

vara El XV. p. 334 ;
1042 .... biZda, a/ti.yirh, baZvode EC. VIII.

Sg. 109. I > 1 ; pogal (13), nalke

(16), pelu (20) ; Z > r : erdda (6) ;

negardda (12, 18); EL XVII.

p. 170;

1045 ... no Z, but \. El XIX. R 180;
1047 .... all 1 for Z except in eppattara (12)

for eZpattara. El., XVII. p. 121 ;

1049 .... aZidam (5), aZida (6), gaZdevum (34),

iiaiidaveZakkarh (34) nandaveZa-
kiiiige (27), EC. IV. Gu. 93;

1050 .... KaZvappatlrtthava EC. II. 4 6

sukhadinaluttumiZdu (21), gaZdeyu
(18), Nolambana (21), EC, VII.
ci. 8, Dravi/aganada EC. L 37 ;
1050 ..,. TivuZiganadarum EC. L 38 ; aZade
(2), taZidarn (4), BiZiyasetti (a)

76

EC. I. 30. taZdida (5) EC. I. 31 ;
1. el (7 and 23), iZdu (14), naZke
(23) 1 - kilila (26), polal (24), El.

XV. p. 77 ;

1052 .... gaZdeyumarii, peZda, but in all the

other words, 1, baliyam, all El.

XVI. 66.

1053 .... negaZdam. El. XVI. p. 54; negaZda

EL XVI. p. '277, negaZdam, pogaZte
eZ-. El. XVI. p. 53.

1054 .... eZurii, iZidode, EC. VII. sk. 118, iZdu

(13) wrongly in aZdu, but 1 for / in
elpatturnam (18) EL XV.
p. 54.

1055 .... / in iZdu, 1 in the rest. El. XIII.

p. 168 ;

1057 .... gaZdeya, aZdeyim, negaZutuiii EL
VI. p. '213;

1057 .... negale (1 and 23), e/ornbhattu (5!),

poga/alke (9), negalo (9), negarda
(19>, sukhadini/du (19), negardda
28 , gaMeya (24, 34), ba^vudu (28),
pogale negalum (27), aZtiyim (26)
EC. IV. Hg. 18; *

1058 .... Dravija-ganada EC. I. 3n ; iZdu (20),

1 for I in all (37), EL XV. p. 83 ;
1060 .... I in negaZdurii (15), eZpattumam (19,)

i/du (21) ,elpattara (29), but negaje

and pogaje (25), pogalugum (61),

See 1087.
1068 .. porttuiii H49), porttuiii (69) El

XII 1. p. 327; EL XV. p. 85;

nega/e pogaZim, negaZda EC. V.

AK. 186 ; pocaZugum EL XV. 87 :

77

1068 .... CoZakundunnadalva EC. Md. 116 ;
1060 .... kelage (3, 15), negalvunnati (40),

goZdegetlisida (44), beZdalegaleya,
inattalondu (56), EC. VII. Sh. 6;

1063 .... alidatau (30), EC. VII. Sk. 11, ali-

davaiiige, EC. VII. Ci. 18;

1064 .... Dravilagana rnaharimgalanmaya-

uathan (35) EC. I. 34 ;
1067 .... irZda for iZda or ii'da, negaZdaru, uaZ,

iZdu, but 1 in cola, a|ida but r in

berkuve, El, XVI. p. 81 ;
10(38 .... tuZilaltanakke, pogaZguiu, aZida, EC.

VII.' Sk. 13 ;

1069 negaZda (2), kallakaZci (10), negaZ-

varii (13), and aZida (13), EC. III.
Tn 135.

1070 .... keZagana (5i, EC. I. 49 ;

1071 .... alipam, peli, EC. VII. Sk. 129,

nega/te (9), biZdu (39), but in all
other cases, 1 tulil (9), pogal (1J ,
33), negal (13, 1^, 18, 33), nalke
(16), Cola 1 27, 30, 41), all (30,9),
ilida (BO, 31), balika (31), bajteya
(33), El. XV. p. 337 ;

1074 .. Z in pelda,! in the rest, El. XVI. p. 68;

1075 .. Z in gaZde and iZdu. } in the rest El.

XIX. p. 184 ;

1075 ... I in negaZda (6, 21, 36), negaZd (31)
iZdudu (1<>), iZdu (37), nimiZdu (12),
eZpattnmarn (17, 37), eZkoti (47),
gaZde (24), but kuZa (3) for kula,
El. XV. p. 34 ; I in negaZda (7, 14),
iZdu (8), eZ (19, 39, 43) El. XV.
p. 96;

78

1077 .... I appears a=5 1, in pogal, ilisi, pel,

ulidorgge, I in pogaZ (once) El.

XII. p. 270.

J077 ... uZidar, EC. VIII. Nagar 35.
1077 .. I > r : narggavundu, parttiya, Z > 1

in all the rest. EL XVI. p. 277 ;
1077 .... eZge, aZkade, negaZcidarh, EC. VII.

Sk. 124 ;'
1077 .... gaZde, garde EL XII. p. 270 ;

1079 .... tari gaZaniya mannalli nalvatteraZ*

khamduga, EC. V. Arakalgud 99.

1080 .... maZpamtire, padaZiyal, Ind. Ant. X.

p. 127 ;
1030 .... beZpara EC. VII. Sk. 297 ;

1080 .... CoZasetti, EC. I. 44 ;

1081 .... negaZda, negartte, EL XVI, p. 8 and

El. XIII, p. 327 ;

1081 .... a/karim, aZtigan, nega/dara, kiZtu,
EL XVI. p. 59 ;

1081 .... Z. negaZte, pogaZtegam, iZdu, Z > r:

kirttu, negartte. Z > 1. Nolamba,
pogalal, negaldar, pelvade, " Z is
falsely substituted for r in peZcut-
tire" cf. peZcuge;

1082 . Z. negaZdar ; 1. alidarhge (15), bilgum

(60), bijguiii (17); hala (35, 51, 5A)
EILXVII, p. 178;

1084 .... Z gaZdeyumam (52) ; r for Zin negard-

daih (6), negardda (11, 22) ; 1 for Z
in elpafctara (28), elkoti (42); Z in
eZda (15, 16), iZdu (29/45), negaZda
(52), EL XV. pp. 100-103 ;

1085 .... kamaZa for kamala, negaZdaZu for

negaZdalu. 1 regularly for Z, alida-
vamge, EL XIX. p. 189 ;

79

1037 .... aZida duratman, iZigum, EC. VIII.

Nagar, 40 ;
1087 .... Kijkenalvisayadhipati (9, 11), alidam,

EC. IV. Hg. 55 ;
1087 .... aHdavam (21),MaZdaqavandana (14),

EC. IV. Yd. 2 ;
1087 .... 1 f or I ; balikka, balikam, negal, elu,

elge ; r for I ; erpattu, but I wrongly

used for I in aZaZdu and kavaZdu.

EL XVI. p. '277 ;

1089 .... aZaram, EC. VII. Sk. 298 ;
1092 .... kottaZe (4), KlZkenaramolevura, EC.

IV. Gu. 68 ;
1095 .... aZdu (33), ga/deya (46), gaZdeyam

166), rnaZikondavarii (/ for r), EC.

I. 57 ;

1098 .... 1: nega/ (5, 8, 23), iZdapan (29) ; r for

Z; kirtt (3), erttaruvarh (28),
arkkarim (29), marppa- (67) ; \ for
/: C6|a (7 & 9), negaldda (14),
pogajverh (46) ; wrong in adda (4),
kavaZdu (16) El. XV. p. 348 ;

1099 .... tna&e, EC. V. Bl. 200 ;

12th Century:

1100 .... fZdu, agaZ, Cola, aZutiva, EC. XI. Dg.

35
1100 .... kiZittu, negaZdan, pogaZadavanilla,

taZkaisuvinegarh, EC. V. AK. 102 ;
1100 .... negaldu (16), pogale negaldan (36),

EC. II.

1102 .... tuZidu, aZkarim, aZida, El. XVI, p. 31 ;
1102 .... I is changed to 1 throughout, El.

XVI. p. 32 ;

80

1103 .... eZge, noZpade, negaZdam, EG. VIII.

Tirthahalli, 19'2 ;

1104 .... negardiB vararyaaarh (35), negard-

dain ' 30), nega/da (31), negildavarol
am (10), Belvala- munuru Pulige^e
MumiZu (14), 1104. Yerpattara (-50).
EC. VII. SK. 131;

1107 .... taZtu (13), EC. IV. Hg. 79 ;

1107 .... pogalvudu (18), EL XVII, p. 196.
iZdu (16), irddu (14). 1 in the rest,
El. XIII. p. 12 ;

1110 .... aZida papi pasugalanaZidamtiraveZ-
kurh, aZigum, iZigum, El. XV. 2 7 :

1110 .... negaZdam (*2), negaZd (3), negaZda (4,
13, 16), iZda (-57), aZd (36); but
aldam (3), pogalute (20), pogalc 33),
pogalva (42), alida (46), veZkuin
(47), iligu (47 , nela-val, (45), El.
XV. p. 26. (Mutgi).

1112 .... Z: negaZcla (25), I wrongly used in
prabaZa (10). a/dan (9, 23), 1 for Z
in ilid a 37 , negalalu (68), baliya
(78); r for Z in ervvar -7), erpatt
(15), negardda (23, 31), irZdu (26),
ir/dar (38), irZdudu (CO), torttu
(30), negarZda (46), verkkuv (63),
El. XIII. p. 36, (Ittagi);

1112 .... podaZda, uegaZte, negaZda, toZtu, El.

XIII. p. 41;

1113-4 .... Z in negaZda (20, 25, 34) ; negardda
(4, 11) EL XV. p. 105.

1113 .... alidam (10), ponnarakondu manna-

rakottam (5) EC. III. Nj. 44 ;
1113 .... negardda (69) EC. II. 126;

81

1117 .... eZdu, EC. V. Bl. 16, negaZdaih (24)
EC. IV. Ch. 83 ;

1121 .... irddu for iZdu (-21) ; All 1 in the rest.

El. XIX. p. 191 ;

1122 .... nijakhaZgabajade; khaZgadevate ; po

gate, negaZda, noZke, podaZda,
noZkatti, noZpode, EC. V. Hn.
116; "

1123 .... pogaZaliuitu, I. Ant. XIV. p. 15 ;

aZgum ;

1123 .... alidavariige (52) ; kirttikkifor kiZtikki

(21), EC. II. 132 ;

1124 .... I > 1 : kiilam (14), belpa (16), alida-

vargge (27), 0/-koti (28), / > r :
gardde (-2-2) El. XVII. p. 117 ;

1125 .... pogaZte, El. XIII p. 301;

1125 .... Z in negaZdarn (47) ; r for Z in negardda
(15, 1.6, 34, 64, 5S, 60, 66), ncgart-
tcyam (1^), negarttc (3 1 :, 65, 87)
norppadu (43) ; pogartteyam (72)
gardde (113) Between vowels it >L
El. XIII. p. 298 ;

11'25 .... Z in nega/dam (18), pogaZda (19),
r in verkkuih (24), torttu (3O) ; \ in
all the rest. El. XIII. p. 317 ;

1128 .... alidavarii (2), EC. III. My. lo,

artthijanakaZpakujamgc. EC. III.
Nj. 194;

1129 .... eveZve (26), khaZgahatige (28) EC.

II. 397 ;

1130 .... peZSvogaZdapudu EC. VI Chicka-

inagalur 137 ;
1 135 .... Talakadu (12), berddaleyum (39 1 EC.

II. 384 ;
1135 .... no Z, all !, alida, El. XIX. p. 30;

G. O. I. 6

82

1136 .... eZge, negafto, pogaZte, EC. V. Bl.

17;
1138 .... pumaZe EC. V. Bl. 202;

1142 ... no 1. 1 in ali, eli ; r in ercchasirada

(12) 'El. XIX p. 35;

1143 .... tallaZise for tallanise Cohielan, EC.

XI. Dg. 85;

1145 . koZmidulim. EC. VIII. Sb. 138;
1145 .... uegalda (52), negajdaln (52), negal-

dirdda (53), all iii pootry. EC. IV.

Ng. 76 ;

1147 .... I as r in iiegarddauri. In the rest all

1. El. XVI. p. 44.

1148 .... alidam (19), honnaZakottu (18) e/ata-

leya (20), palaraZdu (7) EC. III.
NJ. 110; 115. kiZtn, negaZdan,
Bijapurs' asana (S. P. M. p. 284);

1152 .... I > r in Kirtt and negarddam ; in

the rest 1. El. XVI. p. 36 ;

1153 .... pogaJal, aZidar, El. XVI. p. 37 ;
1155 .... e^ge, suZigurul, EC. V. Hassan, 57 ;

1159 .... alalisc negal.darii (7), po^tugalevam,

EC. II. 345.

1160 .... pogaZe, negaZdal, EC. V. Hassan,

72;
1162 .... miZtuvatti. Bom. Br. R.A.S. XL

222;
1162 No /. But r in negardda (11) and 1 in

hala, bilgum ; EL XVII. p. 208 ; r.

erttamdam, negardda. 1. balaldu,

bllguiii. EL XVII. p. 212 ;
1162 .... I in negaZda ; r for I in negarddaiu

(25), norppode, (24) ; 1 for Z in pel

(15), elaneya (14), el (43). EL

XVII. p. 189 ;

83

1165 .... Intone. EC. V. Hassan 76 ;

1168 .... maZge, iiegalte, perce, EC. VII. Sk.

92;

1169 .... irkuZigoZvudu, pel. I. A. Ix. p.

97;

1170 .... naZprabhu, nogaZda, uZidu, EC. VIII.

Sb. 345 ;

1172 .... I in Co/ana ('2t), but wrongly used for

1 in baZasida (31), negardaZu (37),
taiimole (44) ; ainnaZe (48), koZa-
gada (59), all (91) ; I > r in
negardaru (9, 11, 12, 18, 35, 82),
iiorppade (20, 49), negardaZu (37),
I replaced by 1 in other words.
El. XV.^Madagihal;

1173 .... I never occurs in Kan. words; but

I wrongly used in MahakaZa
(16), dhavaZa (28), kuZa (1) and
kaiuaZa (27). El. XIV. Gaca-
rualla.

1173 .... 1 for Z. No. Z at all. pogal, negali, ali,

EL XII. p. 336 ;

1174 .... pombalegal, suZi, EC. VII. 8k.

236;

1177 .... neZal, baZikke, EC. III. Ng. 70;
Ii79 .... Z > 1 in kilt (18), negal ; Z > r in

ervvarurii (26), arvvu (30), negard-

da (39), r p ~> pp in eppattumarii

(56), EJ. XIX. p. 226 ;
1181 .... poravoZal El. XIV. 279 ;

1181 .... negaldal (21 and 53), Cola (34), EC.

II. 327 ;

1182 .... niraZkeyilla, EC. V. Bl. 137 :

1199 .... negaZda (25), taZtu (19), EC. IV.
Ng. 47 ;

6*

84

13th Century

1200 .... belkum for be/kuiii (78), balikkam for

balika. El. V. p. 237;
Iv03 .... alidaih EC. VII. Sh. 88 ;
1204 .... no / at all. EL XIII, p. 1 G ;
1-206 .... ajihi, EC. II. 333;
1-211 .... ajihidavaii), EC. IV. Hg. 25 ;
1218 .... negalda, (25, 43), nelal (16 & 17).

EC. VII. Sh. 5;
1218 .... kalaihkarcci for-kafci. EC. IV. Ng,

29 ;

1224 .... pannera? sasiram. EC. XI. Dg. 25;
1227 .... no/pode, EC. V. Bl. 151;
1242 .... nega/dai, EC. III. K. p. 70;

1247 .... alarvale EC. VII. HI. 55 ;

1248 .... aZtiyiiii, RC. XI. Pavagada.

1265 .... iio/,podam, hoga/alko, EC. VIII. Sg.

140;

1267 .... maZke, EC. V. AK. 8 ;
1270 .... alivu f35), EC. IV. Ng. 49 ;
1276 .... ajipidavaihge (15), EC. IV. Cb. 142;
J278 .... gadde, bcddalu (32) EC. II. 347;
1279 .... Saluva nodidanu, EC. V. Bl. 133 ;

alupidadaih (17) EC. IV. Ch. 17;

eZdu, kiZtu, EC. V. Bl. 92;
1-280 .... gadde beddalu (17), EC. IV. Ch.91 ;

1286 .... kha/gocldhuradharavariyol.

1287 .... alihidava (8) EC. II. 407. EC. V.

AK. 9;

1'291 .... alupitaiiidavanu (3) EC. VII. Sh.
78; alidavaihge EC. IV. gu. 72;

1292 .... alupidavam (20) EC. VII Sh. 72 ;

1293 .... alipidavam, EC. IV. HS. 93 ;
1295 .... balisahita, EC. IV. Ch. 44 ;

85

14th Century:

1300
1317
1319
1320
1322
1327
1338
1360
1388
1390

L390
1390

1397
1397

15th Century

1400
1403

1-108
1413
1415
1442
1465
1484

16th Century :

1500
1544

, alidavam EC. IV. Eg. 23 ;
alihida (26) EC. IV. Ch. 116 ;
alupidavaru (11) EC. VII. HI. 117 ;
alidade (29) EC. III. Md. 74 ;
kelake (13) EC. IV. Kp. 44 ;
Cola (4) EC. IV. Hg. 98.
gacldobeddalu (17) EC. IV. Hs. 82 ;
gaddeyakelago (14) EC. III. Sr. 87 ;
poga/dapem EC. V11I. Sb. 146;
alupidavaiii (31), olelujalmada (33),

K'J. VII. HL. 6;
alupidam (18) EC. VII. SK. 313;
Ka/addiiiayakage (19), huniseda/u

('25), NadudaZasinahalli (7) EC. I.

39;

bi/dar uZida, EC. V. Bl. 3 ;
alipidavaru (19) EC. IV. HS. 46;

alupidavaru, EC. VII. Sh. 11.
alidavanu (34),candrarkaruMhavare-

guih (39), EC. 111. Ch. 45;
evoga/vonarii (KC. Vlil. sb. 261);
algum(64) EC. VII. Sh. 30;
no/podarii, EC- VIII. Sb. 329;
negajlevadeda (4) EC. VII. Sk. 240;
no/pen,, EC. VIII. Sb. 330;
alihidavaru, EC. IV. Ch. 127 ;

alupidavaru (8), EC. II. 340.
all 1 except for mu2u (29), muZu (44),
EC. 1. xu.

86

Consonant Groups.

The consonant groups are the result of (1) the
final const, of one word coming in contact with the
initial consonant of a suffix; ('2) long consonants in
suffixes ; and (3) consonant groups in Iws. These
consonant groups are all in the terminatiorial
element. The consonant groups after short vowels
are more numerous than those after long vowels.

In N. K. most of the consonant groups after short
vowels are retained ; preconsonantal nasal disappears
in the termination ; -r and -I with a stop after a short
vowel are assimilated to the stop except in the case
of those after long vowels.

The Treatment of Consonant- groups in N. K.

I Nasal -f- stop.

A. Nasal + const, in the body of a word.
These are in proper names. Their origin is not known.
They are retained in N. K. Andugi, Kajantur,
Sindera.

B. The stop is the initial of a suffix.

This group is retained in N. K. only (1) if the
nasal is preceded by a short vowel and ( k 2) if the
nasal is

(a) a part of the root : aihte, imbu, entu, endu,
timgal ; nianju of. mamku. or

(b} the remnant of the assimilation of the final
consonant of the root and the initial of the suffix :
konda, (prob. < * kol-nta) ' korida, tandu, Vandu,
bandu, sandu, Sandan

1. See Tense-Suftix in the Past Tense infra.

87

I. Nasal -f Stop.

1. The nasal, if it is only a part of the termi-
nation, disappears after a short vowel: K

O.K. N.K.

kodarhge kodage from kodu ' to give.'

2. The nasal, if it is only a part of the suffix
after a short vowel, disappears :

O.K. N. K.

tanku (cf tankade) 1 taku.

3. The nasal + consonant after a long vowel
disappears in any position :

O.K. N.K.

nompi nohi.

In nompi, the root is given as non. T. nompu ;
riflmbu; M. nompu; Te. nomu.

The following with nasal + stop (suffix) are
replaced in N.K. hy new formations or words:
O.K. N.K.

un-voruih ummvaru, colloq. uiiiboru.

antu, intu, entu Jidge, lilge, lilge

neva en nu vaf (emba)

The following are obsolete in N.K. nonta, nontu.
II I + stop.

(A) 1 + k, g, v. Where k, g and v are initials
of suftixes : all the groups have been replaced by new
formations in N.K. (by the addition of -u to the root),
O.K. ' N.K.

a,\-kalo ah/-ku ' to fear '

al-g &\-ike cf. atida.

kolvonttm ]iQ\\u,-vavanu

cf. koluvorum colloq, kollo vanu.

1. Probably tanku is a mistake for tfuiku, probably ta-nku,
since -nku- is the suffix of the verbal noun as in musuftku beside
musuru and muccu.

88

(B) 1 + g, m. Where g, m. are the initials of
the second word in a word group. There is no change
in N.K.

O.K. N.K.

velgola Belgola u

velinada belmada

III 1 + stop

A. 1 + g, v, t, where g, v, t, are the initials of
suffixes.

These are replaced in N.K.
O.K. N.K.

s&l-ge sallaK

$&l-va-vol saZZt/va hdge

salvon lioguvavanu

colloq. bogovanu.
nal-ta uiil-me

B. 1 + t, in. Where t, in. are initials of the
second word in a' word group.

There is no change.

O.K. N.K.

nal-tapa naltapa (oftenoltapa)

kal-rnano kalmane.

IV y + d, v. where d, v, arc the initials of suffixes :

A. O.K. y + d appears as -d- in N.K. in the
only instance :

O.K. N.K.

aydan adanu.

B. The remaining words with O.K. y + d or
y + v are replaced in N.K. :

(b) The following with y + d and y + v
groups, have been replaced by new words :
eydappaduvar replaced by honduttare

(active)

1. In some inscriptions Beluguja is found, but now also
the form in use in Mysore is Belgola.

89

eydi

eydidan

eydidar

eydidor

eyde

kcydu

geydu

keyvon !

keyvor

geyvalli

V r + stop

r + consonant,

kodalpaduttade

(passive

hogu ' to go '

madu.

But geyyuvanu (colloq.
geyyovanu) restricted to 'he w^ho
works ' on a farm, and keyyu
restricted to ' to join sexually.'

where the consonant is the

initial of a suffix or of a separate word :
* u If the -r is preceded by a short vowel,

the -r

is assimilated to the consonant following :

(1) r -f- consonantal suffix :
O.K.
erddapam M,K. eddapam (replaced in

N.K. by eluttane)
adarppu N.K. adapu

orvvan M.K. orbban, obban.

IN.K. obbanu, colloq. obba, oba.

1. Even when -r is preceded by a short vowel, -r is not
assimilated to the const, following, but is replaced by new

words.

O.K.

negartte

varppu
sasirvvar

N.K.

Iws : yas' assu, kirtti.

Nw : hesaru.

baiuhu.

savirajana

sfiviramandi

But if -r before the consonant is a suffix and the following
consonant is the initial of another suffix, there is no assimilation
of -r to the following const, but there is replacement by a new
form.

O.K. N.K.

ahit-ar-kkal ahit-aru-galu.

malakar-ar-gge malakar-ar-ige.

90

(2) -r of a word + the initial consonant of a
word.

O.K. N.K.

perggoravam heggorava.

perjedi hejjede

irpattu ippattu

Namiliirvvarasamgha Naviluravarasamgha

(3) When -r is preceded by a long vowel, -r is
not assimilated

O.K. N.K.

parvvar haruvaru

VI I 4- const.

/ preceded by short vowel > r, which is later
assimilated to the const, following:
O.K M.K. N.K.

e/tu ertu ettu

eZpattu erpattu eppattu

kiZga kirgga kigga

kiZtu kirttu kittu

gaZde garde gadde

paZcu parccu paccu

peZcu [ perccu heccu

ada/de adardde

But after long vowels, a short vowel is developed
between the I and the consonant. l

1. iMu M.K, ilidu. N.K. ill * fco descend' and e}e 'to
drag '

But there is an O.K. form ll with a long i-.
Probably there is no assimilation because of this
long vowel.

otu -tu replaced by M.K. -ittu. (cf. oliittu, ballittu) and

by N.K. -eyadu, olleyadu.

-I after a long vowel replaced by nadu in M.K. &
N.K. N.K. nadige.

91

APPENDIX I.

A few examples from the later inscriptions to
show the assimilation of r and I to the following con-
sonant are given here :

895

10th Century:
907

925
935

950

978

982

1.1th Century
1000
1019

1033
1057
1060
1063

1076
1079

orkkanduga (12). ikkade (14) EC.
III. "Md. 13 ;

orkkulatupparnum (1'2), ikki (9),

pannirkkulemiriyurh (12), idarkke

(14), EC. Ill Md. 14 ;

irkkandugada (4) EC. IV. Y1 . 25 ;

gaZde (4), irppattu (13), EC. VII. Sk.

322 ;
adarkke (11), irkkandugaui (12), irdu

(4), EC. III. Md/41 ;
. adarkke (12), e/padimbar (14), orbban
(16), orbba (18), perggadura EC.
1.4;

. irppar (69), orggenkol (97), orvvane
(83), barkkum (144) EC. II. 133 ;
irppudu (34), orbam (29) EC. II.
134;

. kalamtiZdi (12) E-C. I. 5;

. gardde (29), gadde (28), parbbi (14,

18), urbbi (17), arddidudu (17) EC.

VII. Sk. 125;

. irpatteradu EC. IV. Hg. 17.
. parvvi EC. IV. Hg. 18;
. gadde (9) EC. VII. 8h. 6;
. garde, gadde, berdale, beddale, EC.

VII. Ci. 18 ;

. berddale, perggade, EC. VII. HI. 14;
. perggade, EC. IV. Hg. 56 ;

92

1085
1089

12th Century :
1104

1113
1117

1 123

1138

1139
J175
1176

.... irppattu, gaZde (56), beMale (56)
perggade (42) EC. VII. Sh. 10.

.... garddeyuih (8), berddaleyum (9) EC.
VII. Sk. 298.

pergatta (47), yerpattu (50), gardde-

yarii (52), kalamkarcci (53), irdda

(55) EC. VII. Sk. 131 ;
killu EC. III. Nj. 44 ;
The assimilation is more pronounced

in the description of boundaries

than in verse. Gradde, beddale,

See EC. IV. Ch. 83.
kirttikki (28), bidurddu (4), irpinam

(24), enisirddu (41), agirppudu (32).

EC. II. 132 ;
inagucida for magu/cida (34) EC. IV,

Hg. 50.

Kabbappunadol 77) KG. II. 141;
maguZci, EC. IV. HS. 112;
eppattarolage (18) EC. I. 33 ;

i3th Century

1217
1218
1284

.... illirddu, EC. II. 170 ;

.... ibbara, EC. VII. Sh. 5;

.... Balligrameya, EC. VII. Sk. 140-

1284;
1290 .:.. illadirddade (4), heggade (10), EC.

I. 52;
1296 ... biddaim (8), neradirddu (12), gadde

(10), EC. I. 45.

By the end of the 13th century, the assimilation
of r and I to the following consonant was an accomp-
lished fact though in poetry the unassiinilated forms

93

were found. In the descriptions of boundaries which
are in prose, no r + consonant or / + consonant are
found after the 13th century.

In K.I1.M. the earliest Kanarese work published
the r + consonant and / -f- consonant are found.,
irddem (I. 60), barddumku (I. 72';. korbbutta (I. 66),
karccidode (II. 69). noredirddu (II. 125), embudarkke
(III. 67), perccal (III. 150), baWal (II. 36).

In K.V.V. and K. 13.13. (1045), unassimilated forms
are very common, e.g., ivarke, orvane, barpparn (212),
irppam (212)

But S.M.D. (1260) reflects the real state of the
language. There seems to have been some doubt
whether certain words should have r + consonant or
a long consonant.

Kes'iraja. the author, of this points out that the
list of words in Sutras 36-40 are to be pronounced
with r and with / ; clearly indicating that the r and
the I had been assimilated to the following consonant
in colloquial speech and that, in writing, confusion
had set in regarding the use of words with r or
/ + consonant. As he did in the case of /, he gives
the list of words where r or / -f- consonant are to be
used. This corroborates our inference.

Further, the change in the pronunciation of these
words is rioted by him in his description of the
fleeting double consonants (Sutras 36-40 and sutras
59 & 60). In these sutras, the s'ithilatva or the slack
pronunciation of double consonants (i.e. the 1st syllable
was to be a closed one with a final consonant) is
described. The words given in his list have in N.K.
a new vowel, in between the consonants suggesting
that there was some half vowel or a short vowel in
between the first and the second of the double conson-
ants in the pronunciation of his age. On p. 49

94

(Sutra 36) he gives two or three words which can
have both dvitva and s'ithiladvitva showing the
dialectical variation, or probably the learned and the
colloquial pronunciation. In Sutra 60, he condemns
s'ithiladvitva in consonant groups (r + const.)

It is probable that, in r + consonant, r had become
assimilated to the consonant following and there was
shortening of the long consonant in pronunciation by
Kes'irajVs time. But some poets had recognised this
shortening, though conservative writing had retained
the r + consonant and called it s'ithiladvitva or fleet-
ing double consonant.

The latest grammar, K.S.S., paraphrases S.M.D.
and is not of much help to us.

The inscriptions show that by the end of the
13th century, the assimilation of these consonants
was an accomplished fact, but that, in verse, the
archaic forms were retained.

VI Disappearance of the preconsonantal nasal :

A : Long vowel + nasal + suffix :
925 .... tontadim (7) EC. IV. yl. 25;
935 .... totaman (12) EC. VII. Sk. 194;
950 .... kote EC. III. Md. 41
982 .... nuriiki (51) EC. II. 134 ;

1057 .... tontakhandada ; (24), tonta (33) EC.
IV. Hg. is ;

1063 .... tontamum (23) EC. VII. Ci. 18.

B. Short vowel + nasal + consonant.

In N.K. these words have no nasals at all. Even
in the llth century there was confusion about the
use of the nasal as can be seen from these few
examples.

In K.V.V. & K.B.B. (1045), these nasals are
generally preserved. But by 1260, the age of

95

Kes'iraja, confusion regarding the use of these nasals
had set in and he, therefore, gives in Sutra 36, a list
of words where the nasals are nitya or permanent (or
compulsory); and where the bindu (nasal) is vikalpa
or optional. This optional use of the nasal in some
and the compulsory use of the nasal in the rest indicate
that the nasal was gradually falling out and he wanted
to retain the ancient usages by giving a list. Most
of the words in his compulsory list have lost their
nasals in N.K. (See the list given under c The
Dative Case' infra.)

But Bhattakajamka's grammar, K.S.S., is not
useful to our enquiry as he is more a commentator
on S.M.D. than a grammarian giving a true account
of .the language of the period.

96

LONG CONSONANTS

Long consonants are found between vowels and
after -r in O.K. The intervocalic long consts, appear,
only after short vowels; similarly the r followed by* a
long consonant is preceded by a short vowel except in
one word parvvarunian (in which, moreover, the group
develops differently from the group preceded by a
short vowel).

These long consonants are due to

(a) the suffixes with long consonants ;

( b) the assimilation of : 1 . the final consonant
of the root and the initial consonant of the suffix : 2. r
with the consonant following : and 3. of / with the
consonant following ;

(c) the retention of Pr. Drn. * -nn~, * mm,
* -11, and * -}}' after short vowels in words of
two syllables and before vowels ;

(d) the consonants coming after -r:

(e) the long consonants in Iws.

These long consonants of O.K. are shortened in
Nws, and Lws. alike in N.K, after a short vowel in all
positions. They are retained in emphatic and deli-
berate speech and in conservative writing.

The shortening of long consonants took place
earlier in the termiuational element (See p. 93)

1. The following suflixes have long consonants :
Nws. -kke. anduva/ikke, akkurh

-ittu. ollittu, ballittu. (cp. SMD. 226).
-pp-. badhippa, rrmdippidar.
Lws : -itti- Devedittiyar, s'isittiyar.

2. In the following, the final consonant of the
root and the initial consonant of the suffix are assimi-
lated.

97

Vbs : kettar; 3 ' vittar; kett * nt-ar; vit-* nt
+ ar. sattar 2 *

Participles: Ketta, kottu, pokka, mikkudan,
rnuttidon, rnetti, vittu.

In the passive form, eydappaduvar < eydal
-f- padu + v + ar, -pp- is due ro the assimilation of

-i + P-.

3. In the following, i.e. in r -f* consonant group,
r- is assimilated to the following consonant k- of ku.
ikki < irku -4- i.

4. In I -f consonant, -/ i assimilated to the
following consonant : vittidalli < * virttidalli < viZti-
dalli. N.K. bittidalli (bittida kade). cf. bi/tiyabhattadol
(8). E. C. I. 3. (890).

5. The long consonants 3 ' in the following are
probably due to the retention of the Pr. Kanarese * -n,
* in,*!, and * -1 of words of two syllables, having a short
vowel before these consonants : Exs. unnurum, go
manna, tamrnadigalor, namma ; alii, nilladan, nillavn,
ballittu, ulle, ollittu. In these, probably, Pr. Dm.
had * -nn, -mm, ' -11, and * -11. In K, T, M. and
Te. these final long consonants are shortened 4 when
they are absolutely final or before consonants ; but
before vowels, they are retained only when the vowel
preceding these consonants is short and the words
wherein they appear are of not more than two
syllables.
Pr. Dr. * -nn

K. T. M. Te.

kan, kan kan

kannu (the eye) kannu ka^nu kannu

1. See Past Tense in Grarpmar for the explanation of
these forms.

2. See v Do do

3. See Grammar. , Do do

4. See Siddeswara Varma. " Critical Studies in the

Phonetic Observations of Indian Grammarians." p. 108.

Pr. Dr. * -rtn

K,

T.

M.

pen
pennu (a girl)

pen
pennu

pen
pennu

man
mannu (clay).

man
mannu

man
mannu

-mm-

nammal (our
servant)
-ZZ-

nammal

nammal

kal

kal

kal

kallu (a stone)
pal
pallu (a tooth)
bil

kallu
pal
pallu
vil

kallu
pal
pallu
vil

billu (a bow)

villu

villu

Te.

ul ul ulle

ulle (inside) ulle
mul raul mul

mujlu (a thorn) mullu mullu

But, in absolutely final position,

mana

kallu

kalu

palu

pallu

vilu

villu

mullu
mulu
the Pr.

Dm.* -nn-, * -mm, * -11, * -11 are simplified or
shortened as given in the forms without- u above.
Before consonants, they are found as single conson-
ants :

kan. -n. kankappu, 'a black collyrium applied to
the eye.'

kankuni ; the socket of the eye', kangone ' the
outer corner of the eye f . kandere ' to open the eyes ',
mangode 4 a mud wall'

-1. kalgana * a mill with stones for grinding '.
kalmaZe * a shower of hailstones, '. kalkutiga * a stone-
cutter \ kalnaru 'the American aloe\ palgadi c to

99,

gnash the teeth.' paldudi ' the point of a tooth.'
paldere ' to uncover the teeth.'

-1. rnulkire l the plant Amaranthus spinosus.'
inulgattige 'a knife for cutting thorns/

Tamil and Malay alam :

-n kankatai ' the corner of the eye ', kankat^a
( to blind the eyes by magic ', kankutu ' the socket of
the eye.'

kantittarii ; opinion from sight.' kanpattai ( an
eyelid '. mankattiri ' to form earth, as white ants. 7
rnankinaru "an unwalled well '. raanma/ai ' shower of
sand or dust.'

manmagal ' the earth goddess.' manpar * a strata
of hard earth.'

-1. kalnenju c a stony heart.' kalmaZai, *a shower
of hailstones ' kalvetti ' a stone cutter ', kalvltu 4 a
stonehouse.'

pulvitu 4 a thatched house/

-1. mulvayan 4 an insect that consumes wood/

In Tel. these consonants are used before conso-
nant with -u.

6. In the following the use of long consonants
after -r are found in these inscriptions.

adarppi, erddapam, orvvan, parvvaruman,
Sasirvvar.

A. consonant following -r is written as a long
consonant ; probably the long consonant was divided
between the two syallables in pronunciation in that
period, -r preceding a long consonant is assimilated
to the long consonant if -r comes after a short vowel;
then the long consonant is shortened. O.K. orvvan M,K.
orbban and obban, N.K. obbanu, colloq. obba, when
used independently and for emphasis, otherwise ' oba '.
alloba bandidane ' a certain man has come there.'

r

100

In the case of parvaruman, a vowel is developed
between the r preceded by a long vowel and the double
consonant and it > N.K. haruvaru.

7. The following gives the long consts. in
Lws. :

(1)J plw. with long const* : ayyamgal , kamrnarar,
Janna, bhatta, bhattarakar, marittaman, Valligga-
ineyar.

(2) Slw. without a long consonant, adapted into
Kauarese with a long consonant :

nittadharmmaman < nitya dharmmarnan.
manakka < manavaka. In N.K. these are also
shortened, as batarirhge in these inscriptions shows
that they were already shortened by the 7th
century.

The following are examples of long consts. found
shortened in these inscriptions :

A. NWS. 1. Verbs & Participles:

in the fut. of ( to be ' *" ' to become ' and the past
of : to give ' ' to be ' ida for id'da, ppl of ir ' to be.'

ay * to become ' akkum > akum, > akun ; fut, of
a-gu 4 to become ' appar > appar > apar > apar.

'to give' 'kottarii>kotarh ; kottar>kotar in the

past tense.

(2) Dem. pron , idarke>idakke>idake 1

Lws : appa>apa in S'antapana ; kammara>
kamara ; bhatta >bata ; bhattarar > bhatarar ;
Valliggame >Balagamve.

1. Professor K.L. Turner : ' The Future Stem in Asoka '
B.8.O.S. VI. p. 529.

i Sya > isati in Asoka. nikhamisati, (Dhau)
i Sya > iSati. in Asoka. VacJhiSati (Shabaz)
These are in the termination element JRAS 1927 p 232
Kurumaty (skt) > skt Kurmah.

101

The following examples from later inscriptions
show long consonants as well as shortened long
consonants :

Inscriptions :-

9th Century :

810

888
890
898

10th Century :
900

910
978

982

995

llth Century
1000
1019
1049

1067
1076

12th Century
1104

. nellakki soilage ( 3) EC. III. Nj. 26 ;
. bhatarara (6) EC. I. 2 ;

bhattargge (68) EC. IV. yd. 60 ;

ajutuiuire (4) EC. Ill NJ. 96;

Malliseuabhatarar EC. II. 4 ; -bhatiara

(2, 3, 4 and 5) EC. II. 62; ajutaui

(3) EC. IV. Ch. 141.
sollageye (16) EC. III. Sr. 134 ;
aluttire (8), bhattarakaravara (10),

akkum(17EC.'i. 4;
nurumuvatentenisida (86) EC. II.

183;
Devanan EC. III. 121;

Hancadarmasetti ill) EC. i. 5.
pudontakam EC. VII. Sk. 126;
naudiiveZakkam (34), nandaveZakimge

(27) EC. IV. Gu. 93 ;
ombhatel ombhatumene (2) EC. IV.

Hg. 18";
kalluvesanamadisidara (37), kalu-

vesana madisidaru (20) EC. VII.

HI. 14 ;

Basavananum (33) EC. VII. Sk. 131 ;

102

1120

1148
1175

J178

13th Century
1200

1246

1255

>5
1247

1276
1281

1285
1290

1297

14th Century :
1368

1380
1390

16th Century ;
1517

1544

. umdipidalu EC. II 129 ; 1123. banni-

patane Vannipam EC. II. 132 ;
. nivedya/rtirii EC. III. 110.
. Hulumoradi EC. III. 138;
. HegdeDevayya(10)EC. III. TN.92;

. Biluvidye Kauiam (13) EC. IV. Ch.

204.
. cikkabettake EC. II. 105 ; cikkabet-

takkecca EC. II. 319 ;
. sallabekendu KG. 1.6;
. setti EC. II. 243 , setti EC. II. 243;

setti EC. (3) EC. II. 245 ;
. nellusalaga (55) EC. III. TN. lul.
. innuranu (16), praptigajanu (3) EC.

III. T LI. 106;

Salabekendu EC- I. 7 (See 1255).
Heggade JSakana EC. I. 52. See 925

and 178;
Hegadehalja (18) EC. I. 59 ; rnakali-

mge (12) EC. I. 59.

kapiieyanu brahrnapananu (30) EC.

II. 344 .

Manikadevaru EC. I. 58 ;
Idharmake (27) ; EC. I. 39.

brahruaijanu kapiieyanu (9), idake

(7 and 8) EC. II. My. 5,
Muluganahaliya (71) EC- I. 10.

Anantamati-avagalu(66), kalugela-

sakke (26, 28).

103

Century :

1639 .... balakikki (140), yedakikki (140) EG.

III. NJ. 198; '
1645 .... Haradanahaljiyalu yiha (3) EC. IV.

Ch. 124;
1675 .... Malavaliya (4), Malavajliya (5) EC.

III. Ml. 63 ;

The following roots arid proper names with long
consonants are found :

1. Roots:

kattisu ' to cause to be built '; kattu c to build';
meccu (maccu) ' to approve '; probably from mar-cu,
where -cu is a suffix, cf. pefcu, percu.

**. Proper Names :
(a) Of Persons.

1. Arabhatta (Pkt. bhatta) ; 2. Ujjikkalguru-
vadigal ; 3. ])allaga; 4. Dhannekuttareviguravi ;
5. Nagennan ; 6. Pattiniguruvadigal ; 7. Mellaga-
vasaguruvar ; 8. Vettedeguruvadigal ; 9, Sokka-
gamundar.

(b) Of Places.

1. Alamavalli (probably from alam a banyan
tree, palli-a settlement, or a village); 2. Ullikal
(probably a rolling stone) ; 3. Kittur (kiru, small and
ur a village); 4. Kittere (kiru, small and ere, a lord);
5. Kilja ; 6. Kottara (probably from kotta (given) and-
ara (for ara, charity) ; 7. Kolattur (probably from T.
kolatta. K. Kolada, of the tank and ur, a village); 8.
Thittagapana ; 9. Navajli (probably from na, four
and palli, a village, four villages,) 10. Nirilli (probably

1. Professor K.L. Turner J.R.A.S. 1927 p. 228.

io4

from Nlr, water and illi here) ; 11. Pattini , 12 Vallig-
g&fne, skt. Valligrama ; 18. Vedevalji.

APPENDIX.

The long consonants after short vowels are

shortened in the following exarriples taken from

kavyas, dictionaries and grammars i 1

adapavajja, adapavala 4 one carrying his master's,

betel -pouch '; anna, ana ' an older brother- 7 ;

anittu, anitu ' so much '. annisu, anisil ' to cause

to say ' ; appa, apa, father ; ' a term of respect/

appa, apa* aha * that becomes' ; alii, ali c in that

place'; illi, ili ' here, in this place'; ennike,

enike * counting '; kaiinadaka, kanadaka s a pair

of spectacles ' ; kajlatana, kajatana ' theft ';

kuyyisu, kuyisu c to cause to be cut '; kurittu,

Jsuri^ * that is sharp '; kollu, kolu ' to kill ';

geddalu, gedalu l the white ant ' ; gellu, gelu ' to

win '; cattige, catige l a small earthen pot with

a broad mouth ' ; cikkata, cikta, cigata c a flea ' ;

cokkata, cokta 4 purity ' ; jalladi, jalade 'a sieve ';

mujju, rnulu * a thorn ' ; sattuga, satuga, ; satga

' a ladle of wood '; sallu, salu 4 to enter a place,

. to go V sallisu, salisu 'to cause to enter, to

, deliver'; soilage, solage, solige 4 a measure of

capacity V hallu, halu * a tooth '; hoddike, hodike

4 a cover, a wrapper.'

'J.B.'A. 8, 1927. P, 238.

Consfcs. and vowels of terminations are liable to a develop-
rijrent, difft. from that in the /body of a >vord. Changes are, due to
pjrbntjt^piation bein^ lax and muscular effort is not intense, i.e,
termination behaves as though it were unaccented or not
prominent :-~'

105

1. Loss of syllable.

2. Shortening,
Voicing,
Assimilation,

or complete disappearance of a const.

RV * Madhai>mahe and-dhi>hi. adhve>Pali. avhe. eni
and anain >anusvara and later nasalisation of the vowel asmin
>-s. through-asi. *asya>assa> ;asa>s e.g. coras. -isya>isya,
issi-issi, isi, iha, ihi. -asi. chavasi > hossi.

Result : A. The inflectional system is destroyed, whatever
the number of syllables of the terminations, due to the Phonetic
weakness of the termination element.

B. , Use of the other means of grammatical expression led
to the termination being more lightly stressed and hence to the
most violent phonetic changes in the terminational element.

PART I

B. GRAMMAR

PART I.

B. GRAMMAR.
Nouns.

The nominal stems found in these incriptions
consist of :

1. Substantives not analysable into root and
suffix :

aneya, gen. sg.-elephant.
edeyan, ace. sg.-place.
pulla, gen. sg.-grass.

2. Steins formed from verbal roots by tht addi-
tion of one suffix :

alge-rule, reign, from al-to rule.

3. Sn bstantives formed from :

(a) existing substantival stems :
okkaltanam from okkal-thrashing from

okku-to thrash.

(b) adjectives or attributive words :
nalta (goodness) from nal-good.
oZtu (good, noun) from oZ-good.

4. Substantives formed from the past and future
declinable participles of verbs :

with gender suffixes, if any.

aZidon-he who destroys-from aZida-Dpp. of a/i-

to ruin,
ittodu-that which is given, from itta-Dpp. of 1

-to give.

109

110

kadon-he who protects, from kada-Dpp. of
kay-to protect.

5. Substantives formed from pronominal adjec-
tives by adding gender-suffixes :

per-an ~)

[ anolher person from pera~ the other.
pcZ-an }

6. Substantives formed from Numeral* :
eZapadimbarge-to the seventy people,
sasirvvar-one thousand people.

Bub in the case of Iws. from Skt. the stems are
formed as follows:

1 . words borrowed from Skt. without any change :
kularh, janam, deham, dharaniyul, bhaktiyirh,
Maranam, mohaiii, rajyam, laksyaih.

2. word 8 borrowed from Skt. with modifications :
acari, nisidhige, risyar, sisittiyar.

3. Skt. words in fern, gender, ending in-&, are
adopted into Kanarese, siibstitutiitg -e for d,

hal( from bala,
mariyadeyan from maryyada
vidyullategal from vidyullata.

4. Skt. stems ending in -s drop -s.
inanade from mana (Skt. Manas)
tapam from tapa (Skt. tapas).

5. Skt. -vat (-vanfy stems are borrowed with tJte,
strong form of the stem -vant.

laksanavantar.

6. Substantives derived from the Dpp. of the
causative forms of Skt. roots :

palisidom

7. Past participles of Skt. verbs are used as
substantives :

rajas' ravitam-age.

Ill

Gender.

There are three genders, masculine, feminine and
neuter.

1. Substantives denoting male persons are
masculine ;

2. Substantives denoting females are femine ;

3. All other substantives (denoting animals,
their actions, qualities, etc.,) are neuter.

Masculine. Feminine. Neuter.

arasan, king ( no okkaltana-farming

aZidan, the destroyer < examples, pa/i-blame
kadon, the protector pavu-a snake

sal von, the goer puZu-a worm.

. The masculine in the nom. sg. is either the
simple stem without any suffix or termination, or the
stem with any of the following suffixes to distinguish
gender :

-an, -am, -am, on, orh. in -a sterns only. (K.B.B.
50.)

(a) stems without any suffix or termination :
masculine. Allagunda, aliya, ere, Kamba, Nas-

tappa, maga.

feminine. tapaccale.

neuter. ittodu, oZtu, kere, dhone, pa/i.

(b) stems with suffix :

(These suffixes distinguish the gender of the
stern as masculine) :

masculine. arasan, arasam, a/idorii, a/ivon.

feminine. no examples.

neuter. uligarii, okkaltanarh.

It will be shown under " Declension " that the
suffix -an runs through all the cases of the sg. except
in some cases, the dative and sometimes in the pi.

112

-on is found as the gender suffix in the nom. sg.
(-on<-avan, see -on under u Adjectives ")

The use of -am for -an is due to the use of the
anusvara symbol (see " the nominative case " under
" Declension ").

The use of -am is found only in the case of
Skt. words.:

Kucelarn, Gainabhusitam.

Loan words, when adopted into Kanarese are
regarded as Native Kanarese words in the matter of
gender. The following Iws. are used as neuter,
rnahajanakke, mfivetlumura, devejanam, prajeyutu
(The, same usage is found in later kavyas).

The forms, S'ri Jambunaygir, Devedittiyar',
s'isittiyar show that feminines were formed from the
masculine by suffixing -i and -itti respectively :

drii Jambunaygir from Sri Jambuoayaka (inascj,
guravi from gurava,

Si sittiyar from sisya (masc.)

There is no example of the fern. sg. of a N W.
ia these inscriptions.

The neuter nom. sg. is the stern l ; some stems
ending in -a take -am or am as the nom. sg. ^uffix,
(see neuter nom. pg. under " Declension ").

Nws. neuter.

(a) stem as nom. sg. neuter.
okkaltana.

(b) stem with -am.
uligam, okkaltanam.

Lws. (a) stem without suffix :

1. Here in these inscriptions eltu (a'bull), Kavile (a cow)
puiu (a worm) and pavtt (a snake).

113

masculine : acaryya, Gunakirtti, -prabhu, bhatara,
Megbanandimuni, Sarppaculainani.

feminine : tapaccale.

neuter : nisidhige, pada.
(b) stem with suffix :

rnasculine,-an.

andhan, niravadyan, pujyamanan, munivaran,
Saukhyasthan.

-am.

Kucelarn, Gunabhusitam.

-orh.

palisidorh.

feminine, no examples.

neuter -am.

ayusyam, kulam, tilakam, svarggam.

-avu, atmavaSakramavu, mukhavu.

In the neuter sg., all Skt. Iws. have -am or -am
added to the stem as a general rule.

adigal-" Feet " is neuter when used as an inde-
pendent word. When auffixed to guru- (a teacher),
Guruvadigal (the feet of the guru) neutter in form,
was used as masc. like the Skt. mitram, kajatram
and sribhagavatpadaiah ; Guruvadigal mudippidar-
the teacher ended (his life) ; the -ar of the verb indi-
cates that this Neuter nonr. pi. is used in the sense
of masculine nom. pi.

In the case of devake, and devarke, the word deva
(god) is used in the neuter and the meaning given to
it by Dr. Fleet is " the establishment of the temple/'

The -a {stems in the masculine sg. and in the
neuter sg. take -an- and -ad- [K.B.B. (51) 33>os
Oort?3 (si)] respectively, as suffixes between the stem
and the case-ending. But the -i-, -u and -e stems

G. o. I. 8

114

have no such suffixes. Pronouns adu, idu (neuter)
take-ar-as suffix, but only the glides -y- in -i and -e
stems and -v- in -u stems. Why this differentiation
is made is not known at present.

Number.

There are two Numbers sg. and pi.

The sg. is either the simple stem in the nom. or
the stem with the gender suffix or glide a,nd case-
termination.

(a) simple stem in the sg :

masc. Nws. Allagunda, aliya, ere, kamba,

-a stems: Dallaga, rnaga.

Iws. kamara, Nastappa, Basantakumara, Rama-
singabhatara, Vasantakumara Santivarmma, Srl-
maccitravahana, Srivikramaditya bhataraka, srlvina-
yadityarajasraya prithivlvallabha-jnaharajadhiraja
paramesvarabhatara.

4 stems : Aksayaklrtti, Gunaklrtti, Pallavacari,
Puspasenacari, bhagi, rnuni, saksi, Sarppaculainani,
Yinayadevasenanamainahamuni. *

-u stems : Caritasrinamadheyaprabhu.

Feminine, no examples.

Neuter.

-a sterns : okkaltana.

-i stems : geZi, pa/i.

-u stems : ittodu, oltu, pufa.

Iws.

-i stem : puti.

-e stem ; nisidhige.

115

(b) stems with gender suffix :
Masc. Nws. Lws.

-an arasan -patakan

-am .... Kucelam, (lunabhusi

tain.

-on aZivon

-oin aZidom palisidom

Feminine no examples.

Neuter. Nws. Lws.

-aril okkaltanaih kulam

uligam dosam

-am .... deham

-avu .... atmavasa-

kramavu
mukhavu*

The pi. is formed by the addition of -ar, -ar,
and -gal.

Masculine and feminine stems form their pis. by
suffixing -ar or -ar.

Masc. Nws. Lws.

-ar .... aninditar

Feminine .... Rajnlmatlgantiyar

-ar

Masc. arasar amikkottamar

Feminine .... Devakhantiyar

Sisittiyar
-ar is more ancient than -ar.

Masc. stems ending in -i, -u and -e from plural
by suffixing -gal. (K.B.B. 40).

Masc. Nws. Lws.

-i ,.., bhagi-gal

8*

116

Fern, -e .... -avvegal

-abbegal

All Neuter stems form their plural by suffixing
-gal.

Nws, Lws.

srlsamgariigala.
vidyullategal
vratagal.

There is no differentiation between Nws. and
Lws. in the formation of the plural.

The use of the honorific plural for kings, monks
and nuns is very common and most of the plurals in
rnasc. and fern, are honorific ones : K.B.B. (42.)
SMD. 102.

Lws, Nws.

Masc. kings maharajar arasar.
monks acariyar
guruvar
masenar
nuns Devakantiyar

Slisittiyar.

The formation of the sg. and the pi. is seen in the
declension of Nouns.

A subject in the sg. has often the verb in the pi.
and vice versa, e.g., 3-71, 3-17, 6-18, 24-2 and 50-1,

Declension.

There is only one declension for all steins in all
genders.

There are seven cases : (1) Nominative,

(2) Accusative,

(3) Instrumental,

ii?

(4) Dative,

(5) Genitive,

(6) Locative,

(7) Vocative.

The stems end in -a, -i, -u, -e and consonants.
The study of these stems is taken up case by
case.

The Nominative Case.

There is no case termination for the nom, sg. in all
the three genders [K.B.B. 74 oorroq}FTa5%?a,Qa5D].
Either the stern or the stem with the gender stiffix is
used in the nom. sg. The pi. is formed by suffixing
-ar, . -ar or gal in the Masc. and fern, but -gal in the
neuter. In a few cases, -u is found as the nom. sg.
suffix.

(a) The stem as nom. xg.

-a stems : Masc. Nativq^word*: Allagunda, aliya,
kamba, Dallaga.

Loan words : kamara, Nastappa,

Basantakumara, Bamasingabhatara, Vasanta-

kumara.
S'antivarmma, S'rimatcitravahana, S'rivikra-

maditya-
bhataraka, S'rTvinayadityarajas* rayaprithivi-

vallabha-

maharajadhiraja paramesvarabhatara.
Feminine. No examples.
Neuter. Nws. No examples,

Lws. degula.

-i stems : masc. Nws. no examples.
Lws. Akayakirtti, Pallavacari, Gunaklrtti
Pu^pasenacari, bhagi, muni, saksi, Sarppaeulamani.

118

Feminine. No examples.
Neuter. Nws. geZi, paZi.

LWR. puti, bhumi.
-u steins :
Masc. Nws. No examples.

Lws. Carita' rliiamadheya prabhu.
Fern. No examples.
Neuter. Nws. ittodu, oZtu, pavu, pu/a.

Lws. no examples,
-e stems :
Masc. Nws. ^
and > no examples.

Fern. Lws. )

Neuter. Nws. no examples.

Lws, nisidhige.

But the masc. stems ending in -a are used as
norn. sg. with any one of the following suffixes of
the masculine gender.

-an, -am, -am, -on and oin. K,B*B. 39, 45, 50.
-an seems to have been the original masculine and
neuter suffix for all stems in -a. The reason for this
supposition is the magan "son " (masc.) and maran
" a tree" (neuter) have the same -an, not only in the
singular, but also in the plural Narayanayyamgaju,
masc* (nom), ivelvisayamgalan, neuter (ace.) and in all
the cases. Examples for all the cases are not found in
the inscriptions studied. Later, -an was restricted
to the masculine gender and -am to the neuter, -am
and -am are essentially the same. The form with
-m is used before words beginning with a consonant ;
the forms with -m or -n before words beginning with
a vowel. The only pre-vocalic form in the case of Skt.
Iws, is -m ; -on and 6m are used as suffixes of

119

declinable (relative) past participles of verbs which
are used as adjs. (see " Adjectives ")

-an.

Nw&. arasan 1 , Allagundan, Nagennan.

Livs. Grunasagaradvitiyanamadheyan, Candra-

devacaryyanainan,

Nandisenapravaramimivanin, niahadevan,
Vidruinadhara Santisenamunlsan.

-am.

Lws. Kucelam, Gunabhusitatr^

-aria.

Nws. no example.

Lws. Kundavarmtnarasarh, gtiravarii, perggora-
vam.

The masc. -i, -u and -e stems have no suffix or
termination in the nom, sg.

The use of -m as the termination of the nom. sg.
for all the stems in all the genders 2 by later
grammarians is due to the influence of Skt. Iws. in
the neuter and the interpretation as -m or -n of the
anusvara at the end of a word ; this is seen from the
examples given by them for illustrating the sutras;
maram (SMD 93).

Nom. sg. Fern. No examples.
Neuter.

As stated already, in principle there is no suffix
or termination in the nom. sg. But the following
suffixes -aril, -am and -avu are found in -a stems.
Essentially, all these are different forms of -am,
avu < am -u.

1. Caldwell and Kittel consider that arasan is Iw. from
Skt. and derive it from Skt. raja.

2. K.B.B. 39,45,50; K.V. V. 15 ; SMD. 93 A 105 ; K.S.S. 227.

120

Neuter.

Nom. sg.

-am. Nws. no examples.

Lws. ayusyam, Katavapras

ailam, dharmmani, parijanam,
maranam, laksyarn.

-am. Nws. uligam, okkaltanam.

Lws. dosarh, paramarttham,

svarggam.

Caldwell 1 and Gundert state that -am is an
obsolete demonstrative pronoun meaning ' it ' and
hence -am is not a borrowing from Skt. But
L.V.li. Iyer 2 comes to the conclusion that -am is a
borrowing from Skt. since the use of -am as a
demonstrative is nowhere seen in T., Kan. or in any
of the Dm, languages. But he has not noted the
use of -am in T. and K. in the nom. sg. and the
incorporation of -am in the plural of neuter -a stems
B. g. marangal in T, and K. There is one neuter pi. acc
where -an-gal<am-gal is found ivelvi^ayamgalam.
sf. alampu, the flower of the banyan tree, where -am
is the nom. suffix, used in the gen. sense. It is not
likely that -am, a simple suffix of the neuter used in the
sg. and the pL of neuter -a steins will be borrowed by
9, higly cultivated language like T. or Kan. from Skt.

Nom sg. Neuter-avu.

These two Iws. have -avu as the termination of
the Nom. sg:

atmavasakramavu, mukhavu.

As pointed out already, the Nom. sg. of Neuter
Lws. ending in -a have -m or -am as the suffix.

1. C.D.G. p. 257. ;

, . .g, Ed, Eev. Madras Oct. 1928, p. 6,

121

The use of avu (<ain-u) as the termination resolves
itself ultimately into -am -u. This -u, used only
twice in nominal stems, is generalised as the norn.sg.
case-termination in N. K. and does not appear in any
other case-forms.

ittodan, iravan, mrtyuvaravan, varppin in these
forms -u disappears when the ace. or other case-
termination is affixed. If it were a part of the stem,
this -u would have survived in all the cases. The
fact that the nom. sg. has no case termination,
coupled with the appearance of this -u only in the
nom. sg. leads us to suspect that this -u may have
been a nom. sg. suffix.

This -u is found in the pronouns, personal termi-
nation of verbs and all nouns ending in consonants
in M. K. along with forms without this -u ; in N. K.
it is fully established as the nom. sg. case -termi-
nation of all sterns of both Nws. and Lws. in all
genders and numbers. The addition of this -u has
not modified the meaning or grammatical function of
any of the words to which it is suffixed. Verbal
roots ending in consonants in 0. K. and M. K. have
this -u in N.K. This -u does not appear even
in N. K. before a suffix beginning with a vowel.

This -u is found in T. Mai. Tel. and Tu. also.
Its non-existence in the other dialects and their late
appearance in these dialects show that this -u has a
definite purpose to serve. In many inscriptions it is
written, though not pronounced, on account of the
needs of metre. 1 Even in N.K. colloquial speech, it
is not always pronounced, though it is always written.

1. Dr. L.D. Barnett, E* I. XV. p. 109 ; .Memoirs of A.S.I
No. 13. pp. 11, 12, 14, 16 and 19.

122

The " euphonic " theory put forward by Caldwell 1
and Kittel does not explain the use of -u as nom, sg.
case-termination in N.K. Caldwell himself doubted
whether this -u had not a specialising signification at
first which had now been lost. 2

I think the origin of this -u may be this:
In Kanarese, there are a lar^e number of verbal
roots which ond in consonants. These roots were
used both as verbal roots and nouns.

alar - to open to flower ; a tiower

aZal - to sorrow ; grief

kaval - to branch off ; a branch

kukil - to sing as a cuckoo and a cuckoo

talir - to sprout ; the tender sprouts

of a plant.

mil - to make thread ; thread
pan - to get ripe ; a ripe fruit
pol - to cleave asunder ; a piece
ba/ - to live ; living, life
blZ - to fall ; uncultivated land, a

creeper.

mugul - to shut the eye-lids ; an open-
ing bud.

mul - to be thorny ; a thorn
sidil - to be split ; thunderbolt
sin - to sneeze ; sneezing
sll - to cut asunder ; a portion
Naturally, the use of the verbal root as the 2nd
sg. imperative and as a noun caused some confusion
and difficulty to the Kanarese child. It saw verbal
nouns formed from roots by suffixing -pu and -vu :

1. C.D.G. p. 134. Kg. p. 23 and 25, 27-29.

2. C.D.G. p. 208.

123

-pu : 6pu<6 - to love,

kapu<ka (y) - to protect

torpu<tor - to appear

padepu<pade - to get

marpu<mar - to change

mepu<mey - to graze
-vu: ari-vu<ari - to know

ai-vu<a/i - to ruin

u-vu<u/i - to remain over

era-vu<ere - to pour

kara-vu<kare - to milch

kl-vu<k! - to form pus

tili-vu<tili -to know

tera-vu<tere - to open

nera-vu<nere - to take place

no-vu < no - to pain

pari-vu<pari - to How

pasi-vu<pasi - to be hungry

pa/i-vu<pa/i - to slander

mera-vu<rnere - to shine

sa-vu<sa - to die

suZi-vu<sufi - to turn round

sela-vu<sele - to drag, to pull

Further, verbal nouns were also formed by
sutfixing-udu or -adu ;

kare-v-udu-calling<kare - to call
kui-v-udu-dancing<kuni - to dance
Verbal nouns may be formed from every verbal
root by suffixing -vudu.

Besides these, a large number of nouns in
nom. sg. in Kan, end in -u :
karu - a calf,
pa/u - a forest.

124

- a worm,
pavu - a snake.

Further, the declension of stems ending in a
consonant (the verbal roots ending in a consonant
when used as a noun) was in no way different from
that of the noun ending in -u excepting the dative.

The forms of nouns ending in -u found A. in the
inscriptions and B. in the kavyas are shown in the
following list : To show that the words end in -u, the
stem forms found in the inscriptions are given in the
list marked 0.

A. From the

Date Without suffix.

C. 900 saypimtidem, Me.

38.
974 pempin SB. 59.

1047 ojpirii A. 81. 18, p6.

1068 melpan-avarjisida

Sk. 13.
1071 alip-ambittu Sk. 129

1074 polepim E.I. XVI.

70.
1074 pempara E.I. XVI.

70.

1677 alagam SK. 124.
balpim

ojpim

Inscriptions.

Data With suffix.

0. 950rupinoISB.39.Sh.

47, 35.
C. 950 pempinoj SB. 139

Sh. 47 36.
910olpimgeSB. 139. Sh.

47. 35.
1019 olpina SK. 1-25.

1054 arpinol SK. 1118,
Sh. 47.

1055 pernpina, E.I. XIII.
170.

1062 sobaginol Sh. 47.

1073 arpinesakam SO. 299
3074 kadupimdam E. I.

XVI. 70.

1074 kadupimdam E.I.
XVI. 70

126

Date Without mtfix.
1080 oddindam I.A.X. 127

bisupindam

112 nanjanembarutireE.I.

XIII. 41.
1117 paypam Bl. 58

1121 olpim SB. 128

1122 Munisim Sh. 4
1122 binpimdameHn 116

1155 rupitn HN. 57

1156 sompanaldu HN. 69
1156 rupim ,,

1158 pempim patihitadim

SK. 23.

1158 munisimdarh SK. 18
1160 pempinumeyam Bl.

193.
1162 klZvaraj-imde Dg. 42

1162 peajpanavagam HS.
187.

1163 elamavim banam
SB'. 64.

1169 tnunisimda I. A. IX.
97.

1170 adatimde DU. 32
1177 pempam A.K. 62

1180 bejpiih SB. 71

1181 imb-im SK. 197
1181 olpam

Date With suffix.
1081 binpiihge E.I. XVI.

59.
1081 gunpimge E.I. XVI.

59.
1081 tinpimge E.I. XVI.

59.

f tinpinol

1096 jgunpinol SK. 114.
^ binpinol

C. 1096 arpinabdhi)

Hempinakarani ) SA.
olpinamodal 5 80

1100 todarpinapasam SK.
311.

1103 pempinaj
tinpinol ;

1139 olpinim SB. 141
1149tolbalpinimHN.65

1156 kenapina
1160 rupinol TM. 9
1160 Saranidhigunpinol

DG. 35.

1 1 62 olpinakurpu AK. 172
1164 podarpmol DG. 43
1164 anmina Sc. 277
1169 olpinagaram Kd. 51
arpimgodarpu

126

Date Without suffix. Date With suffix.

0. 1181 olavim Sk. 197 1172 olpiniihdam Kd. 66

1185 perhpirh AK. 127 arivina Kd. 66

kempim 1173 rupinirh HN. 71

sompirii 1174 rupiniriida Sk. 236

imparh 1176 binpimge SB. 66

melpinodavida A.K. 1181 olavinim SK. 197
127.

1185 agaZimBl. 72 1187 dandinagova LA.

X1T. 96.

1186 rupimdam Bl. 175 1191 adatiniiii Kd. 156
sobagirhde

1189 celvarapadevudu 1*203 gunpinirh Kd. 36

E.I. XV. 34. '

1191 blvim Kd. 156 binpinim Kd. 36

nalavirii 1203 olgavumginim Sk.

225.

1198 rupam Sb. 140
saipimda AS. I. 13.

p. 14. '

1203 peiiipim Kd. 36 1204 adatimda HI. 7
1205 alagim TK. 42

alavimda

1201 belakam miguvudu 1215 aligiliviihdimmda

Sb. 28. Sb. 276.

1217 olpim Bl. 136 1219 rupinondatisayam

Ng. 29.

1220 olpaiia Bl. 112. 1220 balpinol Bl. 112

1220 nalavim Ci/72 1223 seramgimge ON.

203.

1230 pempam Ng. 98 1224 kurupina Dg. 25

1233 kadupimdamAK.82 1280 balupinim Dg. 59
1233 pemparU Ck. 31

127

Date Without suffix Date With suffix
1242 Olavim Kp. 76. 1291 doriibimge KP. 10

1254 periipaninneve/verh 1465 pamginole Sb. 330

AK. 108.
1276 Sompampadedu Cn

269.

1-280 nalaviiii Dg. 59
1286 alavim AK. 9
1291 mulisimdam Kp. 10
1371 nalaviriide Nj. 43
1408 odavirii

B. From Kavyas.

KEM. 877 AD.

PB.941 A.D. (Pampabhharata).

PR. 1105 A.D. Pampara-

mayana).

Without suffix.
alipam PB. 4, 55; PB.

14-13.

alapam PR. 1, 100.
anegaduparii PR. .3, 57.
iuisam KRM. II. 46.
imba PR. 1, 29.
imb-am ariyade Pr. 13,

138.

unisam PB. 3, 26.
urvim PR. 4, 16.
eggam PR. 2, 72.
kadampam PB. 10, 87.
kalumbam Pr. 6, 115.
kurupimda PB. 10, 87.
kurpam PR. 2, 59.

With suffix-irt-

anug-in-o} PB. 2, 61.
amber-in-ge PB. 2, 62.
ariv-im-ge PB. I. 24.
ulav-in-ol PB. 1, 24.
ainard-in-a PR. 10, 67.
alamp-in-im KRM. II.

104 ; Pr. 16, 55.
kadamp-in-ol PR. 5, 109.
kalgapin-ol PR. 2, 11.
kapim-ge PB. 8, 90.
celv-im-ge PR. 3, 75.
taJp-in-ol PR. 9, 167.
nacc-in-a PR. 14, 109.
namj-in-a PB. 6, 75.
muyp-in-a PR. 14, 184,

128

Without suffix. With mffix-in-

kedam PR. 9, 109. saypin-im PR. 7, 78 ; 13,

kopp-am PR. 5, 87. 113.

Jarag-aui PR. 5, 20.
padep-am PR. 1, 122.
palik-imda PR. 11, 125.
Cinp-im PR. 1, 107.
Ceragam PR. 10, 131.
rrmtam KRM. III. 201.
muUs-arh KRM. II. 108,

III. 119.

molag-am PR. 9, 32.
sudam PR. 9, 109.
Serag-am PR. 10, 131.

C.

Date.

alavu Sh. 64 1172
arpu On. -248 1133 ; Sh. 64, 1172.
olpu I A. XX. 69 900; Sh. 4, 1122; Sc.

138, 1145.

Sh. 242, 1163;

Hn. 71, 1173.

kaypu E. I. XIII 41 1112 ; Sc. 140, 1198.
gunpu Kd. 51 1169 ; Hn. 53, 1170.
celvu E. I. XV. 34 1189
tanpu Hn. 116 1122 ; Bl. 193, 1160.
telpu Sa. 159 1159
terapu Sc. 140 1198
pempu Sb. 133 982 ; Ng. 76, 1146 ;

Bl. 193, 1160.

Hn. 53, 1170.

129

Date.

podarpu E. I, XV. 329 1028 ;
balpu Ng. 47 1199

riipu Ak. 62 1177 ;

Saypu Ak. 127 1185;

Sc. 140, 1198.

1)G. 25, 1199.
Sc. 140, 1198.

The declension of -u stems and stems with a
final consonant with and without suffix -in- was very
similar :

varavu - an varavan*

baZ - an =baZan.

baZ - a baZa, ba/Z-in-a

batar - ge, = batargge

batar - iih - gc bataririige.

All these forms are found in these inscriptions.
Further, participles of rts ending in -u and of
those ending in a consonant are similar in form
very often :
-u-

turuku

malagu

arucu

Intu

kattu

odu

suttu

odu

kedapu

tarbu

nernmu

tadavu

tlvu

pp-

Const.

PP

taruki

baZ

baZi

malagi
aruci

udir
adar

udiri
adari

inti
katti

plr
kar

plri
kari

odi

sutti

odi

kedapi
tarbi

nemmi

tadavi

tal

tali

tlvi

sll

slli

arasi

por^l

porali

130

-u-

pp.

Const.

pp.

elasu

elasi

urul

- fc - uruli

biru

biri

a/

aZi

eru

e?i

pogaZ

pogaZi

Though there were exceptions, the child found a
large number of examples where this similarity
existed.

Also, the Sandhi forms of words with ~u and rts
with a final consonant resembled very much.

Examples of those forms from the inscriptions
are :
A.D. 980 poriigadamgidndu. E J. XV. 329

1030 pemp-askhalitagunam. Manjarabad 45.

1032 tanip-i. Sorab. 184.

1060 pemp-firjitamaytu. E.I. XV. 87.

1068 melpan-avarjisida. Sk. 13.

1081 terapilladantu. E.I. XVI. 59.

1160 perhp-in umeyam. Belur. 193.

1162 pemp-in-avagarii. Hunsur. 137.

1169 arpiibgodarpolp-in-agaram. Kadur. 51.

1169 inunisimd-irkuligolvudn. I. A. IX. 97.

1183 gunpullare. A.K. 79.

1185 Melpin-odavida.

1208 Celak-arimTguvudu. Sorab 28.

1219 rup-in-ondatis' ayaiii. Ng. 29.

1223 Seramg-im-g-ajan-aneyarii. Cennaraya-

patna.

1224 riip-amadadudu. Dg. 25.

In course of time, the noun-forming suffix -vu
may have become -u by the loss of the initial v- and
rli alone may have been used as the noun-forming

131

suffix as we have instances of such -u in the inscrip-
tions of the next century.

Even in colloquial speech in N. iv. t we have
matimda, etirhda, gumpiiiida < inatu, etu, guihpu.

The child naturally suffixed -u in all those verbal-
roots ending in consonants when used as nouns.
This -u was generalised as a noun-forming suffix at
first. Since the stem was used without any suffix or
ease-termination in the Norn. Sg later on, this -u was
generalised as the noin. case-ending, and therefore
was added like all other case-endings to the sg. and
the pi. The pronouns in the nominative had this -u
suflixed to them. The personal terminations of verbs
are fragments of pronouns and they too have -u in
M.K. and N. K. In N. K. grammars, -u is th^> nom.
case-ending of all stems in both the numbers and in
all the genders.

It is stated that the virama is represented, by u
throughout and pointed instances are of s' rlmatu,
parthivendranu, and pogajaluke (E. I. V. p. 2fi). But
in E. I. IV. p. 350, Fleet says that the virama is
represented by its own proper sign which resembles
an exaggerated superscript r or e in 11 2, 4, 11, 15,
etc. But in mattaru (24), the virama is represented
apparently by u. At any rate the occurrence of
mattar in Sariidhi in L 23 and by itself in 11. 34, 35
suggests that in mattaru, the final mark is intended
to represent the virama and not to be pronounced.
Further, in E.I. IV. Jatimga Ramesvara Hill, he
states that the virama is represented by its own sign
in devar (7) and kottar (12). In E.I. V. p. 9 both
enal and enalu. paduval and paduvalu, mudal and
pudalu (42, 47, 48) are fotmd. In E, I. XI JL p. 168,

132

u is often used, but not always, to denote the
of a vowel after a consonant.

In E. I. XII. p. 355 u is written instead of the
virama. On page 336 of E. I. XII, the notation of
the virama is found in several places in the prose
portion as well as in verse dhatriyolu and more
notably in tatu-kanlyam (11) and bhavetu (48).

Why the virama should come after every word
in an inscription and whether it does so always is not
clear. Tatu is the normal pronunciation of the
vaidikas or orthodox people in Mysore and Dharwar
areas. In fact, all the statements made in the E. I*
clearly indicate that u was gaining a place in literary
composition as it had established itself in colloquial
speech. The people wrote in prose as they pro-
nounced, but in conservative verse, the orthodox;
school did not accept it for some time and pronounced
as in the past. But later, u came to stay in verse as
in prose and is still in common use in N. K.

The original principle of having the simple stem
or the stem with the gender suffix in maso. -a stems,
was kept up in the conservative literary compositions,
though -u was gaming strength in popular speech.
That is why in some of the inscriptions in verse of
the eighth and later centuries, -u is written but not
pronounced, owing to the needs of metrical length.
But in prose, they were written and pronounced.
Conservative writing rarely adopts the change in
popular speech very soon. Poetry was rarely written
in popular speech in ancient times. Linguistic modi-
fications get into poetry after a, fairly long period of
trial in popular speech. Hence tibd$ -u is raio iu the
inscriptions and j$ more and more in

183

in later ones; by the 15th century A.D. -u had
established itself fully in the Kanhada language.
The silence of grammarians on this point is due to
the fact that their grammars were chiefly based on
standard literary wofks which were mostly in verse.
The addition of this -u made the introduction of new
grammatical forms necessary in M. K.

In the pi. the pluralising particle is suffixed to
the stem directly in all the genders. The maec.
and the fern, genders have the same pluralising
particles : -ar, ar and -or in the case of -a sterns ; ar,
ar and -gal in the -i stems ; and -gal in the -u
stems.

.We have reasons to suspect that -ar is the more
ancient of the two. In fact, -ar is derived from -ar.
In 3rd pi. of vetbs we have eridar, vittar in the
earliest inscriptions. In the 3rd sg. we have aydan,
eridSn, sandan. In N.K. present, continuous, -ane
and are are used, baruttane, baruttare. In Tamil, -ar
is the only pluralising particle for the rnasc* and
fern. In Tel. the 3rd pi. of verbs i -am.

During this period, the ar and -ar are found side
by side,
-ar -a stems

masc. aninditar, prathitar.

fern. no examples,

-ai* -a stems.

adhipar, amikkotfcatfcar, AluarasW, Ka&darbar.
mtisampannar, pancamahapatakasamyiikt&r, bhatara-
kar, Man&kkar masenar, Mellaga vasagurtiwar, Vina-
yaditya satyas raya-prithivlvallabhar, sisyar, S*riji-
namarggar, S'rl PogillisehdrakamaharSjar^ B J ribhan-
tarakat, -bhafcarar, Sarwajnabhattarakat^

134

-i stems

masc. nrpamariyar, pararnaprabhavarisiyar,

mauniyacariy ar
fern.

-fir. -a sterns, no example.
-i stems, Anantamatlgantiyar, Rajiilmatl-
gantiyar.

~ar. Pevakhantiyar, Nagamatigantiyar, S'isitti-
yar, Sasimatis'riganliyar, S'rl Jambunaygir (collo-
quial speech N. KJ

< S'rl Jambunayaki-y-ar.

rnasc. -i stems. adhikarigai, pararnakalyana-

bhagigal.

-u stems, sadhugal.
-or. aZidor, aZivor. Kandarbor.

[See " Adjectives."]

Neuter: The pluralising particle of all neuter stems
is -gal.

-i stem. Neuter in form, masc. in meaning.
gal. -guruvadigal. Baladevaguruvadigal, Vette-

deguruvadigal.

Singanaiidiguru va digal. ^

I'hus we get the following in the nom :
Masc. Fern. Neuter.

Sg. pi. sg. pi. sg. pi.

a. stem -ar (nws. - -ar a. stem -gal.

& Iws.) (Iw, -i stem)

-ar (Iws.)

b. stem -gal - -gal b. stem -
an am

- on (Iws. and (Nw. -i - am

om i stems) stems)

135

The Accusative Case.

The terminations are -an, -an, -am, -am, -a and
-a. We have reasons to suspect, as in the case of -ar
(nom. pi.) that -an and -a are more ancient than -an
and -a. During this period, -an and -an, -a and -a,
were used side by side, -a and -a are the same as
-an and -an with the final nasals dropped. Why the
final nasal was dropped is at present unknown.

The conjunctive suffix -urii is added to the case-
endings of all nouns except in the accusative. In
the latter, -urii comes in between the stem and the
case-ending.

e.g., masc. parvvar-urii-an.
neuter, initum-am.

In the nominative sg. -urn is suffixed to the stem
or the gender suffix. The fact that in the ace.
this suffix -um comes after the stem, but before the
case-ending, suggests that the ace. ending is later in
origin. In N. K. colloquial speech, the ace. suffix is
rarely added to the stern in the case of inanimate
objects :

e.g., inane kattisida - he built a house.

house he built.

tindi tinda - he ate the eatables.

eatables he ate.

pustaka ta - bring the book.

bring the book

The ace. termination is added to the nom. sg. of
-a stems with the suffix -an in the masc. and -am in
the neuter. Loan words from Skt. retain the
-am of the neuter nom. sg. ; the ace. ending is affixed
to the -arn, which sometimes becomes -av-.

-an. masc. -a stems.

Iw. uruiuithyatvapramudhasthiratara nrpanan*
fern, no examples.

neater, ajnanas' ailendraman, ipujyasthalarnan)
ghanammarittaman, tapath sayyainaman, duritabhiir
dvrsarnan,
degulaman, dharmmam-an, prasadantaraman, muru-

degularnan,
$' rltaparn-an, svarggagram-an.

-i stems. Iws. giri-y-an, siddhi-y-an. l
-e stems, nws. al-ge-y-an. ede-y-an.

The ace. termination is added to the gender-
suffix -an in the masc. and -am in the neuter of -a
stems so far. In the following examples, an is added
directly to the Norn. sg. (neuter) without any suffix
coming in between :

nws: ittod-an, irav-an, mrtyuvarav-^n.
-a. masc. and fern, no examples,
neuter -a stem.

Iw. valibhagam-a.
-e stems.

pas 7 upatamariyadey-a
purvvamariyadeya.
-an. masc. and fern, no examples.

neuter, -a stem. Iw. kadambamandalam-an.

-bhavyaman.
-e stern.

nw. ane-y-an.
Iw. mariyade-y-an.
stems ending in a consonant - ni r - an.

1. KBM. II. 15. " -an > -an when followed by a word
with an initial vowel, when the stem ends in a nasal, or at the
end of a line in verse.*' This rule is not observed in these.

137

inas. - kaj&ntar-an-atii. (Th6 meaning is

nom. sg.)

fern. - no examples,
neuter - -i stem - Iw. yati-y-am.
-e stem - Iw. viccheyam.
-am. masc. - -i stem, bai-y-am.
fern. no examples,

neuter -a stems.

Iws. Katavaprav-arn,

manavam.

stems ending in a consonant - pul-l-am.
In place of -am, -am and -an, we sometimes have -a,
masc. and fern. no examples,

neuter Nws. pul-l-a.

Iws. dehav-a, rajyav-a, s' asanam-a

s' ailama.

-ava of dShava, rajyava are < am-a.
In pulla and pullam (ace. sg.) the final consonant
of the stem is doubled before the case-ending. Such
doubling takes place only.

(1) if the penultimate vowel is short as in pul,
and not long as in nlr-an ;

(2) if there are no more than two syllables in
the word; and

(3) if the consonant n, n, y, 1 or 1 is followed
by a vowel.

Primitive Drn. perhaps had long consonants ;
they were shortened in the absolute final position,
but preserved before vowels. 1

The bindu is put between the masc. or fern, -a
stems and -gal or -dir ; when such words are neuter,
the insertion of this before -gal is optional ; but when

1. ProfB. L. Turner, JRA.S. 1927, p. 227 VissaratK
Vismarati.

138

they are skt. neuters, it is obligatory. (SMD. 103), .0,

m. amnarhgal, amnamdir.
/. akkarhgal, akkamdir.

n. maramgal, maragal, polarhgal, polagal,
payarhgal, payagal.

Rkt. gunamgal, desamgal, kosamgal, dosakke :
desagal.

The pi. suffix of -a stems may have been * ihgal
in O. K. as it is in T even now, both for masc. and
neuter. In 1260, the deletion of the nasal was
optional in neuter, but compulsory in the case of
rnasc, fern, and skt. neuters. The omission of the nasal
in skt. neuters was dosa " SMD. 103 "; why it is so
only in the case of -a stems is not known ;

*Pr. pull > O. K. pul. but pr. Kan. pulla remained
pulla.

In one instance, Sanyasana vidhi (intu mudip-
pidar), the nom. sg. (stem) is used as ace. sg. This
use of the nom. stem as ace. is common in colloquial
speech in N. K.

Skt. divaih (ace.) is used as ace. in divampokka
(II. 80, 4) and divam eridar.

In the pi. the ace. endings are added to the
pluralising particle,
mas. and fern. - no examples,
neuter - ivalvisayangalan.

In one case, the -an is suffixed to a stem ending
in a numeral : gandhebhaniayd-an.

139

The Instrumental Case.

The terminations are -iru, 4m, -in, -inda, and
-indu. -im and -in are different forms of -im.

The terminations are added without any suffix
between the stem and the case-ending in the -u
stern : varppin and kavadim. But in neuter stems
ending in~a, the suffix -d- comes in between the stem
and the ending. But in -i stems the glide -y- is
found.

Generally, -irn and -irh are used before a con-
sonant while -in is used before a vowel. But the use
of -in before a consonant is not unusual. There is no
principle governing the use of -im and -in as can be
seen from the following :
anuragadin eradu.

aneka s' ila gunarnalegalin sagid oppidon.
imbinin prasadantaraman.
inbinirh (last word in the verse),
kavadirii Katavaprameriye.
gunadirn svadhyayasampaUinirn kare-il-nal-

tapadharmmadirii.
bhaktiyim aksimanakke . . .
mukhadin keydonduta.
yugmadin oppe val, yogadin avarurh.
svarlokadim niscitam.
-im. masc. and fern. - no examples,
neuter - -i stem. - bhakti-y-im.
-irh. masc. and fern. - no examples,
neuter - -a stems. - (-ad-im).
Iws. amalam naltada s' lladim. vratas' Ilanonpi-

gunadim.
svarlokadim.
-in. masc. and fern, no examples.

140

neuter

(a) without any suffix 1
-11 stems. - varppin*

(b) with suffix -d-

-a stetfis Iw. - aradhanayogadin, gunadin, tapadin,
turhgoccabhaktivasadin. Bhadravahu sa CandragU^ta
munfndra yugmadin, vicitra kanaka prajvalyadin,
vidhanamukhadin, samnarggadin.

(c) with double termination (in-in).
-u stems nw. imb-in-in (inbin-in) (1).

(Iw. svadhyayasampattin-imX

In these two cases, there is no suffix, but the
termination -in is repeated twice. Such instances
are found in classical Tamil.
T. malei-y-in-in - from a mountain.

Here, the first -in- has lost its original signifi-
cance and further reduced to a mere suffix. Hence
the instrumental case-ending -in is again added to
make the meaning clear. Of. Suraloka rnahavibha-
vasthanan (40-4).

-inda. masc. and fern, no examples,
neuter. -a stems :

Iw. devada^da-d-inda.
-indu. masc. and fern, no examples,
neuter. -a stem.
Iw. vidhana-d-indu.

As in the accusative, the termination is added to
the pluralising particle,
-in. riiasc. -a stem. Iw. - kumar -ar-in,

fern* no examples,

neuter -e stem. Iw. - anekagu^as' Ilarnale-gal-in.

1. From this, it is clear that the addition of -tr- glide and
of -in- is later in origin, KG. p. 4 (a) and 43 (b) ; CDG. p. 263.
1. CDG. p. 276.

141

The origin of the instrumental ending -ira, Q?
-in is not at present known. Caldwell's statement 1
that it is identical in origin with -in, the suffix of the
Tamil ablative of motion, originally a locative, is not
quite clear. His attempt to show that -inda is
derived from- -irda by citing the Tuda instrumental
suffix -edd does not n seem to be logical. Gundert's
derivation of -iiida from ede - a. place, is not satisfac-
tory 2 ; -im (or-in) is an adverb of time in Kanarese
and its meaning is " from that time, afterwards."
Perhaps this adverb is used as a post-position to
mean " from or by " (instrumental case.)

This -in- is inserted between the nom. sg. and
pi, of -a stems and the terminations of the dative, as
in kalarige, bataringe 3 . Why this is so inserted is
at present unknown.

The Dative Case.

The terminations of the dative are -ke, -k-ke,
-ge, -i-ge.

The termination is in principle -ke. This is
preserved when preceded by I (< d) ; the neuter suffix
-a < ar <ad (this ar-ke subsequently > ak-ke).
Otherwise, when preceded by a vowel, or by -n
(whether radical or suffixal), 1, 1 and r (other than
r < r) it > -ge. masc.

(a) without any suffix - Devereya-ge.

(b) with suffix -an

In the only instance of the dative-termination,
added to the suffix -an, -i is inserted between the

1. CDG. p, 276.

2. CDG. p. 276.

3. SMD. 108. 109. This -in-is used in the old case-ending
in u, u, r, r 6. ou, and nouns with final consts and some,
Adverbs in e insert this-in-befor any termination.

142

inasc. sg. stem kalan and the termination -ke, the
form being kalan-i-ge, as in N.K. But in O.K. and
M.K. kavyas, the form is kalage, kalamge 1 . The -i-
is considered " euphbnic " (whatever that may mean)
and recent by Caldwell 2 and Kittel 3 . The occur-
rence of the form -ige in the earlier 1 inscriptions
shows that it had existed in the language for a long
time before it appeared in literary composition. But,
beside the termination -i-ge of these inscriptions, a
form, kalan-iih-ge appears in the kavyas and batar-
iriige in the inscription of the 7th century which is
taken up for study. It is, therefore, possible that
-arl-i-ge represents an earlier -an-in-ge with an
additional suffix, which appears also in the termina-
tion of the instrumental (see above) and genitive and
locative of u stems. This preconsonantal nasal of
O.K. disappears in M.K. and N.K. as the earliest
disappearance of the preconsonantal nasal in a
termination is quite natural 4 . The reference of
grammarians to the optional or irregular use of the
bindu or anusvara 6 is to the tendency of the
language during the period of transition from O.K. to
M.K. The process of change can be seen from the
following examples :

O.K. M.K. N.K.

adaihgu adariigu or adagu

adegu (to conceal one's self)

eramke crarhke erake

or erake rekke

(the wing of a bird)

1. K.G. p. 48. KBB. 62. SMD. 113. Nrpamge, avamge,
ayyamge cf. 33rt.

2. C.D.G. pp. 280 and 282.

3. K.G. pp. 52 and 56.

4. Prof Turner, J.RA.fc}. 1927, p.

143

O.K.

oraihte

aumku

kadamgu

kusuihbe kusumbe

kusube
kurumbam kurumbam

koctanti
tururhbu

turhku

todanku

daihtu

dumtii

padarhgu

pasunibarh

seramgu

no examples,

M.K.

N.K.

orarhte

orate

orate
aumku

(a spring)
auku

avunku

aniuku
avuku

(to press)

kadamgu

kadaga

(desire)

kusube

(the safflower)

kuruba

(a shepherd)

kodati

(a wooden hammer)

turubu

(a bundle or tuft of hair

on the woman's head)
tugu

(to weigh)
todaku
(obstacle)
da tu

(to cross)
dudu

(to push, to rock)
hadagu
(a ship)
hasube
(a kind of bird with

greenish plumage)
seragu

(either end of a silk cloth
as ^ garment)

144

Neuter suffix -ad-.

Iw. Lanjigesaram-devarke (578 A.D.)
-ar-ke of devarke is < ar - ke. This -ar- appears in
place of -ad- in the oblique cases 1 of all the neuter
demonstrative pronouns in the sg. and the pi. before
a vowel :

ad-ar-im (from or by this, instr.)
ad-ar-a (of this, gen.)

The later grammarians state 1 " A word with
final -ru, which changes to repha, on taking -ge, the
ending of the fourth (dative case), substitutes k. for
the first letter.' 7 In N.K. this -ar- ke > ak-ke by
assimilation. In Tarn, the dative of adu is ad-ar-ku.

The normal ending is -ak-ke ( >ad-ke)
Iw : apuuarbhavakke, devalokakke, naragakke, ramya-
suralokasukhakke, svarggalayakke.
~ke,

In one instance, Ki/ganadevake, in place of -ak
-ke, we have -ke affixed to an -a stem. This shows
the general tendency of Kan. to shorten long con-
sonants, unlike Tarn, and Mai., when circumstances
favoured it, in the last syllable of a word when
preceded by a long vowel and in the terminational
element.

The following list shows that the long consonant
in the last syllable of a word preceded by a long
vowel in T. and M. was simplified in Kanarese :

Tarn. Kanarese.

attain - play .,,. .... ata

utti - food .... .... uta

ott.am (running) .... .... ota

kuttam (gathering) .... .... kflta

I. SMD. 110. 114.
, KSS, 269 and 275 r

145

Tarn. Kanarese.

takku (to touch) .... .... taku

tlttu (to rub) .... .... tldu

tttu (to search) .... .... tedu

nattu (to fix) .... .... natu

mkkal (to separate) .... .... nigu

nottam (sight) .... .... nota

p&ttu (a song) .... .... pa$u

puttu (to yoke) .... .... puclu

vettarn (hunting) .... .... beta

mittal (to strike the springs

of a lute) .... .... mitu

mukku (the nose) .... .... mugu

muttiai (a bundle) .... .... mute

taekku (height) .... .... inegu

vattam { a> slope) .... .... vata

vattam (a street) .... .... vada

s uttu (to crown)

(to wear on the head) .... sudu.

Probably we have here the beginning of this
shortening of -ak-ke to -ake in the termination.
Later grammarians state that this shortening is
optional (vikalpa), pointing to the period of transi-
tion. 1 In modern speech (as opposed to conserva-
ti\ 7 e writing), only -ake is used,
-ge:

In one instance, a neuter -a stem has the termi-
nation of the masc. -ge, viz. } anka is a tatsama and
-ge is added to it. The word anka has another form,
anke ; -e stems take -ge. This anka may, therefore,
be a* mistake for anke ; or an anka (kj ke may have
been influenced by ankege.

1. SMD. 115.

a. o, i. 10

146

-e stems :

Masc. and fern, no examples.
Neuter - edepare-ge ; kalmane-ge.
Consonantal steins :

stems in -r:- masc. and fern, no examples.
Neuter: (1) -ge : palarur-ge.
(2) stems in -d.

As stated above, after steins in -d, -ke remains
unvoiced, i.e., -d-ke > -t-ke > -/-ke. The -ke which
thus involves a change in the last consonant of the
root is subsequently replaced by the later ending
-i-ge (discussed above) which involves no such change,
i.e., M.K. nad-in-ge, N.K. nad-i-ge. This preserva-
tion of the unvoiced quality of the second consonant
in the group, stop + stop, is paralleled by the deve-
lopment of ad-ke (see above). On the other hand, in
the group, original continuant + unvoiced stop, the
stop > voiced, cf. palarur-ge.

In the pi., the ending is added to the pluralising
particle,
masc. -a steins : malakar-ar-gge.

This doubling probably presents an actual pro-
nunciation, the syllable division being -arg-ge.
Hence later grammarians treat this -gge as fleeting
double consonant. 1

In the two forms (as already discussed) -irh- is
inserted before this -ge:

batar-im-ge, KiZganabatar-im-ge.

In N.K., the -ar-i-ge (< -ar-im-ge) forms have
ousted the ar-gge forms entirely.

Fein. No examples.

Neuter No examples.

1. SMD. 115.

147

The Genitive Case.

The terminations are -a and -a. We have reason
to suspect that -a is more ancient than -a (of. -an
and ~ar in the nominative and -an and -an in the
ace.) The author of Kavirajarnarga (9th century
A.D. i.e. 877 A.D.), the earliest of the published works
in ancient Kanarese, states that the -a of gen. may be
lengthened optionally, when many nouns in the gen.
are combined, or at the end of a line in verse. 1 But
the earliest Kanarese grammar 2 says that -a or -a
may be used " yathestam ". The Kanarese grammar
of the 13th century A.D. states that some accept -a
in the gen. for expressing sorrow and excitement. 3
Bhafctakajamka of the 17th century A.D. says that
-a of the gen. may be lengthened optionally/ Kittel
and Caldwell think that " -a is simply a euphoni-
cally lengthened -a. " 5 . The origin of the -a is at
present unknown. The explanations given by these
grammarians arc attempts to get at the origin of -a.

But in these inscriptions, no use of -a for expressing
sorrow or excitement is found. We cannot infer that
the presence of the initial vowel of the next word leads
to the lengthening of this -a, as all the words after
the genitive -a begin with m-, n-, 6- and s-. At the
end of a line, or for purposes of metre, the -a is leng-
thened, some commentators say. But it is not
unreasonable to suppose that in such cases -a is used
and not that -a is lengthened. There is no principle

1. KEM. II, 20.

2. KBB. 67.

3. SMD. 117 and 118.

4. KSS. 255.

5. KG. p. 53, Section 119. CDG. p. 297,

10*

148

governing the distribution of -a and -a in these
inscriptions. As already stated, the origin of this -a
is unknown.

Forms with -a are more in number in these inscrip-
tions than those with -a-

-a a

Mamgallsana (578 A.D.) kavili-y-a (675 A.D.
Andugiya,kadora (675 A.D.) Vallirggameyar-a (685
Amaliyar-a "") A.D.)

Alamvalliyar-a 1*685 A.D. Banavasiya (692 A.D.)
Nlrilliya J Edevo/alnada (692 A.D.)

Vagura ) Saluvugeya (692 A.D.)

Erevadigala ) *' u A ' Um S'antapana '692 A.D.)
and the rest are of about and all the rest are of
700 A.D. about 700 A.D.

In one and the same inscription, e.g., Kp. 37 of
675 and Sk- 154 of 68rv A.D. we find both -a and -a
forms. Of the -a forms, except 15, all the rest are
found in verse and a long vowel or guru is necessary
in that place for purposes of metre.
A-a : masc. I. with suffix,
(a), ivitJi suffix -an Mamgalls-an-a (578 A.D.)
Fern. No examples.

Neuter (a) with suffix -d-. : anekaguna-d-a. Aji-
ganad-a,kare-ilnal-tapa-dharmma-d-a,Kilganesvara-d-
a, giritala-d-a, Thittagapana-d-a, daksinabhaga-d-a,
Naniilurvvara Sanghad-a, naraka-d-a, mana-d-a,
S'ripuranvayaGandhavarmma-namitaS'risamgha-d-a,
S'rinamilur-samgha-d-a, Samgha-d-a, Saddhamma-
d-a, Sirisamgha-d-a.

(b) with suffix-in-:

u-stems : Ka/vapp-in-a, stutyakaZbapp-in-a.
-is found in ?u

As already stated under " The Instrumental
Case " the meaning or origin of this -in- is not at
present known,
-a. II. without any suffix
Maso. & Fern. No examples.
Neuter : Consonantal stems :
-r. Inangur-a,Kittiir-a, Navilur-a, Vagur-a, Vegur-a.

These are the names of places.
-1. ba-a.

III. with glide -y- :
~i steins. Andugi-y-a, Nirilli-y-a, peri-y-a.

B-a.

I. Without any suffix.
Masc. & Fern. No examples.

Neuter. Adeyerenad-a, EdevoZalnad-a, Tarekad-a,
Ko]attur-a Jannalnavilur-a, Jedugur-a, Jeligur-a
Navilur-a, Nimilur-a, Malanur-a, S'rikolattur-a, Srl-
subhanvitanamilur-a.

In one case, of one consonantal stem, pul, the
final consonant is doubled before -a, the gen. form
being " pulla " (see " The Ace. Case " -pulla).

II. with glide -y-.
Masc. Aneseti-y-a.
Fern, no examples.

Neuter -i stems : kavili-y-a, kodakaniy-a, paravari-
y-a, perjedi-y-a, Banavasi-y-a, varddhi-y-a.
-e stems : rnode-y-a, Saluvuge-y-a.

III. with suffix.

Masc. -an: devandev-an-a, S'antapan-a.

Fern. No examples.

Neuter (a) -d : -a stems. : ararnanetaaa-d-a,

aripith-d-a, upamilyasuralokasaukhya-d-a, kalapaka-

d-a, tana-d-a, tuntaka-d-a, Navilur-samgha-d-a, Sarh-

gha-d-a, Sarpp-ad-a, suraloka Saukhya-d-a*

150

(b) -in- : KaZbapp-in-a.

As already stated above, the origin of -in- is at
present unknown.

The suffix -in- which is found in the genitive
cases of stems ending in a consonant or -u is also
found in the dative and the locative in the same
position. In the dative, it is used in -a stems also
after the gender suffix -an-, as in kal-an-i-ge and
batar-irh-gc (see " The Dative Case")- The case-
ending'of the instrumental is in (irh).(SMD. 108 & 109.)
This -in.- is found in Tamil as the genitive caso-
termination as in ponnin-kudam (or gold-vessel).
According to Caldwell 1 . -in was originally the locative
case-sign,-il-here ? a house, later generalised as a pos-
sessive case- sign*. But we have no evidence to show
that this was in Kan. a locative at first.

As for his statement that -in was originally a
gen. ending in Kan arose as in Tamil and MaL but it
ceased to contribute to grammatical expression and
then -a was used as the gen. ending, 3 so far we have
not been able to discover any such gen. form in
Kanarese where -in is used as the case-ending.
That the instrumental ending in Kan. is -in anc|
that -in- is used as a suffix before the case-
ending in the dative, the gen. and the loc. of stems
ending in consonants, -u and sometimes in -a (only
after the masc. or fern, gender suffix in the -a stems),
are all that can be inferred from the facts before us.

Kittel 4 gives in (iiii) as an adverb of time,
meaning " from that time, afterwards " in his

1. C. D. G. P. 294.

2. Do 292.

3. Do 293.

4. K. G. P. 165.

151

grammar. But his dictionary does not give this
expression at all. It is probable that this in (irh) is
an adverb, but used as a post-position in the instru-
mental case.

In the pi., the termination is affixed to the
pluralising particle, as in the other cases :
-a masc.

nw. Alamvalli-y-ar-a, AlavalH-yar-a, goli-y-ar-a,
Ve-devalji-y-ar-a.
Fern. Gunarnatiavve-gal-a.
Neuter, -i sterus: Erevadi-gal-a, Dharmmasenaguru-

vadi-gal-a
-a masc. -a stems :

Nw. . Amali-y~ar-a, Valliggame y-ar-a.
Lw.: kammar-ar-a, dev-ar-a. Polikesiaras-ar-a,
Vis'okabhatar-ar-a, s'runadgaudadev-ar-a,
fem. no examples.

Neuter -a. S'rl Sarhgaiiigal-a.

-i. Rsabhasenaguruvadi-gal-a ,Kalavirgguru-
vadi-gaj-a, tammadigal-a, Pattiniguru-
vadi-gal-a.
Moniguruvadi-gal-a.
-e. vidyullate-gal-a.

There is one form, killuih (also of killa) in
killuiii Nagennan. killum < killa (of killa)- urii (also)
probably.

The Locative Case.

The terminations are

-ul, -ula, -ulle, -ulle, -oj, -alii, -i, -I, *-e and -e
The first form, i.e., -ul, -ula, -ulle, and -ulje are
different forms of -ul. ul-a place, inside.

These -ul, -ulla, -ulle, -ulle, -ol are not used
independently in these inscriptions or in N' K*

VuJ-to be> ol-when it is conjugated. See " olar H
under verbs).

-alii is an adverb of place and means " there ".
It is used independently in O.K., M.K. and N.K. to
mean " in that place " when it is used here as a
post-position.

-i and -I, -e and -e are the same in meaning and
the lengthening of -i and -e to -I and -e is due to
metrical necessity.

There is no principle governing the use of any of
these endings, -ula is used only in the prose in-
scriptions. The rest are used in the verses. -oj. is
more often used before vowels. It is not possible to
state which is the earliest of these endings, -ul seems
to be earlier and -ol is a later development.
5 ul. (E.I. VI. p. 98 ; I.Ant.X. p. 39, No. 2, 11'68)

Masc. no examples

fern, no examples.

neuter : A. with suffix -d- :-
-a stems : Iws. mahadantagr-d-ul. mahaparuta-d-ul,

s'aila-d-ul, Varanas'iva-d-ul.
Nw. vetta-d-ul.

B. with suffix -in- :- *

-u stems. Iw. Ka/vapp-in-ul.

As already stated under the genitive, the origin of
-in- and why it is used in the -u stems are at present
unknown.

C. with glide -y-

-i stems, gati-y-ul, dharaniy-ul (iravan)

D. There is a form Varanasi-ya-1-ul (in
Benares)

This is the only form found. The significance
of -1-is at present unknown.

153

*ula :- The exact significance of the -a in -ula is not,
known. It is probably the gen. of -ul, prithuvl rajyaj
d-ula standing for " of the inside of the kingdom of tl
earth. " If it is the -a of the gen. after -ul, it
mean "of the inside of." The only example
prithuvirajya-d-ula. The word after prithuvlrajyi

ula is kige(ge) (Kp.39).

-ujle.-ulle ul-e. (-1 is doubled).

-e is the particle of emphasis.

ujle-in the inside itself.

All the forms with -ulle are found in the
There is no principle governing the use of

these.

mase. & fern. No examples,
neuter, -a stems. Jaina-su-margga-d-ulle.
nadirastr-d-ulle (II. 84.) parvata-d-ulle
s'risamgha-d-ulle (II. 106*05).
-ulle. The e is due to the needs of metrej
masc. & fern. No examples.
Neuter -u stems, with suffix -in-

Iw. udita S'rika/vapp-in-u{l-e (I]
-ol.

masc. & Fern. No examples.
Neuter -a stems (with -d-)
vana-d-ol, sanyasanamyoga-d-ol.

-i. The origin of this terminaj
Perhaps it may have originated
strative base iv-this or this side,
to prove this. It may be -in-,
final nasal, (E.I.XIII p, 386 and
sonne is omitted at the end of
sonne at the end of verbs ar
inscriptions.

masc. & fern. No examples,
neuter, -a stems (-d-)

1/54

Iws. anekaguna^ila-d-i, Ko]attursamgha-d-i, tirt-
tha-d-i.

nw. nela-d-i.

In the only example in the neuter, Iw: punya-
the-I is due to its position at the end of a line in
e.

-alii.

alii ' there ' in O.K., M.K., and N.K. It is used
in colloquial speech and literary
sitions. This is a post-position suffixed to the
denote the locative,
fein. No examples.
Vittidalli.

and -e are interchanged in the early kavyas,
an ele -earth, iko and eko-lo, behold this !
le that -e, the particle of emphasis was added
ending -i. Since the Madhwas of Mysore
r reduce all - e to -i in colloquial speech,
niani, ane > ani, ane (anna) > ani, tale
, it is possible that the -i and -e forms
tical variations, e is used in place of i
.()), nilise (21), tamge (32) adegain (47)
' 16.

o examples.

a-)

-e, subhamga-d-e.

,ening of -e is due to the needs of
ly one example,
a-d-e (dosam nirasaiii)
oted that all the loc.

-e
me

these

forms
in the sg. and in the neuter.

in

yocative Case.

mple of a Iw. in the feminine,
girl' bale in Kn.n

165

The vocative is formed by the lengthening of
the final vowel or by suffixing -e to the last syllable
or by the use of the simple stem in N.K. Here it
may be the first or the second or both in bale. In
Viparita, -a is lengthened. The needs of metre in
the verse where these are used, require a long vowel
in the final syllable-

Analysis of Case endings.

Masc.
sg. pi.

noin. (a) stem itself -ar
(nw.lw)

(b) stem- -ar
gender suffix (Iws. &
in the case of nws.)
-a stems i.e.,
only:
stem + an
+arn

+om

Fern,
sg. pi.

ar

ar

(Iw. i
stems)

-gal

(nw.

-i stem

& -e

stem)

Neuter.

sg. pi.
(a) stem itself -gal

(b) stem

am
am
avu

ace.

-an -an

-a -an

-am -a

-am

-an

instr.

-in -in

-in-in

im

156

Mftsc. Fern.

Neuter.

dat. -i-ge -ge

-age
-akke

-anke

-ake

gen. -a -a -a

-a -a

-a -a

-a

loc

-ul, -ule,
-ulle -ulle

-ol, -i, -I,

-e, e

voc .... -e

157

THE USE OF CASES.

The Nominative.

The nominative, as already stated, has no
termination.

I. The simple stem or the stem with the gender
suffix in the case of those ending in -a is used as the
subject of a yerb to express the doer of the action,
denoted by the verb or the participle (K. B. B. 74.)
Subject of a verb :

(a) The simple stem : Nastappa gondu kottan
(8-29); Pegurama Suraloka vibhuti eydidar (24).

(b) The stem ivith suffix. Candradevacary-
yanaman nontu tan deham ikki S'ivanile padedan
(12-4).

Subject of a participle :

Carita s'rlnaina dheya prabhu ajnanas' ailendra-
man poZdu, Gandhebha rnaydan metti, saukhyasthan
aydan. (14-1 <& 4). metti <6 po/du express the action
of -prabhu; the noin. denotes the doer of the action.

But the nom. in the case of intransitive verbs,
expresses the agent whose circumstances or condition
are indicated by the intransitive verb.
Verb : Carita s'rinamadheya prabhu saukbyasthan
aydan. Here -prabhu is the nom. * prabhu became
happy/

II. The gender suffix of the nom. is affixed only to
adjectives ending in -a; such an adj. is in the nom.
and qualifies the noun, in the nom. e.g. Carita
s'rinamadheyaprabhu.

Saukhyasthan aydan; Supanditan, ni'tisampan-
nan ; andhan.

III. The nominative is also used as an adverb
e.g., ml, vol, when preceded by the simple stein or

168

the noun in the genitive, e.g., sikhimel, balamel,
manjuvol, teravol.

IV. The simple nominative denoting a period of
time is used in an adverbial sense or in the sense of
the locative: e.g., irppattondudivasam, IreZpattarularh,
ondutiihgaj, mfmitimgal.

The Accusative.

The accusative expresses an object or person on
which the action of the verb falls.
e,(j., katavapram eriye,

svarggagraman eridar,

metti gandhebharnaydan,

S'asanama gondu kottan

The stem, as already mentioned, takes the
ace. ending after the gender suffix in the case of -a
ptcins or after the glide -y- in -i and -e stems and -v
in -u stems. The ace. termination is of a later origin.
The copulative particle -urn is added to case-endings
in all the five cases excepting ace. where it comes
between the stern and the suffix. (Here it is to -be
remembered that this -uihis riot added to the genitive).
The ace. and the nom. seem to have been the same ir^
form at first (SMB. 136). In these inscriptions, the
endings -an, -an and -a are used in almost all forms of
the ace. But this is most artificial. Even in N. K.
colloquial speech, the ace. has no termination, e.g.,
Mane kattida ' he built a house, mane bidduhoyitu, c the
house collapsed/ The norn. is used, in these, but
the meaning is accusative. Further, the use of the
accusative without the case-ending before a verb has
been treated as kriyasamasa or verbal compound by
the later grammarians. There is no necessity for
such composition as the N.K. colloquial speech

169

amply testifies, e.g., mane cennagi kattida. ' he built
the house well.' tindi tumba timda. c he ate too much
of eatables.' In these cases, the adv. comes in between
the object and the verb. Even here the obj. has DO
case termination, further, the noun is used as the
ace. without any change in the case of inanimate
objects, e.g., havu hodeduhaku, "kill the snake " kallu
takko ' take the stone also/ kal kattu- l tie the feet '.
Here we find no -an, -an or -a of the ace. But in the
case of animate beings, the case-endings are added.
e.g., Kamanna kare ' call Rama.' Here -an and -a
are used as gender suffix and case-termination
respectively in the N.K. colloq. speech. But in these
inscriptions also the following nom. forms are some of
those used in the ace. sense :

S'ivanile padedan, Suraloka vibhuti eydidar.
samadhi neredon, iZdal man am. Even in ancient
kavyas, this use of Norn, for the ace. was common
e.g., ellaruiii matariyar, whore matu c words, speech',
is in the ace. though nom. in form.

The dative is used often in place of the ace.:-
svarggagvarnan eridar and svaraggalayakke
oridar (Smd. 136). The ace. is used as the nom. in
Kalantur-an-aih (21-3) probably the -an-am may be a
repetition of the -an-a suffix as in the inst. inb-in-in
&Vibhavasthanan.

The Instrumental.

The instrumentalacase is used to denote. :

(i) The instrument or the means or the man-
ner : inbinin, gunadim, bhaktiyim, yug-
madin, S'lladim ;

(This use of the instrumental may be treated as
a kriyaviseana).

160-

(2) a special mark or quality : tapadin adhikan.
and (3) association : e.g., aneka s'llagunamale galin
sagidu oppidon.

The case endings of the inst. are -im, in, -inda
and -inde. But this instrumental case ending has
become a general suffix of the dative, the gen, and
the loc. e.g., batarimge (dat.), Ka/vappina (gen.)
KaZvappinuj (loc.)

The stems ending in -u and in consonants take
this suffix. From a study of the medieval inscriptions,
it is seen that the use of the -in- suffix in the dative,
the gen. and the loc. are later and that the addition
of the terminations direct to the stem was earlier,
rupol and rupinol, balol and bajinol. Further, even in
an example of the instrumental, inb-in-in, -in is used
as the suffix before the instr. ending -in-. This
suggests that the use of -in- as a suffix had already
begun in the 7th century. The dative kalanige
shows that this -in was already in use in -a stems
also. (See Dative case under " Nouns)."

The Dative.

The dative expresses *

(1) The person or place to whom or which
something is given :

eraduriina/ke, kalanige, Ki/gabataririige, De-
vereyage, malakarargge, Lamjigesararhdevarke.

(2; The place or position towards which one

moves :

naragakke salge, Svarggalayakke eridar.
The dat. is sometimes used in place of the

ace.
e.g., svarggalayakkeridar and svarggagramaneridar,

161 r
N.B -THERE IS NO ABLATIVE FORM.

The Genitive.

The genitive is used to express the relation
(sambandha) of objects or persons :
Qf Persons : guru vadigala s'isya. moni guruvara
s'isya, tammadigala s'isyam.

Of Places : Tarekada, Namilura, Malanura, Vagura,
Velmadada, samghada.
of Objects :- kalapakada, balamel, modeya.

In Pr.K., the nom. was probably used in the gen.
sense. In s'ikhimel and kaZvappabettammel, the gen.
termination is not used, but the nom. expresses the
meaning of the genitive. This is quite common in
N.K. colloq. speech. With reference to animate
and inanimate beings and objects : e-g., animate :
Raman pustaka, Karnale pustaka.

inanimate: Nayitalemelinbutti. the bundle of
foodstuffs on the head of the dog. Nayi is the nom.
form,

Nayibala nettagagolla-" the tail of a dog never
becomes straight,"

objects: Manen?ele giibe kutide. "The owl is
sitting on the top of the house. M Here mane is the
nom. form.

Later grammarians explain this as sasthi tatpuru-
sa compound. But this is explaining a Kanarese form
in the light of the Skt. idiom.

Further, the oblique bases of the 1st pers. and
of the reflexive pronoun are used in these inscriptions
a,s forms in the genitive case :

(1) tan dehara ikkUsacrificing or abandoning
tiis own body.

(2) ayu^yam eu- the length of my life.

G, 0. 1, 11

162

(3) nam Mauniyacariyar-our guru, Mauniya-
cariyar by name.

This use of pronominal oblique bases is found in
Tamil also, e.g., en vl^u ' my house \ en kacu ( my
money/

These lead us to conclude the nom. was used as
the ace. (already stated above) and also as the gen.

The rales on Vibhakti palla^a or thesinter-change
of cases in the later grammars state that the gen,
stands for the nom. e.g., nypanapefe. (S.M.D. 134).
J;E.A.S. 1918 P. 105. This shows that the nom.
and the gen. were interchangeable,

The Locative.

The loc. is used to denote the relation to a place,
such as a mountain, a kingdom, or a holy place.

KaZvappinul, nadirastradulje, parvatadulle, prthi-
virajyaduja, vettadul, VaranasivaduJ, Srlsamghadulle.

The locative is used in the sense of the instru-
mental e.g., S'rlsarhghada punyadi, where it means
punyadirhda, aneka sila gunadi (58-1). There is
reason to suspect that the loc. ending -i or -I in
punyadi is the instr. ending with the loss of the final
nasal as in O.K. urn > N.K. u.

The interchange of the locative and the instru-
mental and the use of the nom. as the locative (see
nom. used as an adv.) and the use of so many termi-
nations and post-positions in the locative clearly show
that the locative is later in origin than the instru-
mental. In later grammars, even the dative and the
genitive are used in place ot the locative, e.g.
cagigalol (loc) ballaham ;
cagigala ballaham ;

163

murudivasakke bamdam
to mean murudivasadol bandam.
All these show that the loc, is a later
development.

The Vocative,

The vocative is used to invite or direct the
attention of the person addressed to one's self or to
another person or object.

The examples in these inscriptions are bale kel-
* Oh, girl !' listen." and Kaliyuga vipanta.

164

ADJECTIVES.

Adjectives in these inscriptions are words
denoting quality or quantity. They are u?ed to qualify
nouns. They do not change in gender, number or
case according to the gender, number or case of the
nouns they qualify. Loan words from Skt. are
used as adjectives ; these take the gender suffix -an
and -ar in the masculine, if they end in -a. Declin-
able participles, numerals and pronouns are used
as adjs.

Adjs. are used attributively and predicatively.
If the adjective is used attributively, the adj.
precedes the noun it qualifies. In the predicative
use, it comes after the noun it qualifies and agrees in
number and gender with its substantive.

In N. K. the adj. used attributively remains
unchanged, whatever the number, the gender or the
case of the noun it qualifies. But, when used pre-
dicatively, it agrees with the substantive it qualifies
in gender and number. The sirne distinction is
preserved in colloquial speech also.

A. Native Kanarese Adjectives.

These are only four in number :-nal, per, vel, ini-
nal-Goo& :- nal giri, nal tapa.

per- big, great :- per goravam : (with -the suffix -cu
per (< peZ) is used as a verb: peZcuge 'may it
increase.')

per before consonants is used as it is. e.g., perg-
goravarh. But before a word or suffix with an initial
vowel, per > per.* The only example is periya -big
(Fleet). But Bice reads it as periya. This
lengthening of the e in per before vowels is founfl iu

165

Tamil also, e.g., per-al, peraZagu, per-arivu, per-i/avu,
per-inpam. Later Kan. Grammarians have noticed
this point: (KBB. 138, KVV. 50; SMD. 180:
KSS. 335 and 336). The reason for this change is
unknown. Probably, per is the original Pr. Kan.
form and per. the later development (cf. -ar &ar. norn.
-an and-an ace).

vel ' white ', Velgola, Velmadada. N.K. has bel
and also bijupu.
ini-khis .- initu (this much)

inibar (these, so many)

There is another OK. adj. o/, but it is not found
as an adj. but in a noun o/tu from ol 'good.'

.nalta goodness ' is a noun derived from the aclj.
nal, ' good', in Naltada. >

B. Loan words from Skt.

Lws. are used as adjs. All these nouns except
one, used as adjs., end in -a and that all of them
except four, have the masc. gender suffix -an in the
sg. and -ar or -ar in the pi., like the substantives in
the nom. sg. and pk

(a) with masc. gender suffix -an : adhikan,
andhan, anavadyan, urusatvan, natasainyatatman,
niravadyan, mtisampannan, pancamahapataka sam-
yuktan, mahatavan, rnahadevan, munipungavan,
vinayacara-prabhavan, srljinamarggan, sadhuga}pu-
jyamaoan, siddhisthan, supanditan, saukhyasthan.

In Telugu 1 . tatsama adjs. are generally nouns-
meaning that they take the gender-suffix. The
examples given in the Telugu grammar end in -a.

1. Telugu Grammar by B. Papayya Sastry (1927) Page 42.

166

In N.K. when an adj. is used predicatively, the
adj. comes after the noun and takes the pronominal
termination of the gender and the number of the
noun it qualifies, Here the following adjs. are used
predicatively.

pancaroaha patakasamyuktan, siddhisthan,
suralokamaha vibhavasthanan, saukhyasthan.

In the other instances, they are presumably used
attributively. The -an and -ar are suffixed to thfcse
loan words, perhaps, on the analogy of the usage in
Skfc. where adjs. take the gonder and the number of
the noun they qualify.

[There is one form, suraloka mahavibhavas-
thanan, where -an is repeated twice, -an-an, as in the
instrumental case of inbinin ; the original -an may
have lost its significance, and then, -an may. have
been added again. This is a solitary example.]

(b) with pi. suffix -ar.

-a stems : ragadvesatamomala vyapagatar, suddhatma-

Saihyoddhakar, svabhavasoundaryya karangar.
-i. stem : paramaprabhavarisiyar.

(c) with pi. suffix-dr.
-a stems : aninditar, prathitar.

All these -ar and -ar forms are in the honorific
plural.

(d) Feminine. No examples.

(e) Neuter.

-a stem : sg. with suffix -d- : anekaguna-d-a.

C. Declinable participles used as Adjs.

(a) Past Participles :

ada, enva, ko^a, konda, pe/da, podeda, m4i-
sdia, sanda.

16?

(6) Future:

iruva, kedisuva.

There are no relative pronouns in Kanarese. To
some of the relative participles, which are adjs. -an,
-on apd -om are suffixed when they are used as sub-
stantives in the masc. sg. and or in the pi.
masc sg. -an :
Nw. nilladan.
masc. sg. -on :

Nws. aZivon, aZidon, ettikoZvon, oppidon, kadon,
keyvon, salvon.

Iw. : Pertvanavaihs' adon.
masc. sg, -orh :

Iw: palisidom.
masc. pi. -or :

Nws. alivor, unvor, kador, koduv6r, ko/vor,
nenevor, palcidor.

According to some, -on and om are essentially the
same as -an and -am of the nom. sg. 1 (See under
nom.) This -on is only a variant of -an according to
Kittel. 2 Caldwell thinks that -an or -on is a contrac-
tion of avan. 1

K. V. Subbaiya 3 explains that the original -an
(3rd sg. termination masc, of verbs) has developed
into -on through the labial final -m and he supports
his statement from the pronunciation of Toda -am as
(O: M.)

According to later grammarians, 4 0. K. final ~a>
-o and the examples given are a vain > avorh;

1. C.D.G. p. 225.

2. K.G. p. 47 " avaih appears also as avom* avana.m appears

also as avonam."

3. DS. Part II, p. 34.

4. SMD. 157*

.168

nudidam>nudidom; padidam>padidom. Butavam<
avavarii, which naturally >. avorh (ava>o).

Since these -on forms are found in the inscrip-
tions of different and distant parts (so far made
available), it is not possible to assume that the -an
and the -on forms are dialectical variations.

The gradual decrease in the number of -on and
the -or forms in the inscriptions and their replace-
ment by -ar and -avar forms can be seen from the
following list:

keyvor (I. Ant. X 61) C. 700 A.D.

kettodu do C. 700

aZivon (E.G. VII. Sk. 45) C. 890

moccidor ( Mandya 41) 949

kofoSn (E.G. Belur 123) 952

ereyorh (E.G. Ill TN. 69) C. 980

puttidom ( do )

alidam (SK. 126, 1'25) 1019

alidavarh (SK. 118, I'll) 1054

alidan (SK. 170, 1'26) 1065

alidavan (SK. 124, 1 '50) 1077

ajidargge (SC. 178, I '26) 1092

pratipalisidargge (SK. 178 L. 24)'

ajiparhge (SK. 94, T38) 1094 *

alidavan (SK. 114, T53) 1096

pratipalisidavan (SK. 114, 1'5J) 1096

alidavam (SK. 87, 1'13) 1131

alidan (SK. 103, T46) 1149

alidavan (SC. 92, 1'46) 1168

paripalisidatarh (SK. 92, 1'44) 1168

alivamge (SK. 105, 1'65) 1193

pratipalisidaibge (SK. 105, 1'64) 1193

The appearance of these -on and -or forms only
up to the llth century A.D. and that, too, with -on

169

and -or suffixed to declinable past or present partici-
ples only, leads us to assume the following :

Pr. Kan. O.K. M.K. N.K.

1.* -an -an -an-(u) -an-u

2.* avan avan avan (u) avaa-u

3.* -avan -on -an -an-u

-an (-u)

(1) Pr. Kan. *-an was O.K. -an, M.K. -an, N.K.

-an.

This -an is used throughout in all the different
stages of the language : aZidan, alidan, alidanu.

(2) Similarly -avan is used : O.K. a/ipidavan,
M.K. alihidavanu, N.K. alisidavanu.

(3) But O.K. -avan was used as -on in the
O.K. period. In M. K. it was replaced by -an, -anu
(No. 1) in M.K. and in N. K. -anu is still in use (by
old people.)

The pronoun avan is again used as gender

suffix.

In colloquial N.K. speech, avan, avanu>-onu.
In the case of pertvanavam6adon<pertvana-
vam 'ada+avan, it is an analogical forma-
tion.

Fern. No examples.

Neuter : -udu is suffixed to relative past participles
in the Neuter to make them adjectival substan-
tives.

ittodu, rnikkudan.

In ittodu, -u- > -0". This change of u to o is
fairly common. The following examples are from the
Dictionaries :

ul>oi to be

uy>oy to carry

170

kuy>koy to pluck

kudu>kodu to give
kulirue>kolime, the furnace of the black-
smith.
pudi>pode to cover.

The following illustrations are from the inscrip-
tions :

unbodu (19) E.G. Ill 8r. 134.
komarasonabhatarar (13) E.G. Ill Sr. 147.
Kovajala-pura (3) E.G. TV Kl. 51.
kuva/ala E.G. VTI Sh. 24.
Bejugulatirtthada (20) E.G. II, 334.
Belgola (M.K.; E.G. II 336 and 347.
Kuduvantaradar E.G. I, 39,

The conditions under which these Nws. and Lws.
change tho -u- to -o- are unknown. Probably this
is a dialectical variation, depending on the openness
of the u pronunciation.

In Capal-illa, Navilurusamghada Mahanantama-
tlgantiyar, capal-illa is an adj. or an adj. phrase. To
say that capal-illa is used in place of capalillada for
the needs of metre is not satisfactory. Cf. il-i in
bahuvrlhi compds.

nanili, Pallili.

il = not. SMD. 186.

kuli-killer<kul.

In Tamil, ilia is used as an adj. illakkudi ' the
poor family ' illar, 4 the poor/ illamai 4 poverty ',
where -rnai is a suffix for forming abstract nouns,
kanarnun (before it has not been seen),
maramgal paruvattal anrippa/a l trees do not
produce fruit except in the season ( where -a
4 not ' is at the end of paZ-a (T.H. Article 112).

171

In the same verse wherein capal-illa occurs,
upamilla is used. All these point to the fact that
ilia was used as a negative adj. to mean ' not, not
having/ So capal-illa-, not having temptations, firm-
minded.

In later kavyas we find -il used as an adj.

Phalavadenil * there is no fruit (effect)'.

Kittel says that ' il is an unusual abbreviation of
ilia-no, is not ; il-a defective verb of which only some
forms of the negative mood are found '

In Kan. the negative suffix is -a of. veleyade
aga, aga, agadu tappade. 1 This -a is suffixed to the
defective vb, il. Hence ilia -no, not, as in T.

In kare-il, we have the same adj. phrase imply-
ing 4 stainless/ Thus we see il and ilia used as adjs.
in these inscriptions.

D. Declinable past or future participles of the verb
"to be " suffixed to substantives or verbal participles :

(a) Declinable future participle . appa - from
Vagu- to become.

(1) anuparnadivya 2 . -(m)- appadu- Here appa
is suffixed to the'substantive armparnadivya. anupama-
divyarnappa is an adj. adu is added to make this an
adj. with two adjectival suffixes ; adu, (neuter 3rd
pronoun), when suffixed to a substantive, makes it an
adj. 3

(2) Instead of ada, agi (having become)
together with the decl. pp. of ir - to be, is used.

bhadramagi i (d) da - that was strong, well-

established.
This usage is still very common in N.K.

L Kgg

2. Kice has inserted this ~ra.

3. C.D.G, p. 290.

(3) iruva - declinable future participle of iru -
to be.

puni-past verbal participle + iruva-puni-iruva -
that have promised.

This usage also is still very common in N.K.
(b) Declinable past participle :

-ada<agu - to become

This -da is put after a verbal past participle :
neredu (pp. of nere-to become perfect or full) -
ada-nereda-that had become perfect.

E. Numeral Adjectives.

(a) Numerals aro placed before substantives
and as adjectives :

irppatondu divasam, ireZpattarulam, eradum
nalke, oihdu tingal, orhdu sanmaraggadin, nurentu
sarhvatsararii, pattupona, pancamahapatakasarii
yuktan, murutingal, miirudegulaman, muvetmurade-
vejanam, sasirakavileyum.

(b) The ordinal, formed from the cardinal by
suffixing -aneya, is used as an adj. in only one exam-
ple : e/aneya (seventh) from eZu-seven.

-aneya<ane-a<an-to say.?

aneya ' when it says.' KittelV remark tfiat
the -a of -aneya is the gen. case-termination and also
the termination suffixed to verbal participles to con-
vert them to relative participles is not very clear.

F. Skt. loan words in the nom. are used as adjec-
tives e.g.

(1) amalarh naltada s'lladim. amalam adj.
qualifies Siladim ofter naltada, but the -am of amalam
is retained probably for metrical length.
1. E.G. p. 169 Eemark 2.

173

(2) In sadhugal pujyamanan, the pluralising
particle -gal is retained in the compd. for metrical
length, though Sadhusampfijya - would have been
quite suitable there.

(3) In ' suravidyavallabhendrassuravara
munibhistutya ka/bappinaraal ' the nom. pi. termina-
tion in ' valiabhendras' and the instrumental termi-
nation in ( suravara munibhih ' are retained to qualify
' stutykaZbappinamel.' This is not usual and shows
that the grammatical usages were subordinated to the
needs of metre by those steeped in Skt. learning.

G. Substantives are used as adj*.

" arddha-visadi and rnuninvratagal - in these,
arddha-, muni- are substantives used as adjs. This is
effected by placing the substantive before the one
which it is to qualify. Caldwell has pointed out
that any substantive denoting quality or relation can
be used as an adj. by being placed before another
substantive - i.e., by mere position alone. 1 Such a
usage is even now very common in colloquial Kana-
rese. e.q,, rnaraditnbu - a wooden pillow.'

In some places, the adjectives are placed not
immediately before the substantive they qualify, but
before another substantive which comes in between
the adj. and the substantive qualified by the adj.
The two -adj. and subst.- are real adjectival phrases:

(1) amita s'ri Samghada punyadi.

(2) capal-illa-Navilura sarhghada Mahananta-
matlgantiyar.

In (1) '* amita" qualifies " punyadi "-unlimited
puriya, and not unlimited s'rlsamgha.

J, Q.P.G. p< 309,

174

In (2) capal-illa refers to u Mahanantamatlgan-
tiyar, and not to Navilurasamghada.

The word that intrudes between the adj. and the
substantive is a noun in the genitive case in both the
examples. It is clear that these unusual forms are
due to the needs of metre.

H. Pronominal Adjectives.

(See p. 178-179.)

Predicative use of adjectives.

As already stated, the adj. comes after the noun
when used predicatively and then it agrees with the
substantive in gender and number.

pancamahapatakasamyuktan, Siddhisthan,
suraloka mahavibhavasthanan, saukhyasthan.

This usage is still very common in literary com-
position and colloquial speech.

Later grammarians say that cases like the follow-
ing are compounds :

kare-il naltapa dharrnmada, nalgiri.

Here there is no Samasabhava or ekarthlbhava.
There is no necessity to assume these to be coin-
pounds, as these adjs. even when placed apart, give
the same meaning.

175

PRONOUNS.

Personal, reflexive, demonstrative and interroga-
tive pronouns are found.

All these are declined in the same way as nouns
and have the same case-terminations in the sg. and
the pi.

The pronouns of the first and the second person
and the reflexive pronouns do not change for gender,
their gender being the same as that of the nouns in
place of which they are used. The oblique bases of
these are- not the same as the nom. in form. The
oblique bases of the first person and the reflexive
pronoun are used as pronouns in the gen. case.

The pronoun of the third person is the same as
for the remote demonstrative pronoun.

The demonstrative pronouns have different forms
in the masc. and the neuter. There is no example
for feminine.

Only the masc. pi. and the neuter nom. sg. of the
interrogative pronoun are found.

A. Personal pronouns.

A. The first person

sg. pi.

norn, an

dat. enage namage

gen. emma, namrna,

nam.

In the sg. both the examples have ~n : an, enage;
in the pi. all the examples have -rn-; namage, emma,
nam, namma. The oblique base in the sg. is en-and
in the pi. it is em. 1 The terminations of verbs is -en
in the sg. and -em in the pi.
1, KBB. 94.

176

The Nom. sg. is an, with s,n initial long back
vowel, but the dative has a short palatal vowel.

There is an initial n- in the dative and the gen.
of the pronoun of the 1st person in the plural:
namage, namrna and nam. The origin of this n- is
unknown. K. V. Subbaiya l and Caldwell tried to
explain the origin of this n-. They are not satis-
factory. The explanation of the prothetic n is in-
troduced by L. V. R. Iyer. 2 But the commentator on
KSS. 3 says that a few famous poets of the Nothern 4
School of Kanarese accept nan- and nam- as the
oblique base of the 1st person, while the southern
school is in favour of en, only, cf. Tel. nenu- I.
This shows that nan is a dialectical variation of en,
and that en of the Southern School, which has
correspondences in other languages is the earlier of
the two.

The earliest Kan. Grammarian Nagavarma 6
States that en, nin, tan, become an, nln and tan in
the nom. The reason for this differentiation is un-
known at present.

I think that an is the Pr. Kan. base of the first
person and that it is the emphatic form, as the nomi-
natives of pronouns are rarely used in colloquial
speech except it be for emphasis.

The dative sg. is enage and the pi. is Namage.
The reason for the use of n- in the pi. form, namage,
is not known at present. In NK., we have nanage in

1. Dravidic studies Part II p. 21 ; CDG. pp. 364-370.

2. I. Ant. 1929.

3. KSS. p, 263 Commentary on S. 288.

4. KVV. III. 1, KRM. II. 51-55 and 101-108 KC. II,

Introdr. p. 16 and p, 27.

5. KPB 92 ; KVV. 6, WD- W6 f 89, 287 f 288,

177

the sg. and namage in the pi.; in colloquial speech,
it is namge and namage.

B. The second person.

There are only two forms and those too in the
nom.

sg. pi.

nln mm.

We have no examples of the other cases.

C. The third person.

As already stated, demonstrative pronouns im-
plying remoteness are used as pronouns of the third
person (see " Demonstrative pronouns ").
The examples are :

sg. pi.

masc. nom. - avar.

gen. - avar-a.

Fern. no examples

sg. pi.

Neuter nom. adu

ace. adan, ada.

dat, adarke, adakke

The reflexive pronoun.

The examples are:

sg. pi.

nom. tan. tarn

dat. tanage tamage

gen. tan.

As in the pronouns of the first person, the nom.
sg. and pi. have the long vowel -a- and the dative
and the gen. have a short -a-. The sg. has -n- and
-n- and the pi. has -m and -m-, like the pronouns of
the 1st and the 2nd persons.

178

The dative sg. and pi. of the 1st and the 2nd
person and of the reflexive pronoun have -a- before
the case-ending, -ge is the dative ending of the
nouns. This -a- between the base and the ending
may have been -an- originally and later -a- as -in->
-i- in Kalanige (see " The Dative Case") <kalan-im-
ge. But nanamge and tanaiige are not found either
in the inscriptions or kavyas. In N. K. the dative
forms are narhge arid tariige in colloquial speech <
nanage and tanage respectively - the literary forms.
The oblique bases of the pronoun of the 1st person
and the. reflexive pronoun are used as pronouns in
the gen. case.

1st. pr. nam mauniyacariyar
Eef. pr. tan dehainikki.

The Demonstrative Pronouns.

Remote and proximate demonstrative pronouns
are found. As already stated, these have two
genders.

(a) The remote demonstrative pronoun :

sg. pi.

rnasc. nom. - avar

gen. - avar-a

fern. No. examples.

Neuter nom. adu

ace. adan, ada

dat. adarkke. adakke.

(b) The proximate demonstrative pronoun:
Masc. norn. ivan

honorific sg. ita

SMD. 150 <idu. 'KBB. 97

179

Fern, no examples.

Neuter, nom. idu no examples

ace. idan, idarh

dat. idake

loc. idarul.

peran and pe/an ' another' is a demonstrative in
the nom. sg. where -an is the masc. gend. suffix.
The stem is pera <peZa (of poragu, cadv.) This is
not in use in N.K., but is replaced by horaginava-.
(SMD. 152).

ellaman is a pronoun meaning all (together,
(SMD. 151.) This is ace. sg. with the conjunctive
particle -aih-. (See the " Use of Cases " for the
appearance of the conjunctive particle between the
stem and the case-termination,) This is in use in
N.K. as ella and ella.

initu (inisu) ' a little ', ' this much/ This is
used as a dem. pronoun denoting quantity.

The Interrogative Pronouns.

There are two forms in the pi.
masc. nom. ar-urh

dat. argg-am

neut nom. en. (SMD 112.)

-uih and -am are conjunctions (see Conjunc-
tions.)

In N.K. we have yarn for O.K. ar.
The neuter nora. sg. is en ' what' (61-9).
There is no relative pronoun in old Kanarese.--
The declinable participle is used in a way. aftd-on
narakakke salge, ' may he who destroys go to hell/
But about the 10th Century the use of the interro-
gative pronoun with the demonstrative pronoun as
Skt. vat, tat is found.

180

1. " s' ri purusa maharajana dattiyanavanor-
banaZidom Banarasiyum sasirbbar Brahrnanarum
sasirakavilcyuman aZida paiicamahapatakan akkum.

2. idanarorbba kadar avargge piridu punyam
(11-15-17'. B.C. I. 74 (910 A.D.)

In the first sentence, avon c whoever ' and in the
second arorbba i whoever.' The combination of the
inter, and the demon, to express this type of mean-
ing is very common in colloquial N.K.

The personal terminations of verbs found in
these inscriptions are :

sg. pi.

I person -en

II person

III masc. - an, -an r am -ar, -ar

fern. -al, -al -ar, -ar

Neuter - -avu

en- is the oblique base of the first person.
The 3rd neuter pi. is avu. This is the Neuter pi. ter-
mination of verbs.

Pronominal Adjectives.

The demonstrative I and a are the pronominal
adjs. found.

I and a precede the nouns they qualify and do
not change for number and gender.

I-this (or these) and a-that (or those).
I: idharaniyul, Inittadharmrnaman, Iparvata-
dulle, Ipujyasthalarnan, Ibhavavit, imariyadeyan,
Imuvetmuradevejanam.
a : a Kalamturanam.

Later grammarians 1 state that I and a are the
pronouns that are substituted for idu and adu
respectively. The a and I are different words having

1. SMD. 78 and 138.

181

the same meaning and derived from the same prono-
minal base (from iv- av-). The Pr. Kan. pronominal
base of these are at present unknown, though Tol
kappiyam says that they are av- and iv-. 1

Numerals.

Numerals are declined as Neuter Nouns ; appe-
llative nouns of Number in the masc. gender are
formed by suffixing -vv- an in the sg. and -vv- ar in
the pi. to the short forms of Numerals.

Numerals are also used as adjectives by prefixing
the Numeral to the Noun it qualifies. The Numerals,
so prefixed, change the nature of their vowels and
become short in form.

Compound numbers are formed by multiplica-
tion and addition : Multiplication, when ten or a
hundred is the second member of the compound ;
addition when any one of the Numerals from one to
nine is the second member. Hence the numeral
system is decimal.

There is no native word for one thousand, sasira.
is a Iw. from Skt.

The following numerals are found :

nws: omdu (1) eradu (2), mum (3), aydu (5) eZu,
(7) entu (8) pattu (10) irppattu (20) eZpattu (70), nur
(100).

Jws. panca- (5), dvadas'ada (12), Sasira (1000).

nws. irppatthondu (21), muvettumura (33),
nurentu (108), IreZpattu(140>, eZnur (700).

The origin of the Kan. numerals is unknown at
present. 2 They are very nearly the same as those in
Tamil, Malayalam, Telugu and Tulu.

1. Dr.avidic Studios Part I. Page 3. This is a criticism

of Caldwells' theory (C.D.G,) p. 422.

2, Kittel, 1. Ant. II, p. 24 ; CDG. p. 331-543-

182

The numerals from one to ten excepting muru,
aru and el have the suffix -tu, -du or -du in the end.
These are but various forms of -tu ; this is a very
common neuter noun formative. 1 cf. oltu (see
Adjectives). Even in muni, am, el, -r- is derived
from Prn. Dr. * -; and -Z- is, in O. Kan. derived
from -d-.

In their shortened form, ondu is found as or
eradu as ir ; muru as mu ; am as ar; e.l as eZ.

Compound Numbers.

As already stated, compound numbers arc formed
by multiplication and addition :

1. Multiplication: When ten or hundred is
the Second Member of the compound :

ir pattu (2 X 10) 'twenty '
mu vettu (3 X 10) ' thirty '
eZ nur (7 X 100) ' seven hundred '.

2. Addition : When any one of the numerals
from one to nine is to be added to multiples of ten :

irppattondu - (20+1)
inuvettunmru - (30+3)
nurentu - (100 + 8).

There is n.o native word for a thousand ; Sasira,
from Skt. Sahasra, is used.

The following show the numerals, referred to
above, used as adjectives :

. nws. irppattondu-divasaiii, IreZpatt-arulam,oiiidu-
timgal, orsiddhiyan, nurentu-sarhvatsaram, pattupona,
murutingal, muru-degulaman, muvettumura .deveja-
narii, rnuvetmura miselmideymn,

Iws. paiicamahapatakan, sasira-kavileyam.

1. CDG. p. 333.

183

In omdutingal and oiiidusanmargadin, ondu, the
Neuter noun, is used as the Numeral adjective, being
prefixed to another noun. In orurnuniyhiidal and
orsiddhiyan, oru and or have been used as adjective
forms of orhdu. or has been pointed out above as the
root from which oriidu is derived. In the remaining
cases, the neuter nouns, niirentu, pattu, rnuru-,
nmvettumuru, are used as adjectives by prefixing them
to nouns they arc to qualify. In muvettumura-
muvettu-30. But in miivetmura we have only
muvet-dcnoting 30. The latter is the colloquial
form in N.K.

Caldwell l is right in thinking that the numeral
adjectives which arc employed in compound numbers
exhibit the numerals "in their briefest, purest and
most ancient shape."

Appellative Nouns of Number.

The following appellative nouns of number are
found :

Nws. eZniirvvararh, orvvan. orvvan,

Iw. sasirvvar.

As already stated above, these appellative nouns
of number in the masc. gender are formed by the
affixing of -an in sg. and -ar in the plural, to the adj.
forms of these numerals, with the suffix -vv- in bet-
ween the numeral adj. and the -an or -ar.

sg. or-vv-an = one man.
6r-vv-an = orie man.

The lack of differentiation between short and
long vowels is sometimes responsible for the appear-
ance of these two forms. PI ; nw. ekmr-vv-ar-arh (ace.)

3. CDG. p. 322.

184

=efriurvvaram- the 700 people.
Iw. sasir-vv-ar sasirvvar (one thousand
people.)

Ordinal Numeral (Adj.)

-eZ-seven, has its ordinal form eZaneya.
This -aneya does not change for gender. The
origin of this -aneya is discussed under " Numeral
Adjectives/'

Derivative Nouns.

In these inscriptions, a few nouns are formed
from verbal roots and nouns, by the addition of
Suffixes. These derivative nouns are declined as all
the other primary nouns (see ' formation of nominal
stems " under k Nouns ').

A. Nouns from Verbal Roots.

A list of such derivatives is given under " Verbal
Derivatives " under * Verbs.'

B. Nouns formed from Other Nouns.

These Nouns are derived from primary nouns to

denote residence in a place, the trade or occupation

to which a person has devoted himself, the sex of the

person, and the possession of something by a person.

The suffixes are added to Nws. and Iws. alike :

(a) Nws:
raasc. suffix -an : Kalantur-an-am (him of Kalan

tur.)

-an, added to -a stems, (See * Declension of
Nouns ') -an is suffixed to the name of a place ending

186

in a consonant to denote a man of the place ; cf T.
ur-an. Tel. ura-vadu.
(b) Lws:
masc.

(a) Kan. suffix: 1 adi. used in the sense of
an attendant, dasadi ' an attendant of the dasas, a
head of the guild of dasas/ devadi ' an attendant on
the idol in the temple ' A priest. Cf. T. adi yen ' I,
your slave.'

(6) Skt. suffixes:

rnasc. -ara. This is a contraction of aara<
-kara.

karnmara <karmakara.-a blacksmith, T, kam-
marar -Bailors.

kammar-ar-a c of the blacksmiths'. This is a lw
-igd) -ka in Skt, used in the sense of 'born of '
Baivatika, the son of Kevati. This seems to
be analogical formation. Gamiga.

-kara, Skt, l maker ' mala karargge ' to the gar-
land-makers/ cf T, Velaikkaran-a worker.

-vanta, Skt. ' the possessor ' -Laksanavantar :
those who possessed or had the knowledge of the
Symptoms or the Signs

T, pakkiyavantan and pakkiyavan from Skt.

bhaghyavan,
bhagyavanta,
Pern.

Skt. suffixes :

-i naygir <nayaki-y-ar, rnasc, nayaka-cf, T.

tiruti ' a woman thief/

~itti woman, pkt. itthKSkt. stri; deveditti-yar
4 priestess '. sis-itti-yar * women disciples,'
cf, T, parpanatti f a brahmin woman,' and
S'akkalitti i a rival wife,'

186

Composition.

Declinable stems of Iws. are compounded with
one another. These compounds are treated as simple
sterns in declension.

Skt. compounds are more numerous in these
inscriptions.

Nws. and Iws. are compounded often ; except
in titles, such compounds are forbidden by later gram-
marians, So called Kan. Compounds are not so
long as Skt. ones.

The first member of a compound is either a sub-
stantive, an adj, or a numeral. The second is a
substantive, or a numeral.

The suffixes and the case-endings of the first
member disappear in composition ; but these are
retained in a few instances.

A compound, like a simple word, becomes a
member in another compound. The suffix or case-
ending of the compound, as that of the noun, indi-
cates its number and gender.

A compound may be a noun, an adj. or an adv,
according to its meaning and the context.

A. Composition of Skt. Iws.

aksayaklrtti, aksimanakkeramya Sura lokasu-
kkakke, anupamadivya appadu, anekagunada,
anekagunaslladi, aneka s'llagunamale galm,
apunarbhavakke, arddhavlsadi, Ajiganada, atmavas'-
akramavu, aradhanayogadin, Indranandi acaryyan,
upainlllasuralokasaukhyada, Urusattvan, urami-
thyatva pramudhasthirataranrpanan, Katavapra
s'ailama, Kadambamandalaman, kanyadana, gaticesta
viraham, giritalada, Gunasagaradvitlya nainadheyan,

187

Candradevacharyyanaman, Carita s'rinamadheya
prabbu, Citravahanar, Jinamarggan, Jaina
Sanmarggadulle, tapaccale, tiradanama, tlrtthagi-
rimel, turhgoccabhaktivas'adirh, daksipabhagada,
duritabhudvrsaman, devadandadinda, devalokakke,
dvadas' ada, dharmmagaranigarum, natasaihyata-
tman, nadirastradulle, Nandisenapravaramunivarau,
namocintayduse mantraman, nittadharmrnaman.
niravadyan, nltisampannan, pancamahapatakan,
paiicaniahapataka sariiyuktaD, paramakalyanabhagi-
gal, paramaprabhavarisiyar, paramartthaih, pasupata-
mari yadeyan, Puspasenacari, purvvamariyadeya,
prthivivallabhaMam galisana, prthivlrajyaduja, prasa-
dantaranian, Bhadravahu saCandrasuptamunmdra
yugmadin, inahagiri, mahajanakke, mahatavan,
mahatavada, mahadaiitagradul , mahadevan, Maha-
deviyar, mahaparutadul, Masenar, munipurhgavan,
MeghanaadiinuniMauDiyacariyar,ragadvesatam6mala
vyapagatar, rajadandadinda, rajas' ravitain, risigiris'
ile mol, Lanjigesaramdevarke, vicitrakanaka prajval-
yadin, vidyullategala, vidrurnadharaS antisenamunis'
an, vidhanamukhadin, vinayacaraprabhavan, Vinaya-
devasenanamamahamimi, Vis' okabhatarara, vrsabha
nandlnmni, S'uddkatrnasam yoddhakar, s'ripuranvaya
Gandhavarmman, s'rlrupallladhana vibhavauiaharas'
igal, S'rivijayadityasatyas'raya, Srlvinayaditya raja
s'raya, S'risamgamgala, saddhainmada, sanmarg
gadim, Sanyasanam yogadim, sanyasanavidhi, sarppa
culamani, Sarvvajnabhattarakar, Sarvvaparihararii,
Harvvabadhapariharam, Siddhasamayan, Supanditan,
s'ubhaibgade, suracapariibole, suralokaajahavibha-
vasthanan, surendrarajyavibhuti, sthitadehakainalopa
manga s'ubhamum, svabhavasaundaryyakarangar,
Svarggagraman, svarggalayakke, svadhyayasam-
pattinirn.

186

B. COMPOSITION OF LWS. AND NWS.

These compounds do not differ from those of Skt.
Iws. except in having Nws. either as the first or the
second Member.

Aneseti, Ugrasenaguruvadigal, udita a' rlkaZbap-
pinujle, Rsabhasenaguruvadigal, Kalavirgguruvadigal,
KiZgandevake, KiZganes' varada, KiZgabataririige,
gandhebhainaydan, guruvadigal, Devereya, Deva-
khantiyar, Dharmrna Senaguruvadigal, Namilurv-
varasaihghada, Namilursariighada, Nagasenaguruvadi-
gal, Nrpamariar, Pattiniguruvadigal, perggoravam,
Baladevaguruvadigal, mrtyuvaravan, Mallagavasa-
guruvar, Moniguruvadigala, vipulas' rikatavapranal-
giriya, Vettedeguruvadigal manakkar, Vrata s'llanon-
pigunadim, B J ubhanvita S'rinaiuilura, Siiiiganandi-
guruvadigal.

It is true that, in the list of words given, there
are real compound words : Aneseti, Dharmasena-
guruvadigal and words of this type, nrpamariyar;
(even guruvadi is not a compound.)

But KiZganadevake, KiZgaries' varada, Ki/gabat-
aririige, Namilurvvarasamghada, Namilur samghad| ?
are not compounds at all. As stated under the nom,
and the gen. in the section on the use of Cases, the
nom. can be used and is used to denote the gen. In
the examples cited above, KiZgana, KiZga, Namilur are
names of places. To place such proper names before
another substantive, without treating the two as
constituting a compound is quite the normal usage in
the ancient kavyas and in N. K. colloquial speech.
Of course the meaning, e.g., in Ki/gabatarimge is 'to
the batar of kiZga', as Bengaluru huduga 'the Banga-
lore boy' is used in colloquial speech in Kanarese.
Here Bengaluru huduga is not a compound, but only

189

a substantive used as an adj. Hence this type of
word groups cannot be considered as compounds.

Nor can we treat perggoravam ' as a compound
as later grammarians do. As pointed out under
Adjectives, per is an adj, meaning * big, great J * The
great teacher ' in English is not a compound, nor is
per-ggoravarn. kalmane, 'a stone house ' is not a com-
pound. It is only kal (substantive) and mane (a
substantive) kalmane a stone house, cf. kalgana.

The peculiarity of some compounds as the follow-
ing is that a native Kan. word is incorporated in the
compound : Dev-ereya, guruv-adigal. s'rlkatavapra-
naZgiriya, vrata s'lla-fttf/^gunadim.

The following word groups are nouns in apposition
with nouns or the preceding ones are adjs. It is
wrong to call them compounds :

Adeyarenadu * Adeyare kingdom.'

A/uarasar ' AZu kings.'

EdevoZal nadu ( EdevoZal Kingdom'

Polikesi arasar ' King Polkesi '.
Later grammarians have given the name of com-
pounds to such word groups.

Numerals in Compounds.

Groups with numerals, either as the first or the
second member of a word group, are called compounds.

1. Numeral as first Member : irppattondu
divasara, IreZpattu arulam, ondutimgal, nurentu
samvatsararh, pattu pona, murutimgal.

As already discussed under Numerals, the first
member or the numeral is only an adj. which does
not change for gender, number or case of the
noun it qualifies attributively as in these examples.

2. Numerals as second Member : gandhebha-
maydan, aydu may be treated as a Numeral used

190

predicatively and the ace. ending is suffixed to aydu.
This usage is common in N. K. mane muranna kat-
tisida, ' he built three houses'. Here mane is the object,
but muru ' three* has the ace. ending, though mane
is an inanimate object and as such no case-ending is
necessary. As muru is used predicatively, this -anna
is suffixed to the numeral. There is no change in the
meaning whether aydu comes before or after garidhe-
bharn. Though later grammarians call this so, this
is not a compound.

3, Composition of numerals with numerals :
To express a Number meaning more than ten, as
stated under " Numerals," numbers, one to ten, are
added to multiples of ten ; to denote multiples of ten,
numbers two to nine, are prefixed to ten ; the nume-
rals that precede ten in the latter are not the same in
form as the ordinary numerals except in 4 and 5 in
the following examples .

A. B. C. D.

1. irpattu ....2x10 "20* two tens

2. Ir pattu ondu 2 X 10 + 1 "21" two tens one

3. Ir e/ pattu ... 2x7 X 10 "140" two seven tens

4. e/nur ... 7x100 "700" 7 hundreds

5. nurentu .... 100 + 8 "108"0ne hundred and 8

6. muru pattu .... 3x10 "30" three tens

7. muvettu muru. 30-+ 3 "33" three tens three
Even these are not compounds, in spite of the

later grammarians calling these gamakasarnasas 1 (Im-
pulse compounds according to Kittel). The meanings
of these are given in the margin against them. There
also, two, three, seven are numerals used as adjec-
tives and in the case of 21, 108 and 33 the

1. S MD. 168, KSS. 294. There is no Gamaka Samasa in
KW and KBB. Compounds in Kannada Grammars increase in
number gradually, e.g. SMD 174, 193.

191

conventional meaning as in 11, 12, 13 are given by
usage. These are no compounds.

Nouns ' compounded ' with Verbs or Participles.

Examples : sg. pi.

(a) Verbs : s.'ivanile padedan kalamkeydar

nel ekondan prasadariikey dar

samadhi neredon odagaundar
samadhikudidom

(b) Participles :

Transitive : arcikeyye, as'anadivittu, aradhane
nontu, edevidiyal, prithivlrajyam keye, pavu rnutti-
don, pujedandu, besageyvalli, muninvratagal nontu ?
mudimegeye, rajyapravarttanarh keye, sanyasanaih
geydu.

Intransitive. bhadramagi, rnukhamage, raja
S'ravitamage.

*In all these examples, the verb or participle
has the substantive, either in the ace. or the norn.
before it. If it is in the nom. naturally that is the
subject of the verb or the participle following it.tf
it is in the ace. the substantive is the object of the
verb or the participle. As shown under the ' use of
cases ', the norn. is used as the ace. (without the ace.
termination) in a sentence, in 0. K. as well as in N. K.
(literary and colloquial). To call these kriyasamasas
or verbal compounds is wrong. These are used to-
gether so long that they have acquired some fixity in
the language. In reply to the objection that k>, c-,
t-, p- of the verb is voiced in these word groups and
hence these must be compounds, it may be said that,
in Kanarese and other Dravidian languages, inter-
vocalic surds become sonants.

In the word groups given above, there is an anu-
svara before the verb or the participle, e.g. in kalath

192

keydar, prasadarh keydar ; this -m is the usual anu-
svara found in Skt. Iws. in the nominative. See " The
Nominative Case " under " Nouns/'

In the following examples of Skt. compds. the
terminations of the Iw. are retained for the needs of
metre :

1. saravidya \^\\Milndras suravara munibhi
stutya kaZbappinamel ;

2. sadhugaj pujyamanan ;

3. taparh Samyamainan.

But a Skt. compound is split up and the dative
termination is retained for the needs of metre :

aksirnana&fe rarnya suraloka sukakke.

Such instances are very rare.

cf. skt. Dhanamjaya, adj. " winning booty." used
as a proper name ;

Vacaspati M. lord of speech ; a proper name.

Yudhisthira M, firm in battle ; a proper name.

193

VERBS.

Transitive, intransitive and causative verbs are
found. There are three tenses past, present and
future ; three persons and two numbers. In the first
and the second persons, there is no distinction of
gender. In the third person, the three genders are
distinguished. There are five moods the indicative,
the imperative, the optative, the infinitive and the
negative. There are two voices active and passive.

Causative Verbs.

There are two types of causative verbs :
/. Those formed bij the addition of the suffix pputo

the verbal root :

1. mucli-pp-i-dar caused to come to an end.
from mudi to end, to come to an end
(intransitive). This is the only example,
cf. T. Causative, varu-vi-pp-en will cause

to corne ; padipp-i-ppen ;
Te. Vidipincu to cause to be released.
II. Those formed by suffixing -isu to rts, be they

transitive or intransitive :

This -isu is suffixed to Skt. verbal roots and noune
to convert them into causative verbal roots in Kan.

(a) -isu added to trans, rts.

bidisidar from bidisu from bidu * to release/
madisida ' caused to be made ' from rnadisu from
madu 'to do '.

These roots end in -u and -isu is added to the
final consonant of the rt.

(b) -isu added to intrans. rt.

nirisidom ' caused to stand J from nirisu from
nil ' to stand '.

194

(c) -isu suffixed to 8 Jet. rts. :

sadhisidom from sadhisu from sadh + isu * to
accomplish '; palisidorh ' be caused to be protected '
from palisu from pal- ' to protect'.

Later grammarians state that Skt. rts. are adop-
ted into Kan. by suffixing -isu to the Skt. verbal rts.
But these roots with -isu were originally causatives
and later on acquired the meaning they now have.
Otherwise, there was no necessity for the use of -isu
in these roots, taken from Skt.

(d) -isu suffixed to Skt. Noun.

lekkisu ' to reckon ' from lekha ' to write '.

Even in this case, isu had a causative signi-
ficance in the beginning 1 and later on became a
simple root. If these were not causatives, the reason
for forbidding the formation of causatives from these
-isu roots is inexplicable.

Tenses.

Verbs in these inscriptions, with very few excep-
tions, can be analysed into three distinct parts :

1. the verbal root; 2. the tense suffix; and
3. the pronominal termination.

The tense-infix shows the tense of the verb, while
the pronominal termination points out whether the
verb is in the 1st, 2nd, or 3rd person.

There are three tense-suffixes, -da-, for the past,
-utta- (-uta-) for the present, and -m-, -v-, and -pp-
for the future. The rt. + the tense suffix = the adver-
bial participle. The pronominal terminations which
indicate the number and the gender of the subject of
the verb are added to the rt. with the tense-suffix or
the adv. participle to get a fully conjugated verb.

1. KG. p. 90. Sect. 150.

195

Participles.

These are formed by the addition of the tense-
suffix to the roots. There are two kinds of participles--
the adverbial and the declinable. There are past,
present and future adv. participles ; and declinable
participles in the past and the future in these inscrip-
tions.

The past Adverbial Participle.

The past adverbial and declinable participles are
formed in the same way, except in the case of rts.
ending in -u when the declinable participles of these
roots in -u are formed by the addition of -da to the
adverfctial praticiple. e.g. erida, eydi-da.

There are two kinds of suffixes added to the
roots to convert them into adv. participle : -i and -du

(-fu).

1. -i used to form ado. participles.

(a) -i is suffixed to rts. of two syllables ending
in -u when the penultimate vowel is long by nature
or position :

agi, ikki, erti, eri, eydi, kudi, tori, pogi,
madi, metti.

(b) -i suffixed to causative roots :
mudippi, salisi, sadhisi.

The origin of -i is at present unknown. But
CaldwelPs 1 suggestion that -i is derived from I to
give, (T. 1 to give; Te. iccu, K. Isu from Ifisu),
seems to be reasonable in the light of modern collo-
quial usages in Tel. and Kan. (Te. pom let it go ; K :
pogalisa he won't let me go). But KittePs euphonic
explanation is not satisfactory. 2

1. C.D.G. p. 462.

2. KG. p, 104, Sect. 168.

196

II. -du (tu) to form adv. participles.

(a) In principle -du is the suffix added to roots
ending in -a, -i and -e and also rts. ending in con-
sonants -n, -y, -1, -Z, preceded by a short vowel :

-a ka-du.
-i ari-du.

-e kore-du, tore-du, nade-du, nere-du.
-n en-du.
-y key-du.
-1 agal-du,

-I adaZ-du. iZ-du, poZ-du.
In these adv. participles, the rts. have not under-
gone any change.

(b) -du suffixed to roots ending in -1.

Kondu from kol + du.<kol f to kill '

Sandu from sal + du<sal (to go. to become

manifest.')

Later grammarians 1 state that -1 of kol and
sal> -n in front of a consonantal suffix and the
examples given under this sutra are kondarh and
sandam. If this statement in KBB. were true, salge
which appears in these inscriptions should have been
Wi-ge, but it is not san-ge, but sal-ge. But SMD.
237 simply states that kol and sal>kon and san be-
fore -da-. KSS. 491 paraphrases SMD. 237. The
statement by some scholars that -1 of kol and asl
were nasalised in O.K. as y, v, 1 can also be nasals
and in front of a consonantal suffix, the nasal of the
varga to which the consonantal suffix belongs becomes
more audible, i.e. -1- > -n-, does not carry us far.
To say that 1 and n are interchanged in Kan. e.g.,
linga and ninga, limbe and nimbe, do not help us
much.

1. KBB. 232 ; SMD. 237 : KSS. 491 ; KG. P. 97.

2. KBB, 9,

19?

As we shall see later, Kol + du>kondu, ul + du>
untu ; there also the nasal is found :

The adv. participles in T. may be compared with
O.K. adv. participles to see whether the origin of -n-
of kondu and sandu may be discovered.

Tarn. Kan.

(1) mri Idu
eri?*u endu
konru kondu
kondu kondu
canru sandiu
tirandu teradu
ponru poltu
venru bendu
vandu bandu

(2) irundu iddu
From these it is found that

T. -nr .... K. -nd-

T. -nr- .... K. -d- (1 and 2).

It is seen that T. -nr and K. -nd are from Pr.
Drn. *-n-. (See the history of r. supra).

The Pr. Kan :* -nu- has become -ntu- in some,
-ndu- in some and -du in some adv. participles.
kondu< kol + ndu kolndu.
sandu <sal+ndu salndu.
-1 may have been assimilated to -n and* kon-
ndu, and *sanndu, have their long -n- shortened into
-n-. But in places where it is found as -du, the precon-
sonantal nasal -n- has disappeared as is usual in
Kanarese. (See " Dative Case " under ' Nouns ' and
" Consonant groups,")- But nil has both nindu and
nintu.

(c) -du suffixed to rt. ending in -1.
kol+du>kol+ndu>kolndu>konQdu>kondu.
-ndu > ndu before -1, a cerebral in okl.

198

The interchange between 1 and n in Kanarese
is common :

(a) l>n when there is another nasal.

anma, alma ' a ruler '
gondala, gondana ' a crowd '
malal, manal ' sand '.

(b) l>n in places where there is no other nasal.

alii, anil ' a squirrel '.

al, an, c a male '

ali, ani c roundness '

ittaja, iitana ' a crowd '

kuli, kuni ' a pit '

keladi, genati ' a woman friend '

keleya, geneya ' a man friend '

kola, kona ' a tank '

kolagu, konagu 4 a hoof '

gala, gana ' a hook, a fish hook '

gol, gon 4 the nape of the neck '

catali, catani 4 a sudra who worships Visnu,

seladu, senadu 4 to envy '.

In N. K. colloquial speech, villagers use konni,
korini for kolli (take. 2nd pi. imperative)

Hence kol+ndu>kolndu>kondu.

(c) -du suffixed to rts. ending in -r.

tar + ndu > tandu
bar+ndu>bandu.

According to Kan. grammarians, 1 the roots are
tar and bar. In Kan. as in T. and Te. the rt. re-
mains unchanged in 2nd. sg. imper. But in the case
of tar and bar, the 2nd sg. imper. is ta and ba in
Kan. and T. and ta and ra in Te. In some Kanarese
kavyas of the 10th century, tarai and barai are also

1. SMD. 237 ; KSS. 492.

190

found. Caldwell and Gundert 1 have concluded that
tar and ta, bar and ba are the alternative roots
cited in illustration ; the principle of alternative
roots is not found in the dhatupathas given in any
of the Dravidian grammars, tar and bar may have
come from tar and bar, (ta and ba) in the 2nd sg. imper
Caldwell 1 thinks that vanden (past I sg.) is from va
and varugiren from var. Even for this there does
not seem to be any other satisfactory illustration
in Kanarese or Tamil.

In all Kan. grammars, the roots are given as tar
and bar. 2 The adv. pp. is tandu and bandu. They
state that -r~>-n before -da, the tense suffix.

III. f -tu added to rts. ending -I and -n. preceded
by a long vowel.

kll-tu, non-tu, (cf . non-du from no ' to suffer

pain ')
Here the roots do not undergo any change.

IV. -tu added to roots ending in -du to convert them

into adv. p. participles :

kottar and vittar from kodu 4 to give ' and vidu
' to leave ', respectively.

kodu seems to be from kudu to give. In the
later inscriptions we get both kuduva and koduva.
vidu is M.K. bidu and ISi.K. bidu.

Later grammarians 3 state that these rts. with
the penultimate short vowel change their final soft
consonant before -da- and -dapa- into the correspond-
ing hard ones. T. has kututtan in the past. In Tel.

1. CDG. p. 217.

2. KBB. 227. " When personal terminations are added
without suffixes (in the negative mood) the rt. vowel is leng-
thened ": SMD. 237 and 238.

3. SMD. p. 311, Nos. 277 and 278 ; sutra 239. KBB. 228.
237 and 238 ; KSS. 487 and 489.

zoo

this root is not found. The Pr. Kan. rt. may have
been*kut; with -u, -t- was voiced, kut or * kot +
ntu>kotntu>kot+tu by assimilation. Similarly in
vittu from vidu. Of. SMD 181. *Kadidu>Katt,
Nididu>Nitt, Kiru>Kitt, in compounds before vowels.
The penultimate vowels in kodu and vidu are
short and the syllable is a closed one. All rts. of
this type form their past participles similarly. The
following examples are taken from Dictionaries and
Grammars :

idu+du .... ittu (having placed)

udu + du .... uttu (having put on)

kodu + du .... kottu (h a ving given)
nedu -f-du .... nettu (having planted)
padu+du .... pattu (having experienced)
vidu-f'du .... vittu (having given)
sudu + du .... suttu (having burnt)

The forms in Tamil are exactly the same as
those in Kanarese, except in the last where T. has c-
in place of K. s-.

But under the same conditions, roots with -du,
but with a penultimate long rowel form their pps. by
suffixing -i :

(Examples from Dictionaries and Grammars)

rt.

odu

kudu

tldu

nodu

madu

V. -du added to roots ending in -gu with a penulti-
mate short vowel (closed syll.)

Examples : pokku and mikku from pogu and rnigu,
respectively.

K.pp.

T.pp.

Tel.pp.

odi

oti

odi

kudi

kuti

kudi

tldi

titi

tldu.

nodi

...

....

madi

. . .

201

Pogu seems to be from the Pr.K.* pugu like kudu (for
kodu).

Later grammarians 1 state that, before -da-, the
rt. changes the last soft consonant into the corres-
ponding hard one and the resulting form is pokka. T.
pukunden (past. I.m. sg; pukken). M. Pukku.

The Pr. Kan. rt. *puk- with -ntu- may have be-
come pukku. puk-tu- should become puttu. but if k.
is fully exploded and -t- is assimilated to k., we get
pukka. The reason or the process of this change is at
present unknown.

But if the penultimate vowel is long and open,
the adv. pp. is formed by suflixing -i, e.g., agi, pogi.

The origin of the past tense suffix -da- was,
according to Caldwell 2 ' probably a neuter singular
formative, converting the verbal root into a verbal
noun'. Kittel states that -du and -tu are pronominal
suffixes added to verbal roots to convert them into
verbal participles, which are really verbal nouns. 3
He interprets the adv. past participle i/idu c a descen-
ding-it', from Hi ' to descend'. Kittel may be
right, but definite evidence from other Dravidian
languages has to be collected before accepting this as
final, now that Pr. Dr. *-nu- is most probably the
original from which -du- is derived.

The present adv. participle.

The present adv. participle is formed by suffixing
-uttu, (-utu) to the rts :
aluttu .

<
alutu from al to rule

ikkuta from ikku 'to abandon, to kill.'

1. SMD. 239. 251, S. Nos. 85 and 88 ; KSS. 485.

2. CDG. p. 512.

3. KG. p. 105. Sect. 169.

202

In T. this suffix is not found, but Tel. has this
in the following present forms :

avwfamnanu, unfomnanu, kowfomnanu, cadu-
v^/^nnanu, tadwsfainnanu, pach^nnanu, po^nnanu,
parhpw^nanu, viwfa/nnanu. -utu is also found as ntu,
-stu- in these forms.

Kittel 1 considers -uttu- and -utu-, the tense
suffix of the present, comes from -udu-. It is possible
that this -utu- may be from *-untu- as "-ntu- is of
the past tense suffix, as T. has -nra- in the present.

The future adv. participle.

No examples.

The Declinable Participles.

These declinable participles are formed generally
by suffixing to the root -da- to form the past, and
-ppa- and -va- to form the future participles. The
present declinable participle is not found. But in the
case of rts. ending in -u, the declinable past partici-
ple is formed by suffixing -da- to the adv. pp. of the
rt. e.g., en-da.

The declinable pps. end in -a while the adv. pps.
end in -i or -du (-tu). The formation of the declin-
able pp. is the same as that of the adv. pp. except m
the case of rts. with -u.

Some European scholars have given the name of
" relative participles " to this class, as, according to
them, these include the relative pronouns within them-
selves, as there are no relative pronouns in Kan. 2

Declinable Past Participles.

The following examples are found :

(1) Roots with -i or -e : aZi-da, ida, nere-da,
pel-da, pode~da.

1. KG- p. 109, Sect. 173.

2, CDG. p. 520.

203

(2) Boots with -u ; m-da, eydi-da.

(3) Boots with -1: kon-da<kol-da.

(4) Boots with-n: nonta.

(5) Boots with -du : kotta.

(6) Boots I and sa : ifcta ; satta.

Later grammarians 1 explain that 1 before -da>i
and da>ta. They give no reason for the doubling
of -t-.

In T. the past, is inden (I gave) ;

fut. is Iven (I give) ; K. Iveiii
past, s'atten (I died); s'aven (I will die);
In Tel. past, iccinadu (he gave)

caccinadu (he died)

Pr. Kan (Dr.) rt. *Io. gives itta in Kanarese and
iccina in Tel.

(7) Boot with -gu: ada.

The past tense of agu is aydan, found in these
inscriptions. This aydan (3rd, m. sg. past.) presup-
poses ayda, the pp. + an. But ayda is not found in
these or other inscriptions or any of the kavyas so far
published. But Kittel 2 says that the old rustics use
' aydane ' even now. This is not found in Mysore
rural or urban. It may be a dialectical variation of
Mangalore area. But ada is found in later inscrip-
tions, and all the kavyas, and is very common in N.K.
adarii (3. sg. m. past.) is found. In N.K. 3. n. sg.
past is ayitu and colloq. aytu (<ayittu, according to
later grammarians. T. ana, K. ada, Tel. ayina,
correspond in meaning).

There is another verb pogu ' to go '. past, podam
(3rd. sg. m. past,), pp. poda. T. ponan (3sg. m. past)
pp. pona. Te. poyinadu (3 sg. m. past.); pp. poyina.

1. KBB. 236, KSS. 477, KG. p. 97, SMB. 240.

2. KBB. 231, SMD. 242, KSS. 500.

204

The 2nd sg. imper. of all Kan. (Drn.) rts. is the
root itself. K. po, T. po, Te. po. About the 14th
cent, we get hogu (2. imp. 3. sg.) in Kan. In compel,
tenses, potandarn. But in the case of agu, we have
not got any examples of agu used as 2nd imp. m.
sg. Later grammarians 1 of the llth century state
that -da> -ya after a and po. In T. a is used by
itself as a verb. Kural 1312. In Naladiyar past
tense 3. f. sg. ayinal 376 (she became) . ayina (things
that became) 23 ; ayavar (349) are found.

The conditional ayin ' if it be ' (115, 229, 357,
362), the nogative conditional illayin (126), yam ayin
(for our part) 293, ayinuih (5, 88, 98, 115, 139, 147,
176, 186, .etcj are also found.

A Pr. Drn. rt. which can become ay (T) or ay
(Te) or a (Kan) may be assumed to be *ay. The
disappearance of -y can be illustrated from rt. kay
to get heated. kay + pu ftaypu heating. N.K.
kavu<kapu. In Tel. also, kaycu>kacu (rt. V.N.
kavu ; T. kay to be heated, V.N. kayppu - dislike,
displeasure; kay vu drying, dryness, heating. T, kavu-
sacrifice, an oblation to the inferior deities ; a magic
ointment used in making a black spot on the
forehead.)

Hence. Pr. Dr. *ay becomes K. aydan, *ayda, and
ada. -gu is a suffix added later and the fut. agavar
is later (EC. IV. 41, 1569) than ayppar>appar>
appar >appar; K. akkurii < *ay-kkum through *akkum,
where -kkurii is the future suffix. Of. akkie in these
inscriptions. Similarly the root pogu is more recent
and the original Pr. Drn. rt. is *poy, as we find poppar
for fut. 3. m. pi. in inscriptions.

1. KG. p. 111.

205

SMD 232 says that the fut. tense suffix is -pa-
before -g and -g must be elided. Examples given are
popam from pogu
taparh from tagu
tupam from tugu, etc.

This clearly shows that -gu is not a radical part
of the root as a or po, but only a suffix.

Declinable Participles.

Present : No examples.

Future : The fut. deel. participle is formed by
suffixing -ppa- or -v- to the roots.

Hoots ending in -i and -u take -va : -va<-pa-<
-ppa.

ali-va, iru-va, rnugi-va. But rts. ending in a
consonant take -ppa; appa. from *ay to become
(see ada above).

There is reason to believe that the future tense
suffix was -ppa- at first and later it became -pa- and
-va-. Later grammarians (SMD. 232, KSS. 503, 504),
point out that the future tense suffix -va- becomes
-pa- when preceded by -r, -r, -Z, -n, -g, -3, and -6
and this -pa- optionally becomes -ppa- under these
circumstances, then -g and -s must be elided.
Examples : r : kurparh, parparii.
r: ki/pam.

I (d) : noZparh, beZpam.
n: nompam.

g: popam, tapam, mirupam.
s : taripam, baripam.
6 : opam.

doubling : tolappam, belappam.
cf. T. kappen from ka i to preserve '.

iruppen from iru 4 to be '; kalappen from
kala f to mingle ' ; kaZippen from kaK ' to remove '

206

See T.H. Articles 64 and 66. But later grammarians 1
state that 4 agu, when followed by an affix beginning
with p. optionally becomes ap;" 'agu when followed
by an affix with p-, optionally becomes a-;' 'agu,
when followed by an affix with k-, optionally becomes
ak-'. These are attempts to explain an existing form
without knowing the origin of it.

Caldwell 2 thinks that -a of the declinable pps. is
the original -a, sign of the possessive ; Kittel
considers the decl. pp. the Gen. Sg. of the adv. pp. 3
But the explanations given by these do not seem to
be satisfactory. The exact significance of -a is un-
known at present,

As stated under adjs., these pps. are always used
as adjectives. They do not change for gender or
number. The Dpp. is used in the future tense, as
past tense form is used in 3-8.

When pronouns of the third person or their
contractions-on,-6m (sg.) and-6r (pi.) are suffixed to
these, these become adjl. substantives, and their
meaning includes the signification of the relative
pronoun (See " Adjectival Substantives " above.)

Examples :

sg.

pi.

Masc nom.

aZiv-on

aZivor.

keyvon

unnur

muttidon

unvor

salvon

kador

pafcldor

1. KSS. 496499.

2. CDG, p. 523.

3. KG. P. 112 Sect, 178.

207

Examples : sg.

Neuter nom. ittodu

ace. itludan

mikkudan

loc. vitti lalli.

There are three instances where the adv. partici-
ple of one rt. and the dec), participle of another rt.
are used together to hring out the adjectival meaning.
The decl. p. conies second.

1. puni-iruva. Where pfmi (past. adv. p. of
pun -to agree, to undertake).

iruva (fut. decl. p. of iru-to be) -
that have undertaken.

2. bhadramagida.

agi (past. adv. p. of agu -to become)
ida (past decl. pi of iru -to be)
( that had become '

3. neredu+ada

neredu (past. adv. p. of nere -to become full-fada
(decl. pp. of agu -to become)
' that had been completed/

The Negative Participle.

The negative advl. and declinable participles are
also found. The meaning is negative in such partici-
ples.

I. Negative adv. Participles.

The suffix -ade and -ade, are added to roots to
convert them into neg. adv. participles.

The form of neg. adv. participle is the same for
the past, the present and the future, the tense of the

1. K. G, p. 106.

208

neg. participle being determined by the tense of the
finite verb in the sentence. Like -an in the gen.
the -ade suffix is more ancient than -ade. In 0. T.
and N. T. -ade forms are in use, but in M. K. and
N. K. only -ade forms are found.

The examples are :

-ade. allade, tappade, 1 veleyade (cf. N. T., 0. T.
allamal, allade, tappade, veleyade), cf. T. H. illada,
paZa, art. 112.

-ade. tankade, lekkisad-um.
KittePs statement that the nog. participle is
formed by suffixing -ade to the short form of the
infinitive, is wrong. In the formation of adv. parti-
ciples, there is a principle consistently followed : the
tense-suffix and the participial suffix are clearly
related o,nd are almost the same.

tense suffix. parti, suffix,

past. -da- -du-

fut. -va- -va-

in the neg. adv. participles also, the same princi-
ple is followed : the negative suffix -a- (later -a-) is
added to the root and then -de, the participial suffix
is affixed. The result is the same in either case : ira
ade. (Kittel) and ir-a-de.

III. Neg. declinable participle.

The neg. declinable participle is formed by suffix-
ing -a to the negative adv. participle (as in the case
of declinable participles generally).

Only example is nillada from nillade (neg. adv.
p.) from nil-to stand.

Tappadu<Tavu+pa. + ade(SMD 240).

209

Conjugation.

As already stated, the fully inflected verb = rt.+
tense suffix + pronominal termination, i.e. y it is a
participle+a pronoun.

The tense suffix for the past is -da- and for the
future it is -in- and -ppa-.

The personal terminations are :

sg. pi.

I. person -en

II. person 1. -oy

2. rt. itself.

III. person mas, -an -ar

-an
-arii

fern. -al -ar

neuter - -avu

These terminations are the same for all the tenses
and for all kinds of verbs.

By suffixing these terminations to the participial
forms, the conjugated forms of the verb are obtained.
Thus it is seen that there is only one conjugation in
Kanarese (with very few irregular forms).

As already stated, there are five moods indica-
tive, imperative, optative, infinitive and negative.

A. The Indicative Mood.

The past tense : The personal terminations are
added to the past verbal ( participle.

There are no examples for the I and II persons,
sg. and pi.

Ill person. sg. pi.

paasc. *an -ar

G. o. i. 14

210

(a) Transitive

Intransitive

Gausatives

(b) Transitive

Intransitive
Causative

Indicative-past
III person, fern.

eydi-d-an

erid-an

pade-d-an

aydan
sandan.

-an (am)
ari-d-am
kottam
kotam

eydi-d-ar

erid-ar

pade-d-ar

key-d-an

kon-d-ar

vitt-ar

mudippidar
-ar

i/-d-ar
mudippidar
bidisidar

-al
iZ-d-al.

As stated before, -an and -ar are more ancient
than -an and -ar. In 0. T. and N. T. -an and -ar are
still the suffixes in 3rd sg. and pi. masc. of all tenses.
In Tel. in all the three persons, the terminations
with the long vowel a are in use. In N. K. in the
present tense, 3rd sg. and pi. masc. and fern, -ane,
-ale and -are are still the only suffixes; -anu, -aluand
-aru are still the suffixes in the sambhavanarupa of
the verb where doubt is to be expressed.

All the examples (except aydan) (& eridan &
eydid,n) are regularly formed from verbal participles,
But in eridan and eydidan, we have -da-, added to the
pas verbal participles eri and eydi before suffixing
personal terminations.

But ay daft is forced from* ay da (the past decl.
participle) + an, Put ay da, is not found m these

211

inscriptions or kavyas. See ada under " Declinable

pps."

The present tense : No examples.

The future tense :

person. sg. pi.

trans. I aZi-in-en

II

intrans. Ill masc -ar

-appar
appar
-ar appar
olar.

fein. no examples,
neuter, no examples.

In aZi-m-en, -m- is the future tense suffix.
Later grammarians say 1 . that the fut. tense suffix is
-v-,-m-> -v-. Probably, here, -m- had the phonetic
value of -v-, and the conservative writing had -in-
still ; appar. appar, and appar are the fut. 3rd pi
masc. forms of agu (Pr. Kan.* ay) This shows that
another future tense suffix is -pp-. The O. K. appar,
appar, appar, apar, M. K. aharu, replaced in N. K. by
agu -v- aru.

In ol-ar, the 3. m. pi. fut. of ul ' to be \ the rt.
has become ol-. There is no tense suffix at all here.
T. hasul 'to be.' Kural : ullar (1127) -3rd m. pi.
present and future, ulal (617) -3rd. f. sg. pr. and fut;
ulen (167) 1st s. pres. and fut. ; ulem (1204) 1. pi. pr.
and fut ; untu (1098, etc.)

Te : undu ' wait, exist ' 2. sg. pr.

unna-di ' it is ' 3. N. sg. pr. and fut.
unnaru c they are ' 3. m. pi. p. and fut.

1. KBB, 196.

212

Why in K. ul > ol is at present unknown (cf.
kudu>kodu; pugu pudi>pogu, pode, the secondary
forms are all found in these inscriptions).

Later grain marians * state kudu, pugu, etc.,
when followed by an affix beginning with -d-, change
their vowel into short o. But kodu is found in the
future also where tho -d- is not the suilix, but -v-.
It is not known whether these changes of -u- to -o-
are due to the presence of.any suffix. It is also possible
that originally verbs were formed without any tense
suffix and the saino form was used for all tenses, the
meaning being determined by the context, cf. akkurh
used for all tenses ; neg. verbal forms used for all
tenses, untu - the 3rd. n. sg. of ul is used for all ten-
ses, all genders and all numbers in Kan. and T.; the
tense is fixed by the finite verb. Later, the subtle
distinctions of tense may have arisen. In some
grammars, it is said that there were only two tenses
in Kan. - the past and the future. The present tense
was a later development. Anyway, olar is formed
without any tense suffix either in T. or Kan.

The following forms are used in the fut.
tense :

akkum (akum), pirigum.

1. idanaZidon pancamahapatakan akkum * he
who destroys this will be guilty of the five heinous
crimes. '

2. S'rirupa-lila-dhana-vibhavamaharas 'igal piri-
guih nillav arggam ' the great treasures of beauty,
pleasure, wealth and power will separate and not be
permanent for anyone/

akkum (3. m. sg. and pi. fut); pirigum (3. pi. n.
' fut.)

1. KBB. 226, SMP, 238, KSS, 489, KG. 130,

213

Later grammarians 1 say that -kkum, -kum,
-gum, -ku and -gu are the 3rd per. suffixes used in all
tenses, in all numbers and genders.

This -kkurh is found only in two forms not in
these inscriptions, but in N. K. beku < beZkum ' is
wanted ' < belu - to want, saku < salkum, ' is suffi-
cient, < sal - to be sufficient, akkum has been
replaced in N. K. by agu-v-udu.

B. The Imperative Mood.

There are only two examples in II. sg. keloy <
kel - to listen ; nodu < nodu - to see.

The rt. is used as II sg. imp. in nodu. But in
keloy, the -oy is added. This -oy has survived in
N. K/as -o. i.e. kelo - people call the attention of a
man to themselves by suffixing -6 to the root kel or
nodu in Colloquial Speech.

Later grammarians 2 have used the imperative
for giving a blessing, advising, inducing respectfully
to do, debating how to do, ordering an inferior to do,
begging a superior to do, laying down the law, and
praying.

C. The Optative.

The desire or a wish is expressed by an optative.

The optative is formed by the addition of -ge
(-ke) to roots ending in -i, -u, e. and 1, without any
tense suffix :

tani-ge, kedu-ge, pefcu-ge, nene-ge, vele-ge,
sal-ge.

Those used in the sense of a blessing : tani-ge.
pe/cu-ge, nene-ge, velege :

In the sense of a curse : keduge, sal-ge. (nara-
kakke).

1. SMD. 227, KSS. 463, KG. p, 146.

2. KSS. 465, SMD. 229.

214

D. The Infinitive.

The infinitive is formed here by the addition of
-e or -al to the verbal root (whether the root ends in
a vowel or a consonant) without any tense-suffix.
These remain the same in all the tenses and do riot
change for gender and number. The time denoted by
the infinitive is to be determined by that of the finite
verb. The infinitives here have a subject of their
own and the finite verb of the sentence has its own
subject. This use of the infinitive is a kind of loca-
tive absolute, l and is intended to denote the minor
actions that take place contemporaneously with the
principal action of the verb.

This kind of infinitive is not very much in use in
N. K.

The forms here are : appe, alare, ag-e, al-e,
eyd-e, oppe, kol-e, yen-e, (aZkalo, nniye).

In aZkalo, < a/ku, the suffix -alo is used ? M.D.
121.

In uniye, the rt. is un - to eat. This uniye is
used in the sense of uniie and unnal - for eating (or
for causing to be eaten. ? )

The meaning of these infinitives is e.g. appe-when
it embraced, embraces or will embrace (it embracing.)

E. The Negative Mood.

The Et. + termination = the negative verb.
There are only two forms.
I. sg. (1) meccen - I do not agree.
III. pi. (2) nillavu - They do not remain,
neuter.

The negative forms are used (1) for the present;
and (2) for the future. These negative forms of verbs
are rarely used in N. K.

1. SMD. 246. KSS. 587-588, cf. T. H. article 41, No. 8.

Voice.

There are two voices - active and passive. All
the examples given under ' Conjugation ' above are in
the active voice. But there is only one passive form
of the future 3rd. pi. masc. eydappaduvar < eyd-al-
padu-v-ar.

rt. + infinitive suffix + padu + tense suffix +
termination. ~ the passive (future) form.

There is only one passive participial noun :
eriveppaduvor. The passive is not common in 0. K,
and not popular in N. K.

Verbs and Participles in so-called Compounds.

See ' Use of Cases ' and ' Composition ' ante.

216

A list of verbal roots, used in these

Transitive : Meaning. Transitive:

attu

- to run after

tar

adaZ

- to ascend

tore

appu

- to embrace

nene

a/i

- to destroy

nodu

ai

- to rule

non

ikku

to beat, to kill

I

- to give

padu

un

- to eat

y

- to carry

pade

en

- to say

pa/cu

ettu

- to lift

piri

eru

- to ascend

punu

ondu

- to unite

peteu

kay

- to protect

peZ

kit

- fco uproot

pode

kodu

- to give

pol

kudu

- to bring

together

bidu

key

- to do

madu

kel

- to hear

muttu

kore

- to cut or carve

rueccu

kol

- to kill

in ettu

kol

- to take

tankn

- to touch

vidu

Intransitive :

al

- not to be suit-

ir

able

il

alar

- to open

\l

a/ku

- to be without

strength

ui

agu

- to become

oppu

inscriptions.

Meaning.

to bring

to give up

to remember

to see

to vow reli-
gious penance

to experi-
ence, to suffer

to get

to whisper

to separate

to promise

to increase

to say

to cover

to cleave
asunder

to let go

to do

to touch

to assent, to
agree

to place the
foot on

to let go ; cp.
bidu

to be
not to be
to abandon,
to sacrifice
to be
to shine

217

kidu

tani

tavu

tor

nade

nil'

nere

Causative
nirisu

palisu
bidisu
madisu -

to be ruined
to feel satisfied
to decrease
to appeai-
to walk
to stand
to become full
or perfect

to cause to

stand
to cause to be

protected
to cause to be

released
to cause to be

done

pogu
baZ

- to enter
- to live

bar

to come

raigu

to remain
over, to ex-
ceed

inugi
sagi
sal

to contract
p

- to go

lekkisu -

salisu
sadhisu -

to cause to
be reckoned
with

to cause to
be given

to cause to
be accom-
plished.

Substantives derived from Verbal Roots.

The following substantives in these inscriptions
are derived from verbal roots by the addition of
suffixes :

Abstract Noons.

1. -ge. al-ge (rule, government, from al ' to rule ')

osage ' delight ' from ose 4 to be delighted '
cf. T. vaZkai - living.

2. -te. negarte ' fame ' from negaZ ' to shine ' Te.

negadta . cp T. nata-ttai.

3. -pi. nompi ' religious penance ' from non * to make

a religious vow/ T. nompu. Te.. nomu.

218

4. -pu. varppu ' firmness ' probably from T. varu i to

dry ' T. varppu.

5. -me. mudu-me ' ripening, old age ' from mudu

4 to ripen, to advance in growth ' T. -mai,
illamai ' poverty ' and kutirnai.

6. -vu. vaZ-vu 4 living, life ' from vaZ ' to live '

7. -(a) vu. iravu ' existence ' from ira ' to be, to

exist ' T. iravu, iruppu ; varavu 4 arrival '
from var c to come ' T. varavu.

-tana : okkaltana ' farming ' from okkal 4 thrashing '

from 4 okku ' to tread out corn '. This suffix

is said to be of Skt. origin. It is found in

all the South Indian languages. T.

kudittanam * farming, ' eZetanam ' poverty.'

Te. goppatanamu ' nobility '; cinnatanamu 'mean-

ness.

It is possible that it may have come from tan
'one's own self.' But abstract ideas are of later
origin and hence the Kan. People may have borrowed
this -tana from Skt. But the existence of a large
number of suffixes for the formation of abstract
nouns shows that the abstract notion was not new
or strange to them. I believe that -tan may be
Dravidian. There is another word in T. tanmai
' nature, inherent quality'. Here -mai is the abstract
noun-forming suffix, corresponding to -me in Kana-
rese. If tan-mai is Dravidian, it is certain that-
-tanarn is Drn. also, as -am is the normal neuter
formative in T. paZam ' fruit ', itam ' place ' valam
c right ' itam ' left ' Japam * repetition of mantras,
counting the beads in prayer.'

219

In the following the Abstract Nouns formed are
now used as common nouns :
nile : ' standing ' from nil to stand '
nile is not found in Kittel. T. Nilai. K. nela s. n.
sg. nom. - now used as nele l permanent abode.
pftvn : ' spring ' from pay ' to spring '. Now used to

denote an object which springs ' a snake ' T.

pampu. Te. pamu.

The following two are roots used without change
to denote the result of the action denoted by the
verb :
pali : ' to slander ' here * slander ', (T. Pa/i, N. and

Vb.)
pulu :- ' to rot, to decay , here 4 a worm ' T. pu/u

(N. and Vb.)

A few of such roots which are used both as rts.
and nouns taken from Dictionaries is given under -u
in the nom. under " Nouns." (ante)

220

ADVERBS.

There are three kinds of adverbs : 1. Adverbs
of time, 2. Adverbs of place, and 3. Adverbs of
manner.

1 Adverbs of time.

andu C then), anduvaZikke (thereafter), in (still), indu
(now), endu (when), pin (before), begam (Iw.
soon).

2 Adverbs of place.

illi (here), kelage (down), porage (outside), mel (above),
mele (above).

3* Adverbs of Manner.

antu (in that manner), ante (like), intu (in this
manner), entu (how), dal (certainly), val
(certainly), valam (cetainly), vol (like), vole (like)
The following adverbs have the first syllable in

common :

andu and antu ; indu and intu ; endu and entu.
Suffix -du makes them adverbs of time and -tu
makes them adverbs of manner. These corres, T
pond t,o the pronouns, avan, ivan and en.

anduvaZikke is a compound adverb formed from andu
(then) and vaZikke (afterwards).
Of the other adverbs, ante (probably from an - to

say) - apparently ; in (< proximate demonstrative

base iv) - hence, from this

kelage (<kiZ - the state of being low) - Under (loc.
of kela-gu)

pora-ge (<pora - the outside) - loc. of pora-gu - out-
side.

ba/ikke (<baft - going, passing on, following - a way,
a road) - after-perhaps a dative.

mel - the top-part, nom.

pol - from pol - to resemble and infcervocalically vol.

These are either nouns or verbal derivatives,
used adverbially.

Since adverbs qualify verbs, their gender is
dependent on that of the verbs they qualify.

Adverbs of place are preceded either

(1) by an uninftected stem :

adrirnel, rsigiris'ile-tnel, Kaivappubettammel,
tirthagiri-mel, dhatri-mel, s'ikhi-mel ; (See " Use of
Cases " ante.)

or

(2) by a Noun in the gen. case.

Katavapranalgiriya mel (on the top of the Kata-
vapra mountain), balamel (on the sword), (SMD. 118),
varddhiya mel (on the sea), tiradanadakelage - (under
the edge of the land near the bank.)

The adverb of manner vol is similarly preceded
by an uninflected stem :

teravol, rnafijuvol, suracaparnbol
(like the wave), (like the dew), (like the rainbow).

In suracapauibol, v > b after the nasal.

In salva-vol, vol comes after salva. the future
relative participle of sal - to go, and also in bittavol,
pol and intervocalically vol from pol - to resemble ;
the constant use of pol as the second member of a
compound rnay have led to the adoption of vol as an
adverb where initial p- becoming intervocalic, > -v-.
vol is not used independently.

Adverbial post- positions :

(1) The use of agi (adv. pp. of agu - to become -
having become) with a preceding noun in the norn, as
an adverb is found in bhadram-agi, are-y-agi.

222

(2) Nouns in the instrumental case are used
to express an adverbial meaning (See " Use of Cases "
under ' Nouns ')

(3) A demonstrative pronoun in the nom. sg.
denoting quantity is used in an adverbial sense.

inisu - (a little, this much).

(4) Nouns denoting time and preceded by
numerals are used as adverbs :

irppattondu divasarh, ondutirhgal, murutimgal
(See " Use of Cases ").

avicaram, S'asvatarh and Sarvvabadha pari-
haram, sarvvapariharam (Iws.) - are used as adverbs.

223
INTERJECTIONS

No examples.

CONJUNCTIONS

The following conjunctions are used in these
inscriptions to connect words and sentences , but -um
is the only conjunction used to connect sentences :
-um, -um, -am, -anu, men.

These are suffixed to the case-terminations of
nouns, pronouns and adjectival substantives except
in the ace. where this conjunction comes in between
the stem and the termination, and also to infinitives
and participles. Each of the words and sentences to
be combined has this -um, -um, -am or -anu added to
it generally. The principle is the same for both
numbers and all genders, sometimes this -um is
added to single words to mean * also. 1

The -m of -um and -aih remain unchanged when
preconsonantal, but become -m or -n before a vowel.
As the last syllable of a verse, it is found written
as -um.

The origin of these is unknown at present. 1

-um and -um are found in N. K. as -u with the
loss of the final nasal, -am is not found at all. But
-anu is replaced by agali, the imperative form of agu
( to become ' and adaru.

(A) I. Substantives with ttm

L -ttm : (also, and)

sorkkagamundarum Edeyagamundarurh Mojeja-
ramaniyagamundarum .... Andugiya gami-
garum (6-8 and 10).

J. ODG, p, 407 and p, 53?. tor -uip

224

II. -um.

1. Aluarasarum rnahadeviyaruih Citravahana-
rurii ; 2. bhaihtamum kaviliya palurh eZtum

3. polipukolliyurh aramanetanadabhagamum :

4. Valliggameyara dasadiyum Amaliyara devadiyum

Alavalliyara Ravicandanum Nirilliya.

Sinderagamigarurh ; 5. Senavarasarum dharmma-
garanigaruih ; 6. peninorvvan koluvonum koduvo-
nurh; 7. sthitadehakarnalopamamga 8 J ubhatnum,
-um connecting single words :

attamurii Kondarssarum, akkoreteyum.
-um connecting sentences :

There are two examples :

1. iielanum velege parvvarurh prajeyuih tanige,

2. koduvorurh pancamahapataka-samyuktar
appar devadandadioda eriveppaduvoruiii appar
rajadandamum eydappaduvar.

In the following example, -urii is added only to
the last word :

" Banavasiyanagaramum" and the three pre-
vious words which are connected have no -urn suffixed
to them :

Bhavagamundanu (1) Candagarnundanu (2)
EdevoZ-alnadu (3) Banavasiya nagaranmm saksi
(8*- 37 and 38),

I suspect that the final -rh of 1, 2 and 3 are not
clearly seen in the plates as given. The -rh may be
there. The other possibility is that u may stand for
u which is the N. K. equivalent of -um.

II. Pronouns with -um

avar-um ; ar-uih.

III. Adj. substantives with -um

1. adan a/ivorum aZival pa/cidor (urn) manade
nenvorum a?imenendu upadesaiij koduvorum ;

225

2. idan kojvonuih koduvonum ;

3. int unvoruin uniye koduvorum Devedittiye-

rindum Saerinduih kolvoruiii

ideyuiii kolvoruiii kondu unvorum ;

4. koZuvornii) ; 5. torevoruih unnururii.

In the examples given above, the -urn is suffixed
to the nominatives mostly. But in the following,
-urii is suffixed to the ace. in between the stem and
the termination, as already stated :

(1) osageyurii alavanavum aputrakaporudu-
man ; *2. sasira kavileymh parvvaruman. Cp. Part
I. A; p. 14, hasuvam haruvanam.

In these examples, the ace. ending is suffixed to
the -UHI of the last word, -poruduman and parvvaru-
man and not to (1) osageyurii alavanavurh and (2)
kavileyum, though -an is implied in (1) and (2) from
the context and -um is suffixed to each. The same
usage is very common in N. K. cf. sthalamgala
ayariigalanum (34) E. C. III. TN. 101 ; and kavileyanu
brahmanaranu E. C. VII. Sh. 78.

But in ' Nayarkhandamurh Jeluguralgeyan aluttu
-uih is not placed between alge and -an. All these
examples are taken from prose inscriptions. There
are no examples from verse inscriptions.
-urh with the instrumental :

Devedittiyerindum Saerinduni.
-urn with the dative :

Only one example : eradum na^kc ' to both the
countries.' But eradum is a numeral used here as
an adjective. In N. K. the form will be * eradu
nadigu ' or eradu nadugaHgiV
-nm with participles and infinitives :

adv. participle : alutturh,

negative infinitive ; lekkisadum.

a, o. i, 15

226

(B) -am (also, even)
The examples are :

ace. ell-arh-an.
dat. argg-arh.

This has not survived in N. K.

(C) -anu :

As already stated -anu is suffixed to each of the
words it connects. The meaning is 4 either - or.'

The only example is

Maranarm Vokuliyanu (either Mara or Vokuli)

This has not survived in N. K., but is replaced
by c agali ' or ' adaru.'

The origin of this -anu is not known (-an-urii?).

(D) -men - and.

men Sattar avicaram (61-10).

227

Word-Order.

The sentences in these inscriptions are generally
of the following pattern :

(1) (adj.) Subject, (adj.) Object, (adv.) verb.

(trans.)

(2) (adj.) Subject, adj. predieatively used, adv.

verb ; (intrans.)

The exceptions which are very few, are found in
verse more than in prose.

The attributives precede the substantives except
in verse. When a proper noun appears with another
substantive in apposition, the latter precedes the
former in prose, while in verse, this order may differ.
In strings of titles, the substantives in apposition
follow the proper noun. When an adj. qualifies a
substantive, it generally stands before the substan-
tive, but when it is used predieatively, it follows the
substantive. An adv. or advl. phrase which modifies
an adj. or a participle (used as an adj.), precedes the
adj. or the participle.

The subject comes at the beginning of the sen-
tence and before the object if the verb is transitive.
But if the vb. is intransitive, the subject comes as
near the verb as possible.

An adv. or advl. phrase used as an attributive to
the verb or participles, comes as near these as possi-
ble. When the adv. is a caseform such as the
instrumental or the locative, or the dative, which are
really enlargements of the predicate, they stand
before the verb or participle, and as near as possible,
except in poetry, where it may precede or follow the
noun it modifies.

Absolute construction by the use of the infini-
tives in -e is found ancj. this .absolute phrase precedes

15*

228

the clause with the finite verb. This, being an advl
adjunct, comes in the place where the adv. naturally
comes.

The adv. participles are used to express a series
of actions succeeding one another without the use of
conjunctions ; -urii, the conjunctive particle is also
used to connect words and sentences. In the only
interrogative sentence, the interrogative pronoun
4 en * is suffixed to the the adj. substantives. There
are two imperative sentences wherein the second
personal pronoun which lathe subject is not expressed.
These two sentences are in verse.

There are five optative sentences wherein the
order is the subject, the enlargement of the verb and
the intransitive verb.

There are two negative sentences where
negation is expressed by the verb in the negative
mood.

There are simple, complex and compound sen-
tences. The word order in complex and compound
sentences is not different from that of a simple
sentence. But the simple sentence is only one
sentence. In the complex sentence, there is a prin-
cipal clause with one subordinate clause.

In a complex sentence, the internal word-order of
different clauses does not differ from that of a simple
sentence, except that the different clauses are corre-
lated by means of adverbial participles. Further, the
subordinate clauses in a complex sentence come first
and the principal clause comes last. The subordinate
clauses in the complex sentences in these inscriptions
are noun clauses.

The compound sentence is a series of independent
simple or complex sentences connected by the

229

The Subject:

The subject precedes the verb. But if the verb is
transitive, the object comes in between the subject
and the verb.

Examples :

(a) -with transitive verbs :

1. (Kandarbor) periya osageyum aputrakaporu-
duman vittar ' (Kandarbor remitted (the fees leviable
at) the festivity of attaining puberty) and the duty
leviable in the case of a man dying without a son '
(5-5).

2. S'antapana maga Devereyage Nastappa
gondu kottan 'Having brought, Nastappa gave to
Devereya, son of S'antapa ' (8-29).

3. Avar svarggagraman eridar ' He ascended
the hich heaven ' (25-2).

(b) with intransitive verbs :

1. AZivon paiicarnahapatakan akurii * He who
destroys will become guilty of the five great sins.

(1-4).

2. kadu salvon paramakalyanabhagigal appor

4 He who protects this shall become the worthy
recipient of excellent good fortune ' (6-17).

3. Carita S'rmarnadheya prabhu munin vratagal
nontu saukhyastban ay dan. ' The lord named Carita
S'ri, having observed the vows of a muni, became the
possessor of happiness.' (14-4).

(c) In the following there is no verb :

1. Kittere yara nisidhige ' The tomb

(or epitaph) of Kittere ya' 19-2).

2- Devakhantiyarnnisi (dige) ' The tomb or
epitaph of Devakhantiyar ' (42-2).

230

3. Puspasena cari ya nisidhige 'The

tomb or epitaph of Puspasenacari " 47-2).

4. Gunamatiavvegala nisidhige. ' The tomb or
epitaph of Gunarnatiavvegal ' (55-1).

5. Sri Jinamarggan mtisampannan Sarppa
eulamani ' Sarppa-culamani (Crest-jewel among
serpents) follower of Jina and of righteous conduct 7
(61-1 and 2).

The verb is understood ' this is '.

(d) 1. In the following the subject comes

after the verb.
Verb.

Vb. In prose:

* kottar Seiiavarasaruih dharminagaraniga-
rum ' Senavarasa and the dharinakaranika (the
palace officer in charge of charities) will (divide and)
give' (3-9 and 10).

It is probable that the line is misplaced in the
inscription.
Vb. In verse :

meccen an c I do not approve ' (37-8).

2. In this verse, a series of advl. trans, past
participles is used without the subject coining
first.
In Poetry participles:

The subject comes near the finite verb in the
sentence : duritabhfid vrksaman kiltu alare poded
ajnanas' ai]endraman,^oW^., Uramithyatvapramudha-
sthirataranrpanan, metti gandhebhamaydan carita
S'rlnamadheyaprabhu Saukhyastban aydan.'

' Having uprooted the tree of sin, having smitten
the mountain of ignorance, having cut asunder the
silly but firm king of false doctrine, and having
trampled on the five rutting elephants (the five

231

senses), beloved lord of Suravidya (heavenly learning)
named Carita S'rT, [on the hill named KaZbappu,
praised by the god and sages,] observed the vows
of a rnuni, became the possessor of happiness."
(14-14).
The Object:

The object always comes after the subject and
precedes the verb or adv. participle in prose :

(1) avar Svarggagraman aridar ' He ascended
the high heaven." (25-2).

(2) Pegurama Suralokavibhuti eydidar c Pegu-
rama attained the splendour of the world of gods '
(24-2).

(3) aputraka poruduman vittar * (He) remitted
the duty leviable in the case of a man dying without
a son' (5-5).

But, in poetry, the object may come after the
verb.

J. Rajmrnatigantiyar namagind oltidu yendu
eri giriyan 4 Kajmmatiganti, having said " This is
good for us now " and having ascended the mountain '
(43-3).

2. Mahanantimatigantiyar suraldka saukkyade-
deyan tain eydi ildal manarii l Mahananta matigant-
iyar, having reached the abode of the happiness of
the world of gods, sacrificed (her) mind ' (44-4).

3. In (d) 2 above, the participles come after
their objects.

4. meccen an T dhararuyul iravari ' I do not
approve existence on this earth ' (37-3).

The verb :

Comes last in the sentence in prose.
1. aZivon elaneya narakada puZu akum * He who
destroys will become a worm in the (lowest) seventh
heir (1-4).

232

2. avar svarggagrarnan eridar. ' He ascended
the high heaven ' (25-4).

3. Kandarbor aputraka poradurnan vittar (6-6).

4. Neduboreya Panapa bhatarar nontu mudip-
pidar 4 Panapabhatara of Nedubore, having observed
the vows, ended his life ' (13-1 & 2).

But in verse also, the verb comes in the end, but
there are exceptions:
In verse.

1. perggoravam Sarnadhi neredoii nont eydid or
siddhiyan.

4 The great guru accomplished Sarnadhi, and
having observed the vow, attained perfection ' (2] -4).

2. niravadyann eri &varggam sivanilepadedan
sadhugal pujyamanan * The stainless (he) being
honoured by the good, attained the happy condition
(36-4).

3. meccen an Idharaniyul iravan ' I do not
approve existence on this earth ' (37-3).

Participles.

Advl. and declinable participles fake objects,
if they be transitive. Here the .object precedes the
participle

I. ADVL. PARTICIPLES.

Trans. In prose.

1. Sri Pogilli Sendraka rnaharajar Nayar-
khandamurii Jelugur dlgeyan aluttu (rii) "While the
illustrious Pogilli, the Sendraka maharaja is adminis-
tering the Nayarkhanda and the government of
Jejugur."_ (5-4).'

2. Aluarasar Gunasagaradvitlyanamadheyan
Kadambarnandalarnan aluttum * When Aluarasa, with
the second name of Gunasagara, was ruling the
Kadambamandala ' (62-2 & 3),

233

3. tapaman keydu ' Having practised penance '
(44-1).

In poetry also, the object precedes the verb
generally :

1. tan deham ikki ' having sacrificed his body '

2. ghanammarittaman vittu ' Having given up
the great misfortunes' (34-1).

3. idan kole 'If nny one takes this' (6-15).

4. idan kftdu salvon ' He who preserves this '
(6-17).

But, in sonio verses, probably for adjustment of
metrical length, the object comes after the adv.
participle :

1. metti gandhebha maydan c Having trampled
down the five rutting elephants (the five senses)'
(14-2).

2. niravadyan eri svarggam ' The stainless (one)
having ascended (to) heaven' (36-2).

3. eri giriyan ' Having ascended the mountain
(43-3).

II. DECLINABLE PARTICIPLES (TRANS) TAKE OBJECTS
WHICH PRECEDE THE PARTICIPLES.

The declinable participles with gender suffixes >
adj. substantives. These take objects which precede
them.

1. nitta dharmmaman kddord kulaih pelcuge
* May the family of the man who preserves (protects)
this permanent work of charity prosper ' (3-8).

2. idan alivon pancamahapatakan akum ' He
who destroys this becomes guilty of the five great
sins (1-4).

3. Sasira kavileyurh parvvarumdn konda paiica-
inahapataka-sarhyuttan akkurii ' He will be guilty

234

of the five great sins' of having killed 1,000 brown
cows and brahmins, (6-13 & 14).

Substantives in Apposition.

In prose and verse, the substantive in apposition
precedes the proper noun :

1. Anesetiya aliya Basantakumara, ' Basaiita-
kumara, son-in-law of Aneseti/ (8-27).

2. Santapana niaga Devereyage i To Devereya,
son of Santapa ' (8-29).

3. Moniguruvara s'isya Kottarada Gunasena-
guruvar ' Gunasenaguruvar of Kottara, the disciple
of Moniguruva ' (12-2 & 3).

In verse.

4. Vegura parama prabhava risiyar Sarvvajna-
bhattarakar ' Sarvvajnabhattarakar, a risi or sage of
supreme glory of Vegiir' (15-2).

5. guravam nam Mauniyacariyar * Mauniyacari-
yar, our guru ' (50-1).

But in verse, the substantives in apposition
follow the proper noun :

1. Masenar paramaprabhavarisiyar ' Masena,
the sage of supreme glory : (25-1).

2. Mahadevan munipungavan ' Mahadeva, the
chief of Sages ' (35-1).

Strings of Titles.

1. sri Vinayaditya Rajas ' raya S ' rlprthivlval-
labha raaharajadhiraja parames'vara bhatara (5, 6, &
7-1).

But in

2. S'rltnat prithivlvallabha Mangallsana * of
Mariigalisa, the favourite of the world.' (1-1)

Attributives precede the noun they qualify
(numerals, cardinal and ordinal, adjectives and nouns
are taken as attributives in this connection).

235

Prose.

1. periya osageyum (5 5 & 6-5).

2. elaneya narakada puZu akum c (he) will bo-
come the worm of the seventh hell ' (1-4).

Ver*e.

3. rdgadvZsatamdwala vyapagatar S'uddhatma
Samydddhakar Vegura parama-prabhavarisiyar
Sarvvajnabhattarakar ' Sarvvajna bhattarakar, a risi
or sage of supreme glory of Vegur, free from the dark
stain of desire and hatred, a pure souled warrior'
(15-1 &2).

4. karo-il, naltapadharmmada Sasimati S'rigan-
tiyar ' Sasimati S'riganti, stainless and of good
penance and virtue' (33-2) Verse. 3. capal-illa,
Naviluru Saihghada MahanantamatTgantiyar ' Maha-
nantamatigantiyar, firm-minded and of the Navilur
sarngha" (44-2).

Declinable participles, functioning as adjs.,
precede the noun they qualify.

Verse.

1. bhadrarnagida dharrnmam, the (Jaina) faith
which had greatly prospered (w^hich was firmly esta-
blished) (29-2). '

Verse.

2. S'risarhgarhgala peZda Siddha Samayam
tappade nontu c Having observed the vow in con-
sonance with the rules of the siddhas, enunciated by
the Samghas (25-1).

Verse.

3. peZda vidhanadindu { In the prescribed manner
(34-2).

Prose.

4. konda paiicamahapatakan (5-14).

236

Bub when these attributives are used predicati-
vely, these follow the noun they qualify and precede
the verb :

1. ittodan alivon pancamah&patakan akurh He
who destroys this gift becomes guilty of the five great
sins (1-4).

2. a/ivon eZaneya narakada pulu akuin (1-4).

3. kolvorum unvorum panca wiahdpata samyut-
tan agi. The buyer as well as tho enjoy er having
become guilty of the five great sins ' (3-7).

4. idan kadu salvon p&Y&w&kalyanahhdgigal
appor. He who protects this (charity) shall become
the worthy recipients of the most extreme good
fortune. (6-18)

Verse.

5. Carita S'ri namadheyaprabhu muninvarataga,
ndntu Saukhyastlian ay dan (14-4).

Verse.

6. Aksayaklrtti nontu bhaktiyim aksimanakke
ramyasuralokasukakke bhagi a (darn) c Having
observed the vow with devotion, Aksayaklrtti became
a participator in the happiness of the gods, delightful
to the eye and the mind' (20-4).

Verse.

7. vinayacdra-prabh&van tapadim adhikan
Candradevacaryanaman, niravadyam eri svarggarh
(36-2).

Here in 7, two adjs. precede and one adj. follows
the noun.

8. K and arbor adhiktirigal age (6-5).

9. gamigarum mukhamage (6-11).

10. idake kamara Vasanta kumara saksi (8-31).
The gen. case of substantives and pronouns
precede the nouns like attributives.

237

1. narakaddpu\u (1-4).

2. Mamgali sand kalmanege ' To the stonehouse
of Manigallsa (1-1).

3. Kilc/antsvarada dlvara parivariya bharh-
tamum (3-3).

4. Vedevalliyara devadiyurii (5-8) ' Also the
temple priest of Vedevalli '

5. Banavasiya, knesetiya ajiya, the son-in-law
of Aneseti of Banavasi (8-27).

6. AgaZi ya Moniguruvara s'isya ' The disciple
of Moniguruva of Agaft' (12-2).

7. namrna Kalanturanam 'Our (guru) ofKajan-
turu (21-3).

8. Tarekada, perjediya, niodeya kalapakada
guruvadigal * The guruvadi of Tarekadu, of the matted
hair, of the Munjagrass group/ (31-2 & 3).

Adverbs.

Adverbs or case forms of substantives used as
adv. adjuncts precede the verb or the participle
and are kept as near these as possible.

1. Laksanavantar enti( enalu * When those
who knew the symptoms were in doubt how ' (20-2).

2. (perggoravam) salaiiibaZatapograd intu nada-
dom

3. int endu ' having said thus ' (33-3).

4. valav adu divam pokka ' He entered heaven
most certainly.'

Nouns in the nom. used as advs. precede the
verbs or participles in the same manner :

Adv. of time:

1. Ire/pattarulam okkaltanamkeyvon avittidalli
veleyade keduge fc He who practised agriculture for
140 years, let that which he sows rot, without sprou-
ting (6-16).

238

Adv. of time:

2. mUrutimgal riontu mudippidar, (19-2)

Adv. of Place:

3. balamel, 8'ikhimele sarppadamahcLdantft-
gradul salvavol SalambaZatapograxl intu nadadom

nurentii samvatsaram ' He enagaged himself for one
hundred and eight years in the practice of severe
penance which was like walking on the sharp edge of
a sword or on fire, or passing over the great fangs of a
cobra ' (21-1 & 3).

The last one marked with an * is an adv. of time
coining after the verb-in verse.

The case forms of nouns used in an advl. sense :

1. nontu bhaktiyim 'Having observed the vow
with devotion ' (20-3).

2. nontu inbinim ' Having observed correctly
(or 'sweetly')' (25-1).

In these verses the instr. case form comes after
the participle they modify for purposes of metre.

The locative form of substantives, used adver-
bially, precede the verb or the participle :
loc.

1. Varanas'iyalul konda (5-13) ' of killing in
Varan asi '

2. tlZthadol nontu ' Having observed the vow
on the holy Ka/bappu' (17-1).

3. Sarppada mahadantagradul salvavol 'Like
passing over the great fangs of a cobra' (21-1).

4. S'ailadul ' On the mountain' (34-2).

Dative:

1. devarke puni iruva * Who have promised to
work for God ' (1-2).

2, naragakke salge ' May be go iato hell ' (3-8),

239

3. eradum naZke raja S'ravitarnage ' Having
proclaimed to both the districts or nads ' (6-12).

4. Svarggalayakkerid&r. ' He ascended (to)
the abode of heaven' (33-4).

But in poetry the dative follows the verb in two
cases.

1. S'rirupa lila dhana vibhava maharas 1 iga}
nillav arggarh ' The large treasures of beauty, pleas-
sure, wealth and power are transient and will not be
permanent for any ' (37-2).

2. ayusyaman entu nod enag int endu.

k enage ' the dative of 1st person pron. sg,
comes after the finite verb nodu (33-3).

Skt. Iws. used as advs. precede the verb in prose.

1. Sarvvabadhapariharam bittar ' Gave it free
of all taxes and imposts ' (7-4).

2. Sasvatam eydidan (He obtained permanen-
tly) (41-4).

But in verse, it comes after the verb :

3. men sattar avicaram 'And they died
undoubtedly (for want of foresight)' (61-10).

Adverbial participles are used as adverbs and
they precede the verbs :

1. ndntu mudippidar (13-2).

2. eri svarggam S'ivanile padedan sadhugal
pujyamanan (36-2).

3. tappade nontu inbinin svarggagrauianeridan.
tappade (neg. adv. participle) c correctly '

allade, the neg. participle of al ' to be fit, to be suitable '
is used here in the sense of ' excepting ' or ' except '.
This allade comes after the noun in the noni. with
its preceding genitive i devandevana parijanam
allade ' (3-4) ( Except the attendants of the god of
gods,'

240

Adv. past participles not only express the actions
or circumstances of the subject, but also connect the
action with the action denoted by the finite verb.

I. guruvadigal, nontu mudippidar ' Having
observed the vow, the Gruru, ended his life.'

The observance of the vow is expressed by the
adv. pp. nontu, and the same is connected with the
action denoted by the finite verb ( mudippidar.'

C 2. Katavapra S'ailamacZaZefe perggoravam sama-
dhi Neredon nontu eydidor siddhiyan (21-3 & 4).
' Having ascended the Katavapra mountain, having
observed the vow, he completed samadhi and attained
perfection.'

3. Inscription 14. A series of adv. pps. connect
the several actions with the finite verb.

II. The infinitive in an absolute construction,
not only expresses a contemporary action, but also
connects a series of actions like an adv. pp:

S'rl Vinayaditya Bfvjasraya S'riprthivl vallabha
uiaharajadhiraja parames'vara bhatara prthivlrajyarii
keye, S'ripogilli Sendraka maharajar Nayarkhandamum
Jelugur algeyan alutfcu Kandarbor adhikariga-1 age,
periya osageyuih alavanavurii aputrakaporuduman
vittar (5-1 to 6).

The conjunction Particles.

I. um, -urii and-am are suffixed to each of the
substantives or sentences to be connected :

A. Substantives:

Prose. 1. Valliggameyara dasadiyftw Alavalli
yara Ravicandan?/w, Sorkbagamundarsw?, Edeyaga-
mundar77m, Molejararaaiiiya gamuiidarflm Navalli-
yar?/m Andugiya gamigar^m, Nlrilliya Sindera
mukhavage (6-7-11 5-7-11).

241

Prose. 2. Bhavagarnunda?m Candagamundanu,
Edevolalnadu Banavasiya nagaranmw Saksi (8-37 &
38).

3. aZivomw aZival paZcidor manade nenevonw?
[attval paZcidor manade nenevorwra] alimen end
upade s'am koduvoTum panca rnahapataka samyukta-
rappar [62 (8-11).]

B. Sentences:

uelBiU'um velege, parvvar^m prajeyurii tanige
(6-18, 5-18).

IT. arm suffixed to each of the two nouns
expresses the idea of c either-or-'
Marananu Vokuliyanu (Either Mara or Vokuli).

III. men. nien Sattar avicaraiii. Here men
connects the sentences.
The absolute construction.

The infinitive which denotes a contemporary
action gives rise to the abs. construction in the
following and it is placed in the beginning of the
sentence.

1. S'rlvinayaditya Kaja S'raya prthivlrajyam keye
S'ripogilli Sendraka maharajar Nayarkhandarnum
Jelugur AZgeyan aluttu Kandarbor &dhikdrigal age.
periya osageyurii alavanavurii aputrakapordurnan
vittar (5-3 to 6).

2. S'rimat Citravahana pinduvvale Killum
Nagennan adhikarigal age (3-1 & 2).

Here the subject of each of the infinitives is
different.

The absolute construction comes in the middle
of the sentence in verse : Masenarparamaprabhava
risiyar KaZvappina vettadul, S'r! Sam gamgala peZda
siddha Samayan tappade nont inbinin prasadanta-
raman vicitra kanaka prajvalyadin mikkudan S&sirv-
var vvara ptije dand uye> avar svarggagraman eridar.

G. o. I. i

242

Since the subject and the finite verb are far apart,
the subject is the first and the verb the last, in this
verse, the pronoun avar is used after the abs.
construction.

The Interrogative sentence.

There is only one example and that in verse, as
a subordinate noun clause in a complex sentence,
kattida Simghamen 4 kettod en etnage, erhdu bittavol
(61-9). ( In the same way as releasing the bound lion,
saying ' What' is the harm to us.' The interrogative
pronoun, en ' What ' is used to convert the indicative
into an interrogative sentence.

Imperative sentence:

There are two examples in verse : (a) one is the
main clause:

keloy pin Katavapra S'aila madaZde namrna Kalantu-
ranam bale perggoravarh Samadhi neredon (21-2 & 3).
bale keloy ' Oh girl, listen ' is the correct prose order.
But in this verse, the imperative second sg. comes first
in this line and the vocative comes as the first word
in the next line.

(6) The second is an imperative sentence, used
as a noun clause and as an object of a participle :

" ayusyaman entu nod enage tan " int endu. nodu
' See ' is the imper. second sg. masc.

The sentence within quotation marks is used as
the object of endu, pp. of en to say.

The optative sentence:

All these sentences maintain the same word-order
as an indicative sentence (but the verb takes the
suffix-ge). These are used to curse and tu bless.

Curse.

1. Kondu unvorum pancamahapatakasamyuk-
tan agi puti enva naragakke salge (3-7 & 8) ' May he

243

who takes and enjoys (this) become guilty of the five
great sins and go to the hell named puti,'

2. idari kole okkaltanam keyvon a vittidalli
veleyade keduge (5-16).

Blessing.

1. inittadharmmaman kadora kulam pelcuge
(3-8).

2. nelanurh velege, parvarum prajeyum tanige
(5-18) May the earth also be fruitful, may both the
Brahmans and the people enjoy satisfaction.

Negative sentence:

These two sentences are in verse. The order of
words is not the same as that in prose :

1. pirigum S'rirupalila dhanavibhava rnaharas'
igal nillav arggam endu (37-2).

2. meccen an Idharaniyul iravan endu (37-3).
In these the finite verb comes first and the

subject cornes next, probably for the needs of metre.
In 1. there are two finite verbs of which one comes
before, and the other comes after, the subject.

Simple, complex and compound sentences:

The Complex sentence: As already stated, the
word-order in complex and compound sentences does
not differ very much in prose. But the complex or
compound sentence is only one sentence. In a com-
plex sentence, the different clauses are correlated by
means of adverbial participles ; the subordinate clauses
come first and the principal clause comes last.

The subordinate clauses in these inscriptions are
noun clauses :

1. keloy pin Katavapra S'ailarn adaZde namma
Kalanturanam bale perggorava.m samadhi neredon
nontu eydidor siddhiyan (21-3 A 4). 'Ogirl, hear of
him of Kalantur, who having ascended the holy

16*

244

mountain of Katavapra, the great guru accomplished
Samadhi, and having observed the vow, attained per-
fection'.

2. S'asimati S'rlgantiyar vvandu mel arid ' ayus-
yarnan entu nod enage tan int ' endu KaZvappinul
torad a radhane nontu tirtthagirirnel svarggalayakk-
eridar (33-3 & 4).

3. ' Suracapambole vidyullategala teravol man-
juvol toribegam pirigum S'rlriipallla dhana-vibhava
mahasas'igal nillav arggam, paramarttham meccen
an idharaniyul iravan endu Nandisena pravara muni-
varan clevalokakke sandan/

4. ' vaZv ad arid inn enage ' endu Suralokamaha
vibhavasthanan adam. (40-4).

5. Eajnirnatigantiyar 4 narnag ind olt ida nendu
eri giriyan svarggalayam eridar (43-3 & 4).

6. Kattidasimgharnan ' kettoden emage ' endu
bittavol kalige viparitamgahitarkkal kettar (61-9 &
10)".

The compound sentence.

As already stated, the compound sentence is a
series of independent simple or complex sentences,
often connected by the conjunctive particle-um. The
word-order in a compound sentence in prose does n&t
differ from that of the simple sentence.

Two or more simple sentences.

1. kondu unvorurh pancamahapatakasamyuktan
agi puti enva naragakke salge, Initfca dharrnmaman
kadora kulam pelcuge (two sentences) (3-7 & 8).

2. nelanum velege parvvarurh prajeyum tanige
(5-18).

Simple and complex sentences.

3. adan aZivorum aZival pa/cidor manade nene
yorum a/imen endu upades'am koduvorum

5245

pancamha-patakasamyuktar appar devadandadinde eri-
veppadu-vorum appar rajadandamurh eydappaduvar
(three sentences) (62-8 to 13).

" Those who ruin that, or whisper its ruin, or
think it in the mind, or advise others to ruin it, are
guilty of the five great sins, and incur the punish-
ment of the gods and also the punishment of the
king/'

PART II

THE TEXT OF THE INSCRIPTIONS

OF THE 6TH AND THE TTH

CENTURIES.

PART II.
Inscription No. 1.

I. Ant. X. Page 60. 578 A.T). Badarui Ins.

1. vSvasti Srimat prithivivallabha Maihgalisana

2. kalmanego ittodu Laihjigesaramdevarke puni-

iruva

3. mala ^arargge arddha-visadi ittodan = aZivon

4. pancamahapatakan = akurh e/aneya narakada

puu akum

Inscription No. 2.

About 640 A.D. E. C. VII. 8k. 10

1. svasti Srlanadito agrahara

2. ..: Polokesiarasara

3. madisidadegula ryyagajarddha

4. ttisani

(Not intelligible further)

Inscription No. 3.

About 675. A.D. E.G. VI. Kp. 37

1. svasti ! ' Srimat Citravahana pinduvvale 2 ' (Pon-

buccale)

2. Killum 3 * Nagennan adhikarigalage ' (KiZganes'

varada

3. devara parivariya (e) bhamtamum kaviliyapalum

eZtum

4. devandevana parijanam allade peZanorvanaru-

inundo mendukam

1. mala (Fleet)

2. "ponbuccale " (Rice ; E. C. VI. Transliteration p. 178)

3. Killam (ibid p. 178) Do Kanna<Ja P. 322.

249

250

5* int unvorum 1- uniya 2 * koduvorum Devedittiyer-
indam Saerindum

6. abhararn etti ayetie kolvorum miivetmura 3 ' misel

mideyum

7. pogevogi kolvorum kondu unvorurh ' pancama-

hapataka samyutta 4 '

8. nagi puti enva naragakke salgc ' I nitta dharm-

m am an kadora kulam peZcuge '

9. polipu-koljiyuiii aramanetanacla bhaganmm

10. acca kammettiyeki 6 " kottar 6 ' Senavarasarum

dharmmagara

11. nigarurii idan peranorvan kolvonum koduvonum

panca

12. rnahapatakan akkuui fl

Inscription. No 4.

About 680 A.D. E. C. VIII Sa. 79

1. svasti Sri Vikrama

2. ditya bhataraka

3. Cendugoli valiyaradili

4. ligalge kotta bhumi vivaralke

5. bhu thara undadu a

6 kottu sarva.

7 nalidoppancarnaha

8 saihyuktar appar avara

9 dosa

Inscription. No 5.

About 685 A.D. E.G. VII. 8k. 154

1. svasti rl Vinayaditya Eajasraya Sri prthi-

1. intunnam (ibid p. 178)

2. uniya (ibid p. 178)

3. muvettura (ibid p. 178)

4. samyuktan (ibid p. 178)

5. arccakam menfciyeki (ibid p. 178)

6. koj,jia (ibid p. 178)

2. vi vallabha maharajadhiraja paramesvara bha-

3. tara prthivi rajyaihkcye srl Pogillisendraka-

4. maharajar Nayarkhanda.muiii Jeluguralgeyan

5. aluttu Kandarbor adhikarigal age, periya

osageyurii a-

6. lavanavurii aputrakaporuduuian vittar Vallirg-

gamcyara

7. dasadiyum Amaliyara devadiyuni Vedevalliyara

8. devadiyuiii Alarii valliyara 1 'avicandanurii Sakka

Garjjunda-

9. rum Edeyagamundarum Molefira Maniya Gainu-

10. ndaruih Navalliyarurh Andugiya gamigarurh
' Mrilli-

11. ya Sindera gamigaruni mukhamage

eradurii-Na?ke ra-

12. jasravitatiiago prasadaiii keydar idan aZi-

13. von Varanasiyalul

sasira kavileyum parvva-

14. rurhman konda pancatuahapatakasamyu-

lo. tan akkurh idan kole IreZpattarulam okkaltanam

16. keyvon a vittidalli veleyade keduge.

17. idan kadu Salvon para rnakaly ana bhagigal a-

18. ppor Nelanum velege a parvvarum prajeyurn

tanige (ge)

Inscription No. 6.

I. Ant. XIX p. 143. About 685 A.D. Balagamve

Inscription

1. svasti srl Vinayaditya-l^aja-sraya srlprithi-

2. vi-vallabha-maharajadhiraja-paramesvara-bha-

3. tarar prithivi-rajyam-keye ' Sri Pogilli-

Sendraka-

4. maharajar Nayarkhandamum

Jedugur = algeyan = alu

252

5. ttu Kandarbor = adhikariga| = age periya

osageyum a-

6. lavanavum aputraka-porulurnan vittar== Vallig-

garneyara

7. dasadiy umAmaliyara devadiy u m = Vede valliyara

8. devadiyurii Alavalliyara Ravicandamum Sorkka

gamunda-

9. rum Edeya-gamundarum Molejaramaniya-gatnu-

10. mundarurh Navalliyarum Andugiya Gamigarurii

Nlrilli-

11. ya Sindera gamigarum mukhavage eradum-

naZkc ra-

12. ja^ravitam-age prasadam keydar " idan~aZi-

13. von Varanasivadu! = sasira kavileyum parv\ 7 a-

14. ruruan konda panca mahapatakasarhyu-

15. ktan akkum ' idarikole Ir-eZpattarulam

okkaltanam-

16. key von = a vittidalli veleyade keduge '

17. idan kadu Sal von- pararna-kalyanatirttha (m)

gal a I

18. ppar I Nelanum velege parvvaru (m) prajeyum

tanige D

Inscription No. 7.

C. 690 A.D. E. C. VIII Sb. 15

1. svasti Vinayadityasatyasraya-srl-

2. prithivlvallabhar maharajadhiraja-

3. paramesvara bhattarakar Kodakaaiya

4. mahajanakke sarvvabadhaparihara bitte

5. a muva devapadaij] age amoga-

6. avicara 1 * nalkene vagara Brevedi-

7. gala suputra la madi bidisida-

8. ru sesthe an aZidon panca-maha

1. avioaram (Eice : Transliteration E.G. VIIJ. p. 5)

253

9. pataka samyuktaiim *' akku sri Palarama

10. re karutiih biranuggi 2 ' gosigarurii sanda go.

11. liyara adi Adiarasar 3 * kkarnoji ra

12. siganu murukammduu a kattigaviluke-

13. santu enebaru inta 4ala .... a ....Munda
14 candrasuryyam-unga aZidona

15. pancainahapatakan akkun.

Inscription No. 8.

692 A.D.E. C. VIII, Sb. 571
The first 26 lines are in Sanskrit.

27. Banavasiya Anesetiya aliya Basantakuraara

Edevo-

28. Zalanada Salevugeya kotta Sasariarna padedurb

Santapana

29. rnaga Devereyage Nastappa gondu kottan adu

Marananu 6 * Vo-

30. kuliyanu kodamgeyanu poragagale Salevugeya

31. bhagakarh karnara Vasantakumara idake saksi 7 *
32-35. Sanskrit slokas

35. maha

3fi. Sandhi vigrabika sri Bamapunyavallabhena likhi-

tamidam sasanam
37. Bhavagainundanu, Candagamundanu Edevo/al-

nadu Banavasi-
H8. ya Nagaramum Saksi danasara uligam

nikevatu kotam

1. mnakku (Bice ibid)

2. birav uggi (Bice - ibid)

3. Adiarasa (Bice ibid)

4. kamocjera (Bice ibid)

5. gaviluke (ibid)

6. marananu (Bice. Transliteration p. 176, E. C. VIII)

Plate shows sakki.

7. sakki (Bice ibid)

254

Inscription No. 9.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 5.
srl Tlrtthada = goravadigal^no

Inscription No. 10.

About 100 A.D. E.G. II. 6.
srl Ullikka]=goravadigal==n6utu , dar

Inscription No. 11.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 7.

1. srl Perumalu = guruvadigala sisya Dhanne-

2. kuttareviguravi dippidar.

Inscription No. 12.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 8.

1. srl Aga/iya^Moni-

2. Guravara == sisya = Kottarada = Gu-

3. Nasenaguravar = nontu = inudippidar

Inscription No. 13.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 9.

1. srl Neduboreya Panapa-

2. bhatarar^nnontu rrmdippidar.

Inscription No. 14.

About 100 A.D. E.G. II. 12.

J. Sri duritabhudvrsaman kl/t alare poded ajnan-
asailendraman po?

2. d uramithyatva-pramudha-sthiratara nrpanan

metti gandhebhamaydan

3. Sura-vidya-vallabbendrassura-vara-munibhi-

stutyaka^bappinamel

4 t Oarita ^rl namadheyaprabhu Munin vratagal
noutu Saukhyasthan aydan

255

Inscription No. 15.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 13.

1- * Ragaddvesatamomalavj^ipagatarssuddhatma-

samyoddkakar
2. Vegura parainaprabhavarisiyars Sarvva-jiia-

bhattarakar
3 Gadeva na dita ntabbu

lagra dol

4, Sri klrnnamalapuspa rsvarggagraman

eridar.

Inscription No. 16.

. A bout 700 AJ). E.G. II. 17.
galnootu raudippidar.

Inscription No. 17.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 18.

svasti Sri Jambunaygir ti/thadol nontu
mudippidar

Inscription No. 18.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 19.

1. svasti ri bhantaraka Thittagapanada tammadi-

gala sisyar

2. Kittere yara nisidhige-

Inscription No. 19.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 20.

! . Adeyarenada Cittura Moniguruvadigala

^isittiyar
2. Nagamatigantiyar mtirutingal nontu mudippidar

256

Inscription No. 20.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 21.

1. dakinabhagada madure uym initava ..,

sapade pavumuttidon

2. laksanavantar ent enalu uraga gl maha

parutadul

3. Aksayakirtti tuntakada varddhiya meladu nontu

bhaktiyitn

4. aksimai^akke ramya Suraloka sukakke bhagi a....

5. Pallavacari likitam

Inscription No. 21.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 22.

1. Sri balamel dikhimele sarppada mahadantagradul

salvavol

2. Salambalatapograd intu nadadom nurentu

Samvatsaram

3. keloy pin KatavaprasailamadaZde namma

Kalanturanarh

4. bale perggoravam Samadhi Neredon Nont eydid

or ssiddhiyan

Inscription No. 22.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 24.

1. Sri Kittura velmadada Dharmma Sena Guruva-

digala /Sisyar

2. Baladeva guruvadigal Sanyasanam iiontu

mudippidar

Inscription No. 23.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 25.

1. Sri Malanura Pattini guruvadigala sisyar
Ugrasena

257

2. Guruvadigal ondu-tingal Sanyasanam nontu

mudippidar

Inscription No. 24.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 26,

1 yarull ariplthad iZdon an

2 tarikumararin arccikeyye tarn

3. sthira d aral intu Pegurama suraloka-vibhuti

eydidar

Inscription No. 25.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 27.

1. Srr Masenar pparamaprabhavarisiyar kKaZ-

vappina vettadul, Sri Samgamgala peZda
siddhasamayan tappade nont imbinin

2. prasadantaraman Vicitrakanakaprajvalyadin

Mikkudan Sasirvvar vvarapujedand uye avar
svarggagraman eridar.

Inscription No, 26.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 28.

1. Svasti, &r! laangura Mellagavasa Guravar

2. KaZbappa bettam mel kalamkeydar.

Inscription No. 27.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 29.

1. svasti Sri G-unabhusitam adi uladagderisida

nisidige

2. saddhamrna-Urusantanan samdvigagap.atanayan

3. girit alada melati sthalaman tiradanama

kelege neladi manada

4. Saddhammada Gett Sasauadi patan

258

Inscription No. 28.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 30.

mmadigal nontu kalamkeydar

Inscription No. 29.

About 650 A.D. E.G. 11.31.

1. Sri Bhadravahu sa CandraGuptarnumndra

Yugmadin oppe val

2. bhadramag ida dharminam anduva/ikke vand

inis alkalo

3. Vidrumadhara Santisena munlsan akkie Velgola

4. adrimel aSanadi vitt apunarbhavakk ere agi

Inscription No. 30.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 32.

r! Vettede Guravadigal manakkar Singanandi
Guruvadigal nontu kalamkeydar.

Inscription No. 31.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 33.

1. Sri Kalavirgguravadigala

2. isyar Tarekada perjediya

3. modeya kalapakada gura

4. vadigall irppattondu divasarii

5. Sanyasanam Nontu mudippidar

Inscription No. 32.

^60?^ 700 A.D. E.G. II. 34.

1. Sri J?abhasena Guruvadigala 6isyar Nagasena-

guruvadigal

2, Sanyasana-vidhiintii mudippidar ' Nagaaenam

anagham Gunadhikam

259

3. Naganayakajitarimandalam ' rajapujyam amala-

Sriyampadam

4. Kamadam hatamadam nainam3 r aham II

Inscription No. 33.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 76.

siddham.

1. Nered ada vrata-^Ila-nonpigunadim svadhyaya

sampattinini

2. kare-ilnaltapa-dharmmada Sasirnati brl ganti

yar vvandu mel

3. arid ayusyamen 1- entu nodenage tan int endu

KaZvappinul

4. torad aradhane nontu tlrtthagirimel svargga-

layakk eridar

Inscription No. 33.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 77.

1. Slrl gati-cesta-Viraham Subharhgade Ghan-

amma ritta man vittu val

2. yatiyam peZda vidhanadindu torade KaZbappina

Sailadul

3. prathitar tthappade nonta nisthita ya6 asvayuh

prama yak

4. sthitideha kamalopamarhga-subhamum svarllok-

adim nis'citaiii

Inscription No. 34.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 80.

1. Mahadevan munipu (n) gavann adarppi kalup

erddapam

2. Mahatavan maranam appe tanaga kamu

kande

1 P.IAA R n TT.

260

3. Mahagirima gale salisi satya nav inti

4. Mahatavad ontu male mel valav adu divaiii

pokka.

Inscription No. 36.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 84.

1. Svasti, Sri,

anavadyan Nadirastradulle prathitayas'6

ndakan vandu lam

Vinayacara prabhavan tapadinn adhikan Candra-

devacaryya Naman

2. Udita S'rl KaZvappinulle risigiris' ilemel nontu

tandeham ikki

niravadyana eri Svarggam Sivanilepadedan
sadhugal pujya-manan

Inscription No. 37.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 88.

1. suracapambole vidyullategala teravol raamjuvol

tori begam

2. pirigurh S'rl rupalila dhana-vibhava-iDaharas'

igal nillav arggam

3. paramarttharii raeccen an !-dharani yul iravan

eiidu sanyasanariige-

4. *. yduru satvan Nandisena pravara munivaran

devalokakke Sandari

Inscripiton No. 38.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 91.

1. Dallaga peZ day van
2,

1. yd Rice puts yd to the previous line.

261

Inscription No. 39.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 92.

1. Svasti Kolattursamghadi

2. Vis'okabhata rara Nisidhige

Inscription No. 40.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 93.

1. Edepare gl-diade keydu tapaihsayyamainan

Kolatturasamgha

2. vade kored intu vaZvud arid inn enag endu

Samadhi-kudi-e

3. edevidiyal kavadim katavapravam eriye nilladan

andhan

4. padegam oZippa nd 1 Suraloka mahavi-

bhavasthanan adarn N

Inscription No. 41.

About 700 A. D. E.G. 71. 94.

S'rlmad Gowda devara pada.

Inscription No. 42.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 95.

1 ba Sadhu-gra ra dhlran

Natasamyatattnan Indranandi acaryy

2 me rmma anjedda ntiir id erppa

pravalantari. bhavyaman varppin
3 nde ddi moham agald i-val-visa-

yamgalan atma-vas 1 a-kkramav idu kata

sthitftrftdhita

4* Vimu SVarar i nana rendra

rajyavibhuti sasvatain eydidan.

1. Eice puts m for m in the last syllable.

262
Inscription No. 43.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 96.

1. svasti s'rl Kolattura

2. *' samghada Deva

khantiyar nnisi.

Inscription No. 44.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 97.

1. Nimilfira Sirisaihghad Ajigariada Eajnlmatl-

gantiyar

2. amalam Naltada S'lladirh gunadin a-mikko

ttamar mmlledor

3. namag ind oZt idu yendu eri giriyan sanyasanaiii

yogadol

4. namo-cint-ayduse 2 * mantraman mari e

svarggalayam eridar.

Inscription No 45.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 98.

S'ri.

1. tapaman dvadas' ada vidhanamukhadin kayd

onduta dhatrimel

2. capal-ill-a-Navilura Samghada Mahananfcamatl-

gantiyar

3. vipulas'ri-Katavapranalgiriya mel noat omdu

saomarggadin

4. Upanillya ! * suraloka Saukhyadedeyan tarn eydi

manam.

1. Bice gives sahghada (Transliteration.)

2. Eice gives ayduse. E. C. II. Transliteration p. 42.

3. Upamilla gives better meaning.

263

Inscription No. 46.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 99.

1. S'rl tanage Mrtyuvaravan aride Pertvana varhs'

adoa

2. svasti kalanigek asude ppina rajya vl vatin

3. gha ka modasu to

matakacci ni-

4. dhanama sura gagatiyul nelekondan

Inscription No. 47.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 102.

1 jannal Navilur anekagunada s'rl saiiigha

....du'

2. : menal tilakam s'ri racaryyara

3 bhimanam eyde torad endo ragasaukh-

yagati
4 dad omdu pancapadade dosamnirasam....

Inscription No. 48.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 103.

1. svasti s'rimat Navilur samghada Pu-

2. spasenacari .....ya nisidhige

Inscription No. 49.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 104.

s'rl Devacaryya nisidhige.

Inscription No. 50.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 105,

1. l S'ri angadi naman anekam Gunakirtt id entan

2. 2 * tumgoccabhakti vas'adin to?'adilli deham

1. Kice writes 4 * svasti " after " sr'I " in the first line (E. C.

Transliteration p. 42, No. 99.)

2. tungocca Bice has m in transliteration*

264

3. porigolvicitragirikutamayam Kucelarn.

Inscription No. 51.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 106.

svasti s'ri.

1. Navilura s'rl-samghadulle guravam nam Mauni-

yacariyar

2. avara sisyar aninditar gunami . Vrsabhanandi-

muni-

3. bhava-vij Jaina-Sumarggadulle Nadad oifad l .

aradhanayogadin

4. avaruih Sadhisi svarggaloka Sukhacittarii

madhigal,

Inscription No. 52.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 107.

1. S'ri vand anuragadin eradu granthe gala kkramad

ari s'aila,

2. vandanu rnarggadine tirnira vidhiye Navilura 2 .

Sam

3. cendade buddhiya haraman il tiyum

ya mavi-abbegal

4 Zippi nal surara Saukhyaman im odaga

undar 3 * attamum

Inscription No. 53.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 108.

1. S'ri anavaratan Nalampi bhyta Sayyamarn ente
viccheyam

1. Eice *' ond- "

2. M Navilchara " (Kan. version) Eice.

3. '* o^ago^ar " (Eice) Transliteration p. 44.

265

2. vanado} ayogya nakkum adi galo

3. manavarn ikkuta radi nontu samadhi

kudidom

4. anupaiiia divy l appadu suraloka marggadol

iZdar inbinim

5. Mayuraggrama samghasya Saundaryya Aryya-

namika "

6. Katapragiri S'aileca sadhitasya samadhitah "

Inscription No. 54.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 109.

L S'ri Meghanandi rnuni tan Namilur vvara-
Samghada

2 tirtthadi siddhiyan

3 da

4

Inscription No. 55.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 111.

1. S'ri sa na Negarteyagum sed ene-

vadesi dal

2. mugiva nontum raevola tapamaiii

3 ni pautra nandimunipa

4 maryyana yu 1 malo tala idarul

nontu siddhisthan adarn

Inscription No. 56.

About 700 A.D. E.G. IL 112.

S'r! Navilur-Sariighada Gunarnatiavvegala
nisidhige-

1. Bice has [m] appadu.

266

Inscription No. 57.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 113.

1. tanage Mrtyuvaravan arid endu Supanditap.. . ,

2. aneka-s'ila-gunamalegalin sagid oppidon

3. Vinaya-Deva Sena-Narna-maha-muni nontupin

4. in adar idu pa/i tankade tan divarn eridan.

Inscription No. 58.

About 700 A.D. E.G. IL 114.

1. S'ri S'ubhanvita-S'ri Namilura sariaghada

prabhavati ...................

2. prabhakhyaml-parvvatadulle nontu tarn

svabhavasaunda-ryyakarangaradhipar

3. Grarne Mayura-Sarnghesya Aryyika Damitarnati
4 Katvapragirimadhyastha Sadhifca ca samadhita.

Inscription No. 59.

About 700 A.D. E.G. II. 115.

1. Aneka S'lla-gunad oppidor intu lekkisadum

2. Nenegend oru Muniyim dal 1 tapaccale nontu

tarn

3. tamago rnrtyuvaravan aridam S'ripurttiya ..... .*

Inscription No. 60.

About 700 A. D. E. C. II. 116.

1. I pujya ...... laman sareti varador

eZnurvvaram lak^yam I

2. Sri puranvaya Gandha Varmma namita-Srl san-

3. san-p^ura ...... nide . .

rivalagham ..... rl^ilatala

1 . Bice * yindal ' '

267

4 manneradupa . .

i

Inscription No. 61.

About 700 A. D. E. C. II. 445.

1. Sri jinamarggan mti-

2. sampannan Sarppa-culamani

Inscription No. 62.

About 700 A. D. Tattukoti Inscription I. A. X. 61.

1. Kappe-Arabhattan Sistajana priyan

2. kastajanavarjitan kaliyugaviparitan II

3. varan-tejasvino mrittyur na tu luanavakhan-

danam-

4. Mrttyus tatksaniko duhkliaiu manabhamgarn

dinedine "

5. Sadhuge Sadhu madhuryange madhuryam '

badhippa

6. kalige kaliyuga viparitan ' madhavan itan

perau alia I II

7. ollitta keyvor ar polladuin adaramte ' ballittu

kalige

8. viparlta purakrtain ! illi samdhikkuin adu bariidu"

9. kattida Siiiighaman kettodenemag erndu ' bitta-

vol kalige vi-

10. paritamg ahitarkkal ' kettar men Sattar avi-
caram I "

Inscription No. 61

About 675 A. D. E. C. VI. Kv.38.

1. svasti Srlmatu Aluarasar

2. Gunasagaradvitly anam adhey an

1. keftoden (Fleet. I. A. X. p. 61)

268

. 3. Kadamba ma^dalaman^alutujtib. AJuara-

4. Sarum Mahadeviyarutn Citravabanarum

5. Kunda-varmmarasam mudimegeye KiZga-

6. Na devake ellaman Sarva pariharam

7. bitta modalin an ittor 1 ifctante bitta

8. adan aZivorum aZival paZcidor

9. manade nenevorum aZimen end upade-

10. ^am koduvorum Pancaruahapafcaka

11. Samyuktarappar 2 . devadancjadind erive-

12. ppaduvoruin appar rajadanda-

13. mum eydeppaduvar

14. I muvettumur 3 . adevejanam inelarh Iinari-

15. yadeyan aZivor olar ankage 4 . men 5 .

16. sagemenal 6 en to bhelli-kambar?. enainS.

17. go^tu kondar.

Inscription No. 64.

A. D. 700 E. C. VI. Kp. 89.

1. svasti 6ri Santarasa l .

2. prithuvi-rajyadula kige (ge)

3. br irige besageyvalli marali

4. bataringe kotar dhone Gu^lala naradi

5. iZdu kotar yipa^uy torevaruih

6. sarhpege 9 , sarvva-pariharam 10 . Unnurum

7. Gomarina kotta idal

8. Ka rigaftge

9. inegula . * .

1. ittoran (E. C. VI. Transliteration p. 179)

2. appor (ibid)

3. muvettumuru (ibid)

4. ankage (ibid)

5. message (ibid)

6. monag-(ibid)

7. kammar < (ibid)

8. enam (ibid)

9. sampige (B. 0- VI. Transliteration, p. 179)
10. sarvvaparihara (ibid)

269

10. nedoru patakan akkurii

11. kottu

12. daraftge svasti

13. purvva-mariya

14. deya kammarara

15. pa6upata-mariya-

16. deya ullad alia

17. ettikoZvon pancaiua-

18. ha-patakan akku 1 . a-

19. nt-I-kotta G-aZdeyuina

20. reyuman aZivor 2 .

"21. degulaman aZidor apar

22. idan aZidor puti enva na-

23. r a gakke salvor miiru-

24. degulaman a/ido-

25. r-apar 3 . -a du 1 ' mura.

26 ra

Inscription No. 65.

About 700 A. D. E. C. VI. Kp. 40.

1. svasti sri Santarasa

2 thuvi-rajyaduia keZga 5 .

3. batariftge besageyvalli.

4. lo kkalum iZdu kaiiiba

5. karnmarar aZuva

6. sarvva-parihara kottar

7 ?ia 6 koluvorumlde va

8. Zibhigama.

9. aZivor pattupona.

1. akkum (ibid)

2. alevon (ibid)

3. apor

4 aydu (E. C. VII. Transliteration, p. 179)
5. kiZga (Bice E. C. VII. Transliteration)

6 nna (ibid. p. 179)

7. bhigama left out in transliteration)

270

Inscription No. 66.

About 700 A. D. E. G. VIII 8b. 411.

1. svasti sri

2. vijaya

3. dityabhatara

4. prithivirajya-
6. ngeye Nripa-

6. mariar arasa- 1

7. ntali kuinari

8. yale mu

9. vvana

10. le kalluksara

11. nan kottan ke

J2. . . .". . sala

13. kalu kere pudom

14. li mattalu

15. kanyadana

16. ara-mantama 2 .

17. aggi algal.

18. okkalu, ka . . . . manka , . .

19. amira .... do lage

20 ttalta dharmma.

21. siri pa

22 vaha.

23. madidom.

1. From nrpamariar line 6 to 13 kere, the transliteration
is different from the Kan. version.

2. aramantame. This inscription as given in the Kan.
verse materially differs from the English transliteration given in
E. 0. VIII. Transliteration p. 148 ; much meaning cannot be
made out of either.

PART III

A. THE INDEX.

PART III.

A. The Index.

THE INDEX.

(The first number in brackets indicates the
inscription and the second, the line).

A.

akkum (3-12 ; 5-15 ; 6-15 ; 7-9 & 15 ; 52-2; 63-10 & 18)-

will become, fut. 3 sg. m. of a (gu) - to become.

Other form : akum (1-4); adv. pp. agi (29-2) ; pp.

ada (41-3) ; past 3 sg. m. aydan (14-4); other

form of aydan-adarn (40-4 ; 54-4) ; fut. p. appa

(52-4) ; fut 3 pi. m & f. appar (6-18) ; appor

(5-17) , other forms : appar (62-11) ; appar (4-8);

apar (63-21) ; adv. pp. causative akki-e (T. cans.

pp. akki) ; N. K. caus. pp. agisi ; inf. age (3-2 ;

5-5 & 11 ; 6-5 & 11). Another form of the inf.

agale (foragalu) (8-30). T. a, ak, agu, M. agu;

Tu-agu-to become Te. agunu, avunu-will become.
Aksayakirtti (20-3) - S. pr. m. sgl. nom. slw.
aksimanakke (20-4) - to the eye and the mind. slw.

mana-s. n. sg. dat. see ramyasuraloka sukakke

(20-4).
agaldu (41-3) - having separated, adv. pp. of agal-to

separate (intr.)

T. akal-to separate.

aggi algal (65-17)?

agrahara . . . (2-1) - land or village assigned to
Brahmins for their maintenance . . . . ?
aiigadina . . . . n (49-1) ?

273
G. o. i. 18

274

accakammettiyeki (3-10) ? slw. s. n. sg.? making the
arcaka the chief or the head, mel what is above
1 meti-loftiness. Greatness, excellence (medu-
height) Te. T. melmai 2 meti-a big man, a head
3 a headservant; rnenti-a pillar in the middle of
a threshing-floor; archakam menti yeki (Rice)?

ajnanasailendraman (14-1) - ]the mountain of ignor-
ance, slw. $ailendra-; s. n. sg. ace.

adaZde (21-3) - having ascended, adv. pp. of adaZ-to
ascend +e (particle of emphasis; T. atar-to be
close to ; M. atal-closing with ; Te. adaru-to be fit,
replaced by hatti in N. K. cf. andu Agoing near-
andisi-to come for protection.

Andugiya (5-10) - S. pr. N. Sg. gen. of Andugi
(a village)

atisthalaman (27-3) - s. lw.sthala-s. n. sg. acc.-
that

adaramte (61-7) - like that; adv. (adara stem. pron. n.
gen.) arhte-adv. p. of tr. an-to speak.

adarppi (35-1) - having reproved. Probably adv. pp.
of. adarppu-to reprove, cf. adarppu-s. trembling ;
adapu-to reprove. T. adampu-to rebuke. Te.
adapu-warning, fear.

adan (62-8)-it. Pron. 3rd. sg. n. ace. ; norn. adu (8-29;
46-4; 40-2 ; 61-8) gen. adara-m adaramte (35-1).

adi (7-11)?

adi . . . galo . . (52-2)?

adu (8-29 ; 40-2, 46-4 ; 61-8) - it. pron. 3. sg. noin. T.
atu, M. adu. Tel. adi ; ace. adan; gen. adara in
adaramte,

Adeyarenada (19-l)-of Adeyarenadu : s. pr. sg. gen.
Seel. Ant. VIII, 168.

adrimel (29-4)-on the top of the mountain ; slw. adri +
adv. (cf. mel-the top).

adhikan (36-2) - great, slw. adhika-adj. s. m. sg. norn.

275

adhikarigal (3-2, 5-5 ; 6-5) -officers, slw. kari-s. m.

pi. nom.
ankage (62-15)-to the punishment ; tatsama-anke s. n.

sg. dat. (Bitters I)ict. Preface P. XV.)
Anantamatigantiyar (44-2)-s. pr. f. pi. (hon.) ; nom.

ganti-other forms, khanti (42-2). kanti (ganti)

ganti ; Skt. gantrl-wandering nun.
anavadyan (36-1) - faultless ; slw.avadya-adj. s. m. sg.

nom.
aninditar (50-2 ^irreproachable, slw. anindita-adj.

s. m. pi. (hon.)

andhan (40-3) - slw. andha-adj. s. m. sg. nom.
anadito (2-1) ? slw. incomplete

phrase,
anupamadivya (52-4) - incomparable and divine, slw.

divya-adjs. n. sg. nom. B. L. Bice puts in -in-
between divya and appa- the next word,
anekam (49-1) - slw. probably an adj. qualifying guna-?
anekagunada (46-1)- of many good qualities-slw.

guna-s. n. sg. gen.
anekaguna slladi (58-1)- by many qualities and virtues.

slw. sila-s. n. sg. loc (^ meaning instr.) cf. aneka

&Ilagunamalegalin (56-2).
aneka s'llagunamalegalin (56-2) - by strings of good

qualities and virtues, slw. male- s. n. sg. instr.
antu (63-19) - adv. in that manner, cf. andu-then.
anduvaZikke (29-2) adv.- afterwards, andu - then ;

vaftkka - after. N. K. abajika. T. anru-then.
appa (52-4) - that will be. ft. p. of intr. agu -

to become. 0. K. appa>apa, M. K.>aha, M. K.

replaced by N. K. aguva; see akkuih.
apunarbhavakke (29-4) - to the cessation of birth.

slw. bhava-. S. n. sg. dat.
aputrakaporuduman (5-6) - the property of those

dying without heirs, slw. aputraka-. s. n. sg.

18*

276

ace. with the conjunctive particle -um before the

ace. ending, cf. poruluman (6-6), T. porul-

money, wealth ; M. Porul- what belongs to one.

N. K. porulu - essence,
aputraka poruluman (6-6) - same as aputraka-porudu-

man (5-6)
appar (4-8) - will become, vb. ft. 3. pi. of agu - to

become, 0. K. appar, appar, apar; >apar

M. K. appar, apparu, ahar-u. replaced in N. K.

by agu-v-ar-u. (See agi)
apar (63-21) - same as appar.
appar (62-11, 12) - same as appar.
appe (35-2) - it embracing, inf. of tr. appu - to

embrace.

apor (63-25) - same as appar.
abharain (3-6) probably - that weight or the burden.

Probably abharam or a bharam slw. abhara- or

bhara- s. n. sg. ace. in meaning, nom. in

form,
amalarii (43-2) - pure. slw. amala-adj. n. sg. inst. in

meaning, nom. in form.
Amaliyara (5-7 ; 6-7) - of the people of the village,

Amali. s. pr. m. pi. gen.

amira .... dol (65-19)? S. (numeral) ?
amoghavicara .... (7-6) ?

ayogy n(52-2)?

aydu mura ra (63-25 ; 26) ? five

three ?
aydan (14-2) - five, (numeral) N. ace. pi. T. eindu,

afiju, M. anju ; Tel. eidu ; Tu. eidu.
ayvan (38-1) ?
ara-mantama (65-16) - an alms-shed, slw. mandapa-

T. aram - virtue, charity, dharrnma ; M. ara -

dharmma. cf. aramane - King's bouse (r and

not r). cf, aravantige

277

aramane-tanada (3-9) - of the palace office, slw.
tana<sthana; aramane - king's house ; a palace.
T. arasan- king; T. aranmanai - a palace ; Te.
arasu. M. aracan. Tu. arasu.

aral (24-3) -1. a flower. S.N. sg.nom. 2. later inscript-
ions ; alar. T. alar - a blown flower, M. alar - a
flower. Tel. alaru - a flower, Tu. aralu - a flower,
for 1. See S.M.D. ; 28, T. viral ; Te. vrelu ; velu.

aridu (40-2) - difficult, impossible, adj. n. sg. pro-
bably from ari - to cut off. T. aridu - difficult ;
rareness. Te. aridi - rare. cf. aridu.

ariplthadi (24-1) - in the seat of honour, slw. pltha
- s. n. sg. loc.

arcikeyye (24-2) - when he worshipped, slw. arc. - to
worship or area - worship, inf. of key - to do,
with archa, -i of arci- probably due to the ana-
logy of arc-isu. T. arcikka; Tel. arcincu.

arddhavlsadi (1-3) - at the rate of half a visa. slw.
visa- s. N. sg. loc. visa from vimsa - 1/16 of a
pana) T. visam; Te. (pkt.) visamu ; M.
vls'am ; (a rice corn's weight of gold or 1/16 of a
pana) ; Tu. visa. See visa.

aridarii (58-3) - he knew. vb. past. 3. sg. m. of ari - to
know. N.K. aridanu. adv. pp. aridu (33-3 ; 45-1;
53-1) T. arindan - he knew ; M. ari - to know ;

aridu (33-3 ; 45-1- 53-1) - having known or recognised,
adv. pp. of ari- to know. cf. ari-to cut off. T.
arindu ; Tel. erungi. See. aridarh.

arulam (5-15 ; 6-15) - years, slw. for varsa. s. n. sg.
nom. meaning adverbial. varsa>varusa >arula.
T. varusam - a year.

alare (14-1) - rejoicing, inf. of alar - to rejoice, to
expand. T. alar - to rejoice. Te. alaru.

Alamvalliyara (5-8) - of the people of the village of
AlamvaJU, s. pr. m. pi. gen. T. palli - a settlement,

278

a village. M.palli; Te.palli, palle ; Tu. halluN.K.
halji ; Skt. palll (fern.) - a small village, a
settlement of wild tribes. Iw. in skt.? see
Alavalliyara

alavanavum (5-6, 6-5) - a tax (Rice). Fleet thinks it
to be arupanarn- six panatn. Probably it means
'alavanam' or 'alarhvanaih'. - the tax on the
ala or banyan tree, or alavanam - the tax on
sugarcane mill. Also called ganadere and aledere-
in some inscriptions, ale- is also written as -arre
cf. toradu (33-4) and nadadu (50-3), the roots also
tore and nade respectively. Dr. Buhler suggests
that alavana may stand for alapana, Marathi
alap- a funeral lament, singing the praises of the
dead, denoting some domestic ceremony. But
aievana or alavana seems to be more satisfactory,
cf, 1 aledere. EC. III. Sr. 105; 2 page 41 parti A.
See Hindu Adm. Institutions. P. 310. Tax on
Sugarcane mill = 60 panamum. s. n. sg. norn.+
um (conjunctive particle)

Alavalliyara (6-8) - of the people of the village of
Alavalli. s. n. pi. gen. see Alamvalliyara (5-8).

alia (61-6, 63-16) - is not. neg. pr. participle of intr
al - to be fit. neg. adv. pp. allade (3-4). for
allade ; T. al, alia- no, not ; M. alia - no, not.

allade (3-4) - except, neg. adv. pp. of al - to be fit,
used in the sense of allade ; d is a mistake for d.
N. K. allade. See alia.

alii (63-3 64-3) - when he did. a locative post-position.
See besageyva (63-3).

avar (25-2) - he, pron. s. pi. (hon.) m. nom. subject of
eridar; gen. avara; nom. with -um, avarum. T.
avar, M. avar, Tel. varu.

avarum (50-2),-of his. pron. pi. (hon.) gen. See
avar.

279

avara (50-4), - he also. pron. 3. pi. (hon. nora. - um
(the conjunctive particle) See avar.

avar dosa (4-) ?

avicaram (b. 1-10) - without foresight. Fleet trans-
lates it as c without doubt '. slw. avicara- s. n.
sg. nom. adverbial in meaning.

asanadi (vittu) (29-4) - food and other things, slw.
adi-. s. n. sg. nom. in form. ace. in meaning,
object of vittu.

asantali (65-7) dying.?

aZival (62-8) - to ruin. inf. of purpose of aZi-to destroy.
T. & M. aZi - to destroy, aZimen - vb ft 1. sg. ;
aZidon - adj. s. sg.; aZidor - adj. s. pi. from aZida-
pp; aZivon - adj. s. sg. from aZiva - f. p.; alivor -
a'dj.s. pi. from aliva; aZivor uiii - adj. s. pl. + um.

alimen (62-9) - I will destroy, vb. ft. 1. sg. m. of aZi -
to destroy. See aZival.

aZidon (7-8, 14) - the destroyer, adj. s. m. sg. from
aZida - pp. of aZi. See aZival. cf. aZitton. cf. IV;
Hg. 87, 780 A. D.; E. C. IV. Gu. 88.

aZidor (4-7 ; 63-21, 2^, 24) - the destroyers, adj. s. m.
p. noun ; see aZidon.

alivon (1-3, 5-12, 6-5, 63-20) - the destroyer, adj. s.sg.
m from aZiva - fut. p.

aZivor (62-15, 64-9) - the destroyers, adj. s. m. pi. from
aZiva. See aZvon.

aZivorum (62-8) - adj. s. HI. pi. nom + um. See
aZivor.

aZkalo (29-2) (the dharmrna) becoming weak. inf. of
aZku - to lose lustre, used in the sense of aZkalu,
at the end of a line in verse, cf. aZi and aZkalo.
T. afa - to be corrupted, wasted.

aliya (8-27) - son-in-law, s. m. sg. nom. cf. Te. alludu.
Son-in-law ; allemu-a feast connected with son-
in-law's return

280

ahitarkkal (61-10) - the enemies, slw. ahita- s. m. pi.
nom. (-ar & -kal) - two pluralising particles)- cf..

1. amarabaminiyarjkalol. E. C. VII. HI. 38,

(1192);

2. rajarkalumaniZisidarh. E. I. XIII. p. 41

(1112)';

3. raunurvarkalol. B. C. V. Hassan, 79 (1183) ;

4. saranayatarkalarh (I. Ant. XIV. p. 15 (1123);

5. surakanyeyarkajam, B. C. VII. HI. 35 (1187)

and 51 (1195)

A.

a (5-16; 5-18; 6-16 7-14; 43-2) - that. adj. denoting
re-moteness, being a substitute for ' adu ' - it.

a (20-4)?

-a kamukande ? I saw ?

akki-e (29-3) - having caused it to become, adv. pp.
of agu- to become with e for emphasis. N, K.
agisi ; Tamil form is akki (Tiruvacakam ; 2-85,
5-101, 103; 15-23). See akkum.

agale (8-30) - if it becomes, inf. of agu -*to becorne-
agalu e. See akkum.

agi (29-4)?

age (3-2 ; 5-5, 11 ; 6-5, 1 1 ; 7-5) - when ....
became, adv. pp. of agu + e. See akkum

Ajiganada (43-1) - of the Ajigana. slw.gana-. s. n.
sg. gen. The Jain community was divided into
groups or samghas. Each samgha was subdivi-
ded into ' ga^as '. Each gana was further sub-
divided into 'gacchas' and the gacchas were again
sub-divided into balis'. The Namlursamgha had
Ajigana as one of its sub-divisions.of . s'rimulasam-
ghadadesigauada pustakagacchada 6ri Divakara-
namdi- siddhantadevara. E. C. IV. Yd. 24 and 26,
cf. E. C. II. 69, 134.

281

acari - see Pallavacari, Mauniyacariyar.

attamum (51-4) - the topmost apartment on the roof.

atta - a tower or an apartment, ata - speaking

sound. Probably atta for atta s. n, sg.

acc.+um.
atmavasakramavu (41-3) - method of controlling

one's self. s. n. sg. nom. slw. krama-
ada (33-1) - that had become, pp. of agu - to become,
* used as a participial adj. T. ana, Tel. ayina.

See akkum.
adam (40-4 ; 54-4) - became past 3 sg. in. of agu - to

become ; see akkum,.
Adiarasarkkamojira (7-11)? oja - a teacher, N. K.

oji - a carpenter.

adiuladagderisida (27-1) -? ul}ude agderisida.?
adhipar (57-2) - the dead or the chief, s. rn. pi. (hon.)

nom. slw. adhipa. adhipar is chosen for the

needs of metre,
an (7-8 and 24-1) - ? Probably

Svastyavan-the property, s. n. sg. ace.
am (37-3, 49-1) - pron. 1 per sg. nom. obi. base.

on used as gen. (33-3). dat. sg. enage. dat. pL

emage. gen. pi. euma, namma; T. nan, yan, M.

yan, nan, Tel. nenu, N. K. nan.
Anesetiya [8-27) - Aneseti's. S. pr. m. sg. gen. slw.

seti from sresthin - head of merchant guild. In

Kan. - a merchant,
appar (6-18) - shall become : ft. 3. pi. of agu. T.

avar. See akkum.
appor (5-17) - shall become. Ft. 3. pi. of agu. See

akkum
am (41-4) ?
amikkottarnar (43-2) - surpassingly most excellent ?

adj. s. f. -pi. (hon.) nom. from ikka - pp. of

migu - to surpass, slw. uttama-.

282

ayu^yama (33-3) - the length of my life. s. n. sg. ace.

slw. ayusya-.
ayeti-e (3-6) - produce (?) s. n. sg. ace. probably Slw.

from ayatika - offspring, hope, expectation.

Kittel gives ayatike - generosity, grandeur, the

state of being noble or worthy.

aydan (14-4) - became, past. 3 sg. rn. of agu - to be-
come- See akkum. N. K. adan-u.
ar (61-7) - who - inter, pron. s. m. pi. nom. aru-rii ; *dat.

argg-am ? N. K. yar-u. T. ar, yar, Tel. evaru, era.

Tu. era. inter adj. ava.
aradhanenontu (33-4) - observing the vow of Sanya-

sana. slw. aradhane- worship, service. Sanyasana-

death by starvation. See sanyasana.
aradhanayogadin (50-3) - by the religious vow of

sanyasana. " sauuidhirnaradhayiturh " E. C. II. 2.

Slw.yoga- See (1) Tattvartha sutra IX. 19-20.

(2) Outlines of Jainism. pp. 38, 56, 95, (3)

Jainism p. 41.
arum (3-4) other persons (no other person) inter, pron.

m. pi. + urn. See ar.
arggam (37-2) to every one (all)- iner. pron. m. pi. dat.

um (conjunctive particle)
Alamvalliyara (5-8) - of the people of Alamvalli. s. m.

pi. gen. probably from alam a banyan tree.
ava (20 - 1)? Probably inter, adj.

ava.
avittidalli (5-16; 6-16) -wherever he sows, adj. s. n.

sg. loc. from vittida - pp. of vittu - to sow. 0. K.

viZtu - to sow, a seed N. K. bittu (to sow), bitta

(a seed) replaced byblja. by the educated classes.

T. vittu, vitei; vire. M. vite, vire , Tel. vittu,

vittana - a seed.
Aluarasar (62-1) - proper name. s. pr. in. pi. (hon).

nom. See E. 0. 1.

283

Aluarasar-urii (62-3)- proper name. s. pr, in. pi.

with -mil.

See E. C. VI. Intro, p. 5 ; Alu, Alva, Alnpa,

Aluva. See D.K. D. p. 309
ajuttu (5-4 ; 6-4) - administering, pr. adv. p. of al - to

rule, aluttum (62-3) ; adv. p. with -um ; ale (3-1 ;

65-8) - inf. algeya (5-4) - vbal noun, gen; algeyan

(6-4) vbal. noun. ace. ; aluva - ft. p. T. M. Tu.

al - to rule ; Te. elu - to rule,
aluttum (6-1 ; 62-3) - pr. adv. p. of al - to rule. See

aluttu.
ale (3-1 ; 65-8) - while .... was ruling, inf.

of al - to rule, to algeya (5-4)-of the Government

s. n. sg. gen. from al-to rule, to govern, ace.

algeyan.
algeyan (6-4) - the Government, s. n. sg. ace. from al

- to rule.

I

ikki (36-3) - having abandoned, adv. pp. of ikku - to
abandon; to lay down. 0. K. irku. N. K. ikku;
adv. pr. p. ikkuta (52-3) T. irakku - to let down,
to put. Tu. ikku - to abandon.

ikkuta (52-3) - abandoning, adv. pr. p of ikku. - to put
down, to abandon, see ikki.

ittante (62-7) - in the same condition as it was given,
itta- pp. of I - to give cf . adarante ; ante from
annute ; an - to say, used as an adv. of manner ;
T. Inda (pp.) Te. iccina (pp.)

ittodan (1-3) - the gift that has been made. adj. s. n.
sg. ace. from itta - pp. of I - to give ; Nom. ittodu
(1-2); adv. ittante (62-7) T. Inta (pp. of 1 - to
give) ; Te. iccina - pp. of I - to give.

ittodu (1-2) - the gift. adj. s. n. sg. nom. from ittudu
<itta - pp. of I.

284

ittoran (62-7) - those that give. adj. s. m. sg. ace. from

<itta - pp. of I - to give,
id (41-2) ?

ida (63-7)?

ida (29-2) - that was. participial adj. qualifying

dharmmaman from idda - that was. pp. of ir - to

be. 0. K. irda. T. M. iru - to be. T. irunda - pp.

of iru ; ft. p. iruva (1-2) cf. i/da.
idake (8-11) - to this, proximate dem. pron. n. sg. dat.

from idakke<idarke ; nom. idu (41-3) ; ace. idan

(5-12 ; 15-17) ; loc. idaul. (54-4) ; with -e, ids (64-7)

T. idarku. Tel. dmikL Nom. T. idu. M. idu.

Tel. idi.
idarul (54-4) - in this, here, proximate dem. pron. n.

sg. loc.
idan (3-11, 5-12, 15, 17 ; 6-12, 15-17,63-22) proximate

dem. pron. n. s. ace.
idu (41-3 ; 43-3) - this, proximate dem. pron. n. sg.

nom. 49-3 )

See idakke (8-31)
ide (64-7)- this same, idu + e . . idu + e -particleof

emphasis in (40-2) - further, hereafter, adv. of

time meaning c from this time onwards.' N. K.

innu. T. ini - henceforth, innam, innum- still ;

M. innu - henceforth ; Tel. imka.
Inungura (26-1) - of Inangur. s. pr. n. sg. gen. (a

village)
inadariZdu (56-4) - probably (1) in-adari-ildu when it

means trembling still more ; then, in - still, adari

- adv. pp. of adar; (z) inadar the sweet man (s.

m. pi. nom.) in apposition to ' Muni ' but here r

is difficult to explain. SMD. adir. - to tremble.
i nana rendra

rajyavibhuti (41-4) - the glory of the King of

Gods?

'285

inisu (29-2) - a little, this much. s. and dem. pron. n.

sg. used as an adv. another form initu. Tel. iihta

- this much,
inta (7-13) intaha. ?
intu (3-5; 24-3; 33-3; 35-3; 58-1) - Thus. adv.

modifying eydidar.

indu (43-3) - to-day, adv. probably from the proxi-
mate demonstrative pronominal base. T. inru, M.

innu.

Indranandiacaryya (41-1) - s. pr. m. sg. ?
imbinin (25-1) - sweetly, f rom impu-sweetness ; charm.

s. n. sg. inst. used in an adverbial sense. T.

in pain, inpu,- delight, pleasure. M. inpam -

pleasure, Te. impu, irnbu, irnpu - pleasure.

Sweetness; Tu. impu - pleasantness, N. B. -in-in.
inbinim (52-4) - with charm or sweetness, same as

imbinin (25-1)
iravan (37-3) - existence, s. n. sg. ace. from verbal

noun<iravu-iru-to be. T. iruppu, iravu - being;

M. iravu.
iruva (1-2) - that has been - ft. p. of iru - to be. O.K.

irppa. M. K. iruva. iha. N. K. iruva. Vb. noun -

iravan. ace.
irppattondudivasam (31-4) - for 21 days. Slw.

divasa-. S. n. sg. norn. used adverbially,
illi (49-2, 61-8) - here. adv. of place, probably the loc.

of the proximate demon, pronominal base,
ivalvisayamgalam (41 -3) - these points or topics. Slw.

visaya- s, n. pi. ace. ival - probably ivel-.
(52-4) - abandoned, sacrificed, past 3. pi. of

transitive il - to pull, to abandon, to become

sapless. M. K. Il (ir) N. K. ele. past. 3 sg. f.ildal;

adv. ppl. i/du. adj. s. M. sg; i/don. T. il - to lose,

to sacrifice. Naladiyar 9, 10, 199, 251, 277, 287,

336. M. il. Te. iducu - to pull

286

iZdal (44-4) - abandoned, past. 3. sg. f. of il. T, to aban-
don, to lose, to sacrifice.

iZdu (56-4; 63-5; 64-4) adv. pp. of il - to
abandon.

iZdon (24-1) - abandoned, adj. s. m. sg. nora from
iZda pp. of iZ - to abandon, to sacrifice.

I

1(3-8; 35-3; 37-3; 40-1 ;I 40-4; 50-3; 57-2; 59-1;

62-14; 63-19) - proximate dem. adj. substitute of

idu - this - see a. Tel. 1 - this (or these),
itan (61-6) - this man, dem. pron. m. sg. (hon.) nom.

Te. itadu. probably i- + tan - this self (speaker) or

i-f tan - this of mine.
IreZpattarulam (5-15; 6-15) - for twice seventy years

(140 years). Slw. arula- varusa- s. n. sg. nom.

used adverbially. T. IreZ - 14 ; T. varutam - a

year,
ivatin (45-2) ? Ivattina-of to day. or Iva tingha . .?

U

Ugrasenaguruvadigal (23-2) - s. pr. m. pi. (hon.) nom.

Slw. guru-
uniye (3-5) - to be enjoyed, inf. of un - to eat. unflo.

adj. s. unnurum; unvorum: M. &P. pi. T. & M.

un - to eat.

undadu (4-5) - that which was eaten,
urimdo (3)4?- undom endukum ?
unnurum (63-6) - to be enjoyed, adj. s. m. pi. nom +

um. unva, fut. p. of u^ - to eat.
unvorum (3-5, 1) - those who enjoy this. adj. s. ra. &

f. pi. nom. from unva. See uiinururh
uditasrlkaZvappinulle (36-3) - at the celebrated KaZ-

vappa: Slw. udita s'rlkaZvappu- s. n. sg. loc,+e

for emphasis.

287

iipamllyasuralokasaukhyada (44-4) - of matchless

happiness of the world of gods. Slw.saukhya-.

s. n. sg. gen. uparallya is probably for upamilla.

cf . capal ilia,
upadesarn (62-9) - advice, s. n. sg. ace. in meaning

nom. in form. Object of koduvorum
urn (5-9, 6-9,) - also urn, N. K. u. T. urn. Te. u ; Tu. u.
uye (25-2) - when conveyed, inf. of uy - to convey,

to carry. N. K. oy - to carry.

uraga gl (20-2) a snake . . . .?

urumithyatva pramudhasthiratara nrpanan (14-2) -

the silly but firm king of false doctrine. Slw.

nrpa- S. m. sg. ace.
urusattvan (37-4) - the strong - minded. Slw. sattva-

adj. s. in. sg. nom.

ulladu (63-16) - that which has or possesses?

_

-mil (6-9 & 10) - also, another form. -um. N. K. u.
uligarh (8-38) - service, s. n. sg. norn.

T. uliyani - service due to deity, obligation of a
slave to his master. M. uliyam - service. Te.
udigamu - service. Tu. uliga- - service. Why
1 and not /. ?

Ksabhasenaguruvadigala (32-1) - S. pr. m. pi. (hon.)
gen. Slw. guru-.

E.

Edeparege (40-1). - Name of a place. S. N. sg. dative,
edeyan (44-4).- their state; the abode, s. n. sg. ace.

Probably from idn - to place. T. itam - a place.

Te. eda - place. Tu. ida, ide - a place,
edevidiyal (40-3) - to get to the abode, inf. of edevidi

(ede pidi) - ede - a place + pidi - to hold. T. pidi-

to hold. M. pidi, Te pidi - a handful, Tu. pidi-

a hold,

288

EdevoZalnada (8-28) - in Edevo/alnad. district or pro-
vince. See DKD. P 339.- s. n. sg. gen. of
nadu - a kingdom, from nadu - to plant, to
cultivate :

poZal - a city ; Te. prolu, polu - a city, T. natu -
a country. M. natu - country. Tu. nadu,
nad - a district, nom. edevoZalnadu (8-37)

EdevoZalnadu (8-37) - EdevoZalnadu also, -urii is
suffixed to the last of the words so connected -
nagararnum, s. n. sg. nom. um -

etti (3-6) - having removed, adv. pp. of ettu - to lift,
to raise; adj. s. ettikoZvon (64-17) from fut. p.
ettikoZva : T. erru ; etu - to lift, to raise, erru - to
transport. M. erru - to throw, as with a sling.
Te. ettu - to lift. Tu. ettu - to lift.

ettikoZvon (63-17) - he who takes, adj. s. m. sg. from
ettikoZva fut. of ettlkoZ - to lift and take.

Edeyagamundarum (5-9, 6-9) - s. pr. m. pi. (hon.)
nom+um. (Edeya - of the chest probable (ede)
hrdaya>herdea>erde>ede cf. eZdeyam P. 66
Part I. A. 975 A. D. cf. erdeyolage E. C. V. AK.
102, 1100 Te. eda, yade= chest. Tu. ede-
[T. nencu. M. neiinu - chest] possibly ede<
erde<herde - Skt. hrdaya. (KSS. 328). 0! K.
Gamunda>Gavunda>gavuda, N. K. gauda - the
headman of a village, or chief officer. T. kaundar-
life-takers, kavandar - scoundrels, a caste. Te.
gaundlu - toddy sellers, men of farmer's caste.
Tu. gaude - the chief officer of a village ; a good
caste of peasants. T. kaundikar - workers in
skins as shoemakers : Skt. kauntikah - one whose
business is to catch birds, etc., in traps; one who
sells the flesh of birds, animals etc.; a butcher; a
poacher. Mar. gamvada, probably - gama unda-
the enjoyer of the village, gamunda seems to be

289

a contamination between the earlier kauntar and

the later gaunda. In N. K. gauda is used also

in the sense of an idiot and a fool. [It comes

from G-ramavrddha>Gamaudda>Gamaanda>

Cramunda possible <kunta - a lance, or kavamai-

a sling. It rnay also be a Iw. cf Pkt. gamauda,

gamauda - the head of the village ; [gamada -

a small village (prakrta s'abda mabarnava p.

367) cf. gavundaramaga, E. C. VII. Sh. 24.

(970- A. D.)<edda ntur (41-2)

en (33-3) - my; pron. 1 pers. sg. gen. see an. obi. base

used as gen. cf. ta-n.
enage (333-3 ; 40-2) - for me. pron. 1. pers. sg. dative.

pi. emage, N. K. namage, T. enakku.
enebaru (7-13) - how many persons ; s. m. pi. from

the int. pron. en - what or how many + var cf.

sasirvvar ; elnurvvararh.
enalu (20-2) - when they also said. inf. of en - to say.

u for urn (see adv. pp. emdu ; yendu. fut. p. enva.

T. en - to say. Te. enu, anu - to say. N. K. an

and en - to say.
enangottu (62-17)-will inflict (?) adv. pp. of -kodu -

to give. See kotta.
entu (20-2) -show (he will fare) ; inter, adv. of manner.

replaced in N. K. by hege. T. erru. - like what.

Te. etlu - how. Tu. emca - how. Probably from

the inter, pronominal base,
entu (33-3; 49-1) - how much, inter, adj. denoting

length or quantity, qualifies ' ayusyamen '. T.

ettanai - how many, how much. M. erra - how

much. Te. emta - how much,
ente (52-l)?-ennte? entu+e?
ento (62-16) - intr. adj. of quantity ?

G,o.i, 19

290

eihdu (33-3; 37-3; 40-2; 58-2; 61-9; 62-9) having

said. adv. pp. of en - to speak ; ft. p* - enva. T.

enru, erru - having said ; M. enra, Te. eni, ani-

Tu. entruni - to say fully. See yendu.
endu (56-1) - when ? inter, adv. of time. T. enru .

when ? Te. endu - in which place,
enva (3-8 ; 63-22) - called, ft. p. of en - to say. See

eriidu.
endo (46-3) - long ago. inter, adv. of time. cf. endu -

adv. of time. ?
emage (61-9) -to us. pron. 1 pers. pi. dative, cf. sg.

enage & en.
eydappaduvar (62-13) - will be taken to. fut. passive

3 pi. of eydappadu<eydalpadu - to be taken to,

from eydu - to get, to go to. Also aydu ; adv.

pp. eydi (44-4); past. 3. sg. m. eydidan; past. 3.

pi. m. eydidar ; adg. s. pi. eydidor, inf. eyde. T.

eydu - to approach, to obtain. M. eydu - to get,

to obtain, Tel. eyidu. eydu - to get, to follow,
eydi (44-4) - having attained, adv. pp. of eydu - to

get, to go to. See eydappaduvar.
eydidan (41-4) - past. 3. sg. m. of eydu - to go, to get.

See eydi.
eydidar (24-3) - did attain. Past 3. pi. (hon.) m. oi

eydu. See eydi.
eydidor - those that'attained (?)adj.s. m. pi. (hon.) of

eydu. (21-4) or past. 3. m. pi. (hon). See eydi.
eyde (46-3) ,- inf. of eydu - to go to, to get, exceedingly

(SMD. 304). See eydi.
eradumnaZke (5-11, 6-11) (Rice -of both the nads;

Fleet. Upon two districts). To both the

countries. S. n. sg. dat. (pi. in meaning) naZke<

nadu+ke. N. K. nadige. cf. eradumkeladoL E. I.

XV. p. 87, 1060.
Erevedigala (7-6) - of Erevedi, s. m. pi. (hon.) gen.

291

erddapam (35-1) - vb. pr. 3. sg. m. of el - to rise, to get
up. O. K. el dapam> erddapam >eddaparii (M.K.
N. K. eluttane.

erppa (41-2) ? Probably pp. of ir - to be. or eZ +ppa.

eriveppaduvorutn (62-11) - those that will be affected
adversely; adj. passive of eriveppadu - to be
affected adversely. Tel. eravu - loan, eruvu -
dried dung, suffering in sunshine ; Kan. iri - to
pierce with a weapon.

ere (29-4) - lord. s. m. sg. nom. T. irai - lord, great-
ness, m. ira - lord, other kan. form : ereya - lord.

ellaman (62-6) - all. s. n. and pron. sg. ace. probably
from eru - to be full ? T. & M. ellam - all. Te.
ellaru - all. Tu. erku - to be full.
eZturii (3-3) bullocks * also?

if so, from il- to pull.

E.

ekasude ppina (45-2) ?

en (61-9) - what. int. pron. n. sg. nom. T. en, M. e -

what. Tel. emi, N. K. enu.
en (36-4 ; 43-3) - having ascended, adv. pp. of eru -

to ascend ; past 3. sg. m. eridan ; past. 3. m. pi.

(hon). eridar (15-4 ; 25-4 ; 434). adv. pp. with -e.

eriye T. eru - to ascend; adv. pp. eri. M. eruga -

to ascend ; Te. eru - to lift. Tu. eruni - to

ascend.

eridan (56-4) -ascend, past 3. sg. m. of eru. See eri.
eridar (15-4 ; 25-2 ; 33-4 ; 43-4) ascended, past 3. pi.

(hon.) m. of eru. See e?*i.
eriye (40-3) - only by having ascended, adv. pp. of

eru+e.
erisida (27-1) - that was placed, pp. of erisu - to cause

to be raised<eru - to ascend. Tu. eravuni- to

set up.

19 X

292

&2aneya (1-4) - the seventh. Numeral adj. n. sg. gen.
from elu. - seven+aneya. N. K. elaneya. T.
eZam - the seventh. M. elu - seven. Te. edu.
Tu. elu.

eZnurvvaram (59-1) - the seven hundred men. s. m.
pi. ace. T. enuru - 700.

okkalu (65-18) ? a plough of black soil (Rice). (1) inf.
of okku - to tread out corn. (2) s. n. sg. thrash-
ing corn, a farm, a farmer.

okkaltanam (5-15, 6-15). - farming, husbandry, agricul-
ture, s. n. sg. ace. N. K. okkaltaiia, from okkal-
tenancy, a tenant, from okku - to tread out corn.

ontu (35-4) having winnowed in penance, adv. pp. of
one - to winnow, onedu, ontu, ?

odagaundar (51-4) -reached; joined; to become united
with. vb. past. 3rd pi. (hon.) indie, masc. of
odagol to join.

omdu (44- * ; 46-4 ; 50-3) - a certain, an unusual-nuai.
adj. n. sg. T. onru ; M. onna - one, Te. ondu-
one ; Tu. onji - one. cf. Vandu (29-2)

onduta (44-1) - having 'practised, adv. pr. p. of ondu-
to unite, to get, to use, to experience. T. onru-
to unite ; Te. onaru - to unite ; Tu. ondavuni-
to gather, to join.

ondutirhgal (23-2) - for one month, s. n. sg. noin. adv.

. in meaning. See omdu - one ; timgal - the moon

a month, from tigal - to shine ; brilliance. Te.

Nela - moonlight, the moon ; a month. Tu.

timgolu - the moon, a month.

oppidon (56-2)- he who was shining with. adj. s. m.
sg. nom. from oppida-pp. of oppu-tobe beautiful,
to agree with ; adj. s. m. pi. (hon.) oppidor ; inf.
oppe. T. oppu - to agree with ; Tel. oppu - to
agree to ; Tu. oppiyuni - to agree to.

oppidor (58-1) - adj. s. pi. (f.) nom.? see oppidon.

293

oppe (29-1) - shedding lustre, inf. from oppu. See

oppidon.
orumuniyimdal (58-2) S. f. sg. (nom. ?) orumuni - one

sage,
orvan (3-4) - one (man.) s. m. sg. nom. from numeral

or v (v) an. M. K. orvan, orban, obban-u ; N. K.

obban-u ; T. oruvan ; Tel. okadu, okarudu - one

man.
osageyuih (5-5 ; 6-5) -.the festival dues ; dues of a joyful

occasion ; from ose - to be delighted. Osage - a

gift, a tax. Te. osagu- to give. T. odavi - a gift.

T. uja, ujar, uyar - to be lifted up, to be glad. T.

uvagai, ogai - joy. K. osage - recording of news,

proclamation, osage - dues for the installation of

an inscription (?). osage - consummation of

marriage, probably dues for taking a procession,
olar (6M5) - to be liable to. present 3 pi. m. & f. of

ul - to be, to have, to possess. T. ul, undu, M-uL

Tel. undu
olippa .... ndu (40-4)^ Kittel gives no rt. o/i.

T. oZi - to cease, to forsake, to quit, to die, to

clear off.
oZtu (43-3) - good. s. n. sg. nom. from oZ - good (adj.)

O.K. ollittu, ojlitu, olatu, olitu, N.K. olleyadu.

oHitta (61-7) ; s. n. sg'. ace. of ollittu. cf. o/par-

bbaruni E.G. IV. yl. 41
ollitta (61-7) - what is good. adj. s. n. sg. ace. See

oltu.

orvvan (3-11) one man. s. m. sg. See orvvan.
T. oruvan, oruttan, one man. T. or - one

K

Katapragiris'aile (52-6)-in the Katapragiri (the holy
mountain). This is part of a Skt. sloka. Other

294

names of this holy mountain found are Katavapra,
Katavapra saila, Katvapragiri, KaZvappu, KaZb-
appu nalgiri, tlrtthagiri, tiltha, risigirisile, velgoja
(d)adri.TheKan. names KaZvappu and KaZbappu
KaZvappu are corrupt forrnsof Katavapra >Katva-
pra> KaZbappu . kata - a hearse, a cemetry ; vapra -
the slope of a hill. The final -u of kalvappu is
the final -u of Norn. sg. (?) cf. Skt. rupa - Kan.
rupu and rupa, kalvappabettammel (26-2) shows
kalvappa is<katavapra.

Kata .... sthitaradhita .... (41-3) ?
aradhana on KaZvappu.

Katavapravam (40-3) - the holy mountain Katavapra,
s. n. sg. ace. See Katavapragiris'aile.

Katavapras'ailam (21-3) ; s. n. sg. ace. obj. of adaZde,
nom. in form.

kattiigaviluke (7-12) ?

kattida (61-9) - bound, pp. ofkattu - to bind. T. kattu
M. kattu ; Te. kattu ; Tu. kattu - to bind.

Kadambarnandalaman (6^-3) - the Kadamba Kingdom,
(the Banavasi Province s. n. sg. ace. Slw.
mandala-.

kanyadana (65-15) - the gift of a virgin. Slw. s. n. sg.
Nom.

Kappe-Arabhattan (61-1) - s. pr. m. sg. nom. Te. kappa
- a frog ; Kan. kappe - a frog. Tu. kappe-a frog,
probably from kuppu-to hop, or kappu - to cover;
ara - virtue, bhatta - Pkt. from Skt. bharta. K
Kappe a frog; that which hops.

ka manka (65-18)?

kambar (62-16) - those who steal ?

kambuka - a mean person ; an asura.

kamara (8-31) - blacksmith. Slw. karmakara. s. m. sg.
nom. other forms are not found in these inscrip-
tions; kammara, kamrnara, kambara, from Skt-

295

kannakara. kaminara, kainmara. and karraakara
are found, karnarar nob in Kittel's Diet. T.
kainmalan - a smith, Tel. kammara - a black-
smith. M- Kam malar-artificers ? Tu* Kam-
mare-a blacksmith.

kaminarar (64-5) Note -r- of; the blacksmiths, s. m. pi.
gen. See karnara.

kammarara (63-14) - of the blacksmiths, s. m. pi. gen.
See kamara.

karuum (7-10) ?? - karu - to vomit, v. n. vornitting. S.
a ploughshare. Te. karru. T. karu. Prob. karu-
a calf ; T. kanru.

kare-il (33-2) - stainless, adj. n. sg. gen. qualifying
^dharmmada. kare - blackness, stain ; il
for ilia - not ; T. karai - blackness, a stain-
M. kare ; Te. kara - a stain. Tu. karel - the
mark on the skin left by wearing anything
tightly, il is used for ilia in "allade phalavadenil
(JNS. 22 and 31). T. ilar - who are not. illar -
the poor. See Capal ilia.

ka rigange ;(63-8) ?

kalapakada (31-3)-of the (Munjagrass) group. Slw.
kalapaka - a bundle in general ; the sectarian
mark on the forehead, s. n. sg. gen.

kalige (61-6, 61-7, 61-9) - to the kali age. s. rn. sg.
dat. Slw. kali-; kali - a hero.

kaliyugaviparita- (61-2, 6)-an exceptional man
in the kaliyuga. Slw. viparlta adj. s. m. sg. noru.
qualifying Kappe-Arabhattan.

kalmanege (1-1) - to the stonehouse. s. n. sg. dab. T.
Kal.- a stone; M. kal. Te. kalu; Tu; kail; T.
manai - a house ; M. mana ; Te. maniki - a dwell-
ing place; Tu. mane-a house; Te. manu- to
live,

kalluksara nan (65-10)?

296

kavadim (40-3) - by a stride, s. n. sg. instr. K. kavadu

- not in Kittel. T. kavatu- the length of a step, a

stride,
kaviliya (3-8)-of the cow. Slw. kavile-. S. n. sg. g-L;

kapila>kapile> kavile >kavili - a browg. cow ;

kavile is found in these inscriptions,
kavileyum (5-13; 6-13)-cow also. s. n. sg. ac. in

meaning, nom. in form. See kaviiya.
Kajantfiranam (21-3) -Him of Kalantur, s. in. sg. ace.
kastajanavarjitan (61-2) - avoided by evil people, adj

s. m. sg. nom. qualifying Kappe-Arabhattan.

Slw. varjita-
ka}u (65-13) -ricefields. s. n. sg. ?

Skt. khalam - a threshing floor,
kalupe (35-1) - inf. of kalupu-to send, probably from.

kaiZ- to subtract. T. kaZi - to subtract.
KaZvappina (25-1)- x>n the mountain KaZvappu. s. n.

sg. gen. See Katapragiris'aile. Another form :

KaZbappina; loc. KaZvappinul
KaZbappina (34-2) fo KaZbappu. s. n. sg. gen.
KaZvappinul. (33-3) on tkfe kaZvappu mountain, s. n

sg loc.
KaZvappudurgga .... (37-2) KaZvappu strong,

hold
KaZvappabettammel (26-2) -on the KaZbappu mountain,

s. n. sg. nom. used adverbially,
kadu (5-17 ; 6-17)-so as to preserve, adv. pp. of ka-t

protect. Kittel, ka and kay-. adj. s. in. kadora

(3-8) SMD. ka-to protect No. 3. T. ka-to protect; M.

ka ; Te. kacu - to protect. Tu. kapuni - to guard,
kadora (3- )- whoso maintains or protects, adj. s. m.

pi. gen. See kadu,

Kandarbar (6-15) - s. pr. in. pi. (hon.) nom.
Kandarbor (5-5) - s. pr. m. pi. (hon.) nom.
kamba (64-4) s. pr. m. sg. nom.?

297

kaiamkeydar (26-2; 28-1 ; 30-1) expired, past. 3 pi.

(hon.) in. of kalamkey to die, to expire. Slw.

kala-

kalanige (45-2) s. m. sg. dative. Slw. kala-.
Kalavirgguruvadigala (31-1) of Kalavirgguruvadigal,

Slw. guru. s. in. pi. (hon.) gen.

kige (ge) (63-2) of kig. s. pr. N. sg. ?

Kittura (22-1) of Kittur. S. pr. n. sg. gen. prob. ki-ru +

ur = small + village. ButR. N.<Klrtipura E. C.

II Introd. 37.
Kittere yara (18-2) of Kittere s. m. pi.

gen.
Killum (3-2) of Killa. s. pr. n. sg. gen. probably killu+-

prpb. kiru + ere (-a lord)-f a+urii.
KiZgabatarirhge (64-2) to the bhatta of KiZga. s. iu. pi.

(hon.) dat. cf. kalaiiige.
KiZganadevake (62-6) to the temple of the God of

KiZgana. s. n. sg. dat. Slw. -deva-.
KiZganes'varada (3-2) of the God, KiZganes'vara.

Slw.-is' vara- S. pr. N. sg. gen.
ki/tu (14-1) having uprooted, adv. pp. of kiZ to

pull out, to uproot. N.K. kittu. T. kiZ to split.

to demolish. kiZdu and kiZtu. in SMD 241, and

KSS 4-66; Bp. 37-24; SSV. 3-42; 4-60.
Kucelam (49-3) s. in; sg. nom. Slw. bad or dirty

cloth ; badly dressed.
Kumdavarmrnarasam (62-5) s. pr. m. sg. noin. Slw.

Kumdavaramma- K. arasam. T. aras'u. M. arasa.

Te. arasu. Tu. arasu.
kumari (yale) (65-7) a piece of land in a jungle or

forest, on which trees are cut down and burnt

for cultivation for a short period only. Tu.

kumeru combustion,
kumararin (24-2) by the sons. Slw. kumara- s. in. pi.

instr.

298

kulam (3-8) the family, s. n. sg. norn. Slw.
kudidom (52-3) joined, attained, past. 3. sg, M. of

kudu- to join ; adv. pp. kudi-e ; T. kutu, M. kutu,

Tel. kudu, Tu, kuduni to join,
kettar (61-10) wereruined. past. 3 pi. m. & f.of kedu-

fco be spoiled, to be ruined, adj. s. n. sg. nom.

ket^odu (61-9) ; optative, keduge. kedisuva : fut.

p. caus. of kedu to be spoiled ; adj. s. kedisidava:

T. ketu, M. ketu; Te. cedu; Tu. keduguni to

ruin. In some inscriptions of the 8th and 9th

centuries, kidu - to spoil, kidisu - to cause to be

spoiled, cf. kidugum (E.G. II. 69). kidadajasam

(E. C. II. 133).
kettodu (61-9) harmful thing, adj. s. n. sg. norn.

from ketta - pp. of kedu. See kettar.
keduge (5-16 ; 6-16) -may that be spoiled ! optative of

kedu to be spoiled. See kettar.
keydu (40-1 ; 44-1) having done or practised, adv. pp.

of key bo do; adj. s. m. sg. keyvon, from fut. p.

keyva, of key to do ; adj. -s, m. pi. key vor. T.

s'ey, M. cey, Tel. cey to do. past. 3 in. pi. (hon.)

kalamkeydar ; adv. pr. p. pyithivlrajyam keyyutta-;

sometimes voiced before nasals prithivlrajyarn-

geyyuttire.
keyvon (5-15; 6-15) one who does. adj. s. m. sg. of

keyva. fut. p. of key to do. See keydu.
key vor (61-7) those who do. adj. s. m. pi. nom. from

keyva fut. p. of key to do. See Keydu.
kere (65-13) : a tank, s. n, sg. nom. probably from kir-

to block up, to fence round. T. kulan tank. T.

cen to narrow down, to close up ; M. cerukku

to darn up. Te. ceruvu a tank. Tu. kere a tank,
kelege (27-3) s. n. sg. dat. of kela to the bottom, the

lower side, from kil low, under ; -e- of -le is

perhaps due to e on either side. T. klZ bottom.

299

pit ; kiZakku the low land, the east ; M.

kiZikka, to descend. Te. kl, kinda, kindi down;

low.
keloy (21-3) hear, listen. Imp. 2. sg. of kel to hear,

other form of imp. 2. sg. (not in these inscriptions)

is the root itself. T. ke/. keZ to hear, to listen

to; M. kel to hear. Tu. ken to hear.

ko s'ala (65-12)'.

kotam (8-38) he gave. past. 3 sg. m. of kodu to

give (kudu to give according to some) other form

kottan (65-11), past. 3. pi. kottar, kotar, pp. kotta;

adv. pp. kottu ; vb. nom. kodamge (8-30) a gift;

adj. s. m. sg. kodu- vo rum ; adj. s. m. pi.

koduvorum. kuduguih (E.G. II. 69j.
kotta (4-4 ; 8-28; 63-7 ; 63-19) which is given, pp. of

kodu to give. See kotam.
kottan (8-29 ; 65-11) he gave. past. 3. m. sg. of kodu

to give.
Kottarada (12-2) of Kottara. a village. Prob. kotta +

ara. S. pr. N. sg. gen.
kottar (3-10, 64-6) gave, other form kotar. past 3.

m. pi. of kodu to give.

kotar (63-4 ; 63-5) granted, past. 3. pi. m. of kodu.
kottu (63-4-6-11) having given, adv. pp. of kodu. to

give. '

Kodakaniy| (7--3) of Kodakani s. pr. n. sg. gen.
kodamgeyanu (8-30) gift. S. vb. noun. n. sg. ace.
koduvonum (3-5 ; 3-11) whoever gives, adj. s. in. sg.

of koduva fut. p. of kodu. to give,
koduvorum (62-10) those that give (whosoever give)

adj. s. m. pi. of koduva fut. p. of kodu to give
kondu (3-7) taking, adv. pp. of kol to take.

other form gondu (8-29) inf. kole; adj. s. m. pi.

kolvorurii and koZuvoruih. T. kol. to take. M.

kolluka, konda, Te. konu, pp. koni.

300

konda. (5-14; 6-14) for having killed, pp. of kol to

kill; past 3. pi. m. kondar; T.kol. kollu to kill.

M. kollu; Tel. kollu Tu. kor to kill. T. konra (pp)
kondar (62-17)- killed, past. 3. m. pi. of kol to kill

T. konrar-- past. 3. m. pi.
koredu (40-2) adv. pp. of kore to cut, to bore a hole.

T. ko/i to force off the husks from the grain,

of paddy by the foreteeth, like mice and birds;

M. kure to cut off, as the splint of trees; Tu.

kurepini, koreyuni to be excavated, to be bored.
Kolattura (40-1 ; 42-1) of Kolattur, s. pr. sg. gen.

prob. the village of the tank.
Kolattiirsamghadi (39-1) in Kolattur samgha. s.

n. sg. loc. Slw. samgha.

kole (5-15; 6-15) when he took ; inf. of kol to take,
kolvonuni (3-11) the taker also ; adj. s. m. sg. nom. of

kolva fut. p. of kol to take, see kondu).
kolvorum (3-6 ; 3-7) those who take or takers also.

adj. s. m. pi. of kolva.
koluvorum 64-7) the takers also- adj. s. m. pi. or

koZuva fut. p. of kolu to take.

G.

gaticestaviraharii (34-1) he who has avoided mote-

ments and gestures. Slw. viraha-. s. m.s g. nom.

" Being free from the activity of influences of

former works". Dr. L.D. Barnett.
gatiyul (44-4) s. n. sg. loc, Slw, gati-.
ganti (44-2) from Skt. gantrl a wandering nun.

See Anantamatlgantiyar. supra,
gandhebhamaydan (14-2) the five senses the

rutting elephants. Slw. gandhebha s. n. pi.

ace.
ga/deyuma reyuman (63-20) the ricefields

s. n. sg. ace.? O.K. gaZde. M.K. garde N. K

301

gadde. T. kaZani a cornfield. M. kaZani. Tel.

kayya (?) or krayya a canal ?
gamigarum (5-10, 6-10) the villagers also. Slw.

Pkt. gama, later gava< grama, s. m. pi.

nom.+urii.

gamumdarum see Edeyaganmndarurh.
giritalada (27-3) of the top or bottom of the mountain.

Slw. giritala s. n. sg. gen.
giriyan (4-3) the hill or the mountain. Slw. giri

s. n. sg. ace.

Gunaklrtti (49-1) s. pr. m. sg. nom. Slw,
gunadin (43-2) for (her) virtues. Slw. guna- s. n. sg.

instr.
Gun^rnatiavvegala(55-l) s. pr. f. pi. (hon) gen. Slw.

Gunamatiavve-N.K. avve,-rnother, grandmother.

awe, abbe<amba mother. T. avvai, auvai

mother. Te. avva mother, grandmother, cf.

Adisrlavvagalu (61), s' rlavvagalam (63) Nelmisrl

avvagalim (66), Vijayas 7 rl-avvagalim (72) B C.I.

10.
Gunabhusitam (27-1) adorned with good qualities, s.

m. sg. nom. Slg. bhusita-

Gunami '50-2)?'

Gunsagaradvitiyanamadheyan (62-2). With the

other name, Gunasagara. s. pr. m. sg. nom. Slw

dheya-.
Gunasenaguravar (12-3) s. pr. m. pi. (hon.) nom. Slw

guru-
guravam (50-1) spiritual teacher, master, s. m. sg.

nom. gorava , a class of s' aiva beggars (Kittel

probably from guru+avam. the teacher-he.

But B. Narasimhacar says gorava tadbhava).

of guru. E.G. II. Tr. p. 3. footnote. T. kuravar

Elders, gurus, religious preceptors and ministers,

T. kuravan sg. guru-avarn goravam.

302

guruvadigall (31-3) the spiritual preceptors. Literal-
ly- the feet of the guru. Like Skt. S' rimatbhaga
vatpadaih. But guruvadigal suggests that guru
pratigal (of the rank of guru ; equal to the guru.
gurupadigal> guruvadigal and guravadigal. T,
padi grade, rank, resemblance. Comparison.

gudalanaradi (63-4)?

gondu (8-29 having taken, adv. pp. of kol. to take.
*T. kondu. Tel. koni.

geZi (27-4) above, assemblage, s. n. sg.? T, M. ceri.
Te. geri, Tu, keri. Kan. ge/i, keZi an assembl-
age, a row. N.K. keri a street or an assemblage
of houses.

goravam (21-4) See perggoravam*

gomanna (63-7) -s. n. sg. ace? possibly the rnudfrom
the gomala (a public pasture ground) or permission
to take mud or clay from gomala (?)

gosigarum (7-10) a public announcer? from Pkt.
gosaga<ghosakah. s. m. pi. nom. +um.

goliyara (7-11) Probably of the caste of golas. gola -a
widow's bastard son. s. ru. pi. gen.

GHA

ghanammarittaman (34-1)- s. n. sg. ace. ghanam, ma
(maha)+aritta (arista) m. + an the great mis-
fortune ? " Strong in his fair body, surrendering
other desires " Dr. L.D t Barnett.

CA.

Candagamundanu (8-37)- s. pr. m. sg. u (m) canda<
candra for garnunda, see Edeyagamundrum.

Candradevacaryyanaman (36-2)- S. pr. M. sg. nom.
Slw. nama-

candrasuryyam unga (7-14)?- as long as the sun and
the moon last. Slw. suryya- adv. of time, -umga

303

till, as long as. O.K. annegaih, annam, ulla-
rmegarii as long as, up to the time of. M.K-
unnevaraih, anneveram. N. K. varege, urhga
perhaps ullannegam. Te. undagaa (while it is so,)

capal-illa- (44-2) firm-minded. Slw. capala- adj. phrase
qualifying Mahanantamatlgantiyar cf. upainilla.
T. illakkuti- a poor family. T. illan M. ilia no,
not, N.K. ilia is not. no.

Carita 's rinamadheyaprabhti (14-4)- The lord bearing
the name of Caritas' rl. s. m. sg. nom.

Cittura (19-1) of Cittur. s, pr. m. sg. gen.

Citravahanarum (62-4,)- s. pr. in. pi. (hon.). See E.G.
VI. Introd. p. 5. + mh See. Q.J.M.S. Jan. son
of Gunasagara. 1933; D.K.D. p. 309. see Ajuarasa,
(supra).

Cendugoli (4-3) s. pr. n. sg. dative ?

JA.

Jannalnavilura (46- J)- s. pr. n. sg. gen. of Navilur, the
place of sacrifice. Janna<yajna a sacrifice.
Navilur the town of peacocks. Navilur is called
Mayuragrama in these inscriptions cf. Mayurag-
rama.

Jedugura (6-3)- s. pr. n- sg. gen. Jedda in Sorab
Taluk now?

Jelugura (5-4)- s. pr. n. sg. gen. Same as Jedugura.

Jaina sumarggadujle (50-3) in the good path of the
Jainas. Slw. ma-rgga- s. n. sg. loc.

Jha- 1
N
T

TEA j- " No words with

PA

Dha

Na J

these initial sounds.'

304

TA

tan (36-3)- of his. reflex, pron. 3. sg. gen. and oblique

base. cf. en. N.K. literary tanna gen. colloquial

tan gen. T. tan. M. tana. Tel. tana. nom. tn,

tarn. dat. sg. tanage. pi. tamage.

tanage (35-2; 45-1; 56-1)- Kef. pron. 3. sg. dat. to

himself. T. tanakku, Te. Tanaku.
tankade ( 56-4) without touching (him)- inf. of tanku
(tanku) to touch, N.K. taku, tagu to touch,
(of. N. K. tangu to halt; M. takku; Te. taku;
Tu. takuni, taguni- to touch, tanguni-to support.

tanige (6-18) may enjoy satisfaction, Optative

of tani bo be satisfied or satiated, from tani
to be satisfied, tan cool, cold ; another form is
tanigege, T, tani to appease, tan cool ; M, tan
cold, taniyuga ; TeL taniyu ; Tu. taniyuni to
become cool.

tanigege (5-18) same as tanige, See KSS.
tapaccale (58-2) firm in penance, cala Kan. resolu-
teness < chala. s. f. (?) sg. nom. slw.
tapadin (36-2) in penance, slw. tapa . s. n. sg. instr.

Slw. sayyama s. n. sg. ace.

tapamsayyarnaman (40-1) penance jor^ self-control.

and

taparnarh (54-2) penance ?

tappade (25-1) without failing, neg. inf. of. tappu
to fail, to commit a mistake. T. tappu, tavaru
to deviate. M. tappu, Tel. tappu to commit a
blunder. Tu. tappu a fault, another form thap-
pade. thais wrongly written for ta. Some derive
this from tavu to decrease, cf. tavuva balam.
E.G.VII. Sk. 110 decreasing strength,
tamage (58-3) Ref. pron (f?) pi. (hon.) dative. See
tan t

305

tarn madigala( 18-D of the priest, an attendant on an
idol. s. m. pi. (lion.) gen. tammadigala tarn
adigala -of the feet of God. Though neuter, it
refers to the priest here- Te. tambali, tammali
tammadi, fcambalavadu, tammalavadu a person
living by conducting the worship of an idol. Is
it likely that it is from dharmma + adigal ?

Tarekada (31-2) of Tarekadu (now Talekadu). s. pr. n.
sg. gen. In some inscriptions TaZekada.

tanada (3-9) of the place. Slw. tana (Pkt.) Hkt.
sthana s. n. sg. geri. T. tanam place ; M.
tanam rank, position ; Tel. tanamu a place ;
Tu. tana a place.

tan (33-3 ; 53-1 ; 56-4 58-2 (f?) he, self. Ref. pron. in.
sg. nom. Other forms Lam, fcarii (See tan). T. tan,
M. tan, Te. tanu, Tu. tanu self.

tarn (28-2) -same as tan.

tarn (44-4, 57-2) same as tan.

tirhgal a lunar month, from tigal to shine. See
ondutimgal

tilakam (46-2) -s. n. sg. nom.? Slw. tilaka

tiradanama (27-2) the place on the bank. s. n. sg.
ace. Slw. dana (tana).

tlrtthagirirnel (33-4)-on the top of the holy mountain,
s. n. sg. nom. used as an adv. of place. Slw.
giri tirttha means, remedy ; Jiiia; holy.

ti/thadol (17-1) -at the holy place, s. n. sg. loc. Slw.
tl/tha for tirtha.

tumgoccabhaktivas'adin (49-2)-through lofty devotion.
s. n. sg. inst.r. Slw. vas'a

tuntakada (20-3)- of suffering, s. n. sg. gen. Slw. poss.
tunna pp. of tud. to strike, to pain, or tuda, a
striking, galling, tudaka and nasalisation ?

teravol (37-1) - like the streaks or openings, s. n. sg.
nom. used as an adv. of manner, tera a way, a
G. o. i. 20

306

form. T. tira to open; tiravu opening. M. tira,
tiravu a wave ; Te. tere, terre open, plain.

toradu (33-4 ; 46-3 ; 49-2)-having abandoned, adv. pp.
of tore to abandon. Other forms torade (34-
2); adj. s. torevarum from fut. p. toreva from
tore. T. tura to discard ; Te. toragu to leave.
Tu. torevum to adandon

torade (34-2)- adv. pp. of tore- to abandon with e, the
particle of emphasis. See toradu.

torevarum (68-5) -also those that abandon, adj. s. rn.
pi. noni. + um from toreva fut. p. of tore to
abandon.

tori (37-1) - having appeared, adv. pp. of tor to
appear. T. tonru, torru to appear. M. toru
appearance. Te. tocu to appear. Tu. torike
appearance, toj to appear.

thappade (34-3) correctly, without a mistake, with-
out failing ; tha is wrongly written for ta , See
tappade.

Thittagapanada (18-1) of Thittagapana. s. pr. n. sg.
gen. probably Tittagapanada.

DA.

daksinabhagada (21-1) of the Southern region. Slw.

bhaga s. n. sg. gen.
Dallaga (38-1) s. pr. m. sg. nom.
dasadiyurn (5-7) the chief of the Dasas; dasari a

Vaisnava
(Bice) religious mendicant. Tel and T. dasari a

Vaisnava religious mendicant. Slw. dasa s. in.

sg. nom. + um ; sarne'as dasadi of. skt. daserah

a fisherman,
dasadiyum (Fleet) (6-7) by the guild of the Dasas. cf.

dasadiyum. s. m. sg. nom. + um s. n. sg. gen.

307

dvadas'ada (44-1) : s. n. sg. gen. Slw. dvadas'a : to
the twelve kinds. The twelve kinds of penances;
I. External : anas'ana (not taking food).-
avamodarya (eating less than what one desires;
vrttiparisankhyana (a pledge when going to
receive food) ; rasaparityaga (giving up tasteful
dishes) ; vivikta s'ayyasana (sitting and sleeping
alone) ; and kayakles'a (mortification of the
body) ;

II. Internal. Prayas'citta (mortification of the body,
repurification); vinaya (reverence); vaiyaprltya
(service to the old, the infirm, etc.); svadhyaya
(sbudy of the Scripture); vyutsarga (non-attach
mpnt to the body) ; and dhyana (meditation).
Tattvarthasutra IX. 19 and 20. and Outlines of
Jainism (pp. 131, 133).

divam (35-4, 56-4) heaven, s. ri. sg. ace. Slw.

duritabhudvrsaman (14-1) the tree of sin (Rice). Slw.
vrsa s. n. sg. ace. for vrksa ?

degula (2-3) the temple s. n.?

devakula a temple. Pkt. de-u-la, M. Amg. JM.
SMg. Dh. (168) Pkt. de-ulam, Dh. 25, 351.
ace. degulaman:

degulaman (63-2) the temple, s. n. sg. ace. Slw.
degula .

Deva khantiyar (42-2 and 3) s. pr. f. pi. (hon.)

nom, Slw. kanti a Jaina nun. ganti<
gantri one that goes or moves. T. kanti a
female ascetic, khanti wrongly for kanti.

devadiyum (5-7) the chief servant of the god, the
head of the temple establishment. Slw. deva .

(Bice)

s. m. sg. nom. +urh. devadi the feet of God.
adi the feet as an object of adoration, the
person himself. T. adigal God ; a priest ; a lady;

20*

308

a sage ; a senior ; M. adi king. Tel, andi sir. cf.

Skt. pada, deva, bhattaraka; Mahratti devudi.

N. K. devadi a raised terrace in front

of the door ; devadiga a priest, same as deva-

diyum.

devadiyum (6-7 and 8) the head of the establishment.
(Fleet)

of the temple, s. in. sg. nom. + urii. Slvv. deva

cf, J. Bom. Br. HAS. XI. 230 " Mamjes'varadi-

mbadaga".
devadandadmda (62-11) by the punishment of the

gods. Slw. danda s. n. sg. instr. K. danda a

line, punishment. T. tantam; M. dandam; Te.

dandamu ; Tu. danda.
devarke. See Lafijigesaramdevarke. cf. 1. idarkke (E.G.

III. TN. I.) 2. eradarkam. (E.G. VIII. Sb.

299.)
devara (-3-3) of God. Slw. deva. s. in. pi. (hon.)

gen.
devandevana (3-4) of the God of Gods. Slw. deva .

s. m. sg. gen. poss. for devanarii devana. or

devanadevana.
devedittiyerinduni (3-5) from the devadittiyer. Slw.

deva s. f. pi. (hon.) instr. + urh. possibly dev&di

+itti the female attendant on the idol. cf.

s'isittiyar.
Devereyage (8-29) to Devereya. s. pr. m. sg.dat. Slw.

deva Deva-f-ereya-4-ge. ereya. lord, master. T.

irai a master,
devalokakke (37-4) to the world of gods. Slw. loka

s.n. sg. dat.
dehan (49-2) the body. s. n. sg. norn. in form, ace. in

meaning. Slw. deham.

deharna (36-3) the body. s. n. sg. ace. Slw. deham.
doam (46-4). Sin. s. n. sg.?

309

DH.

dharaniyul (37-3) on the earth. Slw. dharani s. n*
sg. loc.

dharmma (65-20) the dharmma. Slw. s. n. sg. nom.

dharmmagaranigarum. (3-11) the royal account
officer in charge of charities. Slw. karanika ,
s. m. pi. (hori.) nom.+uiii. T. karanam calcula-
tions, accounts, accountant. M. karnam deed,
document. Te. karanam- -an accountant. Tu.
karnike a secretary. N.K. karamka a village
accoountant.

dharmrnam (29-2) the Jaina faith (religion); Slw.
s. n. sg. nom.

Dharmmasenaguruvadigala (22-1) of Dharmmasen-
guruvadigal. Slw. guruvadi. s. m. pi. (hon) gen.
Dhannekuttareviguravi (11-2) -the nun, Dhanne-
kuttarevi s. pr. f. sg. nom. subject of mudippidar.
guravi is the feminine of gurava.

dhatrimel (44-1) on earth. Slw. dhatri s. n. sg. nom.
used as an adv.

d hone (63-4) a pond on the hill, a well. Slw. s. n. sg.
ace. T. toni a boat, a dhoney. Te. dona a pond
on the hill, donne a cup made of leaves ; M.
donna -a cup made of leaves ; Tu. doni a boat,
from Skt. dronih, droni a basin, a reservoir, a
valley between two mountains, cf. N. K. done a
pond on the hill ; donne. a cup made of leaves,
dhone for done or .lone which are in common
use.

N.

Nagararnuih (8-38) the town also. Slw. nagara s. n.

sg. nom. + urh.
nadadu (50-3) having walked, adv. pp. of nade to

walk ; past 3. sg. m. ; nadadorh (21-2); verbal

310

iloun (?) nade (40-1) in composition with keydu

(40-1). T. nadai to walk;

M. nadakka to walk ; Te. nadacu to walk.

V.N. nada a walk ; Tu. nadapuni to walk. vb.

n. Nade a walk,
nadadorh (21-2) engaged himself, pasfc. 3. sg. in. of

nade to walk. See nadadu.
nade- keydu (40-1) nade keydu adv. pp. of key

to do having practised,
natasarhy ataman (41-1) : Slw. atman, adj. s. in. sg.

nom.
Nadirastradujle (36-l)-in the Nadi kingdom, s. n. sg.

loc. Slw. rastra -

Nandimunipa (54-3)? s. pr. m.

Nandisenapravara munivaran (37-4) Nandisena, the

chief of Sages. Slw. vara . s. m. sg. nom.
nam (50-1) our. Pron. 1. pers. pi. gen. nam is the

oblique base in pi. M. dat. pi. emage, namage.

gen. namrna. T. nam our, namar (our people) ;

M. nammal, nain-we. namakku-to us. Te. manamn

(we, inclusive), gen. mana ; Tu. nama pi. 1.

pers we. (including the person spoken to),
namage (43-3) for rne. pron 1. pers. pi. (hon.) dat.

narnma (21--3)-our, pron 1 pers pi. gen. (see nafa)
Narnilurvvarasariighada (53-1) of the holy samgha or

community of Navilur. s. ri sg. gen.; slw.

samgha
namocintayduse mantraman (43-4) the mantra

" namocintayduse " Slw. mantra s. n. sg ace.
naragakke (3-8; 63-23) -to the hell, Slw. naraka , s*

n. sg. dat, gen narakada (1-4.) k > g .
narakada (1-4) of the hell. Slw. naraka . s. n. sg.

gen.
naltada (43-2) of goodness s, (abstract n. sg. gen.

from nal adj. good. T. nal, nalla good,

311

excellent; M. nal good, nalam goodness; Tu.
nal good, cheap; nalta (not found in Kittel).
naltapa good penance (33-2)

Navilura (44-2) of Navilur. s. n. sg. gen.

Navilura (50-1) of Navilur. s. n. sg. gen.

Navilursanighada (47-1) of Navilursariigha. Slw.
sarhgha. s. n. sg. gen.

Nastappa (8-29) s. pr. m. sg. nom. Slw.

Nagamatigantiyar (21-2) &. pr. f. pi. (lion.) nom.

Nagasenarii (32-2) s. pr. m. sg. part of a Skt. s'loka.

Nagasenaguravadigaj (32-2) s. pr. rn. pi. (hon) nom.
Slw, guru

Nagennan (3-2) -si. pr. m. sg. nom. T. annan an elder
brpther ; M. annan an elder brother * Te. anna
an elder brother ; Tu. anne elder brother. T.
amial The High Glrod; K. T. Te. arma an.
upwards, above.

nalkene (7-6) nalku ene. ?

Nayarkhandarnurii (5-4, 6-3)-the Nayarkhaiida (Rice),
the Nayarkhanda(Nagarakhanda) district once a
division of Banavase. (Fleet); Slw. khanda s. n.
sg. nom. + um. T. nayar a high caste landlord
in Malabar ; nayan a master of the slave
(Malabar) Tu. nayire, nayimare a nayar of
Malabar. Tu. nayer a plough. T. nayir, the
sun. perhaps the worshipper of the Sun and the
Serpent. See DKD. P. 281 ; I. Ant. XIX. 144
prob. naga-r-a khaiida of the Nagas.

Bilhana speaks of Nagarkhanda (pkt nayar cf. P.
S.O.C.I. No. 120. Cf. Nagarahavu.

Navajliyaruih (5-10; 6-10) -also the people of Navalli,
s. m. pi. nom.+urii. Prob. Na (four)+palli
(Villages)

nalampi (52-1) having wept over ? pp. of nalampu.
nalampi crying, the weeping sound ?

312

cf. K. a/al grief, sorrow, mental heat.

K. a/al to grieve.

K. alapu weariness, fatigue, alarhpu beauty,

ornament,
nikevatu (8-38) Probably nisevatu inhabit, honour,

serve, enjoy, Slw.
nittadharmmainan (3-8) Permanent work of merit.

Slw. dharmma s. u. sg. aco.

nidhanama (45-4)?

Nimilura (43-1) s. pr. n. sg. gen. Same as Navilur.
niravadyan (36-4) distinguished for pure conduct.

Slw. niravadya adj. s. m. sg. nom.

nirasam (46-4) is annihilated ?

nirisidom caused to be set up. vb. past. 3 sg. in. of

nil to stand. In causative nirisidom. T.

niruttinan. cf. E.C V. 131. 112 (Nirisida) and

E.G. VIII, Sb. 146 (nirisidar).
nilladan (40-3) without waiting (?) adj. s. m. sg.

norn. from nillada neg. pp. cf nil to stand.

fut. 3. n. pi. niilavu (37-2). T. nil, M. nil, Tel.

nilu. Tu. nil to stand, cf iiirisiderii
niilavu (37-2) will not stand (are fleeting): fut. 3. n.

pi. neg. of nil to stand.
nis'citain (34-4) is assured, certain ; Slw. s. n. &g.

rioni. used as an adverb.

nisi (42-3) epitaph ?

nisidige (27-1) epitaph. Other forms nisidhige (18-2).

s. n. sg, nom. Slw. from naisedhiki or naisedhika

a place of worship of the holiest Jaina monks,

They were usually forbidden places for the lay

people, e. g. burial grounds, dense forests, etc.

(The Heart of Jainism. P. 149) The following

forms are found in the inscriptions of later

centuries: nisadya, msad} 7 aka, nisiddhi, nisidhi,

nisidhige, nisiddhi, nisidhi, nis'idhi, nis'idhige;

313

nisidhige. Even now, nis'idhi, nisidhi and

nisidhige are used by the older members of the

Jain community. It means " a tomb erected

over the remains of a Jain ascetic " " nisidbi of

the venerable one" is mentioned. (T. Ant. XII

P. 99. (1883) Dr. Fleet),
nisidhige (18-2; 39-2; 47-2; 48-2; 55-2;)-s. h. sg. norn.

see nisidige.

nisthitayas'ah (34-3) Slw. s. m. sg.?
nitisampannar (60-1) of righteous conduct Slw.

sampanna adj. s. m. pi. (hon) noin.
Nirilliya (5-11; 6-11) of Nirilli. s. pr. n. sg. gen. prob.

mr- water.+illi-here.
nurentusamvatsaram (21 -2) -For ono hundred and

eight years.

Slw. samvatsara s. n. sg. nom. used as an adverb.

T. nurettu (108); M. nurettu; Te. nutienimidi;

Tu. nurenma.
Nrpamariyar (65-6) King Mariar. Slw. nrpa s. m.

pi. (hon.) nom.
nenevorum (62-9) those who think, adj. s. m. pi.

nom. -hum. Optative nenege. T.ninai to think.

M. ninayuka ; Te. nenayuta: Tu. nenepuni to

think,
negartey (aguih) (54-1) fame. s. n. sg. nom.? from

negaZte, from negaZ to become manifest or

famous. T. nigaZ to shine, vbal. noun ; nigaZci;

M. nigaZuka, nigaruka to shine. Te. negadu

(from negadu to shine)
nenege (58-2) May they remember. Optative of

nene to think, to remember ; T. ninai.
neradu (59-4) having completed, adv. pp. of nere to

become complete, pp. nereda (33-1). T. nirai to

become full; M. nirai; Te. nerayu to become

full. Vbal. noun : neravu fullness.

314

nereda (33-1) possessed of, was full of. pp. of nere-
to- become full. See neredu.

neladi (27-3) on the ground below, s. n. sg. loc. from
nil-to stand ; norn. nelan- urn (5-18 ; 6-18) ; T.
nilam. M. nila; Te. nelamu; Tu. nela the
ground, earth.

nelanum (5-18; 6-18) the earth, also s. n. sg. nom.+
nm. See neladi.

nelekondan (45-4) Settled himself. Past. 3. m. sg.
of nelekol-to settle down ; kol in composition
with nele - an abode, cf. nela in neladi. But
nile in s'ivanile padedan (36-4) is used in the
same sense. T. nilai ; M. nile ; Te. nela ; Tu.
nile the bottom ; depth; firmness.

nodu (33-3) See. impl 2nd. sg. m. of nodu to see.
T. nottam-scrutiny, nokkam a look; M. nokku-
ga to see. nottain examination. Tu. nota
sight, nodadruni to show.

nonta (34-3) that observed the vow. pp. of non to
perform a vow (SMD Dh. 430) adv. pp. ndntu ;
vb. noun, nonpi (33-1) ; T. nompu, nonpu
religious austerity ; M. nompu same as T. Te.
nocu to celebrate a religious performance; nornu-
a religious vow; Tu. nornbu fast, penance,
nompu -any meritorious act ; K. nohi ^same as
nompu.

nontu (9-1; 10-1; 12-3; 13-2; 14-4; 16-1; 17-1;
19-2 ; 20-3 ; 21-4 ; 22-2 ; 23-2 ; 25-1 ; 28-1 ; 30-1 ;
31-5; 3fi-3; 44-3; 52-3; 54-2, 4; 56-3; 57-3;
58-2)- having observed the vow. adv. pp. of
non to perform a vow. (430 SMD). See
nonta

nontum (54-2) even having vowed?

316

P.

pancapadade (46-4) by the utterance of the panca-
padas. The five padas are the Jinas, the Sid-
dhas, the Acaryas, the Upadhayas and the
Sadhus. Also called panca paramesthis. Slw.
pada-. s. n. sg. loc. e. See KKC. I. p. 391.

pancamahapatakan (1-4; 3-12; 7-15 ; 05-18) (a per-
son) guilty of the five great sins. These sins are
1. Killing a Brahman ; 2. Drinking spirituous
liquor ; 3. Theft ; 4. Adultery with a teacher's
wife ; and 5. Association with persons guilty of
these four crimes. MS. 11. 54.

pancarnahapatakasaihyuktan (6-16 ; 7-9) Guilty of
tfie five great sins; Slw.-samayukta- adj. s. m.
sg. nom.

pancamahapatakasaiiiyutan (5-14) Guilty of the five
great sins. adj. s. m. sg. nom. Slw. saihyuta

pancamahapatakasamyuttan (3-7) Guilty of the five
great sins. Slw. osamyutta- adj. s. m. sg*
nom.

pancamahapatakasamyuktar (62-10) adj. s. m. pi.
nom. Slw.

pattiniguruvadigala (23-2) s. pr. m. sg a gen.

padegam (40-4) to the multitude ; to the host also.
s. n. sg. dat.+am ?

padedum (8-28) Even having received, adv. pp. of
pade to get, to obtain; past. 3. m. sg. s'ivanile-
padedan ; T. padai to secure. M. padeyuga to
obtain. Tu. padepuni to get.

patan (27-4) pattan ?

pattupona (64-9)-Possibly pattuten and pona-pana-
money. N. K. hana. s. n. sg.? T. pattu, M.
pattu, Te. padi, Tu. patt. T. panam, M. panam.
Tu. hana.

316

pararnakalyanatlrthangal (6-17) worthy recipients of
the most extreme good fortune (Fleet). Slw.
tirtha-. s. n. pi. nom. used as masc. cf.
parama-kalyanabhagigal (5-17 Rice).

paramakalyanabhagigal (5-17) Partners in the most
extreme good fortune (Rice), s. m. sg. nom.
Slw. bhagi-

paramaprabhavarisiyar (15-2 ; 25-1). A sage of
supreme glory. Slw. risi- s. m. pi. (lion.) nom.

paramarttharh (37-3) The supreme truth. Slw.
arttha- s. n. sg. nom.

parivariya (3-3) Rice thinks that it is parivariye.
s. n. sg. gen. (?) Probably of what surrounds;
of the members of the temple establishment. But
I think parivariya may be from paripariya of
different kinds, as parijanam is mentioned in the
next line.

parijanam (3-4) Attendants. Slw. parijana- s. n. sg.
norn.

parvatadulle (57-2) On the mountain. Slw. parvata-
s. n. sg. loc.+e. See mahapariitadul.

[palarurge (Dev) 14 E. I. XI. s. m. n. sg. dat.]

Pallavacari (20-5) s. pr. m. sg. nom. Slw. acari
Title of acarya. Pkt. acariaa guru a title 6f
learned men ; a conductor of religious ceremonies.
Now the surname of the followers of Madhva-
carya and Rarnanujacarya in South India.

paZi (56-14) blame, calumny, s. n. sg. ace. nom, in
form. T. pai, M. paZi. N.K. hali to revile.

paZcidor (62-8) Those who whisper, adj. s. in. pi.
paZcu>parcu>paccu.<parcu (SMD 173 rt.) to
sound indistinctly. T. paZ(l)ku to be multiplied
as words, (pal tooth ; or possibly paZi to dis-
parage) Tel. paluku to speak, to speak ill
of.

317

prajeyum (5-18; 6-18) People also. s. n. sg. norn.

um. Slw. praje-.
prathitar (34-3) The celebrated one. Slw. prathita-

adj. s. m. p.l. (hon.) nom.
prathitayas'o .... ndakan (36-1) ?
prabhakhyam (57-2) s. n. sg. nom. Slw.
prabhavati .... (67-1) ?
pravalantari . . . . (41-2) ?
prasadamkeydar (5-12; 6-12) Conferred a favour.

past. 3. in. pi. (hon.) of key to do, with prasa-

daih favour. Slw. pasada-
patakan (63-10) A person guilty of sins. Slw.

pataka-, adjs. M. sg. nom.
pada (40-; a) -1) the foot. Slw. s. n. sg. nom.
Panapabhatarar (13-1 and 2)---s. pr. m. pi. (bon.) nom.

bhatarar from bhattara from bhartara.
parvvarurhman (5-13) The Brahrnans also, s. m. pi.

acc.+um. T. pappan, parppan; M. pappan,

parppan; Te. paruta, parudu-paruva a Brahman.

N. K. haruva. nom. parvvarum (6-18) ace.

parvvaruman (6-13).
parvvaruman (6-13) The Brahrnans. s. m. pi. ace.

+ um.
parvvarum (5-18, 6-18) The Brahmans. s. in- pi.

nom. um.

pala (M8-2) ?

[palisidom (Dev. 21. E. I. XI) (is) a protector, adj.

s. m. sg. nom. of palisida-pp. of palisu to pro-
tect, from Skt. pal to protect. T. palikku

(caus.) Te. palincu fcaus.)]
paluiii (3-3) Milk, s. n. sg. nom. um. T. palu, To.

palu.M. palu. milk. N.+K. halu.
pavu (20-1) a snake, s. n. sg. nom. H. K. havu from

pay to spring. T. pampu. Te. pamu. M.

pambu ; Tu. havu a snake.

318

pas'upatamariyadeya (63-15) s. n. sg. ace. (?) Slw.

niariyade Rules of conduct according to pas'u-

upata doctrines. (Sarvvadars' ana Samgraha :

Oh. VI, pp. 103-112 in Cowell's Translation.

Oh. VI, pp. 161-173, Text ed. by V. S. Abha-

yankar, B. 0. E. I. 1924.)
prasadantaraman (24-2) Another palace. Slw.

"antara. s. n. sg. ace.

pin (21-4 ; 56-3) the back. adv. of place. T. pin
afterwards, behind. M. pin the backside, behind;
Te. pidapa after. Te. pimmata afterwards,
pindu wale (3-1) ruled before? Rice has Poinbuc-

cale while ruling Pombucca. ?
pirigum (37-2) fut. 3. n. pi. of piri to separate.
Kittel does not give it in this sense, but gives
hiri to pull out. T. piri to disjoin. Tu.
piriyuni to separate. M. piri to separate,
prthivivallabha Mamgalisana (l-l)-Of Mamgalisa, the
favourite of the world. Slw. Mamgalisa. s. m.
sg. gen. younger brother of Kirthivarmman I.
KLISI App. p. 2.

w Calukyas of Badami Rana Vikraina Puli-
kesin I.

Kirittivarmman I (567-598.) Mamgalisa. (598-608.)

Pulikesi II (609-642).

I
Vikramaditya I (655-680).

I
Vinayaditya 1 (680-696).

Vijayaditya I (696-733).

punyadi (5-9) by the fruit of previous good deeds.
Slw. punya-s. n. sg. loc. in form, instr. in mean-
ing-

319

purakrtam (61-8)-the ancient karma (Fleet); the
deeds done in the past. Slw. krta- s. n. sg.
nom.

[pulla (Dev. 14. E. I. XI) the grass, s. n. sg. ace.
Another forrn pullam (Dev. 11) T. pul ;
M. pul ; Te. pullu ; Tu. pullu, hullu the
grass.]

pullam (Dev. 11. E.I. XI) s. n. sg. ace.

Puspasenacari (47-2) s. pr. rn. sg. nom. Slw. hut gen.
in meaning.

puZu (1-4) a worm. s. n. sg. nom. T. puu,i\t. PuZu,
Te. puruga, puruvu. Tu. puri a worm.

pujyamanan (36-4) being honoured. Slw. mana
adjs. m. sg. nom.

pujedandu (25-2) having honoured him. Slw. puje-.
adv. pp. of tar to bring, to give, with puje
worship. See varapfijedandu (25-2).

pujyasthalaman (59-1) the place worthy of honour
(worship) s. n. sg. ace. Slw. sthala-.

pudorii . . . li (65-14) ? the fiower garden, a
flower garden ?

puti (3-8) the name of one of the 21 hells, s. pr. n.
sg. nom.

puti-enva (63-22) called puti (enva fut. p. of en
to say, to call.)

puni (1-2) Having agreed or promised to undertake
adv. pp. of pun to vow, to promise. But Kittel
and SMD give only pun promise and not pun
(vide SMD. Dhatupatha 370). T. pun to under-
take a course of duties ; M. punuka to be yoked
to, to put to. Tel. punu to try. In other,
inscriptions pundu. E. C. VII. Sb. 299 ; E. I.
XVI. p. 70.

purvvamariyadeya (63-13) The ancient usages. Slw
yade. s. n. sg. ace.

320

prthivlrajyam keye (5-3 ; 0-2) When reigning over
the earth. Slw. prthivirajyarn keye inf. of key
to do. Another form rajyangeye.

prthivlrajyarigeye (65-4)- While ruling the kingdom of
the earth -keye inf. of key to do.

Pegurama (24-3) s. pr. m. sg. nom.

peran (61-6)-another pron. in. sg. nom. From pera
outer place ; the outside. Other form : peZan
(3-4) ; M.K. hera ; N.K. hora. T. piran a
stranger. M. piran another; Te. pera
another.

peran (H-ll), whoever else, adj s. m. sg. nom.

periya (5-6)-Great, heavy, adj. s. n. sg. gen. T. peridu
that which is great ; periya great ; perugu to
increase ; perukkam increase, per, peru great,
large ; M. perukuka to grow large ; Tel. peru-
gu peruvu to increase ; pedda great, old.
pelucu, perucu to increase. Tu. periya large.

perggoravam (21-4) the great guru. Slw. guru. s. m.
sg. nom. re : per, see periya (5-5) and peZcuge
(3-SL Guravam, goravam cf. sote and sode for
sudha (Skt.) bojamga for bhujamga ; kodu for
kudu. E.I. XVI. p. 81. 1067 A.D.

Perjediya (31-2) of Perjedi s. n. sg. gen. Possibly
per big, large, with jedi from jate. N.K. jede.
Perjediya of big matted hair. N.K. Hejjede.

Pertvanavams'adon (45-l)-Heof the Pertvana family.
Slw. vams'a. adj. s. m. sg. nom.

peZan (3-4) adj. s. m. sg. nom. Another form of
peran (61-6) No one else). Either I is a mistake
for r, as in tiZthadol ; or probably I was original
and / later. See peran (61-6; 3-11).

pe/cuge 1 3-8) may (it) increase. Optative pi. n. of
peZcu to increase (not found in Kittel or SMD)
SMD. dhatupatha 165 is percu. N.K. heccu.

321

T. peZ largo, great ; perugu to increase; M.

same as Te. peruca, peluca, pelcana greatness.

Tu. percuni to increase. Cb. pe/dore, page

71,
periya (6- r >) Same as periya, adj. s. n. sg. gen. T.

peZ, per ; M. per ; Te. peru great, large. Te.

perucu to increase.
peZda (25-1 ; 34-2; 38-1) mentioned by, prescribed.

pp. of peZ to say. N. K. helu. T. pes'u to

say. M. pecu. Te. prelu, pelu -to speak.
pokka (35-4) entered. Past. 3. sg. in. of pugu

(pou) to enter. N.K. hogu and hokka. inf.

poge (3-7). pugu probably the more ancient form

and pogu later. T. puku to enter. Past pukken ;

N. T. coll. pugunden; M. puku to enter. Past.

pukka ; Tu. pogguni to enter.
pogevogi (3-7) -entering and taking, poge . inf. of pogu

(pugu) to enter, pogi adv. pp. of pogu -to go.

poge pogi pogevogi. pogu N.K hogu. T.

po. pogu to go. Past ponen. Poyinen Fut.

poven ; neg. pogen. M. poka to go. Te. pogu.

povu. po to go. Tu. popini to go. DR. p.

154 of AJ P. 1929.
poiigolvicitragirikutamayarii (49-3) of the beautiful

golded mountain. Slw. pongojva-adv. fut p. kol-

Probably pongolva and citragirikutamaya-. s. n.

sg. ace.
podeda (li-1) That had covered, pp. of pode to

cover, (pudi in some inscriptions, cf. pugu and

pogu) T. putai to hide to cover. M. puta a

cover, an outer garment. Tel. podi, podugu to

cover. Tu. pudepuni, podepuni to put on

clothes, to brood as a hen over her eggs.
poragu (8-30) The outside, s. n. sg. nom. From

pora the outside. T. puram outside, exterior.
G. o. I. 21

322

M. puraui the back, the outside ; Te. pora the
exterior covering.

polladurii (61-7) The evil also. adj. s. IK sg. nom.
+ um (N.K. holladu, hole) T.pol to agree with,
negative of this is polla. T. polia, pollada bad,
vicious, (neg. of pon to shine) M. polla to be
bad, evil. Tel. pollu- useless ; Tu. polle slan-
der, backbiting.

Polikesiarasara (2-2) s. pr. rn. pi. (lion.) gen. King
Polikesi's. T. arasan, irasan a king. M. araca
a king. Te. arasu. Tu. arasu Oaldwell and
Kittel say arasu is from raja.
KLISIEI VJII, App. p. 1.

polipukolliyuih (3-9) Probably the place for waving a
firebrand ; the granary of good fortune ; pol
to excel ; kolli a firebrand, polipu good luck,
kolli-" granary, s. n. sg. iiorn. + um.?

po/du (14-1) having cut asunder, adv. pp. of pol
to split. T. po/, polu to split. M. po/ikka-
to cause to be split.

BA.

batarimge (63-4) to the bhatta. Plw. bbatta>bata.

Skt. bharta. s. in. pi. (hon.) dat. T. pattan-*a

learned man, especially one well-versed with

philosophical systems ; a lord ; M. bhattan- ~ Te.

bhattudu a learned man. Tu. bhatte a priest.
Banavasiya (8-^7), (37) of Banavasi. Slw. Vana-

vasi-. s. pr. n. sg. gen. Kittel : a forest Spring.

Chandombudhi. p. XXXI. not satisfactory, also

called Vaijayanti, DKD.p. 278. I. Ant. III. 273 ;

VIII. p. 244 ; XIII, p. 329.
bamdu (61-8) having come. adv. pp. of bar

to come, T. vandu (pp.) M. vandu. Te.

vacci.

323

ballittu (61-7) Strong, adj. s. n. sg. nom. used pre-

dicatively from bal strength (cf. T. valindadu,

K. balitu).

bra .... iihge ((58-3) ?
Basantakurnara (8-^) S. pr. ni. sg. nom. Slw.
badhippa (61-5) causing distress, fat. p. of badhisu

to cause distress, from Skt. badh to harass, cf.

mudippidar.
Baladevaguruvadigal ("2*2-2) s. pr. m. pi. (hon.) nom.

Slw. guru

bale (21-4) Maiden. Slw. s. f. sg. voc.
bala (21-1) Of a sword, s. n. sg. gen.

T. val, M. va}, Te. valu a sword. Tu. bal a

razor
bitta (62-7) that was granted . pp. of vidu (bidu) to

leave bitte, past. 1. pers. sg. N.K. colloq. bitte,

bidisidaru past. 3. pi. of bidisu causative of

bidu; bitta for bittar. Perhaps the r is left out

by oversight. T. vitta, M. vitta, Te. vidicina.
bittavol (61-9) in the same way as releasing, adj s.

n. sg. norn. used as an adv. cf. bitta and

vol.
bitte (7-4) made a grant, past. 1. sg. from bidu to

leave; colloq. N.K. bitte (past 1. pers. sg.) ?
bidisidaru (7-7) -granted, caused to be left. Past. 3.

pi. of bidisu caus. of bidu to leave.
biranuggi (7-10) ?
besageyvalli (63-3 ; 64-3) while worshipping. Slw.

besa from vidha to honour. To worship (?)

according to Kittel. vasa, besa and basa seern

to be more apt.
begam (35-1) quickly. Slw. s. n. sg. nom. Used as

an adv. N.K.bega. T. vegam swiftness. Te.

vega, vegamu quickness; M. vegam haste;

Tu. bega speedily.

21 '

324

BHA.

bhaktiyim (20-3) with devotion. Slw. bhakti- s. n.

sg. instr.

Bhattarakar, bhattarar, bhantaraka (18-1) Pkt. for
bharta venerable or worshipful person, used of
gods, scholars and men of rank ; a kind of saiva
monk. bhatta< bharta doctor, a designation
of great scholars, balant is the Tdb. of bhatta-
raka (See E. C. IT. i9. Devanandibalara.)
bhantaraka is from bhattaraka. There are two

reasons for this nasal.

I. -tt- is written in early inscriptions as t, like
all long consts. The is like an anusvara
and hence bhamtaraka and later bhanta-
raka.

cf. (1) hesarani tu (or hesaranittu E.G. IV.
Hg. 112 (1342).

(2) ta pidavanu for lappidavanu E.C IV.

Hg. 112(1342).

(3) ca kravarttige forcakkravarttige E.C. IV.

Hg. 112 (1342).

Why not for -tt- is not known.

(4) ta naguru (2) do

(4) a nadani (8) E.C. IV. HS. 94, 1262.

(6) vunata (15) E.C. VII. Sk. 3131. 1390.

(7) gade (15) for gadde )

JE.O. iv. Hg.

(8) sidaya (36) for siddaya 3 112.

(9) Gopana for Gopanna E.C. VII. Sk. 282.

(10) Gumatanathana(4))

[E.G. II. 342, (H12).
sanidhiyalli (4) 3

(11) .sampanaruih E.C. IV. Hs. 101. (1460.)
This explains some of the nasals in the Pkt.

loan words like Chajiitaiimni.

326

II. There is pendara gopajadevaru (E.G. III.

TN. 97, 1276) 29.
pendara not in Kittel.

T. pantaram a religious mendicant wearing
beads and yellow garments ; a monk ; Skt.
pindara a religious mendicant or beggar ;
a cowherd ; a term of censure, bhantaraka
may probably be a contamination between
pandaram and bhattaraka.

bhadram (agi) (29-*2) firm, happy, auspicious, pros-
perous. Slw. bhadram. s. n. sg. nom. subject of
agi.

Bhadravahusacandraguptamumndrayugmadin (29-1)
with the pair of the great sages, Bhadravahuand
Candragupta. s. m. sg. instr. Slw. yugma Sea
I. Ant. XXI. p. 156 ; E.G. II. Introd. pp. 36-42 ;
E. I. IV. p. 22 ; DKD. p. 281. JRAS. 1909-23 ;
JRAS. 1921*816 ; E.I. IV. 339; Vienna Oriental
Journal : VII. 352. Thomas : Jainism or the
Early Faith of Asoka. p. 23.

I. Tradition re Bhadrabahu and Candragupta.
II. Inscriptions : EC II 67 of \ 129 ; 64 of 1163 ;

258 of 1432.

III. Brhatkathako6a by Harisena 931 AD B. son
of Soma^arma and Soinasri, taken by G-ovar-
dhana. Candragupta of Ujjain. Bhadra-
bahu died at Bhadrapada-Ujjain.
IV. Bhadrabahu Carita by Batnanandi. Caudra-

gupti, King of Ujjain.

V. Munivariisabhyudaya of Cidananda (680) B
Killed by a tiger, C came on a prilgrimage
stayed and died at Belgola 9.

VI. Bajavalikathe (1838) by Devacandra, C, King
of Pataliputra. became B'S disciple.

326

VII. EC II. 1.

Dr. Fleet's criticism.
But 1. Dr. Leumann V. 0. Journal VII. 382.

2. Dr. Hoernle. IA. XXI. 59-60.

3. Thomas. Jainism 23.

4. Jainism prevalent at the time of Mudra-

raksasa.

Raia Tarangini, and > T . . . Tr .
A i u ~ c Jainism m Kashmir.

Ainiakbari. )

5. C's disappea-rance from public life

B. C. H22-298.

6. Dekhan and the north of Mysore ruled by
Mauryas, JUAS 1919. 598.'

Edicts of Asoka in Mysore, Hyderabad,
etc. EC VIT. SK. 225. stating that
Kuntala (W. Dekhan and n. Mysore) was
ruled by Nandas.

7. V. A. Smith : Oxford Hist, of India 75-76.
Jaina tradition holds the field and no
alternative account exists.

bhamtamurh (3-3) the paddy produce, s. n. sg. nom.

Skt. bhakta Pkt. bhatta (shared out) M. bhat

(n) (IVD), N.K. batta and bhatta. cf. banta

from bhata a warrior from bhrta hired^ cf.

bhattamum (-24) E.G. IV. Hg. 4. 750, A.D.
bhavavit (50-3) knower of this existence. Slw. s. m.

sg. nom.
bhagakam (8-3) to the share of. Slw. bhaga- s. n.

sg. dat. am ; ace. bbagamum ; m. nom. bhagi.
bhagarnum (3-9) the share also. Slw. bhaga- s. n.

sg. ace. urn.

bhagi (20-4) a participator. Slw, s. m. sg. nom.
Bhavagamundanu 8-37) s. pr. rn.sg. nom.+ (-um)

re : gamunda. See Edeyagamundarum.
bhumi (4-4) Land. Slw. s. n. sg. nom.

327

bhrtasayyamam (62-1) Filled with concentration or

self-control. Slw. s. m. sg. norn.
bhelli (62-16) Silver, s. n. sg. ace. from bel White.

bh is a mistake for b-. N.K. belli, cf. Skt.

rajata. cf. T. velli (silver) whiteness, Venus,

Friday. M. velli (same as in T.) ; Tel. vendi

silver ; Tu. bolli silver.

MA.

raaga (8-29) son. s. in. sg. dat. in apposition with
Devereyage. T. makan sou. M. inakan; above
and below Te. maga- manliness; a male:
magadu a man, a husband; Tu. mage a son ;
magadlu -sons.

mattalu (65-14) a measure of land (mattar;. rnattalu
not given by Kittel. T. mattu a measure, a
standard, amount, limit; mattukkol a measur-
ing rod ; M. mattu measure, limit ; Te. mattu
a measure ; Kan. rnattu, matta measure, limit.
The proposed derivation from vartane a
measure of 50 mandalas is not correct, matra
measure, size, height, depth, length, quantity ;
matra a standard of measure, a foot, mattar
(and later mattal) is from matra.

madure (20-1) s. pr. n. sg. Slw. madhura.

manjuvol (87-1) like the dew. s. n. sg. nora. used as
an adv. of manner. T. inancu ; M. mannu ; Te.
mancu.

manarn (44-4) (the state of) mind. Slw. s. n. sg. ace.
in meaning, norn. in form. ace. manavam ; loc.
manade.

manade (62-9) in the mind, Slw. mana-. s. n. sg.
loc.

manavam (52-3) the mind, s. n. sg. ace.

maranam (35-2) death, s. n. sg. norn. Slw.

(35-4) on the top of the mountain, s. n. Sg.

noin. used as an adj. of place. T. malai ; M.

mala; Te. mala; Tu. male a hill overgrown

with forest.
Mayuragrarnasaihghasya (52-5) Part of a Skt. s'loka

cf. Navilursamgha.
marali (63-3) again ; adv. pp. of maral to turn

back. Used as an adv. T. marra, mara another,

next; Te. mara hi to turnback; Tu. rnaru

next, following.
mariyadeyan (62-15) The usage. Slw. yade- s. n.

sg. ace. T. raariyadai propriety, limit; M.

maryada limit, custom. Te. mariyada method,

procedure; Tu. inaryadi, mariyadi custom, usage.
Malanura (23-1) of Malanur, s. pr. n. sg. gen ; T. ur,

M. ur, To. uru, Tu. nru a village, a town.

(Ma.lanur hilly town).
Mahanantamatlgantiyar (44-2) Holy Anantamatl-

gantiyar. s. f. pi. (hon.) noin. Slw. ganti-
rnahagirima .... gale (35-3)- ascended the

great mountain? Slw.
mahajanakke (7-4) To the people of the village. Slw.

jana-. s. n. sg. dat.
mahatavan (35-2) The great ascetic. Slw. tavE-.

adj. s. rn. sg. nom.
mahatavadi (35-4) great penance. Slw. tava. s. n.

sg. loc.
mahadantagradul (21-4) In the great fangs (of the

cobra). Slw. agra-. s. n. sg. loc.
mahadevan (35-1) adj. s. m. sg. nom. deva-.
Mahadevi}^aruni (62-4) s. pr. f. pi. (hon.) nom. Slw.

devi. See QJMS. Jan. 1933. See E.G. VI.

Introd. p. 5.
mahaparutadul (20-2) on the great mountain. Slw.

paruta s. n. sg. loc.

329

Maharajadhiraja Paramesvarabhattarakar (7-2)
adj. s. m. pi. (hon.) nom.

madi (7-7) having done. adv. pp. of madu to do.
vb. past. 3rd. m. sg. madidom (65-23) cans. past.
3. sg. in. madisidom.

T. madal doing ; M. rnaduka to build, to cons-
truct ; mattam making. Kan. mata. Tu. ma-
dauni to cultivate the land, mata sorcery.

madidom (65-23) Made this. vb. past. 3. sg. in. of
madu to do. See madi.

madisida (2-3) That caused to be made. pp. of

niadisu causative of madu- -to do. T. madal.

manakkar (30-1) disciple. Tdb. of manavaka. s. m.
pi. (hon.) nom. T. maiiavakan, manakkan a
pupil. M. manavan a boy, a student, rbanak
kan a friend of the bridegroom. Te. inanava-
kudu a boy. Tu. mani a Brahmin boy. Skt.
manavah, manavakah a boy, a Brahmin boy. .

Madhavan (61-6) Visnu, Slw. Madhava- s. in. sg.
nom.

madhuryaiia (61-5) Sweetness, s. rn. sg. nom. Slw.

madhuryamge (61-5) to the sweet, s. rn. sg. dat
Slw. madhurya-

manada (27-3) of self-respect.? Slw. mana- s. n. sg.
gen.

Marananu (8-29) s. pr. m. sg. nom. + anu (m) Slw.
mara-

malakarargge (l-3)-^~To the garland - makers. Slw.
kara- s. m. pi. dat. mala a tatsarna. SMD. 297.
Kittel's Diet. XV. footnote.

Masenar (25-1) s. pr. m. pi. (hon.) nom. Slw.

sena-.

tnikkudan (25-2) which surpassed, adj. s. n. sg. ace.
of mikka pp. of migu to exceed, to remain
over. ,T. raiku to surpass. Mincu to exceed

S80

M. Miku~-to surpass ; mikkiln to become great ;
Tu. mikkuni and raiku to surpass,

mfsel rnideyum (3-6) first fruits as consecrated, s. n.
sg. nom. + um. From migisal that which is left
for or is different from ; anything untouched or
undefiled ; T. mittu the balance ; first fruits set
apart for Bacred uses; Te. mldu consecrated;
Tu. ml portion.
M. nricli unripe fruit;
Te. rnidi do

Tu, midi do

K. midi do ,

uuledor (40-2) Those that surpassed, adj.? s. m. pi.
nom. probably from mlrida from lulru to go
beyond. T. mlru, M. rnlru. Te. v mlru, Tu. mi-
runi to transgress (I used for r probably).

muttidon (20-1) he who is bitten or touched by. adj.
s. m. sg. nom. from muttida pp, of muttu -to
touch ;T, muttu to thrust against. M. muttu
to touch; Te. muttu to touch; Tu. muttuni
to touch.

nmkham(age) (5-11) The leaders or the prominent or
the first people. SI. mukha-. s. n. sg, nom.

mukhavu (6-11) same as omkhatn. s. n. sg. nouf.

mugiva (54-2) fut. p. of mugi to contract. To
choose, to end. T, muki to end. mukivu
end; Te. mugiyu to end; Tu. mugituruni to
finish.

mudippidar (16->1 ; 17-1 ; 19-2)-rcaused to end. Past.

3. pi. m. of mudippu causative of mudi to end.

other form ; mudippidar (12-3). T. mudi to

end. murm the end. M. mudi to finish,

- mudippu end. Tel. mudipu to^nd.

mudippidar (11*2; 12-3; 13-2; 22-2; 23-2; 31-5;
32-2) caused to end. Past 3. pi. (hon.) of

391

tnudippu oaus. of mudi to end. See mudip-

pidar.

(tnu) . . . dippidar.?
mudimegeye (62-5)- dying, inf. of key to do, with

rmidime becoming full grown, mudime abs,

s. from mudi old age. T. enudiyaiua senior,

inudu old; T. murmend. Te. mudiyu tc

grow old; mudimi old age \ Tu. mudiyunitc

feel worn out ; raudiye adj. old n. an old.nian,
muni (50-2) a sage. s. m. sg. nom. said to be a

Skt. word. But in Te. munivu anger; K

munisu, mulisu anger ; Tu. munipu anger ;

muniyuni to hate,
munin (vratagalnontu) (14-4) of a muni. s. m. sg,

gen. probably for muniyin. (See muni),
rnunipungavan (35-1) The chief of sages: Slw.

munipumgava- s. m. sg. noin. (See muni),
murukanundu u (7-12) ? - muruku a bit, from mu-

ri to break ?
murutimgal (19-2) For three months, s. n. sg. nom.

used adverbially* See ondutimgal. T. munru.

M. Munna. Te. mu^u ; Tu. muji.
miarudegulamin (63^24) three temples, s. n. sg. ace.

See. degula. and murutimgal.
muvetmura (3-6) Of the thirty-three, s. n. sg. gen.
muvettumuradevejanam (62-14) Those thirty three

gods. s. n. sg. nom. janam treated as n. in such

combinations (SMD 92) Slw. devejanam.
mu .... vvana .... (6*5-9)?
muva .... devapadam (7-5) ?
mrty uvara van (45-1 ; 56-1; 58-3). approach of death.

Slw. mrtyu s. n. sg. ace. varavan from varavu

from var to come. T. varavu coining, arrival.

M. varavu. Te. varavu a channel for the flow

of water.

332

meccen (37-3) I do not approve. Neg. 1. Sg. m. of
meccu to approve, to admire, to esteem. T.
meccu to admire. M. meccam excellency,
superiority. Te. meccu to praise, Tu. mec-
cu to applaud. O.K. marcu.

metti (14-2) Having trampled on. adv. pp. of rnettu
to trample down. To step. T. rnettu, M. mettu,
Te. mettu to trample down.

mendukam (3-4) ? m. endukum ? in whatever
time ? never ?

mettiyeki (3-10) ? plastering the floor ? See acca-
kammattiyeki

mensage (62- ' 6) Probably inenasuhoge the pepper-
smoke? or menasige the name of the menasige
plant. T. iriilagu,Te. miriyalu. Kan.menasu
pepper.

Mellagavasaguruvar (26-1) s. pr. in. pi. (hon.) nom.
Slw. -vasaguru-. K. mella squint, from mel.
to roll, as the eyeballs, mellaga a squinting man.

men (61-10) and. Conjunction, M. K. men and
menu what is above, from mel above. M.
men what is above: Superiority; menavan a
superior sudra. (modern M. menon). replaced by
mattu in N.K.

mel (14-3; 20-3; 21-1; 27-3; 33-2; 44.3).-- The top
on. s. n. sg. nom. used as an adv. of place-
Other forms; melain. mel. K. the top part ; T.
above, the sky; M. what is above; Te. better,
superior ; Tu. the upper part. adj. higher, adv.
hereafter.

melaiii (62-14) moreover, s. n, sg. nom. am used as a
conjunction moreover. T. inelum moreover,
further.

modalina (n) (62-7) former original, s. n. sg. gen. of
modal the first, the beginning, probably from

333

rnudu old, adv. from T. caudal the first, the
beginning; M. mudal; Te. modalu, rnrolu first,
Tn. mudel origin, cause, Mar. rnodala. cf. padu-
val ; mudal, i.e., mudu + inf. suffix mudal.

inodeya (31-3) of the Munjagrass group, s. n. sg.
gen. Slw. munja? Mode from inudu to ad-
vance in growth (?) The guru probably belonged
to a particular group which had the inunja grass
for its emblem.

Meleura Maniyagarnundarum (Rice) (5-9) s. pr. in.

pi. (hon. nom. + um. K. rnaniya superintendence

of temples, mat/has, customs palace chanties. T.

maniya- same as M.K. Te. maniva-kadu. Now

maniyagara a subordinate revenue officer.

Molejaramaniyagamundarum (t>-9)-Same as Moleura-

' (Fleet)/

Monigumvadigala (19-1) of Moniguruvadigal. s. m.
pi. (hon.) gen. Slw. guru- rnoni for mauni-.

Moniguruvara (12-1 and 2). of Moniguruvar. s. m. pi.
(hon.) gen. Slw. guru- moni <Skt. rnaunin.

Mauniyacariyar (50-1) ^S. pr. m. pi. (hon.) norn. Slw,
acari ; pkt. moni. Skt. maunin.

YA.

yatiyam (34-2) religious vow. i.e., sanyasana. Slw.
yati-. s. n. sg. ace. Skt. yati an ascetic; re-
straint ; check ; control.

yipaduy (63-5) ? K. padu a place of refuge for wild
animals between stones or in rocks ?

yendu (43-3) saying, adv. pp. of en to speak, to say.
T. enru (pp.) See endu. cf. yalliya (51), yadinatha
(57), yacaryya (58, 84, 87, 93, 94), yamvanam
(59), yatavidba (86), yadu (95) E.I. XV. 337.

334

BA.

ramyasuralokasukakke (20-4) To the delightful happi-
ness or pleasure of suraloka or the world of gods.

Slw. suka-. s. n. sg. dat. see aksirnanakke.
Ravicandanurh (5*8; 6-8) s. pr. m. sg. norn.+um.

canda <Skt. caridra. Slw. Ravicanda.
ragasankhyagati .... (46-3) ?
ragadvesatamomalavyapagatar (15-1) Free from the

black dirt of attachment and hatred. Slw. gata.-

adj. s. m. pi. (hon.) nom.
rajadandamum (62-12) Also the punishment by kings.

Slw. danda- s. n. sg. nom.+um.
rajapujyam (32-3) The honoured of kings. Slw. part

of a Skt. sloka.
rajasravitarn(age) (5-12 ; 6-1'j) in the shape of a royal

proclamation, adj. s. n. sg. nom. I. Ant. VIII. p.

286 has the same expression ; also ' nagara

s'ravitam.'

Rajnlmatlgantiyar (43-1) s. pr. f. pi. (hon.) nom.
rajyava (45-2) the Kingdom. Slw. rajya. s. n. sg. ace.
risigirisilemel (36-3) on the rock of the Risi (holy)

mountain. Slw. silo-, s. n. g. nom. (adv.)
Revamagaviganu (8-31) s. pr. m. sg. nom. u (for um)

Slw. gaviga from gamiga-.

LA.

laksanavantar (20-2) those acquainted with the symp-
toms. Slw. vanta- s. m. pi. nom. But here
vanta the possessor of the knowledge of laksa-
nas ; hence -vanta -jna.

laksyam (59-1) fut. p. to be indicated, to be
observed; N. object aimed at, aim, prize,
example, disguise.

335

Lamjigesaraihdevarke (1-2) for the god, Lamjigesara
(Visnu). Slw. sara- s. n. sg. dat. To. lamja,
lamjika, lamje a harlot, from Skt. Lanjika. Skt.
Lanjika, Lanja a prostitute, a harlot ; Laksini ;
from laiij to blame, to dwell, to shine, to cen-
sure.

likitaih (20-4) written. Slw. adj. s. n. sg. noni. from
pp. of (Skt) likh to write, other form : likhitam
(8-36).

likhitam (8-36) written. Slw. adj. s. nom. from pp.
of likh to write.

lekkisadum (58-1) not reckoning, neg. inf. of lekkisu
cans, of lekka Tdb. of lekha reckoning 4-um.
Te. lekka laksyamu, lekkincu to attend to.
Tu. lekkiyuni to reckon.

lo kkalum (64-4) ?

Va.

vanadol (52-2) In the forest. Slw. vana-. s. n. sg.

loc.
vandu(inisu) (29-2) A (little) numeral adj. sg. nom.

qualifying * inisu ' this much, vandu for ondu

(one). Seeomdu.
vandu (33-2; 36-1) having come. adv. pp. of var to

come. In 33-2, vvandu for vandu. T. vandu

(adv. pp.); M. vanda; Te. vacci (adv. pp.) Tu.

baudu (adv. pp.) ?

vvandu (33-2) having come. Same as vandu (36-1)
vvarapujedandu (25-2) having offered holy worship,

Slw. varapuje- tandu adv. pp. of tar to bring,

to give with varapuje-. T. tandu (adv. pp.)

Te. tecci (adv. pp.). Tu. tandu (adv. pp.) See

tandu.
varppin (41-2) by firmness, s. n. sg. instr. (?) M. K.

balpin, balupin, baluhin,? T. varppu firmness,

336

strength. T. val, vali, valu strength, firmness.

Te. balu strength. Tel. balupu strength,
valiyaradili .... ligajge (4-4) ?
Valliggameyara (6-6) Of the people of VaUiggame

(from Valligrama.) Other forms Vallirgameyara,

M.K. Balagamve (B.C. VII. Sk. 114) (Fleet

PSOCI:.Nos. 152-212 inclusive) N.K. Balagami

(Rice). Slw. Valligrame- s. m. pi. gen. of. Balli-

(E.C. VIII Sk. 100).

Vallirgameyara (5-6) Same as Vallirggaineyara.
val (29-1 ; 34-1) most certainly. Adv. of manner.

Probably from vala strength (?) Other form

valarii (35-i); valav (-m->-v-) (35-4).
valav (adu) (35-4) Most certainly. Adv. same as

val.

Vasantakumara (8-3) s. pr. m. sg. nom. Slw.
vratagal (14-4) The religious vows ; Slw.vrata-, s. n.

pi. nom. in form, ace. in meaning,
vratasilarionpigunadim (33-1) by virtue of religious

vows, noble character and devotional acts. Hlw.

vrata slla- and guna-. s. n. sg. instr.
Vagara (7-6) s. pr. n. sg. gen.
Varanasiyalul (5-13) at Varanasi. Slw. Varanasi- si

pr. n. sg. loc. Other form Varanasi va^d-ul

(6-13).
Varanasivadul (6-13) at Varanasi-.Slw. na4 i - . cf.

Baranas ivada I. Ant. XIX.p. 145 and Baranasiva

B.I. VII. p. 202 AD. H56. s. pr. n. sg. loc. probably

contamination between Varanasi and Siva,
varddhiya (20-3) of the ocean. Slw. varddhi- s. n.

sg. gen.
vali .... bhagma (64-8) ? Siw. bhaga-. s. ri.

sg. ace,?
vaZvu (40-2) life, living here. s. n. sg. nom. T. va/, M.

vaZ, Tu. balu, N.K. balu.

337

vicitrakanakaprajvalyadim (25-2) with the splendour
of variegated gold. Slw. prajvalya-. s. n. sg,
instr.

viccheyarh (52-1) ? vidye? Slw. s. n. sg. ace. Pkt.
viccaya renunciation ; ?

vittu (29-4 ; 34-1) having given up. adv. pp. of
vidu to leave. M.K. and N.K. bittu. past. 3. pi.
m. vittar (5-6 ; 6-6) adv. pp. in T. vittu ; M.
vi^u ; Te. vidici.

vittar (5-6 ; 6-6) remitted. Past. 3. pi. m. of
vidu to leave ; from this vidu to grant. T.
vitteir. M.K. bittan. N.K. bittar-u. I. Ant. Vol.
XIX. P. 145.

vidyullategala (37-1) of the screaks of lighting. Slw.
vidyullate-. s. n. pi. gen.

vittidalli (6-16) where it is sown. adj. s. n. ag. loc.
T.K. vittu. from vittida pp. of vittu. to sow.
M.K. bittu. N.K. bittu. T. vittu to sow ; a seed.
T. vitai a seed ; M. vittu to sow. a seed ; Te.
vittu to sow; a seed. Tu. bittuni to sow;
bitt a seed.

vidrumadhara Santa senamum&an (29-3) The coral-
lipped sage, Santisena. Slw. muni- s. pr. in. sg.
nom.

vidhanadindu (34-2) In the manner prescribed. Slw.
vidhana. s. n. sg. instr. used as an adv. of man-
ner. See dvadas ada.

vidhanamukhadin (44- ) according to the rules pres-
cribed. Slw. mukha- s. n. sg. instr.

vinayacaraprabhavan (30-2) s. pr. m. sg. nom. Slw.
prabhava-

Vinayadevasenamahamuni (56-3) s. pr. ui. sg. nom.
Slw. muni.

Vinayaditya satyasrayaprithivl vallabhar (7-1) s. pr.
m. pi. (hon.) nom. (Vinayaditya, the refuge of
G. o, i. 22

338

truth and the favourite of earth). (DKD. p. 337

and p. 367).
viparltamge (61-10) to the exceptional man. Slw.

viparlta-. s. m. sg. dat. voc. viparita.
viparita (61-7) the exceptional man (to the Kali age)

Slw. s. m. sg. voc.

vipulasri Katavapra nalgiriya (44-3) of the broad holy
mountain kata-, vapra. Slw. vapra and giri s. n.

sg. gen. cf. naltapa ; nonpi
vivaralke . .. . bbu . . . (4-5) ?
Visokabhatarara (39-2) s. pr. m. pi. (hon.) gen. Slw.

bhatara-.
visa (1) weight of exactly 3 Ibs. 1 oz. 4 drs. with the

Calukya of varaha ; (2) Weight of 12 ozs.

and 2 drs. (1/4 of 1. above). Sanderson in his

dictionary gives visa 1/16 and visa five seers

or the weight of 120 Rupees. This word occurs

again in I. Ant. VIII. p. 286.
Vrsabhanandlmuni s. pr. m. sg. nom. Slw.
vettadul (25-1) On the mountain. S. n. sg. loc.

Other form betta-. N.K. betta. T. vira to increase

Vlru to be great, verpu a hill. Tu. bottu

high, lofty.
Vettedeguravadigal (manakkar) (30-1). s. pr. m. *al.

(hon). nom in form, gen. in meaning, vettede
vetta and ede hill and place. Slw. guru-.
Vedevalliyara (6-7) of the people of Vedevalli.- s. m.

(Eice) pi. gen. Other form Vedevalliyara (5-8)

(Fleet)
Vedevalliyara (5-8) Of the people of Vedevalli s. m.

pi. gen. (Fleet),
velege (5-18 ; 6-18) May it grow ! Optative, s. n. sg.

of vele to grow. To increase. M.K. be}e N.K.

bele. T. vilai to grow. M. vila-. neg. inf,

vejeyade (5-16; 6-16).

339

veleyade (5-16; 6-16) Without growing, neg. inf. of
vele to grow. M.K. and N.K. beleyade. T.
vilaiyamal without growing.

Velgola (29-3) of Velgola. s. pr. N. sg. nom. in form,

gen. in meaning. In the later inscriptions, Belugula
(E.G. II. 333-10. 1206 A.D. E.G. II. 334-20.
1282 A.D.; E.G. II. 336-20, 1279 A.D. E.G. II.
347-35, 1278 A.D.) Belugulada E.G. II. 341-
1325; Belugula E.G. I. 10, 1544. Belugula E.G.
II. 249, 1723 A.D.

N.K. Belgola. Velgola is from vel white ;
kola a tank; T. vel and ven white, kulam
a tank ; M. vel, ven white ; Te. vennelagutti
the rnoon, where ven- -white, venna butter ;
Tu. bili white.

velmadada (22-1) Probably velmadada, here mada
a palace, velmada a white palace, or velmada
may be the name of a village, where mada is the
tdb. of mahadeva. s. m. sg. gen. ?

Vegura (15-2) of Vegur. s. pr. n. sg. gen.

Vokuliyanu (8-30) s. pr. m. sg. nom. + anu (or).

S'A.

&'ala ... a ... rnunda (7-13) ?

Santapana (8-28) of Santapa. s. pr. m. sg. gen. Slw.
Santapa-. appa the usual termination of
(father) proper names of persons particularly of
of Saivas, as a term of respect. T. appa, M. appa,
Te. appe, abbe, abba, Tu. amme, Probably from
Skt. amba father. (Kittel) but <atma.?

Santararasa (64-1) of Santarasa, s. pr. m. sg. geri.
See. E.G. VI. introd. p. 10.

[Santivarmma (Dev. E.I. XI.) s. pr. m. sg. nom.
Slw.]

Sapade (20-4) by the curse, s. n. sg. loc. Slw.

22*

340

Sasanama (8-28) the deed or document of gift. Slw.
Sasana.- s. n. sg. ace.

ikhirnele (-21-1) on fire. Slw. s'ikhi- s. n. sg. norn. e
used as an adv. of place.

Silatala .... (59-3) (on) the rock ....
Slw. s. n. sg. ?

Sivanile padedan (36-4) attained the abode (or
condition) of happiness. Slw. s'ivanile + past. 3.
sg. in. of pade to get. with 6'ivanile (happy
condition), (nile is not in Kittel). nela earth,
nele a bode, nila, nilavu the door frame. T.
nilai state, condition, place. M. nila place,
position. Te nela place; Tu. nile firm. Tu.
nela earth.

Sisittiyar (19-1) woman disciple. Slw. s. f. pi. (hon.)
nom. cf. D'evedittiyerindurii. cf. s'isya.

Sistajanapriyan (61-1) Beloved of the good people.
Slw. priya. adj. s. m. sg. nom.

Sisya (11-1. f ; 12-2. m.) disciple. Slw. s. f. and m.
sg. nom. cf. s'isittiyar.

Sisyar (18-1; 22-1; 23-1; 31-2; 32-1; 50-2) -dis-
ciple, s. m. pi. (hon.) nom. slw.

Slladim (4-^-2) by conduct. Slw. s'lla- s. n. sg. instr.

Suddhatmasaihyoddhakar (15-1) a pure-souled war-
rior. Slw. samyoddhaka- adj. s. m. pi. '(hon.) nom.

Subharhgade (34-1) in his auspicious body. Slw.
amga-. sJn. sg. loc.

Sailadul (34-2) on the mountain, Slw. Saila- s. n,
sg. loc.

Sri (3-1; 5-1; 11-1; 14-1; 21-1; *3-l ; 25-1;
26-1; 27-1; 28-1; 29-1; 30-1; 32-1; 36-1;
42-1 ; 45-1 ; 49-1 ; 50-1 ; 52-1) Wealth, Pros-
perity. This is used as an auspicious sign at the
commencement of letters, manuscripts and
inscriptions; sometimes for the needs of metre.

341

Sri AgaZiya (moniguru vara) (12-1). s. pr. n. sg. gen.

Sri is used as an honorific prefix to the names of

eminent and holy persons and places.
Sri Ullikkalguruvadigal (10-1) The guru of Ullikkal.

slw. guru s. m. pi. (hon.) nom.
Sn Klrnamalapuspa . . . . r (15-4) strewn with

flowers . . . s. ru. pi. (hon.) nom.?
Sri Kolattura (42-1) of holyKolattur. s. pr. n. sg. gen.
Sri Jambunaygir (17-1) Holy Jambunayakiyar. Slw.

nayaki- s. f. pi. (hon.) nom.
Sri Jinamarggar (60-1) Follower of the Jaina path-

Slw. margga adj. s. in. pi. (hon.) nom.
Srltaparnan (44-1) Penance. Slw. tapa-. s. n. sg. ace.
Sri Tirtthadagurivadigal (9-1) -s. pr. m. pi. (hon.)

nom. Slw. S'ritirttha and guru.
Sri Devacaryya . . . (48-1) s. pr. in. sg.?
Sri Navilur Samghada (55-1) s. f. of the holy Navilur

sariigha. S. pr. n. sg. gen.
Sri Neduboreya (13-1) of holy Nedubora. Nedubore.

central mound, s. pr. n. sg. gen.
Sri Palarama .... re (7-9) ? S. pr. from Sg ?
Sri Purttiya . . . (58-3) of s'ri Purtti.
Sri Puranvaya Gandhavarmma Namita s'risariighada

(59-2) bowed to by Gandhavarmma, the fortu-
nate Lord of Pura family. Slw, samgha- s. n. sg.

gen.
SrlprthivIvallabhamaharajadhirajaparamesVara-

bhatarar (5-2) adj. s. m. pi. (hon.) nom. Slw.

bhatara-
Sri Perutnalu guruvadigala (11- 1) of holy Perurnalu

guruvadigal ; perumal big person ? T. perumal.

s, pr. m. pi. (hon.) gen. slw. guru.
Sri Pogillisendrakamaharajar (5-3, 6-2). s. pr. m, pi.

(hon.) norn. slw. raja-. DKD. p. 292 ; T. Ant.

XIX p. 14?.

342

Sri Bhantaraka (18-1) adj. s % m. pi. gen. 81 vv.
Srimat (1-1 ; 47-1) same as Sri.
Srlmatu (62-1) same as Srimat.
rlrnad Gaudadevara (40 (a) 1) of the celebrated
Gaudadeva. s. pr. m. pi. (hon.) gen.

1. See Citravahana.

2. A}upa King.

3. DKD. p. 309.

Srimaccitravahana (3-1) s. pr. m. sg. nom. Slw.
Sri Meghanandimuni (53-1) s. pr. m. sg. nom. Slw.
Srlrupaliladhanavibhavamaharasigal (37-2) the great

treasures of beauty, pleasure, wealth and power.

Slw. rasi-. s. n. pi. nom.
Sri Vikramadityabhataraka .... (4-2) s. pr.

m. sg.?
rl Vijayadityabhatara . . . (65-'2 and 3) s. pr.

m. sg.?

KLTSI. App. p. 2; DKD. p. 333.
Sri Vinayaditya raja^raya Sri Prithivivallabbamaha-

rajadhiraja pararnesvarabhatara (5-1, 2 and 3) s.

pr. m. sg. norn.

KLISI. App. p. 2 ; DKD. p. 336.
Sri Vinayadityaraja sraya Sri Prthivlvallabharnajja-

rajadhiraja paramesvarabhatarar (6-1, 2and 3).

s. m. pi. (hon.) norn. See Vinayaditya.
Sri >antarasa (647) of Santarasa. s. pr. m. sg. gen.
Sri s'ubhanvita Namilura (57-1) -of the auspicious

Namilur, s. pr. n. sg. gen. Other forms of

Narailur, Navilur, Nimilur.

Sri sariigamgala (25-1) of the samghas. s. n. pl.gen.
Snsamgha . . . . du (46-1) ?
Srlsamghadulle ( ) in the holy samgha, s. n. sg.

loc.
Srlsa .... na ... (54-1) ?

343

SA.

sakki (83-1; 38); saksi (83-1, 38) witness, s. m.sg.
nom. Slw. for saksi ; a contamination between
saksi and sakki

sagidu (56-2) Probably adv. pp. of sagi to be con-
trolled, to be humbled. This is not found in
dictionaries. But there is sugi to fear; and
taggu to be humbled, saggu to be humbled
are found in Kan and Te. Tu has only taggu -to
be humbled. In colloquial speech, saggu to be
humbled, is found. This may become sagu and
not sagi. But there is K. tage to stop, to stun.
T. tagai. e>iin Kan. and tagi may have had sagi
as in Tu. where s, and t. doublets are found.

sariig'hada (44-2) of the saihgha. Slw. sanigha-. s. n.
sg. gen ; other forms sarhghada.

samghada (42-1, 57-1)- of the sarhgha. Slw.

saihgha .... (-10-1) ? saihgha s. n. sg. gen.

svarggalayakke (33-4) to the abode of heaven, s. n.
sg, dat. Slw alaya-.

sattar (61-10) died. past. 3 m. pi. of sa (y) to die.
T. ca to die. past. Sattan M. ca to die. Te.
caccu to die ; pp. caccina. Tu. say, sai to die.
pp. satta-.

satya .... nav -(35-3) ?

saddhammada (27-4) of the holy dharma s. n. sg. gen.
Slw. dhama-

santu (7-13) ? Probably a contracted form of sanditu
past 3 n. sg. of sal to go, to reach. N. K.
colloquial speech, santu for sanditu.

saddhammagurusantanan (27-2) descended from the
virtuous gurus. Slw. santana, s. m. pi. ?

sanda (7-11) pp. of sal to go, to become famous;
past 3. sg. m. sandan (37-4) caus. adv. pr. p.

344

salisi. optative: salge; adj. s. sg. sulvon from fut.
p. m. salva,adj. s.pl. salvor from fut. p. salva.
adv. salva-vol.

sandan (37-4) went. past. 3. sg. m. of sal to go.

samdvigaganatariayan (27-2) of the Saihdvigagana
discipline (?) Siw. naya s. m. sg. nom. ?

sanmargadin (44-3) correctly, in the right path. Slw.
rnarga s. n. sg. instr. used as an adv.

sanyasanarhgeydu (37-3) adopting sanyasana Slw.
sanyasana adv. pp. of key to do with Sanya-
sanam. sanyasanarn (sanyasanam) abstinence
from food ; fasting as a form of suicide ; it is more
or less synonymous with sallekhana and samadhi.

sanyasanam nontu (22-2; 23-2 ; 31-5) vowing sanya-
sanam. Slw. sanyasanam. Adv. pp. of non to
perform a religious vow sanyasanam. T. non to
do penance; vb. noun, nompu. M. non. Vb. noun,
nompu. Te. nocu ; Vb. noun" nomu. K. verbal
noun, nonpi in vrata Silanonpigunadim (33-1)

sanyasanamyogadol (43-3) in the yoga of sanya-
sanam. Slw. yoga. s. n. sg. loc.

sanyasana vidhi (32-2) The rites of sanyasana s. n. sg.
nom. Slw.

samadhikudidom (52-3) Joined samadhi. Slw. saifia-
dhi. past 3. sg. in. of kudu to join ; adv. pp. of
kudu is found in sarnadhikudi + e (40- 4 2). T. kutu
to join; M. kutu; Te. kudu; Tu. kudavuni to
join, samadhi is not used here in the sense of con-
centration of mind as in yogasutra, but it conveys
the additional sense of a religious vow, known as
sallekhana, according to which the Jainas starved
themselves to death. This is clearly indicated
in " Samadhirnarane prayatitavyam ". cf also
Ravisenacarya's Padmacarita II. 187 : " t
masedhirn samasadya krtva dehavisarjanam."

345

samadhikudie (40) (2) Joining samadhi only. adv.
pp. of kudu- (to join) with e the particle of
emphasis) See samadhikudidorh (52-3)

sarnadhi Neredon (21-4) accomplished samadhi. Slw.
samadhi. neredon. Past. 3. sg. m. of nere to
complete, to accotnplish, in composition with
samadhi- adv. pp. neredu (59-4) ; pp. nereda
(33-1) T. Nirai io fill. M. nira. Te. niihdu~to
fill (adj. full; Tu. neriyuni, to be full.

sarhpige (63-6) the sampige trees. Slw. sampige
Skt. campaka T. Saiiipakam; Te. sampamge.
Tu. sampige.

saretivarador (59-1) ?

Sarppaculamani (60-2) s. pr. m. sg. nom. Slw.

sarppa'da (21-1) of a cobra. Slw. sarppa s. n. sg. gen.

sarva . . . . n (4-6) ?

Sarvvajnabhattarakar (15-2) s. pr. m. pi. (hon.) nom.
Slw. raka-

sarvaparihararh (62-6) Free of all (imposts or taxes)
Slw. hara s. n. sg. nom used as an adv. Other
form sarvvaparihara (63-6) (64-6).

sarvvaparihara (63-6 ; 64-6) Free of all (imposts) s. n.
sg. nom. used as an adv.

sarvvabadhaparihara (7-4) Free of all imposts or
taxes s. n. sg. nom. used as an adv.

salisi (35-3) paying, giving, adv. pr. p. of salisu to

cause to enter, to bestow, See Sanda. T. adv. ppl.

f

Salutti. from Saluttu-to cause to enter to bestow.
Salevugeya (8-28, 30) of Salevuge. s. pr. n. sg. gen.
salge (3-8) may (he) (or they) enter. Optative. 3. sg.

(PI.) of sal to go.
salvon (5-17 ; 6-17) who behaves (Fleet) who does

(protect) adj. s. m. sg, nom.
salvor (63-23) Those that go. adj. s. m. pi. noin. o

salva fut p. of sal to go.

346

salvavol (21-1) Like the walking on or passing over

s. n. sg. nom. used as an adv. of manner,
sasanada (27-4) ? sasanadi. s. n. sg. loc.?
Sasimati Srlgantiyar (33-2) s. pr. f. pi. (hon.) norn.

Slw. ganti.
svarggarh (36-4) to heaven, s. n. sg. nom. in. form,

ace. in meaning,
svarggalokasukhacittam .... madhigal-s. n.pl.

nom. ?
svarggagraman (15-4; 25-2) the top of heaven (the

high heaven). Slw. agra-. s. n. sg. ace.
svargalayam (43-4) to the abode of heaven Slw

alaya s. n. sg. ace. in meaning, nom. in. form,
svabhavasaundaryyakarangar (57-2) He of the

natural beauty of body. Slw. anga-. s. in. pi.

(hon.) nom.

svarlokadirh (34-4) (Eice) Slw. loka s. n. sg. instr. ?
svasti (1-1 ; 2-1 ; 3-1 ; 4-1 : 5-1 ; 6-1 ; 7-1 ; 17-1 ; 18-1 ;

26-1 .; 27-1 ; 34-1 ; 39-1 ; 42-1 ; 45-2 ; 47-1 ; fiO-1 ;

62-1; 63-11 and 12; 64-1; 65-1) s. f. nom.

well-being, fortune, success. Hail, farewell used

as an adverb at the beginning of a letter, ms or

inscription as an auspicious word. A letter is

called svastimukhah. *

Saerindurn (3-5) from Saer. s. pr. f. sg. instr.

um
sadhisi (50-4) having accomplished, adv. pp. of

sadhisu to accomplish from Skt. sadh to

accomplish one's aim, to reach one's goal,
sadhu (61-5) Good, kind, person. Slw. s. m. sg. nom.

nom. pi. sadhugal ; dat. sg. sadhuge.
sadhugal (36-4) by the good. SJw. sadhu- s. m. pi.

nom. in form, but instr. in meaning,
sadhuge (61-5) to the good people. Slw. sadhu, s. m-

sg. dat.

347

sadhu-gra . . . radhlran (41-1) the hero of .
. . . ?

sandhi vigrahika Sri Rarnapunyavallabhena likhita-
midam (8-36) Part of the Skt. portion of the
inscription. This was written by S'rl Rama-
punya, the minister for peace and war. cf.
samdhivigrahilalamam. E. 0. V. AK. 127 (1185).

salambalatapogradi (21-2) In the practice of severe
penance. Slw. tapogra-. s. n. sg. loc. The mean-
ing of salarnbala not clearly known. Probably-
excessive. Kan. adv. sodam badam further,
much (possibly from Skt. sodham badham
borne very well) may have been in use as
salambala. Op. SMD. 309. Sodambadam
much more.

sasira (5-13 ; 6-13) Thousand. Slw. Numeral adj.
qualifying kavileyum parvvaruman. sasira<Skt
sahasra-

sasirvvar (25-2) The thousand (Grods) Slw. sasir-. s
m. pi. nom. cf. orvvan, elnurvar.

sasvatam (41-4) for ever. Slw, Skt. adv.

svadhyayasampattinim (33-1) by the wealth of
"constant study of the scriptures (Outlines of
Jainism pp. 131 and 133). Slw. sampattu- s. n. sg.
instr.

svayuhprarna .... yak (34-3) his own life ?

siganu (7-12) ?

Singanandiguruvadigal (30-1) - s. pr. pi. (hon.) norn

simghaman (61-9) The lion. Slw simgha-. s. n. sg
ace.

siddham (33-1 ; 34-1) nom. n. of the Past perf.
passive and as an equivalent of Siddhi. Siddhi
actually occurs in place of Siddham success
(pp. = achieved) used as s'rl and svasti at the
commencement of inscriptions (l.Ant.X.p. 273.)

348

siddhiyan (21-4; 53-2) Perfection. Freedom from

laws of Nature, s. n. sg. ace.
siddhasarnayan (25-1) In consonance with the rule

of the siddhas. (Jainisra by H. Warren p. 67
Outlines of Jainism pp. 46, 63, 85) adj. s. m
sg. nom. Slw. samaya-
siddhisthan (54-4) possessor of siddhi or perfection.

Slw. stha- s. m. sg aom (See Heart of

Jainism, pp. 9.>. 104, 108, 262, 271, 274)
Sinderagamigarurh (5-11 ; 6-11) The people of tho

village of Sindera. s. m. pi. nom.+um-.
siri pa . . . . vaha .... (65-22) ?
sirisarhghada (43-1) Of the holy samgha. Slw.

saingha- s. n. sg. gen.
sthitadehakarnalopamamga S'ubhamum (34-4) (to)

prosperity of one resembling a lotus in body

Slw. S'ubha-. s. n. sg. norn.

sthirada (24-3) of firmness. Slw. sthira- s. n. sg. gen.
supanditan (56-1) a good scholar. Slw. pandita- adj,

s. m. sg. nom.

suputra .... la (7-7) ? of the good son ?
suracapambole (37-1) Like the rainbow. Slw. capa-

s. n. sg. nom-fe.
suraiokamahavibhavasthanan (40-4) The posses&br

of the great powers of the gods of heaven. Slw.

vibhavastha- adj. s. n. sg. nom. The penulti-
mate an appears to be superfluous and may be

due to the mistake of the engraver. It is also.

possible that -an -an was in use as -in -in for the

instrumental in inbinin.
suralokada (marggadol) (52-2) of the world of gods.

Slw. loka- s. n. sg. gen.
suralokavibhuti (24-3) The splendour of the world of

gods. Slw. s. n. sg. tuCC. in moaning, nom. in

form.

349

suralokasaukhyada (44-4) of the happiness of the
world of gods. Slw. saukhya- s. n. sg. gen.

suravidyavallaWiZndraksuravara munibhistutyakaZ-
bappinamel (14-3) on the top of the mountain,
Kalbappu, praised by the lords of heavenly learn-
ing. Slw. Kalbappu-.

1. Kalbappiria s. n. sg. gen.

2. inel s. n. sg. nom. adv.

1 may also be taken as qualifying " Carita 3rl.''
stutya Kalbappiria (14-3) on the Kalbappu, worthy of

praise, s. n. sg. gen.
sedenevadesi (dal) (54-1) ?

Senavarasarum (3-10) s. pr. m. pi. (hon.) nom. +um.
sesthe an (7-8) property, svastya s. n. sg. ace.

sva asti land either with a trifling rent or free

from tax.?
Sokkagamundarum (5-8) s. pr. m. pi. (hpn.) nom.+

um. (Rice) sokka from sokku<sorkku pride.
Sorkkagamundarum (6-8) same as Sokkagamunda-
rum (5-8) (Fleet)
saukhyasthan (14-4) Possessor of happiness, adj. m-

sg. nom. Slw. stha-.

PART III

B. APPENDICES.

PART III.
B. Appendices.

APPENDIX I.

PROPER NAMES.

Agali (12), Andugi (5 and 6), Adeyarenadu (19),
A mail (5 and 6), Alamvalli (5 and 6), Anes'eti (8),
Aryyanarnika (52), Aluarasar (62), Ugrasenaguru-
vadign] (23), Ullikkal (10), Ullikkal guruvadigal (10),
RttaJbhaseiiagiiruvadigal (32), Edeyagarnundar
(5 & 6), EdevoZalriadu (8), Erevedi (7), Kappe
Arabhattan (61), Kalanturan (21), KaZvappu (33, 34),
KandarJbor (5 and 6), Kalavirguravadigal (3J),
Kittur (22), Ki/ga (64), KiZgana (62), Killu (3),
Kucelam (49), Kundavarmmrrasa (62), Kottara (12),
Kodakani (7), Kolattur (32, 49), Gandhavarmma (59),
Crunamatiavvegal (55), Gunasagara (62), Gunasena-
guruvar (12), Oandagamurida (8), Candragupta (29),
Caiidradevacaryyanarnan (36), Caritasrmaindheya-
prabhu (14), Cittur (19), Citravahana (3 and 62),
Cendugoli (4), Jehigur (5 and 6), Tarekadu (31),
Tirtthadaguruvadigal (U), Thittagapana (18), Damita-

matl (57), Dallaga (33), Deva khantiyar (42),

Devereya (8), Devacaryya (48), Dhannekuttarevi

guravi (H) ? Dharmiua Seriaguruvadigal (22),

Nadirastra (36), Nandimunipa . . . (54), Nandisena-
pravaramuaivaran (37), Namiliir (53), Navilur (43, 44,
46, 48), Nastappa (8), Nagasenaguruvadigal (32),
Nagamatigantiyar (19), Nayarkhanda (5 and 6),
Naval] i (21), Ntriili (5 and 6), Nedubore (13) Pattini-
guruvadigal (23), Pallavacari (20), Panapabhatarar
(13), Perunjaluguruvadigal (11), Puspasenacari (47),

353
G, o. i. 23

354

Pegurama (24), Perjediya Modeya Kalapakadaguru-
vadigal (31), Polikes'iarasar (2), Banavase (8),
Basantakurnara (8), Baladevaguruvadigal (2 ; 2), Bhad-
ravahu (29), Bhavagamundar (8),Madure (21), Mala-
nur (23), Mahadeviar (62), Mahanantamatigantiyar
(44), Mara (8), Maviabbegal (51), Me}lagavasaguru-
var (26), Mcghanandlmuni (53), Molefir (5 and 6),
Moiiiguruvadigal (19) Moniguruvar (12), Mauniya-
cariar (50), KajnTmatigantiyar (43), Vasantakumara
(8), Valliggama (5 and 6), Varanasi (Sand 6), Vinaya-
devasenanamamahainuni (56), Vis'okabhatarar (39),
Vlrasena Gamundar (66), Vrsabhanandlmuni (53),
Vettedeguruvadigal (30), Vede Valli (5 and 0), Vegur
(15), Vokuli (8), S'antapa (8), S r antarasa (64) S'anti-
senarnunlsan (29), S'rl Jarabunaygir (17), S'rlpogilli-
sendrakamaharajar (5), Sri Ramapunyavallabha (8),
Srlvikramadityabhataraka (4), Siivinayadityarajas'-
raya (6), Sarppaculamani (60j, Sarvvajnabhattarakar
(15), Saluvuge (8), Sasimatigantiyar (33), Singanandi-
guruvadigal (30), Sindera (5 and 6), Senavarasar (66),
Sorkkagarnundar (5 and 6).

355

APPENDIX II.

PKOPEK NAMES.

The proper nouns of these inscriptions consist
of: Names of (i) Kings, (2) Queens, (3) Warriors,
(4) Monks, (5) Nuns, (6) Merchants, (7) Land-
owners, (8) Writers of inscriptions and (9) Names of
places and countries.

1. Nantes of Kings

Alu-arasar (62),Erevedi (7-6), Kundavarmrnarasa
(62), Citravahana (3 and 62), Polikesiarasar (2), S'anta-
rasa (64), S'npogillisendraka-rnaharajar (5), S'rivikra-
rnaditya bhataraka (4), Srlvinayaditya rajas'raya sri-
prthivfvallabhamaharajadhiraja parames'vara bhatarar
(5), Senavarasar (66).

2. Names of Queens :

Mahadeviyar (62).

3. Names of Warriors :

Kappe-Arabhatta (61), Kandarbor (5 and 6),
Nagennan (3).
-1 . Na rnes of Monks :

Ugrasenaguruvadigal (23), Ullikkalguruvadigal
(3), RsabhasenaguruvadigaJ (32), Kajanturan (21)
Kalavirgguruvadigal(31), Kucelam (49), Gandhavarin-
man (59), Gunasenaguravar (29), Candragupta (29),
Candradevacaryyanaman (12), Tirtthadaguruvadigal
(9), Caritas ; rmamadheya prabhu (14), Devacaryya (48),
Dhannaiasenaguruvadigal (22), Nagasenaguruvadigal
(32), .Nandirnunipa .... (54), Nandi-senapravara
Muni varan (37), Pattiniguruvadigal (23), Perumalu-
guruvadigat (11), Panapabhatarar (13), Puspasenacari
(47), Pegurama (24), perjediyarnodeyakalapakada
guruvadigal (31), Baladevaguruvadigal (22), Bhadra-
vahu (29), Mellagavasaguravar(26), Meghanandimuni

23 *

356

(53),M6niguruvadigal(19), Moniguruvar (12), Mauni-
yacariyar (50), Vinayaclevasena natnamahanmni (56),
Vis'okabhatarar (39), Vrsabhanandnniini(53), Vettede-
guruvadigal (30), Santisenamunls'an (29), Sarppaciila-
rnani(60), Sarvajnabhattarakar (15), Singanandiguru-
vadigal (30).

5. Names of Nuns :

Aryayanamika (52), Gunamatiavvega] (55) ?
Damitamati (57), Deva . . , . . khantiyar (42),
Dhannekuttareviguravi (11), Nagaiuatlgantiyar (19),
Prabhavati (57),MahanaDfcamatlganfciyar (44), Maviab-
begal (51), Rajnimatigantiyar (43), Sri Jambunaygir
(17), Sasimati srlgaubiyar (33).

6. Names of Merchants :

Aneseti, Devereya, Nasfcappa, Basantakurnara,
Santapa (8).

7. Name of the blacksmith : Vasantakumara (8)

8. Names of Landlords :

Edey again undar (5 and 6), Candagauaunda (8)
Bhavagamundar (8), Mara (8), Moleyuramaniyaga-
mundar (5 and 6), Vlrasenag am undar (66), Vokuli (8),
Sorkkagamundar (5 and 6.)

9. Names of writers of inscriptions :

Pallavacari, S'ri Bamapunaya vallabha (8), (20).

About the names ' Dallaga (38) ' and ' Narayan-
ayyamgal ' (66) the details are not known, as the
inscriptions are incomplete.

10. Names of Places :

AgaZi (12), Andugi (5 and 6), Amali (5 and 6))
Alamvalli (5 and 6), Ullikkal (10), KaZbappu (kaZvappu),
(33, 34),'kittur (22), KiZga (fi4), Killu (3), KiZgana (62),
Kottara (12), Kodakani (7), Kolattur (32, 49), Cittur
(19), Cendugoli (4), Jejugur (5 and 6), Tarekadu (31),
Thit^agapana (18), Nayilur (43, 44, 48, 46), Navalli

357

(5 and 6), Nlrilli (5 and 6), Nednbore (13) Banavase
(8) Madure (21), Malanur (23), (66), Moleur (5 and 6),
Varanasi (5 and 6), Valliggama (5 and 6), Vedevalli
(5 and 6), Vegiir (15), Sindera (5 and 6), and
Saluvuge (8).

11. Names of Countries :

Adeyere-nadu (19), Edevolal-nadu (8), Nadirastra
(36), Nayarkhanda (5 and 6).

The name of Narnil-ur (the peacock village) is
translated into Skt. as May lira -gram a (52, 57.)

358

APPENDIX III.

VERSK INSCRIPTIONS.

Of the 66 inscriptions, '22 are in verse.

Inscriptions 35, 41, 46, 51, 54 seem to be in
verse, but the exact nature of the metre cannot be
ascertained on account of the missing words. 46
seems to be in Sardula or Mattebha viknditavrtta- a
samapada metre in 8kt.

Of the 22 verse inscriptions, 61 is in Kanarese
metre tripadi 1 , excepting the first stanza. It is a
metre of three lines ; each line differs from the other
in length and in the number of moras (or matras) ;
there is alliteration of the second letter of each line.

The distribution of moras in each of these three
lines is :

1. 20 moras in 4 feet.

2. 17 moras in 4 feet.

3. 13 moras in 3 feet according to Nagavarmma.
But the 2nd foot has more than 18 moras here in

the third and fourth stanzas.

This is a visamapadavrtta in Kanarese.
The other stanzas are all in Skt. metres. They
are .

No. of the

Name of vrtta. inscription where

it is found.

1. utpalamale (203) 2 .... 20, 52.

2. campakamale (206) .... 40, 53.

1. Chandombudhi, 299 p. 98.

2. A descriptive account of these vrttas is given in Naga-
varma's Karnataka Chandombudhi. The number in brackets
against the names of the vrttas refers to the verse wherein its
laksanas or characteristics are given in the book referred to
above.

359

No. of the
Name of vrtta. inscription where

it is found.

mamgalarh (185) .... 57.

mattebhavikrldita (202) .... 33, 34, 44, 45,

50.

5. mallikarnale (194) .... 29.

6. mahasragdhara (210) .... 14, 36, 37.

7. vamsastha (150) .... 57.

8. vasantatilaka (171) .... 49.

9. sardulavikrldita (200) .... 15, 21, 25, 60.
The characteristics of each of these metres are

the same as those in Skfc. except the alliteration (prasa)
of the .second letter in each line in Kanarese. These
are all sainapada vrttas or stanzas having four lines
of equal length.

The following verses do not conform to the
description given above :

Inscription 36 1st line -words missing.

36. 11. 1, 3 and 4 defective words
missing in 1 and 4, and more
words in 1. 3.

59. 1st line defective because of
long e. There are only three
lines.

03. 11. 2 and 3 are defective words
missing in 1 and 4 ; two matras
are in excess.

In alliteration, there are short and long letters,
bindu and double consonants. When analysed, the
following types of alliteration are found: 1

1. Short letters (laghu) : 14, 33, 34, 37, 44, 45,
51, 53, 57.

1. Chandombudhi 43 to 50.

360

2. Long letters (guru) : (by nature or position.),
16, 20, 21, 25, 29, and Badami (1), 56, 60)
1 (2 and 3).

8. Bindu with a consonant : 50, 52.

4. Double consonants : 29.

Later writers on prosody call 1, 2, 3 and 4
simhaprasa, gajaprasa, vrsabhaprasa and hayaprasa
respectively.

In 34 the consonants of a varga are treated as
prasa letters.

The later writers call this * vargodita ' prasa. 1

In 25 there is the alliteration of the first two
letters of each line, which is called by later writers
' dviprasa.' 2

The prasa in 36 : the last two lines have -di- and
-ra-instead of -na of the first two lines. This is
defective, according to later Kanarese writers.

1. Chandombudhi 56.

2. Do 65.

361

APPENDIX III.

FIGURES OP SPEECH IN THE INSCRIPTIONS.

The following alariikaras are found :

A. upamalamkara (simile) 1 21, 84, 37.

B. Rupakalariikara (metaphor) 2 14, 15, 20, 29, 33,

35, 44.

1. KVV. 159 ; KKM. Ill 59, et seq,

2. KYY. 161 ; KKM. Ill 12, et seq.

362

APPENDIX IV.

SKT. VERSES IN KANARESE INSCRIPTIONS.

In the following inscriptions, Skt. slokas are
found :

8, 32, 58, and 62.

1. In 8. The first 26 lines ; lines 31-36.

Nagasena managham gunadhikain
In 32, Naganayakajitari maiidalam

rajapivjyarnamalarh griyarnpadam.
kamadam hatamadam namamyaham.

This is in praise of Nagasenaguruvadigal who
ended his life by Sanyasanavidhi.

2. In 53. Mayuraggramasamghesya,

saundaryya Aryyanamika
Katapragiri saileca
sadhitasya samadhitah.

There are a few words missing in this inscription.
The name of the person who ended his life is not
found.

3. In 58 grame Mayurasamghesya,

Aryyika Damitamatl
Katvapragirimadhyastha
sadhita ca samadhita

The death by sanyasana of a lady is referred to
here. The name cannot be made out as the word is
only ' Damitamati ....

In 8, the history of the grantor is narrated in
Skt. in the first 26 lines. In 11. 35 and 36
" Mahasandhi-vigrahika sri Ramapunyavallabhena

likhitamidarn 6'asanam."

363

In the Tattukoti inscription of about 700 A.D.
(62) the following Skt. sloka appears after the first
Kan. stanza :

varan tejasvino uirttyur

ria tu manavakhandanarh

mrfcfcyus tatksauiko duhkham,

njanabhaihgain dine-dine.

364
APPENDIX ^.

IN DO- ARYAN LOANWORDS.

The following Indo-Aryan loanwords are found
in these inscriptions.

A. 1. ayya<arya (S MD. 270, 'J32) 1 ; 2. awe,
abbe<amba 3. appa<atma 4. acari<acarya (SMD.
254) ; 5. Isara<isvara (SMD. 253, 231) ; 6. kaviie<
kapile (SMD. 258) ; 7. khanti, ganti<gantri (SMD.
261) ; 8. gosiga<ghosika ; 9. canda<ohanda (SMD.
255); 10. canda<candra (SMD. 261); 11. Janna<
yajna (SMD. 269) ; 12. Jede< Jate (SMD, 255, 271) ;
13. tapaccale<tapacchala? (SMD. 255); 14. tana<
sthana (SMD. 257, 278, KSS. 149); 15. degula<
devakula (SMD. 295) ; 16. dhone<droni (SMD. 261,
KSS. 154); 17. nisidige<nisedhika (SMD. 254);
18. padi<prati (SMD. 261); 19. bata<bhattaraka,
bhatara<bharta, bhartara ; 20. bhanta<bbakta
(SMD. 295) ; 21. raanakka<rnanavaka ; 22. menasu
<raarica (SMD. 282) ; 23. ruode<munja (SMD. 282 ?
285 ?) ; 24. risi<rsi (SMD. 268, KSS. 159) ; 25. visa
<vims'a;26. sakkKsaksi (SMD. 254, 262, 270);
27. sasimati<s'as'imati (SMD. 254) ; 28. sasira<
sahasra (SMD. 254); 29. singa, simgha<simh^
(SMD. 263) ; 30. siri<s'rl (SMD. 254 ; KSS. 147) ;
31. setti<s'resthin (SMD. 254, KSS. 138).

These are treated as tadbhavas 4 or words
corrupted from Skt. by later grammarians. But such
a modification of Skt. words in Kanarese is not

1. The number within brackets gives the sutra which
explains the formation of the form.

2. K.B.M. uses this word in II 53 (K.B. Pathak's Edition)
and II 55 in the Madras University Edition), but K.K.M. is a
translation of Dandin's Kavyadars'a and this verse corresponds
to tadbhava used in that Book I 32-37, in a different sense.
See SMD. 235, KSS. 138-160.

365

possible as can be seen from B. infra. Further, these
words are found in Pkt. in almost the same form.
Hence the loans are from Pkt. and not from Skt.
though no Kan. grammarian has stated that these
are Pkt. loans. The rules framed by Kan. grammari-
ans are practically translations of the sutras of
Prakrtaprakas'a with slight modifications to suit the
genius of the Kan. language.

These Pkt. hvs. came into Kan. when Pkt. was a
spoken language in the Kanarese country 1 : (a) The
existence of Asoka's inscriptions (1) at Brahmagiri,
iddapura and Jatinga Barnes* vara Hill in what is
now the Mysore State ; (2) at Palkigundu and Gravi-
matha 2 in what is now the Hyderabad State ( Deccan)
with later Kan. inscriptions on the other side of the
same rocks; (b) the existence of Pkt. inscriptions at
Malavalli (B. C. VII. 8k. 263) and (c) the prevalences
of Jainism in South India before the spread of
Buddhism, show that Pkt. was used as a spoken
language in South India about the third century B. C.

G-osiga, degula and nisidigc represent the loans
from an earlier stage of Pkt ; bata shows the charact-
eristic tendency of the Kan. language to shorten long
consonants ; in bhariita and siriigha, aspirates are re-
tained ; the nasal of bhamta is noticed by later gram-
marians, but is left unexplained (N". K. bhatta and
batta.)

B. 1. nagir<nayakiyar ; 2. nitta<nitya ;
8. paruta<parvata ; 4. Banavasi< Vanavasi ; begam
<vegain; 5. rnattaru<matra ; 6. mariyade<mar-
yada; 7. masena<mahasena (SMD. 291) ; 8. inoni
<mauni (SMD. 282) ; 9. risi<rsi, probably con-
tamination between Skt. rsi and Pkt ; risi ;
10. s > isittiyar<s'isya + ittiyar ; 11. sariigha.

1. MAE. 1928 pp. 10-14, and I Ant. 1912, p. 23(X

2. Professor B. L. Turner. The Gavimath and Palkigundu
scriptions of Asoka (1932)

366

BIBLIOGRAPHY.

A . Grammars :
1 Arden, A. H.

2 Beames, J. A.

3 Bellew, Dr.

4 Beschi, C. J.

5 Bloch, J.

6 Bedding, P. 0.

7 Bray, D.deS.

8 Brigel, J.

9 Brown, C. P.
10 Bhattakalamka

... 1. A Progressive Grammar

of common Tamil (1910).

2. A Progressive Grammar

of the Teluga Language

(1921.)

Comparative grammar of the
Modern Aryan Languages of
India. Trubner's London
1872.

From the Indus to the
Tigris. London 1874.
(Contains Brahui gram-
mar.)

Kodun Tamil Grammar ;
Sen Tamil Grammar (1864).

Langues dravidiennes in les
langues du monde (1924) ;
Sanskrit et dravidien in the
B.S.L. (1924); La forma-
tion de la langue Marathe
(1920.)

Materials for Santali Gram-
mar I (1922,)

The Brahui Language (1909);
The Brahui English
Dictionary (1933) London.

A Grammar of the Tulu
Language (1872.)

A Grammar of the Telugu
Language (1857).

Karnataka Sabdanusasana
(19230

367

11 Caldwell, R. ... A Comparative Grammar of

the Dravidian or the South
Indian Family of Languages
(1913.)

12 Chakravarti .... The Philosophy of Sanskrit

Grammar (1930).

13 Cole, R. A. .... An Elementary Grammar of

the Coorg Language (1867).

14 Drake, J V Grammar of the Kurku

Language (1903).

15 Droese, Rev. E. .... Introduction to the Malto

Language. Agra (1884).

16 Friend-Periera, A Grammar of the Kui

J. K. Language (1909).

17 Frohnmeyer, L. J. A Progressive Grammar of

the Malayalam Language
(1913).

18 Graeter, A. .... Coorg Songs, with outlines of

Coorg Grammar, Mangalore
(1870).

18a Grierson, Sir G. A. Linguistic Survey of India

(Ail Volumnes).

19 Grignard, A .... An Oraon Grammar (1924).

20 Gundert, H Malayalam Grammar (1881).

21 Hahn, F. ... Kmukh Grammar (1900) ;

Kuru/c// (Oraon) English
Dictionary, Part I. (Calcutta
(1903), Kvrukh Folk-lore.
(Calcutta 1905).

22 Hoernle, A. F. R. A Comparative Grammar of

the Gaudian Languages
(1880).

23 Ketanakavi, .... Andhrabhasabhusanamu

(1932).

24 Kes'iraja .... S'abdamanidarpana (1872).

25 Kittel, F.

A Grammar of the Kannda

Language (1903).
A Tamil Grammar (1878);
An English Translation of
theNannul (1884-.
An Introduction to the
Grammar of the Kui or
Kandh Language (1902).
A Phrenologist among the
Todas (1873) (Tuda
Grammar).

The Tribes inhabiting the
Ncilgherry Hills. Manga-
lore (1864.)

Simplified Grammar of the
Telugu Language (1890.)
Karnataka Bhasa Bhusana
(1908) ; Karnatakakavyava-
lokana (19u3).

32 Papayyasastrulu, B. A Telugu Grammar.
Pavanandimunivar N annul (1929.)
Pischel .... Grammatik der Prakrit

sprachen (1900).

Pope, G. U ..... A Handbook of the Ordinary
Dialect of the Tamil Lan-
guage (191 lj.
36 Satakoparamanuja- Nan mil Kandikai (Madras

chariar, V. (1900).

Schulze, F. V. P. A Grammar of the Kui
Language (1911).
Madras,

26 Lazarus, J.

27 Letcrnajee, L.

28 Marshall, W. B..

29 Metz, F.

30 Morris,

31 Nagavarma

33
34

35

37

37a. Tolakappiyam,

J. 0. Jti.
38 Trench, C. G. C.

89 Vinson, J.

Grammar of Gondi I (1919)

and II (1921).
Manuel de la langue tamoule

(1903),

369

40 Wickromasinghe,

M. de Z.

41 Williamson, Hev.

H.

42 Winfield, W. W.

B. Dictionaries :

1 Amarasimha

2 Brown, C. P. ...

3 Grignard, A.

4 Gundert, H.

5 Holler, P.

6 Kittel, F.

7 Laxminarayana-

sastrulu.

8 Manner, A.

9 Percival, P.

10 Prakrta abda

Maharnava.

11 Beeve, W.

12 Sanderson, D. S.

13 Sankaranarayana,
G. 0. 1,

Tamil Grammar ( 1906) ;
Malay alam Self-taught
(1927).

Gond Grammar and Vocabu-
lary. London (1890).

A Grammar of the Kui
Language (1928).

Amarakosa ed. B.L. Bice
(1883).

A Telugu-English Dictionary
(1852) ; An English-Telugu
Dictionary (1853), Madras.

An Oraon-English Diction-
ary (1924).

A Mai ay alam and English
Dictionary (1872).

Telugu Nighantuvalu*
Bajahmundry (1900).

A Kannada-English Diction-
ary (1894).

Laxminarayaniyamu (1907).

Tulu-English Dictionary

(1886).
Telugu-English Dictionary

(1862).
(Calcutta) (1928).

A Oarnataka and English

Dictionary (1832).
Canarese-English Dictionary,

Bangalore ^1858.
Telugu-English Dictionary

1928.

370

13A Sankaranarayana :

1 4 Sitaramacaryulu,

B.

14A Stede and Rhys
Davids.

15 Tamil Lexicon ...

16 Visvanath Pillai...

37 Williams, Monier

18 Winfield, W. W.

19 Winslow, M.

C. General :

1 Bagchi

2 Bloch, J.

3 Buhler, G.

4 Burnell, A. C.

5 Campbell, Sir

George.

6 Chatterji, S; K.

7 Dalton, E. T.

English-Telugu Dictionary
(1897).

&abdaratnakaram- -A Dic-
tionary of the Telugu Lan-
guage (1929.)

A Pali-English Dictionary
Q925).

Madras University.

Tamil-English Dictionary
(1928).

Sanskrit-English Dictionary
(1899).

The Kui Vocabulary
(1929).

A Comprehensive Tamil
and English Dictionary
(1862).

Pre-Aryan and Pre-Dravidian
(1929.)

Sanskrit et dravidian in
B. S. L. (1924).

Indian Paleography, trans-
lated by J. F. Fleet.
South Indian Paleography
(1878) ; Specimens of South
Indian Dialects (1873.)

Specimens of Languages of
India (Calcutta 1874).

The Origin and Development
of the Bengali Language
(1926).

, Descriptive Ethnology of
Bengal, Calcutta (1872).

371

8 Fleet, J. P.

9 Grierson, Sir Gr. A.
and Sten Konow

10 Hauffniann

11 lyengar, S.K

12 Hodgson, B. H

13 Jaini, C. R.

14 Jones, 1).

15 Joshi, H. ft.

16 Kielhorn

17 Madras G-ovt.

18 Marshall, Sir John

18A Mazuiudar, B. C.

19 Muir, J.

The Dynasties of the Kan-
arese Districts (1895) ; Pali,
Sanskrit and Old Kanarese
Inscriptions.

The Linguistic Survey of
India Vol. IV (1906).

Encyclopaedia Mundarica.
Vols. I XX (Calcutta).

Hindu Administrative Instu-
tions in South India (1932).

Miscellaneous Essays relat-
ing to Indian Subjects.
Vols. I and II. London
( 1880).

Outlines of Jainism.

An Outline of English
Phonetics (1932).

Samati Sariigraha (Belgaum)
(1894).

List of Inscriptions in
Southern India.

A Manual of the Adminis-
tration of the Madras
Presidency Vols. I, & II
1885.

The Indus valley civilization
(Arthur Probsthain & Co.,
Great Eussel Street, Lon-
don). l'J-12-0.

The Bengali Language, Cal-
cutta (Influence of Dravi-
dian on Bengali):

Origizial Sanskrit Texts
Vols. I V. Trubner's, Lon-
don (1868.)

372

20 Narasimhacar, R.

21 Nagavarnnna

21 A Narayana Rao,

Dr. C.

22 Nrpatuiiiga

23 Prinsep, J. T. ...

23a Ramaswami Aiyar,

L. V.
24 Rice, B. L

25 Rice, E. P

26 Roberts, Major R.

E.

27 Sabhapatinavalar,

V. S.

28 Sarnian, T. T

29 Sastri, M. Sesha-

giri.

30 Sinclair, Mrs.

Karnataka Kavicarite Vol. I
(1924); II (1919); III
(1929) ; Sasanapadya Man-
jari (1928).

Kannada Chaiidassu (1875)
edited by Kittel.

Dravidiari Philology.

Kavirajamarga (Madras Uni-
versity 1930).

Essays on Indian Antiquities
ed. E. Thomas, Vols. I & II
(1858).

Articles on Dravidan Philo-
logy.

Epigraphia Garnatica Vols.
I XII ; Mysore and Coorg
Inscriptions ; Mysore Gaz-
etter, Vols. I & II (1897).

A History of Kanarese
Literature (1921).

Specimen of the Language
of the People inhabiting the
Hills in the vicinity f
Bhagulpoor. Asiatick Re-
searches, Vol. V. (1799.)

Dravidaprakasikai (Kurnba-
konam 1894).

Memoirs of the Archaeologi-
cal Survey of India, No. 13
(1924).

Notes on Aryan and Dra-
vidian Philology (Madras
1884).

The Heart of Jainism.

373

31 Slater, G.

32 Srinivasa lyengar,

P. T.

33 Turner, R L

34 Vendryes, J.

35 Venkatasubbiah,
A.

36 Warren, H.

37 Woolner, A. C. ..

Dravidian Element in Indian
Culture

History of the Tamils ;
Taemil in the Maltre
phonetique (1913).

A Comparative and Etymo-
logical Dictionary of the
Nepali Language (1931) ;
The Palki-Gundu and Gavi-
rnath Inscriptions of Asoka
(1932).

Language, a Linguistic In-
troduction t o History
( 1928).

Some Saka Dates in Ins-
criptions (1918); Kelavu-
Kannada Kavigala Jivana
Kalavicara (1928).

Jainism.

Introduction to Prakrt.

D. Journals and Periodicals:

1 American Journal of Philology 1929 Dravidian

Researches.

l(a) Archaeological Reports of the Government of
India, Mysore, and Hyderabad.

2 Bulletin de Societe de Linguistique (Paris.)

3 Bulletin of the School of Oriental Studies,

(London).

4 Calcutta Review (^Calcutta).

5 South Indian Inscriptions. Madras Government
5(a) Census Reports : 1881, 1891, 1901, 1911, 1921

and 1931.

6 Epigraphia Indica (London).

7 Indian Antiquary (London).

374

8 Journal of the American Oriental Society

(New York).

9 Journal of the Eoyal Asiatic Society, London.

10 Journal Asiatique (Paris).

11 Journal of the Bombay Branch of the Royal

Asiatic Society (Bombay ) .

12 Journal of the Bengal Branch of the Royal

Asiatic Society.

13 Karnatakasahitya Parisat Patrike (Bangalore).

14 Dravidian Developments. Language Philadel-

phia (1930).

15 Memoires de Societe de Languistique (Paris).

16 Prabuddha Karnataka The Mysore University

Magazine, Mysore.

17 Proceedings of Oongres International des

Orientalistes.

18 Quarterly Journal of the Mythic Society, Banga-

lore.

19 Recueil de rnemoires. (S de L)

20 Revue de Linguistique (Paris).

21 Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgeiilandischeu

Gesselschaft (Berlin). (ZDMti).

375

a paritosad vidusam na sadhu manye prayoga

Vijna-nam."

*****

(api tu)
klesah phalena hi punar navatam vidhatte"

WD 1716-GBP-500-15-12-41.

MYSORE UNIVERSITY PUBLICATIONS.

I. English.

1. THE MYSOEE TBIBES AND CASTES

by the late MR. H. V. NANJUNDAYYA, M.A., M.L., C.I.E., and
Bao Bahadur L. K. ANANTAKRISHNA IYER.

Four Volumes: Volume 11, 1928 ; Vohme III, 1 930 ; Volume
IV, 1931 ; Volume /, 1936. Appendix.

Each volume is profusely illustrated.

Vol. I, Bs. 15 ; Other Vols., Bs. 12-8-0 each. Appendix Free
to purchasers of the full set.

2. PBAMANA SAMUCCAYA OF ACHABYA . DINNAGA,

Cha. I, by MR. H. B. BANGASWAMI lYENGAR, M.A. Bs. 3.

This is the most important work of Dinnaga, the famous
Buddhist Logician of the Medieval School. This book contains
the very Amrta of Indian Logic. Mr. Bangaswami lyengar
has transposed the Tibetan text into Sanskrit and has thus
restored into its original one of the most famous of Indian
Scientific treatises?.

3. LABOUB AND HOUSING IN BANGALOBE CITY,

by MESSRS. C. NARASIMHA MOORTY, M.A., and

B. K. SRINIVASAN, M.A. Be. 8

4. THE MUNBO SYSTEM OF BBITISH STATES-

MANSHIP IN INDIA,

by DR. K. N. VENKATASUBBA SASTRI, M.A., Ph.D.

r

5. HISTOBY OF KANNADA LANGUAGE,

by MR. B, NARASIMHACHAR, M.A., B.L. Be. 1

6. HISTOBY OF KANNADA LITEBATUBE,

by MR. B. NABASIMHACHAR, M.A. Be. I

7. DVAITA PHILOSOPHY AND ITS PLACE IN THE

VEDANTA,

Es. a. p.

by MR. II. N. EAGHAVENDRACHAR, M.A. 3 c

8. THE METAPHYSICS OF VALUE,

by MR. K. R. SREENIVASA IYENGAR, M.A. (In Print.)

II. Kannada.

(a) General. Es. a. p.

Kannada Kaipidi, Vol. I. Ordinary 140

Calico 1 12

(b) Mysore University Kannada Series.

1. HAEISCHANDRAKAVYASANGEAHA

Choice selections from the Kavya of the famous

Kannada poet Eaghavanka 12

2. KADAMBAEI SANGRAHA

Choice selections from the Kadambari of Nagavarma 12

3. PEABHULINGALEELEYA SANGEAHA

(SECOND EDITION).

Choice selections from the Kavya of Chamarasa 12

4. LAST DAYS OF SOCEATES

by MR. A. N. MURTI EAO, M.A.

On the trial and death of Socrates, fche Wise Man

of Athens. Ordinary 12

Calico 100

5 LIFE OP SEI EAMAKEISHNAPAEAMAHAMSA
(SECOND EDITION).

by MR. K. V. PUTTAPPA, M.A. Ordinary 12

Calico 140

6. LIFE AND WOEKS OF EABINDEANATHA

TAGOEE

by MR. M. VENKATESA IVENGAK, M.A. Es. a. p.

Ordinary 12
Calico 140

7. AEOGYA-ADAEA GNANA MATTU SADHANA

by MR- J. A. ISWARAMURTHY, B.A., L.M.S.,

B.S.Sc. Ordinary 12

Calico 1 4

8. PAMPAEAMAYANA SANGEAHA

b.y Asthana Mahavidvan T. SRINIVASARAGHAVACHAR and
MR. D. L. NARASIMHACHAR, M.A. Ordinary 12

Calico 100

9. HANAPEAPANCA

by MR. V. SITARAMIAH, M.A. Ordinary 12

Calico 140

10. SAMSKEITA NATAKA

by MR. A. E. KRISHNA SASTRI, M.A. Ordinary 12

Calico 140

11. J1VA VIJNANA

by MR. B. VENKATANARANAPPA, M.A.

Ordinary 12
Calico 140

12. HINDU DAE8ANA SAEA

by Mahamahopadhyaya Panditaratnam
L. SRINIVASACHAR Ordinary 12 0-

Calico 140

13. EAJANITHI Bs. a. p.

by MB. H. KRISHNA EAO, M.A. Ordinary 12

Calico 140

14. HADIBADEYA DHAEMA

by SRI. D. CHAMPA BAI, M.A. . Ordinary 12

Calico 140

15. PUEANA NAMA CHUDAMANI

by MESSRS. BBNAGAL EAMA EAO, M.A., LL.B. and
Vidwan PANYAM SUNDARA SASTRI Ordinary 2 12

Calico 340

16. YASODHAEACHAEITEYA SANGEAHA
by MR. K. V. EAGHAVACHAR, M.A., B.T.

Ordinary 12
Calico 140

17. SHOET HISTOEY OP GEEEK PHILOSOPHY

by MR. K. E. SREENIVASA IYENGAR, M.A.

Ordinary 12
Calico 1 4

18. INDIAN GEOLOGY

by MR. T. NAGAPPA Ordinary 12

Calico 140

Note. The publications are available for sale at -
The Oriental Library, Mysore,
or at

Messrs. Karnataka Publishing House,

Basavangudi, Bangalore.